India - Ecodevelopment Project - World Bank Documents ...

IndiaEcodevelopment Project

Project DocumentSeptember 1996

LIUTHE WORLD BANK

Pub

lic D

iscl

osur

e A

utho

rized

Pub

lic D

iscl

osur

e A

utho

rized

Pub

lic D

iscl

osur

e A

utho

rized

Pub

lic D

iscl

osur

e A

utho

rized

GEF Documentation

The Global Environment Facility (GEF) assists developing countries to protectthe global environmenl in four areas: global warming, pollution of international waters,destruction of biodiversity, and depletion of the ozone layer. The GEF is jointly implementedbythe United Nations Development Programme. the United Nations Environment Programme,and the World Bank.

GEF Project Documents - identified by a green band - provide extended project-specific information. The implementing agency responsible for each project is identified byits logo on the cover of the document.

Global EnvironmentCoordination Division

Environment DepartmentWorld Bank1818 H Street, NWWashington, DC 20433Telephone: (202) 473-1816Fax: (202) 522-3256

15sxq. ~

INDIAEcodevelopment Project

Project DocumentSeptember 1996

South Asia Department IIAgriculture and Water Division

CURRENCY EQUIVALENTS

Currency Unit = Rupees (Rs.)US$1.00 = Rs.35.1

WEIGHTS AND MEASURES

The metric system is used throughout this report.

GOVERNMENT FISCAL YEAR

April 1 to March 31

ABBREVIATIONS

DGS&D Directorate General of Supply and DisposalDEA Department of Economic AffairsEDC Ecodevelopment CommitteeGEF Global Environment FacilityGOI Government of IndiaGOS State GovernmentICB International Competitive BiddingIDA International Development AssociationJFM Joint Forest ManagementMOEF Ministry of Environment and ForestryNCB National Competitive BiddingNGO Non-Governmental OrganizationNTFP Non-Timber Forest ProductPA Protected AreaPAMIA Protected Area Mutual Impact AssessmentPPF Project Preparation FacilityPTO Project Tiger OfficePRA Participatory Rural AppraisalSFD State Forest DepartmentSOE Statement of ExpensesTOR Terms of ReferenceTR Tiger ReserveUNDP United National Development Program

Part I: Project Summary

Part 1: Project Summary

1. Background 11.1 Extent and Status of Biodiversity 11.2 Government Policy 21.3 Ecodevelopment Strategy 31.4 Existing Institutional Responsibilities, Capacity, and Coordination 41.5 Lessons from Other Projects 51.6 Project Preparation Process 5

2. The Project 72.1 Rationale for GEF and IDA Funding 72.2 Project Areas and Participants 72.3 Project Objectives 92.4 Summary of Project Content 82.5 Detailed Features 9

3. Project Costs and Financing 173.1 Project Cost Estimates 173.2 Financing Plan 183.3 Procurement 193.4 Disbursements 223.5 Accounts and Audit 23

4. Project Implementation 254.1 Staffing and Organizational Structure 254.2 Flow of Funds and Work Plans 274.3 Project Performance Review 29

5. Project Impacts and Justification 315.1 Benefits and Outputs 315.2 Environmental Impact 315.3 Social Impact 325.4 Sustainability 335.5 Risks 34

6. Tables 35Estimated Costs 35Financing Plan 35Amount and Method of Procurement 36Summary Disbursement Schedule 37Estimated IDA and GEF Disbursements 38Timetable of Key Project Processing Events 38

India: Ecodevelopment Project

Credit and Project Summary

Borrower: India, Acting by its President

Implementing Agencies: GOI Ministry of Environment and Forestry and State ForestDepartments of Bihar, Gujarat, Karnataka, Kerala, MadhyaPradesh, Rajasthan, and West Bengal

Beneficiaries: Globally important protected area ecosystems and people inand around these areas

Credit Amount: IDA Credit of SDR 19.5 million (US$28 million equivalent)

Terms: Standard, with 35 years maturity

Financing Plan See table in Schedule A

Fund Advance Terms: From GOI to state governments as part of central assistanceto the states through MOEF for development assistance onstandard terms and conditions applicable at the time

Grant Amount: Global Environment Facility (GEF) Grant of SDR 13.9million (US$20 million equivalent)

Terms: Grant

Financing Plan See table in Schedule A

Poverty Category: Program of Targeted Interventions

The project's human beneficiaries, tribal peoples, and forestfringe villagers, belong to the poorest sections of society.About 39 percent of the beneficiaries are tribal. Tribaldevelopment concerns are integrated under the rubric ofsocial impact, participation, and equity, rather than as asubsidiary tribal development plan or component. Theproject also incorporates specific measures to safeguard theinterests of the landless and women

Environment Category: Program of Targeted Interventions - globally significantbiodiversity

Economic Rate of Return Cannot be quantified 14914-IN

Staff Appraisal Report Report No. 14914 IN

Project ID Number INPA36062; INGE9584

Vice President: D. Joseph Wood

Director: Heinz Vergin

Division Chief: Shawki Barghouti

Task Manager: Jessica Mott

INDIA

ECODEVELOPMENT PROJECT

1. Background

A. Extent and Status of Biodiversity

1.1 Biological Significance. India's biodiversity is rich, often unique and increasinglyendangered. India is one of the twelve megadiversity countries in the world, thatcollectively account for 60-70 percent of the world's biodiversity. Its ten biogeographiczones represent a broad range of ecosystems. India has 6% of the world's flowering plantspecies and 14% of the world's birds. There are over 45,000 identified plant species. One-third of its 15,000 flowering plants are found only in India. It has 81,000 identified speciesof animals. Some 14% of its 1,228 bird species, 32% of its 446 reptile species and 62% ofits 204 amphibians are unique to India. The endangerment of some ten percent of all plantspecies and over 21% of the 372 mammal species indicates a widespread degradation ofecosystems that has significant economic implications.

1.2 Economic Importance. India's biological resources are economically important,both globally and nationally. As one of the oldest and largest agricultural societies, Indiahas an impressive diversity of crop species and varieties. At least 166 species of cropplants and 320 species of wild relatives of cultivated crops originate on the subcontinent.About 90% of all medicines in India come from plant species, many of which are harvestedin the wild. Medicinal plants and other non-timber forest products are particularlyimportant as a source of income and subsistence for tribal populations. Closed primaryforests, which cover about 21 million hectares, or six percent of the total land area, andone-third of the total forest area, have been an important source of timber and fuelwood.Natural ecosystems strongly influence natural resource development (agriculture,livestock, forestry and fishery sectors contributed 32% of GDP in 1992/3), provide newcommercial products (e.g., pharmaceuticals) and also affect water resource management,which is important not only for agriculture but also for industrial and municipaldevelopment.

1.3 Protected Areas. India has 75 parks and 421 sanctuaries, covering some 14million hectares (i.e., 4.3 percent of the total land area). Most of these areas receivedprotection status relatively recently; there were only 10 parks and 127 sanctuaries in 1970.Selected high priority parks and sanctuaries, sometimes in combination with contiguousreserve forest areas are managed as tiger and elephant reserves. ). Some protected areas(PAs) have few or no human inhabitants, while others have small communities withsignificant human populations in the aggregate. Village economies on the peripheries ofthese protected areas are based on long-established sedentary agricultural systems.

1.4 Pressures. The biodiversity in India's forest, grassland, wetland and marineecosystems faces many pressures. These include grazing cattle, cutting of trees for fuel,and timber, gathering of non-timber forest products, hunting, uncontrolled fires, andconversion for and spillover from agricultural, infrastructure, industrial, and commercial

2

development (e.g., pollution, siltation, and weed infestation). India's high levels of humanpopulation density and growth, high incidence of poverty, and large numbers of livestockspeed the degradation. Local people, when traditional rights and access are limited by theestablishment of PAs, often have little incentive to use natural resources in a sustainableway.

B. Government Policy

1.5 India's forest and environmental policies, plans, and actions reflect a significant,continuing commitment to biodiversity conservation. Annex 1 provides a detailedoverview of these policies and related legislation

1.6 Convention on Biological Diversity. The Government of India has ratified theConvention and taken recent policy and program initiatives corresponding to Conventionaims. These are to reconcile the need for conservation with the concern for developmentand give careful consideration to equity and shared responsibility. Ministry of Environmentand Forestry (MOEF) is identifying further actions required by the Convention.

1.7 Biodiversity in Action Plans and Policy Statements. The Government's plansand policies reflect its strong commitment to conserve and sustainably use biodiversity.The 1988 National Forest Policy treats forests as: (a) an ecological necessity, (b) a sourceof goods for use by local populations, and (c) a source of wood and other products forindustries and other non-local users. India's Environmental Action Plan, published in1993, lists "conservation of and sustainable utilization of biodiversity in selectedecosystems" as one of the top seven priorities for future action, and specifically citesecodevelopment. The National Wildlife Action Plan (1983) identified the following goals:

(a) Establishing a representative network of protected areas

(b) Developing appropriate management systems for protected areas, with dueregard for the needs of local people and ensuring their support andinvolvement

(c) Protecting biodiversity within multiple-use areas, and

(d) Extending conservation efforts beyond protected areas.

In 1988, the Wildlife Institute of India produced a biogeographic classification forconservation planning and formulated a plan for a revised network of protected areas.

1.8 Interaction Between Protected Areas and Local People. In the past twentyyears, state governments, with national assistance, have developed an extensive networkof PAs strongly enforced by forest departments. During this period, governments'approach to local people has sometimes been confrontational with significant impacts,mostly negative, on the tribal populations resident within protected areas. There is a longhistory of communities, especially tribal groups, inhabiting or using forests that weresubsequently designated as PAs. Local people were involved (usually without governmentrecognition or sanction) in managing the forest and wildlife. Increasing governmentprotection and legal control have curtailed local communities' resource use andmanagement, forced changes in traditional livelihoods, and removed incentives to useresources sustainably. Forest department employment opportunities have also shrunk withthe establishment of PAs and the ban on timber harvesting in most forest areas.

3

1.9 Community Participation in Forest Management. Now the Government isrecognizing the historic, current, and potential role of local communities. The initialgovernment effort to increase community participation was focused not on protectedareas, but rather on forests officially designated for local or commercial harvest. Throughthis effort, called joint forest management (JFM), decision-making authority andresponsibility for control over forest lands and their products are shared between forestdepartments and local user groups. Agreements specify the distribution of authority,responsibility, and benefits. Initiated in the 1 970s, early success led to expansion of JFMprograms throughout India. Several now receive support through Bank-funded stateforestry projects.

C. Ecodevelopment Strategy

1.10 Definition of Ecodevelopment. In response to pressures on protected areas, theGovernment is now beginning to address the special issues regarding participatorymanagement of protected areas through a strategy of ecodevelopment. The strategy aimsto conserve biodiversity by addressing both the impact of local people on the protectedareas and the impact of the protected areas on local people. Ecodevelopment thus hastwo main thrusts: improvement of PA management and involvement of local people. Indoing so it seeks to improve the capacity of PA management to conserve biodiversityeffectively, to involve local people in PA planning and protection, to develop incentivesfor conservation, and to support sustainable alternatives to harmful use of resources. Itsupports collaboration between the state forest departments and local communities in andaround ecologically valuable areas. Ecodevelopment addresses the welfare and behavior oflocal people and integrates these concerns into management of protected areas. It alsobuilds private-sector stakeholder support for conservation among NGOs, nature touroperators, and the general public.

1.11 Existing Ecodevelopment Programs. To date, programs for supporting PA/localcommunity linkages have been limited and small scale. In recent years, using domesticfinancing, the Ministry of Environment and Forestry (MOEF) has initiated a centrallysponsored scheme with an annual average value of about US$1 million that is distributedto dozens of PAs. The Bank has financed five forestry projects with biodiversityconservation components that include village ecodevelopment investments associated withprotected areas. Implementation of these ecodevelopment programs is only beginning.Nevertheless, the design of the Ecodevelopment Project has already built on theconceptualization and participatory planning of the earlier programs. The specializedattention that preparation of the Ecodevelopment Project has received has alreadyproduced detailed written guidelines that are being applied to programs already inprogress.

1.12 Potential Scope of Ecodevelopment. Should this project prove it to be feasible,ecodevelopment potentially might benefit 100-200 PAs. As a next step, the Governent isseeking support for an experimental demonstration and capacity-building project thatwould build on and integrate existing experience, would be large enough to establish thefeasibility of ecodevelopment in a variety of situations, and would provide for expansion inthe long term. As a national project, such an undertaking would have the potential toaddress multi-state ecodevelopment issues and management processes and to establish abasis for programmatic financing. Proceeding now with a limited version of such a project

4

is justified by the extent and urgency of human pressures on protected areas. Incorporatingfull-scale ecodevelopment at a large number of sites at this time would not be appropriate,given the complexity of issues, lack of implementation experience, and amount ofparticipatory preparation required.

D. Existing Institutional Responsibilities, Capacity and Coordination

1.13 Protected Area Management. State and national governments take theirresponsibility for PA management seriously and professionally, and have assignedsignificant numbers of staff. The national Project Tiger scheme, for example, supplementsstate support in 21 PAs by providing incentives to staff and by compensating local peoplefor animal depredation. Although funding for PA management has been limited, it has beenmore adequate than in most developing countries. Management plans exist for all sevenproject PAs and cover an implementation period of 5 to 10 years, but most of these plansneed updating in the next few years, and management skills of PA staff need improvement.In addition, PA management activities need to be better integrated into the broaderecological, sociological, and regional sphere. In many Indian PAs, humans have alreadymodified the environment so much that the remaining species and ecological communitiesneed carefully planned human intervention in order to survive.

1.14 Village Ecodevelopment. In existing programs, the linkage between villageecodevelopment investments and conservation actions has generally been implicit ratherthan explicit, through reciprocal commitments. Government initiatives have usuallyemployed traditional top-down approaches to project planning and implementation, evenwhen the programs have embraced the principle of a more participatory approach.Detailed guidance on participatory processes has been lacking. Some forest departmentstaff have experience relevant to village ecodevelopment based on their work with pastand ongoing joint forest management and social forestry programs. Training programs arenow being designed to apply this expertise to PA-oriented ecodevelopment microplanning.NGOs also have extensive capacity and experience in fostering community participation.PA authorities have begun to forge links with NGOs but these links generally have reliedon informal arrangements rather than formal contracts.

1 .15 Environmental Education. PA awareness and education programs have mainlyconsisted of the construction of an interpretation center for visitors and the preparation ofposters or leaflets.

1.16 Monitoring and Research. Monitoring in PAs has focused on large mammals.There is room for improvement in both the methodological design of existing activities andthe breadth of focus. Research institutions and individuals have conducted a number ofstudies and inventories of flora and fauna. This research has contributed to redefinition ofPA boundaries, the establishment of new PAs, and recognition of the need for increasedpolicing, but additional research is needed to improve the understanding of other issuesrelevant to PA management. PAs lack the facilities, equipment, and personnel toundertake research themselves.

1.17 Annex 2 provides further analysis of the existing organizational structure andcapacity.

5

E. Lessons from Other Projects1.18 Conservation, forestry, rural/urban development, and multi-state projects have allprovided lessons that highlight the importance of:

(a) Linkage between economic investments and conservation

(b) Building understanding and consensus on project concept

(c) Maintaining project size within realistic, achievable limits

(d) Involving disadvantaged groups in participatory resource management

(e) Using contractual agreements between government entities and localcommunities

(f) Assessing incentives for beneficiaries

(g) Avoiding numerical physical output targets and top-down planning

(h) Using participatory rural appraisal (PRA) exercises and cost sharingarrangements to increase ownership, appropriateness, and sustainability ofinvestments

(i) Using existing organizational structures and skilled specialists

G) Developing transparent and verifiable monitoring to ensure accountability

(k) Disbursing funds to states in response to past performance and to workplans that meet clear criteria

(1) Specifying a clear identity and mandate, designated full-time staff, andadequately delegated financial and administrative powers for the centralcoordinating unit.

Annex 3 provides a further summary of lessons learned.

F. Project Preparation Process

1.19 Site Selection Criteria. In consultation with NGOs and state governments,MOEF selected project PAs from a list of areas where the threats to biodiversity stemfrom local rural dependencies. Selection criteria comprised biodiversity importance,biogeographic representation and likelihood of success. The success factor took intoaccount the extent of human pressures, PA management capacity, existing infrastructure(which accounts for six of the eight sites being tiger reserves), accessibility, state andnational government support and state government responsiveness to community andNGO involvement in forest management.

1.20 Exclusion of Similipal Tiger Reserve in Orissa. The 1994 government proposalwas for eight sites, but the Bank reduced the project scope to seven sites by excluding theSimilipal Tiger Reserve in Orissa, without prejudice to future considerations. The Bankreceived documentation on relocation plans and activities in Similipal, but this did notconfirm that all relocation after preappraisal had been and could in the future be consistentwith the project strategy for people in the PAs. The Bank was particularly concerned thatrelocation be voluntary and be consistent with the best practices outlined in the Bank'soperational directives.

6

1.21 Participatory Preparation Process. Preparation for the project has emphasizedclient ownership, local participation and public involvement (e.g., informationdissemination, consultations). MOEF prepared the project with the assistance ofprofessional institutes, NGOs and state forestry departments and financing from theUNDP/GEF Preinvestment Facility. Bank staff and foreign consultants provided limitedperiodic comments and advice. The preparation incorporated technical papers from in-country experts, reviews of completed studies, and collections of available information(e.g. population censuses, ethnographies, scientific reports). It also applied participatoryrural appraisal (PRA) techniques and indicative planning in an innovative way based onsample views of local people about biodiversity issues. Preparation was conducted by oneNGO/professional institute as national coordinator, two professional ecological/wildlifeinstitutes, four specialists as national consultants and twelve state-level NGOs. More than40 conservation and rural development NGOs have participated in the NGO and public

consultations. Preparation included 38 recorded meetings between March 1992 and May1995 to discuss project design and work plans. There were 14 site visits to select the sites,four inter-state PRA training sessions, four state-level PRA training workshops, andeleven national consultation meetings. Annex 4 provides a more detailed description of theproject preparation process.

1.22 Project Preparation Facility Advance. In January, 1995, in response to a requestfrom GOI, the Bank provided a US$2 million Project Preparation Facility (PPF) Advance.The Department of Economic Affairs (DEA) countersigned the PPF agreement letter inMarch, 1995, but the flow of funds began only in December 1995. In order to meet thecondition of appraisal by May, 1995, government agencies, NGOs, and otherorganizations that prepared essential reports spent their own resources in anticipation ofeventual reimbursement by the PPF. In addition to providing funds for completing projectdesign prior to project appraisal, the advance is expected to finance villageecodevelopment activities on a pilot basis, consultancies needed to develop detailedguidelines and arrangements, office equipment, training and workshops in preparation forproject startup expected in October 1996. A portion of the International DevelopmentAssociation (IDA) credit would be used to refinance the advance. The initiation ofnegotiations of the Ecodevelopment Project was contingent on many actions associatedwith the PPF including guarantees that GOI and state governments had begun toimplement the activities required for a timely and full-scale startup to the project and haddemonstrated their capacity to meet project administration requirements. These actions aredescribed in relevant sections of Chapters I1-V and summarized in Chapter VI.

Discussions with NGOs have revealed a range of perspectives, including constructive suggestions fordesign improvements and expressions of distrust of any activities receiving financial support fromthe Bank.

7

IL The Project

A. Rationale for GEF and IDA Funding

2.1 Rationale for GEF Involvement and Incremental Costs. The project is fullyconsistent with the Convention on Biological Diversity and the GEF Council guidance.The GOI has identified ecodevelopment as a national priority in the biodiversity actionplans and policy statements (see paragraph 1.7). The project would address urgent globalbiodiversity conservation needs. The project would conserve biodiversity in seven criticalareas, in a megadiversixy country. One of the seven areas, Gir, has the world's onlypopulation of Asian lions. The other six project sites support vital populations of tigers,one of the world's most endangered carnivores. In combination, these sites give goodbiogeographic and habitat coverage (e.g., dry deciduous open forests, semi-evergreenforests, moist deciduous open forests and wet evergreen forests, in forest, semiarid, andmountain ecosystems). The level of threats to biodiversity in the seven sites is high andrequires a substantial effort on an urgent basis. The analysis of incremental costs inaccordance with GEF guidelines shows baseline costs of US$19 million and incrementalcosts of US$48 million, which would be financed by GEF and IDA. The Government ofIndia realizes that, in view of the scale of external funding required, it cannot expect toreceive a GEF grant sufficient to cover the entire incremental cost of the globalalternative. However, it is so strongly committed to the objectives of the project that it iswilling to borrow up to US$28 million of IDA resources to cover 58% of the incrementalcost. A GEF grant of US$20 million would cover the remaining 42% of the incrementalcost. Annex 5 further analyzes the rationale for GEF, including the calculation ofincremental costs.

2.2 Country Assistance Strategy The Bank's Country Assistance Strategy (CAS) forIndia dated May 1995 explicitly encourages Bank and GEF financing of ecodevelopmentas an important way for the Bank to support biodiversity conservation. The CAS mentionsthat such financing would build on the Bank's support for recent forestry projects. Theproject would also act on CAS concerns by enhancing participation, involving NGOs, andincreasing women's role in managing productive resources. The project also wouldimplement the new approaches to conservation outlined in the Bank's 1991 Forest SectorPolicy. These approaches incorporate local people into PA management activities, benefitsharing, and planning, and emphasize consideration of the needs and welfare of forest-dwelling people.

B. Project Areas and Participants

2.3 Biogeographical Features. The seven project areas would include protected areas(PAs) as well as villages in areas peripheral to the PA but within a 2 km. radius of thePA's boundary. Five of the seven PAs are tiger reserves, which generally comprisegazetted and proposed parks and sanctuaries, plus specified areas of reserve forests andtourism zones. There are two PAs that are not tiger reserves: Nagarhole, which is aProject Elephant reserve comprising a declared national park, and Gir, a declared nationalpark that has the world's only wild population of asiatic lions. The total land area of thetiger reserves and national parks is 6714 sq. km., with 2014 sq. km. managed as core

8

areas. Individual PAs range in size from 643 to 1412 sq. km., with core areas ranging from192 to 393 sq. km.

2.4 Demographic Features. About 427,000 villagers would participate in the project;of these 89,000 currently live within the PAs (mostly in enclaves and other non-core partsof tiger reserves where human settlement is allowed). About 39% of the participantswould be tribal. ). The number of participants range from 36,000 to 77,000 per PA. Theproject would cover as many of the people living within 2 km. of the PA boundaries aspossible, within the limits of institutional capacity. The intensity of local people's impactson the PA provided the basis to select specific participating villages. Most of the villageecodevelopment investments would take place in the periphery area. Annex 6 furtherdescribes the project areas.

C. Project Objectives

2.5 The project would conserve biodiversity by implementing the ecodevelopmentstrategy in and around seven protected areas (PAs) and would also include support forpreparing future biodiversity projects. The main objectives would be:

(a) To improve capacity of PA management to conserve biodiversity andincrease opportunities for local participation in PA management activitiesand decisions

(b) To reduce negative impacts of local people on biodiversity, reduce negativeimpacts of PAs on local people, and increase collaboration of local peoplein conservation efforts

(c) To develop more effective and extensive support for ecodevelopment

(d) To ensure effective management of this project, and

(e) To prepare future biodiversity projects.

D. Summary of Project Content

2.6 The US$67 million project would be implemented over a five-year period fromOctober 1996 through September 2001. The components correspond to the objectiveslisted above and comprise:

(a) Improved PA management (US$14 mln. - 22 % of the base costs):

(i) improving PA planning processes and building capacity

(ii) protecting and managing ecosystems and habitats within the PA

(iii) upgrading PA amenities for field staff

(b) Village ecodevelopment (US$34 mln. - 55 % of the base costs) thatreduces negative interactions of local people on biodiversity and increasescollaboration of local people in conservation by:

(i) conducting participatory microplanning and providingimplementation support

9

(ii) implementing reciprocal commitments that foster alternativelivelihoods and resource uses to be financed by a villageecodevelopment program and that specify measurable actions bylocal people to improve conservation

(iii) special programs for additional joint forest management, voluntaryrelocation, and supplemental investments for special needs

(c) Education & awareness and impact monitoring & research (US$5 mln. - 8% of the base costs) that develops more effective and extensive support forPA ecodevelopment including:

(i) promoting public support for conservation through environmentaleducation and awareness campaigns

(ii) impact monitoring and research to improve understanding of issuesand solutions relevant to PA management and interactions betweenPAs and people

(d) Overallproject management (US$5 mln. 9 % of the base costs):

(e) Preparation offuture biodiversity projects (US$2 mln. - 4 % of the basecosts):

(i) Second Ecodevelopment Project

(ii) Biodiversity Information Project

(iii) Ex-situ Conservation Project, and

(f) Reimbursement of the Project Preparation Facility (US$2 mln. - 3 % ofthe base costs).

E. Detailed Features

Improved PA Management

2.7 Improving PA Planning Processes and Building Capacity. The improvedplanning processes and capacity building would use specialist advice, studies, workshops,associated travel costs, and training containing two main parts:

(a) To strengthen PA management plans and the capacity to implement theplans

(i) a two year updating process and skill building process would:

* update PA management plans in conformity with currentguidelines

* incorporate ecological considerations, including boundaryrationalization, buffer forest land management, andbroadening the focus of the plan to cover ecosystems inaddition to species

10

* introduce processes and arrangements to broadenparticipation and cooperation of local people and outsidegroups, including increasing consultation, and developingbenefit sharing arrangements for PA byproducts andenterprises

* develop PA-specific financial sustainability strategies

* incorporate initiatives supported under other projectcomponents (e.g., village ecodevelopment, environmentaleducation strategies, research strategies, etc.).

(ii) the component would also include support throughout the projectfor training in PA management skills.

(b) To incorporate PA concerns into regional planning and regulation, whichwould involve.

(i) early identification and assessment of existing and proposedactivities outside the scope of the project that might potentiallyundermine effective biodiversity conservation of the PAs orundermine implementation of the ecodevelopment strategy in andaround the PAs and

(ii) strengthening the capacity for environmental site clearance andmonitoring of non-project activities using existing environmentalprotection regulations and agreed best practice for environmentalassessment and resettlement.

2.8 Protecting and Managing Ecosystems and Habitats. During projectpreparation, the PA authorities developed an indicative list of activities based on existingplans and available information. The scope and nature of these activities differ from PA toPA and in most cases would be very site specific. The broad categories of activities are:

(a) Ecosystem and habitat restoration and

(b) Improving fire, poaching, and animal control.

These activities would require inputs of restoration and control works, associatedsupervision, communications equipment, a limited number of vehicles and boats, minoraccess track improvements, fire watch towers, sign boards, boundary markers, and otherworks and goods in accordance with recommendations of the PA management plans. Theupdated PA management plans described above, once completed and cleared by the Bank,would determine the specific content of investments in this subcomponent. However,some investments in ecosystem protection and management would be required prior to thelikely completion of the PA management plan updating. In order to ensure that activitiesimplemented in the interim are sound and do not have a negative impact on biodiversityand the environment, PA officials would demonstrate prior to implementation that theactivities would (a) conserve biodiversity; (b) be urgently needed; (c) not foreclose optionsbeing considered for the updated PA management plans; (d) be consistent with existingPA management plans; (e) be technically feasible; (f) not erode customary tenure rights oftribals, and (g) be environmentally sustainable.

I1

2.9 Annex 7 describes details of the improved PA management planning processes,clearance requirements, technical assistance, and training. Assurances were obtained atnegotiations that planning and implementation of the ecosystem protection andmanagement investments would be in accordance with guidance agreed with IDA.

2.10 Upgrading Amenities for PA Staff. The selection of the seven PAs was premisedin part on the fact that these PAs already had good facilities and would not requireextensive infrastructure improvements. Nevertheless, some upgrading of the amenities forlowest ranked PA staff, would be required and would comprise limited staff quarters forthe lowest ranked PA staff, patrol camps, and drinking water and electricity supplies forsome locations. In addition, career development training and field kits for staff would besupported under the project.

Village Ecodevelopment

2.11 Microplanning and Implementation Support. Conducting participatorymicroplanning and providing implementation support for reciprocal commitments woulduse contracted local NGOs, expert advisors, workshops, materials, training (ofgovernment officials, NGOs, and local people), and PA staff travel to:

(a) Undertake participatory mutual interaction assessment of PA and localpeople

(b) Explain and consider the implications of the eligibility criteria, budgetconstraints, local contribution requirements, and applications of traditionalnatural resource management systems

(c) Identify potential investments and activities which would mitigate negativePA-people interactions

(d) Analyze the financial, technical, institutional, and social feasibility of theproposed programs

(e) Strengthen capacity of implementing institutions (e.g. village groups, parkpersonnel, NGOs, etc.)

(f) Confirm reciprocal microplan agreements that address negative interactionsof both PA and local people, and

(g) Facilitate the review and implementation of the reciprocal commitments.

Teams comprising PA staff and local NGO staff (with each team including at least onewoman) would use specially focused participatory rural appraisal techniques, called aprotected area mutual interaction assessment (PAMIA). The PAMIA would facilitatedetailed village-level planning of reciprocal ecodevelopment commitments. These teamswould take special care to ensure that women, tribal groups, and other disadvantagedpeople participate in the planning process and benefit from the agreed program. PA-levelecologists, social scientists, and other specialists would provide advice and review theproposed microplans to ensure that they met eligibility criteria. National-level specialistswould also review proposals presenting new or difficult issues. Annex 8 outlinesmicroplan procedures and contents in detail.

12

2.12 Implementing the Reciprocal Commitments. Reciprocity would reside in themutual quid pro quo of (a) specific measurable actions by local people to improveconservation and (b) investments that foster altemative resources use and livelihoods.PRA surveys in sample communities in and around the PAs have enabled the projectpreparation teams to identify an indicative list of possible ecodevelopment investments andactions to improve conservation. Investments categories include: biomass substitution(e.g. alternative fuels), biomass generation and forestry, ecotourism, agriculture includingwatershed management, small irrigation and livestock, agro-processing, and artisanry.These investment ideas need site-specific review to judge whether they meet eligibilitycriteria, and other proposals may be identified during more detailed planning. Examples ofactions to improve conservation include curtailing grazing, curtailing fuelwood collectionwithin the PA, and increasing participation in anti-poaching efforts.

2.13 Investment Eligibility Criteria. The eligibility criteria specifies that villageecodevelopment investments associated with the reciprocal commitments would:

(a) Conserve biodiversity by reducing negative and increasing positiveinteractions between people and PAs, either directly, or indirectly bycreating sufficient incentives for a consensus that commits local people tospecific, measurable actions that improve conservation (the other essentialelement of the reciprocal commitment)

(b) Mitigate the negative impacts of the previous establishment of the PAs onvulnerable groups and ensure equitable distribution of benefits topopulations currently dependent on the PAs, especially tribals, women andother disadvantaged people

(c) Add supplemental resources, i.e., alternative sources of funding andsupport is not available

(d) Be technicallyfeasible, e.g., inputs and technical advice are adequate;physical conditions are suitable

(e) Be financiallyfeasible, e.g., costs within norms or cleared by PA manager,returns are sufficient to compensate for PA resources foregone, and for allinvestments intended to produce cash revenue or benefits that can bemonetized, market linkages are adequate, cash flow requirements areviable, and returns compare favorably with alternative investment options,

(f) Be socially and institutionally feasible, e.g., associated activities areculturally acceptable, local institutional capacity is adequate to organizeforest protection, distribute benefits from common resources, providephysical maintenance, keep accounts, meet contribution requirements, etc.,and

(g) Be environmentally sustainable, e.g., adverse environmental impact ofexotic species, agro-chemicals, construction activity, can be ameliorated oravoided.

(h) Be selected and "owned" by EDCs, ensured through use of budgetconstraint mechanism and contribution requirement.

13

Village ecodevelopment investments associated with the reciprocal commitments mustmeet all of the above criteria. Annex 8 describes the process and documentation requiredto ensure that these criteria are met, including specific eligibility and feasibilityconsiderations. Annexes 17 and 18 provide further guidance on environmental and socialconsiderations.

2.14 Budget Constraints and Phasing The total costs of the ecodevelopmentinvestments that would be associated with reciprocal commitment would not exceed Rs.10,000 (US$285) base costs per family, plus Rs. 500 (US$14) per family at preinvestment(i.e., during initial microplanning) to establish credibility. The funding of the Rs. 10,000per family would usually be spread out over a three year period, with one third of the totalresources available each year. The budget constraint per EDC would be calculated on aper household basis, multiplied by the total number of households. For example, a forty-family hamlet would make decisions within a binding budget constraint of Rs. 133,333(US$3,800) for the first year, or Rs. 400,000 (US$11,400) over the three years. Annex 8further explains the basis and arrangments for the budget constraint mechanism.

2.15 Contributions of Local People. Local people would contribute at least 25 percentof the Rs. 10,000 per household village ecodevelopment investment in cash, kind, or labor.Payment from project funds for the market value of contributions would be made availableto the local people for additional community investments.This arrangement would thushelp to extend the incentive mechanism beyond the period of the project investments.Amnex 8 describes further details of the arrangements for local contributions.

2.16 Special Programs. These programs would mostly take place outside the nationalpark and sanctuary boundaries but inside the 2 km periphery of the PAs, and wouldcomprise:

(a) Supporting plantation activities under joint forest management (JFM) inreserve forests in the immediate vicinity of PAs, beyond levels allowedwithin ecodevelopment budget constraints, in order to maintain consistencywith JFM coverage elsewhere in the state

(b) Developing the voluntary relocation option for people in the PAs in waysthat are consistent with project objectives and GOI and Bank policies (e.g.,develop participatory operational plans, aid households in the transitionalperiod, provide investment funds for alternative livelihoods, provideimplementation support services, and support measures fostering culturalcontinuity), and

2

(c) Providing other supplemental investments through a discretionary reservefor PA managers to allocate to areas with special needs (e.g., specialwatershed management priorities in buffer areas, communities that areespecially dependent on forest resources, or village ecodevelopmentinvestment opportunities with economies of scale).

2The discretionary reserve would not exceed 18% of the regular village ecodevelopment investments.

14

2.17 Guidelines. It is important that all village ecodevelopment activities follow projectguidelines. Annex 8 provides detailed guidelines on the participatory microplanningprocess, including a list of specific eligibility and feasibility considerations. Annex 18provides an analytical framework to help ensure that vulnerable groups (indigenouspeople, women, and other marginalized groups) would be full participants in projectdecision-making and benefits. Annex 19 provides guidelines on programs fro people in thePAs, including voluntary relocation. Assurances were obtained at negotiations thatplanning and implementation of reciprocal commitments, including associated investments,would be in accordance with guidelines (including selection process, eligibility criteria,feasibility considerations, acceptability of investment costs, budget constraint, andbeneficiary contribution requirement) agreed with IDA (consistent with Annexes 8, 18,and 19). For each PA, SFDs would submit the first three proposals for village

ecodevelopment microplans (which could those developed during the PPF ) for approvalby IDA prior to the implementation of the microplans.

EducationNisitor Management and Impact Monitoring/Research

2.18 Education and Visitor Management. The project would provide local NGOs,expert advisors, training, workshops, physical facilities, equipment, and materials for:

(a) Environmental education and awareness to

(i) Develop an environmental education and awareness strategy withhelp from professional educators, communicators, scientists, socialscientists, NGOs and PA staff

(ii) Improve visitor information and interpretation services

(iii) Expand education programs for school children

(iv) Run mass media campaigns

(v) Develop alternative media

(b) Visitor managment and ecotourism

(i) Develop a visitor management and participatory ecotourismstrategy

(ii) Implement agreed strategy.

2.19 Annex 9 describes the environmental education and visitor management activitiesin detail.

2.20 Impact Monitoring and Research. Impact monitoring and research wouldimprove understanding of issues and solutions relevant to PA management andinteractions between PAs and people. It would involve the extensive use of contractedinstitutions and individuals for implementation support, expert advice, and special studies.It would also involve local people in participatory monitoring, and provide support for

3Microplans proposed during the PPF could be implementated prior to these three proposals, providedthey meet guidelines outlined in February 1996 Bank mission Aide Memoire.

15

improved facilities and equipment, training, workshops, transport, and materials. Theseimports would support:

(a) Ecological and socioeconomic monitoring to measure status and impactsand to measure the effectiveness of project institutions and processes

(b) Ecological research (e.g., human impact within PAs, ways to controldepredation by wildlife, impacts of fires and flood, ecosystem dynamics)

(c) Socioeconomic research (e.g. long-term impacts of PAs on people,ethnobiology, indigenous resource management systems, cultural heritage,participatory processes, tenure requirements), and

(d) Capacity building and communication programs to facilitate experimentallearning and demonstration, increase compatibility of approaches anddisseminate findings on above.

Annex 10 describes the impact monitoring and research activities in detail.

Project Management Component

2.21 This component would support the management organization and activities, i.e.,the overhead, required to implement the overall project. Items in this component are notsolely associated with the individual components described above, but instead cover arange of components. It would include:

(a) Direct PA level management

(b) Implementation strategy and guidelines

(c) Multi-state learning and dissemination

(d) Implementation review

(e) National-level policy studies and

(f) National level administration.

Assurances were obtained at negotiations that the national level project managementactivities would be implemented in accordance with arrangements agreed with IDA.Annex 11 presents the terms of reference for the national-level technical assistance and theindicative training program in project management.

Preparation of Future Biodiversity Projects

2.22 Overview. The Ecodevelopment Project would include preparation support(including experts, studies, and workshops) for relatively large and comprehensive futureprojects intended to strategically address India's priority biodiversity concerns. TheGovernment has developed a list of three project concepts which potentially could meetthis criteria: Second Ecodevelopment, Biodiversity Information, and Genetic and Ex-situConservation.

2.23 Second Ecodevelopment Project. In concept this project would be be a largerscale, progamatic version of the current project, but also include a component addressing

16

biodiversity conservation in multiple use areas. This preparation of this project wouldinvolve:

(a) Providing preparation guidance incorporating existing experience

(b) Preparing detailed proposals for specific project areas of the SecondEcodevelopment project

(c) Appraising submitted proposals for the Second Ecodevelopment Projectand

(d) Building capacity and consensus to lay a foundation for timelyimplementation of the Second Ecodevelopment Project.

2.24 Biodiversity Information Project. The concept of this project would be toorganize a demand-driven system for biodiversity information that would:

(a) Strengthen systems for gathering, organizing, and storing useful information

(b) Strengthen distributed system for providing access to information and

(c) Enhance analysis and application of information for decision-making.

2.25 Genetic and Ex-Situ Conservation Project. This project concept wouldcomprise a nationally-coordinated and user-oriented effort to:

(a) Expand the stock of ex situ genetic resources, salvaging selected species andgenetic variability that would otherwise be lost if left in situ within protected ormultiple use areas

(b) Strengthen the capacity to replicate, manipulate, and exchange geneticresources

(c) Improve safety, reliability, and efficiency of genetic resources management

(d) Develop and establish a legal framework for ex situ conservation

(e) Promote public awareness and education of ex situ genetic resourcesconservation

2.26 Annex 12 further describes the projects concepts and preparation activities.

17

Ill. PROJECT COSTS AND FINANCING

A. Project Cost Estimates4

3.1 Total project costs are estimated at US $67 million (Rs. 294.9 crore ), inclusive ofduties and taxes in the amount of US $0.9 million (Rs. 3.9 crore). Of this 8 percent or US$5.3 million are foreign exchange costs. Investment costs amount to 86 percent andincremental recurrent costs to 14 percent of base costs. The base costs are those obtainedat the time of appraisal, adjusted for inflation to the date of negotiations. Physicalcontingencies amount to 9 percent. Price contingencies reflect foreign inflation of 2.0, 2.3,and four years at 2.5 percent, and local inflation of 8.0, 8.0, 7.5 and three years at 6.0

5percent for the respective fiscal years of the project.

3.2 The table below gives a summary of project costs by component. Additionalsummary tables of project costs are presented in Annex 13.

Project Cost Summary

(Rs. Lakh) (USS '000) %% Total

Foreign BaseLocal Foreign Total Local Foreign Total Exchane Costs

A. Improved PA ManagmentPlanning Processes 367.2 1.1 368.3 1,046.1 3.2 1,049.3 - 2Ecosystem Prtection and Management 3,644.1 490.5 4,134.6 10,382.2 1,397.4 11,779.5 12 19Amenities for Field Staff 342.1 38.0 380.1 974.6 108.3 1,082.9 10 2

Subtotal 4,353.4 529.6 4,883.0 12,402.9 1,508.9 13,911.7 11 22B. Village Ecodevelopment

Participatory Micro-Plnning andImplementation Support 1,681.7 119.2 1,801.0 4,791.3 339.7 5,131.0 7 8

Investments tolmplement Reciprocal Commitments 7,703.7 405.5 8,109.2 21,948.0 1,155.2 23,103.1 5 37Special Programs 1,868.2 94.4 1,962.6 5,322.5 268.9 5,591.4 5 9

Subtotal 11,253.7 619.1 11,872.7 32,061.7 1,763.8 33,825.5 5 55C. Develop Effective and Extensive Supportfor Ecodevelopnent

Conduct Environmental Education andAwareness Campaigns 316.9 78.0 394.9 902.9 222.1 1,125.1 20 2

Improve Impact Monitoringand Research Systems 1,186.7 72.8 1,259.6 3,380.9 207.5 3,588.5 6 6

Subtobal 1,503.6 150.8 1,654.5 4,283.9 429.6 4,713.5 9 8D. Project Managenmnt 1,784.8 67.4 1,852.2 5,084.8 192.0 5,276.8 4 9E. Pepare Futur Blodivemlty Projets 573.1 245.6 818.8 1,632.8 699.8 2,332.6 30 4F. Reinbursementof PPF 659.9 42.1 702.0 1,880.0 120.0 2,000.0 6 3

TotalBASELINECOSTS 20,128.5 1,654.6 21,783.1 57,346.1 4,714.1 62,060.2 8 100Physical Contingencies 567.4 57.9 625.3 1,616.5 165.0 1,781.5 9 3PrkceContingencies 5,939.6 530.4 6,470.0 2,774.5 383.8 3,158.3- -

Total PROJECT COSTS 26,635.5 2,243.0 28,878.5 61,737.1 5,262.9 67,000.0 8 108

4A crore, which is the Indian unit commonly used to express large sums of money, equalsRs. 10,000,000.

5Local costs have been converted into US$ costs assuming a stable, real exchange rate regime.

18

3.3 Relation of Cost Estimates to Annual Budgets. Cost estimates are indicativeonly. They indicate the overall size of the project and amount of required financing but donot provide an approved blueprint for specific expenditures. In the course of the project,managers would allocate specific expenditures according to an annual work plan andbudget, which would be subject to a review process to ensure consistency with projectobjectives. The updated PA management plans would determine the specific investmentduring project years three to five for the protection and management of ecosystemscomponent. Annual budgets for the village ecodevelopment component would specifyonly the location and unit size of the villages selected. Funds would then be allocated forspecific activities as agreed with village groups through participatory microplanning andfeasibility analysis, in conjunction with reciprocal commitments that promote conservation.Strategies supports during the initial project period would also determine specific projectsupport for environmental education and monitoring and research activities.

B. Financing Plan

3.4 The financing plan below presents the IDA, GEF, project beneficiaries, GOS, andGOI contributions for the five-year project period. The IDA Credit of US $28.0 million

6equivalent would finance 42% of project costs, net of taxes. The GET Grant of US $20.0million equivalent would finance 30% of project costs. The IDA and GEF financing isallocated roughly on a pro-rata basis to all components except for the preparation offuture biodiversity projects and the reimbursement of the US$2 million IDA ProjectPreparation Facility). GOI and the GOSs would finance US $14.6 million. While thisfinancing would represent a significant increase in government resources devoted tobiodiversity conservation, it would be only a small share of the total budgets of theparticipating state forest departments. Project beneficiaries would contribute US $4.4million equivalent by contributing primarily labor to the ecodevelopment program.

6The Global Environment Trust (GET) is the legal entity that provides Global Environmental Facility(GEF) grants.

19

Components by Financiers(USS '000)

InternationalDevelopment Project State Government ofAssociation GEF Trust Beneficiaries Governments India Total

Amount Amount Amount Amount Amount Amount %

A. Improved PA ManagementPlanningProcesses 562.1 562.1 - 9.0 47 1,137.8 1.7Ecosystem Protection and Management 2,910.2 2,910 2 - 5,709.1 1,409.2 12,938.7 19.3Arnenitiesfor Field Staff 491.8 491.8 - - 245.9 1,229.5 1.8

Subtotal 3,964 0 3,964 0 - 5,718 1 1,659 8 15,306.0 22.8B. Village Ecodevelopment

Participatory Micro-Planning andImplementabon Support 1,7018 1,6671 - 2,0504 214.9 5,634.3 8.4

InesbmentstolmplementReciprocalCommitments 10,019.8 7,395.1 4,585.8 - 2,459.1 24,459.8 36.5Special Programs 3,019.8 2,260.6 - - 711.3 5,991.6 8.9

Subtotal 14,741 4 11,322 7 4,585 8 2,050.4 3,385.3 36,085.7 53.9C. Develop Effecive and Extensive Support

for EcodevelopmentConduct Enuronmental Education and

Avareness Campaigns 501 1 501.1 - 985 157.9 1,258 7 1.9Improve Impact MonitoringandResearchSystems 1,8139 1,8139 - 2045 103.2 3,935.5 5.9

Subtotal 2,315.0 2,315.0 - 3030 261.2 5,194.2 7.8D. Project Management 2,3982 2,398.2 - 9864 50.1 5,832.8 8.7E. Prepare Future Biodiversity Projects 2,581 4 - - - - 2,581.4 3.9P. Reimbursementof PPP 2,000.0 - - - - 2,000.0 3.0otal Disbursement 28,000.0 20,000 0 4,585 8 9,057.9 5,356.4 67,000.0 1)0.0

C. Procurement

3.5 Procurement under the project would be undertaken by each state forestrydepartment, and for centrally managed activities, by the responsible MOEF office. Bulkingor grouping of contracts across states would not be practical because of the widelydispersed nature of the project sites.

3.6 Civil Works. (US$7.4 million). Works would be procured following NationalCompetitive Bidding (NCB) or other procedures acceptable to IDA:

(a) NCB. Civil works in the project consist mainly of the construction ofoffices, residential quarters for forest guards, foresters, and range officersin remote forest areas, a few quarters for forest officers in divisionalheadquarters, and repairs of gravel forest tracks. Works to an aggregatevalue of US$450,000 would be procured under contracts awarded on thebasis of NCB procedures acceptable to IDA. The justification for the NCBfor civil works is that they consist of works in widely scattered interiorlocations, during the first three years of the project, and therefore could notbe grouped together into convenient packages that would attact foreignfirms. Nevetheless, bids from foreign contractors would not be precluded.

(b) Other procedures acceptable to IDA. Small works valued at less thanUS$20,000 would be procured by the respective state forest departments inaccordance with procedures acceptable to IDA: (i) under community

participation provisions by direct contracting with village communities ornon-governmental organizations; (ii) by soliciting quotations from at leastthree qualified contractors; or (iii) through force account. Materials forthese works valued in aggregate at US $4.0 million would be procuredfollowing national shopping procedures acceptable to IDA. Monitoring ofworks would be done using procedures acceptable to IDA.

20

3.7 Vehicles and non-motorized transportation (US $0.8 million).Vehicles for theproject consist of four-wheel drive vehicles, minibuses, and boats. They would be requiredin small numbers in widely dispersed areas over the project life of five years in contracts ofless than US $100,000. To meet these requirements, vehicles costing not more thanUS$650,000 in the aggregate would be procured through national shopping proceduresacceptable to IDA. Rate contracts of the Directorate General of Supplies and Disposal(DGS&D), New Delhi, would only be acceptable as a substitute for procurement undernational shopping. Elephants and ponies to be used for anti-poaching, valued at about US$100,000, would be obtained under direct contracting procedures acceptable to IDA.

3.8 Furniture and Equipment (US $1.9 million). Computers and the associatedsoftware costing more than US$100,000 to an aggregate value of US$346,000 would beprocured using international competitive bidding (ICB) procedures. The remaininginformation technology, field, office, and laboratory equipment are required by the sevenstates and spread over the project life of five years. Individual contracts are not likely toexceed US $20,000 and hence are not suitable for competitive bidding. They would beprocured up to an aggregate amount of US $0.9 million through national shoppingprocedures acceptable to IDA. Rate contracts of the (DGS&D), New Delhi, would onlybe acceptable as a substitute for procurement under national shopping. Satellite imagery,aerial photography and maps up to an aggregate amount of about US$100,000 would beprocured directly from GOI agencies such as the National Remote Sensing Agency or theSurvey of India. Similarly, books and periodicals, proprietary software, extension andpublicity materials, valued at about US$0.5 million would be procured under directcontracting procedures acceptable to IDA.

3.9 Ecodevelopment Investments (US$30.5 million). Investment expenditures wouldfinance small works and village development activities in 2,000 widely scattered EDClocations over the five-year project period. Procedures acceptable to IDA for managementof the investments, including planning, the selection process, eligibility criteria, would beutilized (Annex 8). Civil works required for these investments would be procured inaccordance with procedures acceptable to IDA: (i) under community participationprovisions by direct contracting with village communities or non-governmentalorganizations; (ii) by soliciting quotations from at least three qualified contractors; or (iii)through force account. Construction materials for these works, aggregating to about US$13.0 million, would be procured following national shopping procedures acceptable toIDA. Small equipment and goods required for these investments would be procuredthrough national shopping procedures acceptable to IDA. Livestock, including breedingstock, young animals, fertile eggs for hatching, bees, and silk worms, estimated to cost US$800,000 would be obtained under direct contracting procedures acceptable to IDA.

3.10 Consultancies, Studies, Training (US $12.1 million). Consultancy servicesestimated at US $6.0 million with consulting firms (mainly large NGOs) and US $4.2million with individuals for management support, implementation assistance and specialstudies would be contracted on terms and conditions in accordance with IDA guidelinesfor the use of consultants ("Guidelines: Use of Consultants by World Bank Borrowersand by the World Bank as Executing Agency, August, 1981") Consultancy services incontracts less than US $20,000 (mainly small NGOs) up to an aggregate of US $1.6million for participatory planning and implementation assistance with VillageEcodevelopment would be contracted on terms and conditions acceptable to IDA (Annex

21

14). Assurances were obtained at negotiations that GOSs would select NGOs inaccordance with criteria agreed with IDA (Annex 14). Training estimated to cost US $1.1million, including a service contract for placement and support of trainees would beprocured using governmental/administrative procedures acceptable to IDA. Detailedtraining plans are presented in Annexes 7, 8, and 11.

3.11 Project management travel costs (US $0.7 million) that would include'transportation for project managers, staff and EDC members to supervise projectinvestments and attend planning workshops that would be financed under the project.

3.12 Incremental recurrent costs (US $9.0), including staff, the purchase of office andcomputer supplies, and incremental maintenance costs of vehicles and equipment, wouldbe financed by the GOS and procured by standard GOS procedures.

3.13 Procurement Review. All ICB and NCB contracts for works and goodsexceeding US$100,000 and the first NCB contract for goods or works in each Statewould be subject to prior review by IDA. In respect to consultancies, (i) the modeldocuments for inviting proposals, (ii) terms of reference for consultant contractsregardless of value (including NGOs and autonomous government organizations), (iii) allsingle source contracts regardless of value (not applicable to contracts for individuals),(iv) all contracts for assignments of a critical nature (regardless of value), and (v) allcontracts (original or amendments) valued at more than US $100,000 awarded to firms, orUS $50,000 or more awarded to individuals, would be subject to prior review by IDA.This would result in prior review of about 10 percent of all contracts procured. Contractsbelow the threshold levels would be subject to selective post-review by visiting missions.In addition, a nationally recognized auditing firm would be engaged for a random post-review of 10% of the Ecodevelopment Support Investments. Reviews of theEcodevelopment Support Investments would concentrate on the consistency of theinvestments with the selection and eligibility criteria, agreed procurement procedures,competitiveness of prices paid and physical inspections of the relevant items. Although thiswould result in only about 15 percent of project expenditures being subject to priorreview, the nature of the project, with its emphasis on ecodevelopment programs managedand implemented by villagers and NGOs, is such that a higher level of IDA review wouldnot have a significant impact on procurement quality.

3.14 Procurement Information. Procurement information will be collected andrecorded as follows:

(a) Contract award information will be promptly reported by the borrower

(b) Comprehensive half-yearly reports will be prepared by the borrowers in theformat presented in Annex 16

(c) Compliance with aggregate limits on the specified methods of procurement

(d) Preparation of a completion report by the borrower within three months ofthe loan closing date

3.15 The project elements, their estimated costs and methods of procurement aresummarized below:

22

Procurement Arrangements(US$ '000)

Procurement MethodInternational LocalCompetitive Competitive Consulting

Bidding Bidding Other Services N.B.F. Total

Civil works 440.9 6,990.7 - - 7,431.5

(176.3) (2,796.3) (2,972.6)[176.3] [2,796.3] [2,972.6]

Vehicles - - 750.6 - - 750.6

(300.2) (300.2)[300.2] [300.2]

Furniture & equipment 329.7 - 1,585.4 - - 1,915.2(131.9) (634.2) (766.1)[131.9] [634.2] [766.1]

Ecodevelopment fund - - 30,471.4 - - 30,471.4

(13,050.7) (13,050.7)[9,632.0] [9,632.0]

Consultancies, studies and training - - 939.9 11,182.4 - 12,122.3(469.9) (5,591.2) (6,061.1)[469.9] [5,591.2] [6,061.1]

Supervision travel - - 669.9 - - 669.9

(268.0) (268.0)[268.0] [268.01

Recurrent costs - - - - 9,057.9 9,057.9

Project preparation - - 258.1 2,323.2 - 2,581.4(258.1) (2,323.2) (2,581.4)

PPF - - 200.0 1,800.0 - 2,000.0

(200.0) (1,800.0) (2,000.0)

Total 329.7 440.9 41,865.9 15,305.6 9,057.9 67,000.0(131.9) (176.3) (17,977.4) (9,714.4) - (28,000.0)[131.9] [176.3] [14,100.51 [5,591.2] - [20,000.0]

Note: Figures in parenthesis are the respective amounts financed by the International Development AssociationFigures in square brackets are the respective amounts financed by the GEF Trust

3.16 Contractual Arrangements. Prior to negotiations, MOEF and SFDs, followingprocedures acceptable to IDA, ,have contracted or are in the process of contracting NGOsand professionals to implement PPF activities and have a time-bound plan on which theyhave begun action to prepare final terms of reference and final design and tenderdocuments for works and goods to be procured through the first fiscal year of the project.Assurances were obtained at negotiations that: (i) procurement of works, goods,consultancy services would be in accordance with Bank guidelines; and (ii) standardprocurement documents as already agreed with GOI would be used.

D. Disbursements

3.17 Disbursements under the Credit would be made for:

(a) 40% of civil works for building and roads

(b) 50% of foreign expenditures, 50% of local ex-factory costs or 40% ofother local costs of equipment, vehicles, non-motorized transport andmaterials, except for those financed through the village ecodevelopmentinvestment program

23

(c) 50% of expenditures on consultants (including NGOs) services, training,

workshops, meetings, publication contracts and contract staff , excludingthe preparation of future biodiversity projects

(d) 50% of local costs of small-scale field equipment and associated runningcosts, materials, livestock, and labor financed through the villageecodevelopment investment program in accordance with proceduresacceptable to IDA

(e) 40% of project management travel, and

(f) 100% of expenditures on consultants (including NGOs) services, training,workshops, meetings, publication contracts and contract staff forpreparation of future biodiversity projects.

3.18 Disbursements under the Grant would be made for all project components exceptthe preparation of future biodiversity projects.

(a) 40% of civil works for building and roads

(b) 50% of foreign expenditures, 50% of local ex-factory costs or 40% ofother local costs of equipment, vehicles, non-motorized transport andmaterials, except for those financed through the village ecodevelopmentinvestment program

(c) 50% of expenditures on consultants (including NGOs) services, training,workshops, meetings, publication contracts, and contract staff

(d) 37% of local costs of small-scale field equipment and associated runningcosts, materials, livestock, and labor financed through the villageecodevelopment investment program in accordance with proceduresacceptable to IDA, and

(e) 40% of project management travel.

3.19 Disbursements against goods and works contracts over US $100,000, and allconsultant contracts that require prior review, including contracts exceeding US $100,000equivalent for firms and US $50,000 equivalent for individuals, would be fullydocumented. Disbursements for all other expenditures would be made against statementsof expenditure (SOEs). Supporting documentation for SOEs would be retained by GOIand the GOSs and be made available to Association staff during supervision.

3.20 MOEF and FDs have already commenced activities to expedite project start-up,not all of which are financed under the PPF. To remiburse the Government for suchexpenditures, retroactive financing would be applied to all eligible expenditures for projectactivities not already eligible for PPF fianancing, incurred after December 31, 1995, up toa maximum of SDR 1.4 million (US $2 million equivalent) from IDA and SDR 1.4 million(US$2 millioin equivalent) from GEF. All contracts and items to be financed retroactivelywill have been procured in a manner acceptable to the Association. Disbursements areprojected over a period of six GOI fiscal years, from 96/97 through 01/02. The

7Includes payments for travel and subsistence of government staff to workshops and meetings,honoraria for external specialists and facilitators, and contracts with NGOs.

24

disbursement schedule is presented in Annex 14. The completion date would be December31, 2001. The closing date of the Credit would be June 30, 2002.

3.21 To facilitate project implementation and to reduce the volume of withdrawalapplications, a special account in US dollars would be established in the Reserve Bank ofIndia, with an authorized allocation of US$2 million for IDA and US$2 million for GEF,which is equal to the estimated four monthly average disbursement. The state forestdepartments would submit withdrawal applications directly to the Controller of AidAccounts, DEA, sending copies to MOEF. Assurances were obtained at negotiations thatGOI and the GOSs would implement a system satisfactory to IDA for channeling fundsrequired for carrying out the project. Paragraphs 4.8--4.13 provide further guidance onflow of funds.

E. Accounts and Audit

3.19 The respective MOEF offices and each state government would establish aseparate project account. This account together with supporting documentation, includingcontributions from GOI and the Credit, would provide a comprehensive record of projectfinancing and expenditures. Assurances were obtained at negotiations that this accountand the special account would be subject to normal GOI and GOS accounting proceduresand controls. Project accounts would summarize project expenditures under categories tobe agreed with IDA, showing: (a) actual versus planned expenditures for each quarter; (b)actual versus planned expenditures accumulated to date; and (c) financing source for thequarter, and accumulated, by IDA and the GOSs. The summaries, which would provideinformation for the SOEs would form part of the project account, including thoseexpenditures for which reimbursement would be claimed with full documentation. Theproject accounts would be supported by a listing with the withdrawal applicationssubmitted for the period. They would be audited annually in accordance with appropriateauditing principles. The Controller and Auditor General and his accountants general at thestate levels would be considered acceptable auditors. The consolidated audited projectaccounts, including the special account and SOEs, and the auditors' reports, which wouldinclude a separate statement on the SOEs and certified copies of the SOEs, would besubmitted to IDA not later than nine months after the close of the fiscal year. The auditreport on SOEs would specifically comment on their usage and the controls established toensure their accuracy. The special account that would be maintained by the Department ofEconomic Affairs (DEA) would show all withdrawal requests disbursed, amountsadvanced and reimbursed by IDA, and the balance at the end of each accounting period.Auditor's reports would reflect the certification of the balance held by the Reserve Bankof India. The GOSs would prepare a project report on a biannual basis, in a format agreedwith IDA, summarizing project progress in physical terms by project objectives, linked tofinancial terms that would be based on the biannual unaudited project accounts.

25

IV. PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION

A. Staffing and Organizational Structure

4.1 Organizational Responsibilities. Project management would use and build uponexisting forest department, inter-agency, NGO, and community organizational structures,modifying them where necessary to ensure autonomy, flexibility, and accountability. Stategovernments, through their PA authorities, would be responsible for field level projectexecution. For many project activities, the PA authorities would develop partnerships withor delegate to NGOs and village groups. PA authorities would also contract tasks toindividual specialists, professional research and training institutions and other groups andinvolve existing district coordination committees. At the national level, the project wouldneed strong coordinating support to provide overall project integration. National NGOs,professional institutes, and contracted specialists would play major roles. Except for theproject preparation component, it is anticipated that the project would not require foreignconsultancies. Annex 15 further describes the allocation of responsibilities by component.

4.2 Staffing. The staffing plans generally rely on increasing the productivity of existingstaff already based in the PAs. However, in some cases the state governments propose toredeploy a limited number of departmental staff who currently are based outside the PAs,and to create new contractual positions. The state forest departments have provideddocumentation that the staff plan, including planned internal transfers and the assignmentof project responsibilities to existing staff would not adversely affect the adequacy ofstaffing of existing, non-project conservation activities. At the national level, MOEFwould expand existing offices to handle the project work. MOEF would in turn be assistedby outside consultancies (including NGOs). In order to support sustainability, the projectwould not include external financing for any government staff. Annex 15 provides furtherinformation on the staffing plans. Prior to negotiations, the state governments and MOEFfinalized their respective staff plans for the PAs and PTO, and filled positions required forthe implementation of PPF activities. Assurances were obtained at negotiations that thestate governments and MOEF would:

(a) Fill all positions required for the project by July 31, 1997

(b) Ensure that no more than 33% of the senior executive field staff (i.e., allstaff above range officer level) of the project PAs, under normalcircumstances, would be transferred in any one year of the project.

4.3 Consultant Contracting. Because of the importance of specialists and NGOpartnerships to timely project inception prior to negotiations, the SFDs and MOEF:

(a) Following procedures acceptable to IDA, contracted or were in the processof contracting NGOs, professional institutions, and private consultantsrequired for the implementation of PPF activities

(b) Had a time-bound plan on which they had begun action to prepare finalterms of reference, requests for proposals, short lists, and draft contracts

26

for consultants including NGOs to be contracted through the first fiscalyear of the project, using model documents, and obtain approval by IDA.

4.4 Village-Level Operations. Village institutions for microplanning would berelatively small and homogeneous villages or hamlets (preferably less than 100households) in which all households are represented in the decision-making body by bothmen and women. They would not necessarily correspond to the panchayat (municipal)structure, due to their smaller size and differences between administrative and naturalresource management boundaries. Where possible, the ecodevelopment committee wouldbuild on or use existing forest protection committees or other appropriate committeesalready existing, provided these committees are composed of all forest-dependentmembers of the village/hamlet and include women representatives from each household aswell as men. Initial village ecodevelopment investments can proceed without a formal legalframework, but for large-scale implementation of the village ecodevelopment program,states will need to have an appropriate government order consistent with project design.Annex 8 outlines the minimum requirements for government orders. Prior to negotiations,each state government drafted a government order on village ecodevelopment and were inthe process of considering suggested improvements. Assurances were obtained atnegotiations that the state governments would adopt government orders on villageecodevelopment consistent with project design by September 31, 1998.

4.5 PA Committee Structure. Each PA is making its own arrangements to manageand coordinate the project activities in accordance with its local conventions. The PAswould make an explicit effort to expand their composition beyond government employeesand to include representatives from a range of outside specialists and stakeholdersincluding NGOs.

4.6 National Committees. The Project would have two national- level committees.

(a) The Ecodevelopment Project Steering Committee, comprised of seniorMOEF and SFD officials and representatives of NGO and other institutionscontracted for national-level support, would

(i) facilitate Center-State coordination, and

(ii) provide policy guidance on project activities and work plans, and

(iii) address conflicts related to application of project guidelines andcompliance with project covenants that have not been otherwiseresolved by SFD or MOEF officials.

(b) The Ecodevelopment Project Implementation Board (EPIB) would be anempowered body assigned full financial and administrative powersnecessary:

(i) for program planning and implementation, and

(ii) to ensure that the necessary governmental approvals are processedexpediently within the MOEF.

Annex 15 provides further information on committee structure and functions. As acondition of negotiation, MOEF has established the above committees with terms of

27

reference acceptable to IDA. As a condition of negotiation GOI and GOSs haveobtained all the necessary governmental clearances.

4.7 Training. The project proposal for its various components includes carefulconsideration of training needs and many provisions for training of government staff, localcommunities and other project participants. The training activities would include:specially designed short courses, fellowships to existing domestic degree programs, studytours, on-the-job training by experts, and a very limited number of overseas trainingprograms. Prior to negotiations, GOI and GOSs prepared detailed training plans organizedaccording to project objective for the first fiscal year of the project. Assurances wereobtained that GOI and GOSs would ensure that (a) recipients of the fellowships or degreeprograms, on completion of their program, would be placed in job positions for aminimum of three years where they could make full use of their training and (b) that staffselected for the fellowship or degree programs or for overseas training would have at leastfive years to retirement, except under circumstances acceptable to IDA. Text and tablesdescribing the indicative plans for specific content, recipients, methodology andinstitutional arrangements of training are specified in accordance with the relevant projectcomponents in Annexes 7, 8 and 1 1.

B. Flow of Funds and Work Plans

4.8 Overview. The innovative nature of the Ecodevelopment Project would require amanagement structure with the authority and competence to channel funds in a timelymanner and to adapt the project work program and future project proposals in response toperformance, lessons learned, and design improvements. The management will thereforeneed a high degree of flexibility in appointing staff and consultants, strong professionalexpertise, and access to good information on program activities, accomplishments, andproblems.

4.9 Additionality. The sum of annual GOI and external financing that would comprisethis centrally sponsored scheme represents a significant increase of the MOEF total "plan"(i.e., expenditures other than salaries and maintenance) budget, an increase of about 10%above 1995/96 levels. The project expenditures in the PAs also represent a significantincrease in total expenditures of the state forest department wildlife wings. Under GOI'sbudget system, the entire amount of external aid is added to the normal plan resources (netbudgetary support) to obtain the overall budget allocation for any particular sector. Tablesin Annex 2 present data on FY94/95 - FY96/97 actual and planned expenditures of MOEFplan budget line items affecting biodiversity, and FY94/95 - FY96/97 actual and plannedexpenditures for project PAs and their respective state forest department wildlife wings.These data provide the baseline information to be used in an exchange of information onbiodiversity expenditures at the national, state, and PA levels in semi-annual progressreports.

4.10 Work Plans and Budgets. Assurances were obtained that MOEF would:

(a) submit to IDA for comment a preliminary annual work plan, which wouldinclude updated cost tables, training, contracting plans, and other items as

28

agreed with the Bank by September 30, 1997, and on an annual basisthereafter,

(b) furnish to IDA the final annual work plan proposals, taking into accountcomments of IDA by January 31, 1998, and on an annual basis thereafterand

(c) implement the final annual work plans.

MOEF would adjust the preliminary work plan and determine the final work planproposals (which would still be subject to Parliament approval), based on comments fromthe Bank, views of the Planning Commission and a review of the April-September semi-annual progress reports. To avoid delays in the implementation of microplans, the annualwork plans would not include the microplans of individual hamlets, but would includeestimates of the facilitation support and hamlet coverage required for the villageecodevelopment component.

4.11 Fund Advance Terms. As a centrally sponsored scheme, all funds to the PAswould flow through MOEF to the state governments. The proceeds of the credit and grantwould be advanced to the seven states participating in the project, under standardarrangements for developmental assistance for centrally sponsored schemes in India.Under current policies and regulations of Government of India (GOI), fund advances takethe form of 100% grant.

4.12 Release of Funds. Release of funds to the states, with immediate forwarding toPAs, would occur three times annually: by May 15, June 30, and August 31. Annex 15further describes the flow of funds arrangements and includes charts outlining the flow offunds structure and the schedule of annual planning, budgeting, sanctioning, and fundflow.

4.13 Requirements for Effective Flow of Funds. Based on the Project Tiger andexternally financed projects, the following arrangements would be essential:

(a) Timely provision of project resources provided with state counterpartbudget (i.e., staff and recurrent operating expenses)

(b) Minimal or no lapse in cash flow between one fiscal year and the next

(c) Delegation of powers permitting PA staff to make payments for certaintypes of project investments (especially the village ecodevelopment fund),based on clear criteria and procedures, and

(d) Flexibility allowing PA managers to make adjustments between budgetheads in response to project monitoring results.

Standard terms and condition for flow of funds at the national and state levels allow forthe flow of fund arrangements specified in Annex 15. The schedule and conditionsspecified in Annex 15 would be considered project performance benchmarks for thisaspect of project administration.

29

4.14 Prior to negotiations, GOI and GOSs demonstrated that they had channelsacceptable to IDA for PPF and project flow (including meeting the requirements describedabove) by:

(a) Documenting that existing channels meet the requirements and havefunctioned effectively either for Project Tiger activities or for otherexternally financed PA investments, and

(b) Using the selected channels successfully for PPF activities.

C. Project Performance Review

4.15 Conceptual Approach. The project includes both permanent impact monitoringand project performance review of limited duration; the later is integral to projectmanagement. Both programs would provide feedback and accountability to assist inproblem-solving and project adjustment. The performance reviews would incorporatefindings from impact monitoring and research component to the extent these are available,but would mostly have to rely on shorter-term "proxy" measures of project inputs,outputs, and processes. Process would be measured by the extent to which the projectfollows its design specifications. An adaptive management approach would require quickincorporation of lessons learned from these reviews. The project also includes support fora special expenditure and procurement review, and an overall independent review.

4.16 Semi-Annual Reports. The PA field directors, directors of the MOEF offices, andcontracted review specialists would be responsible for ensuring that progress reportsefficiently provide the information required for sound and timely management decisions.Regional and national institutions would provide background data to supplement theinternally-generated information, and would review and comment on the semi-annualprogress reports of project performance and the yearly work plans. The progress reportingwould incorporate findings from the impact monitoring and research component. Annex16 further explains the project approach to project performance review and presents anoutline of progress report contents. As a condition of negotiation, GOI and GOSs have(a) prepared a conceptual framework for impact monitoring (Annex 10) and projectperformance review (Annex 16) acceptable to IDA, (b) proposed guidelines for projectprogress reporting including performance monitoring indicators (Annex 16) and are in theprocess of developing the format and (c) developed a list of project performancebenchmarks (Annex 16). Assurances were obtained at negotiations that MOEF wouldsubmit to IDA progress reports, in a format acceptable to IDA, on a semi-annual basis, byJune 30 and December 31, beginning in June 1997, and use performance monitoringindicators agreed with IDA.

4.17 Supervision. A Bank mission would supervise the project semi-annually. Inaddition to the Bank task manager, the mission team would regularly include at least onebiologist and one anthropologist and, occasionally, include additional technical, financialand institutional experts. In the interest of overall portfolio management efficiency and cross-fertilization of individual state experiences, the Ecodevelopment Project supervision would alsointegrate the supervision of the ecodevelopment components in Tamnil Nadhu and HimachalPradesh under the Forest Research Education and Extension Project. Each mission would

30

include field visits to about three project sites plus a national consultation meeting that wouldinclude representatives from the seven project sites plus the two FREEP sites. Project stafffrom those sites not receiving a field visit would participate in the field visits to one of the othersites. Members of the national-level implementation review tearn contracted under the projectwould visit each PA at least twice a year and also participate in the supervision missions. Thisarrangement would enable each site to receive a Bank supervision about every 18 months, andproject staff from each state to meet with Bank supervision team to review a field situationevery six months. This arrangement would also encourage mutual sharing and cross-fertilization across states and build domestic capacity for implementation review.

4.18 Mid-Term Review. In the middle of the third year of the project, the projectmanagers and the PTO, with the assistance of the implementation review specialists,would prepare a mid-term Review. It would provide the opportunity to officially adjustproject benchmarks and to make other changes in project design if necessary. It wouldprovide a channel for reporting initial measurements of longer-term project impacts. Itwould influence the design of the Second Ecodevelopment Project. Assurances wereobtained at negotiations that the project managers in the PAs and the PTO would preparea mid-term review not later than June 30, 1999 in accordance with guidance agreed byIDA, and would promptly carry out the recommendations of this review.

4.19 Completion Report. Within six months of project completion, the projectmanagers and the PTO would prepare a project completion report on the basis ofGovernment, Bank and GEF guidelines.

4.20 Other Reviews and Evaluation Studies. The project would have independentreviews to assess project activities. The impact monitoring and research component wouldprovide the foundation for long-term evaluation, including baseline studies.

Implementation Schedule

4.21 Annex 16 includes the project implementation schedule.

31

V. PROJECT IMPACTS AND JUSTIFICATION

A. Benefits and Outputs

5.1 Basic Benefits. The project would conserve globally significant biodiversity in theseven PAs and develop capacity for increased conservation in the future. The projectwould slow, halt, or possibly even reverse declines in the richness, complexity, diversity,connectivity, and regeneration of ecosystems and species.

5.2 Outputs. The project would increase the capacity of government officials tomanage PAs effectively, addressing not only internal operations but also proposed andexisting periphery and regional activities that impact the PAs. It would increase localpeople's support for and role in PA conservation. It would create organizational processesthat could be expanded to other ecologically significant areas. More specifically, it would:

(a) Broaden the focus of PA management planning, restore ecosystems,improve fire and poaching control, and improve staff efficiency andeffectiveness

(b) Enable communities to meet their needs in an environmentally sustainablemanner, reduce unsustainable uses of PA resources, offset negativeeconormic and cultural impacts of PAs on local communities, and resolveconflicts;

(c) Provide a firmer base of public support for PAs and increase understandingof PA biodiversity, local people, and their interactions

(d) Provide the technical review and administrative and financial servicesnecessary for quality control, accountability, adaptive management,improvement of the long-term framework, dissemination, integration, andoverall timeliness of project implementation.

(e) Produce a portfolio of biodiversity project proposals eligible for GEF, IDA,and other donor consideration.

Annex 21 describes these outputs in greater detail, and also describes the project approachto measuring benefits, consideration of alternatives, the public sector role, cost recovery,and fiscal impact.

B. Environmental Impact

5.3 Project Investments. This project would have a highly beneficial environmentalimpact. The main goal of the project is to conserve critical biodiversity in seven selectedPAs. Adverse impacts would be minimal because all infrastructure investments would besmall and labor-intensive. To further ensure minimal impact, the preparation team hasreviewed the current operational procedures and guidelines for construction andmaintenance and found that they would provide adequate safeguards. In order to measureproject success, the project monitoring would include close review of the ecologicalimpact of the project, beginning with carefully designed and reliable baseline studies. .Biodiversity considerations including ecosystem integrity would also be central in villageecodevelopment eligibility criteria and in defining associated obligations, as well as in park

32

management investments. The project also includes provision of ecologists who wouldreview annual work plans and selected site-specific proposals on an ongoing basisthroughout the project period. Annex 17 provides a further summary of the environmentalanalysis.

5.4 Regional Impacts. Assurances were obtained that GOI and GlOSs would takesteps acceptable to the Bank to ensure that activities outside the scope of the projectwould not undermine effective biodiversity conservation in the PAs or undermineimplementation of the ecodevelopment strategy in and around the PAs. Annex 7 describesspecific criteria and procedures for the compliance of this assurance.

C. Social Impact

Tribal Groups, Women, and Disadvantaged People

5.5 Social Assessment. The project would operate in a setting where the previousestablishment of PAs and changes in forest use have already significantly and negativelyaffected the livelihoods of tribal groups living in and around the PAs. The establishment ofPAs has also negatively affected other disadvantaged groups. These groups includewomen (who for example, harvest most of the non-timber forest products) and poor andlandless households in the vicinity of the PAs. In this setting, the project would engage inparticipatory decisions on behavior changes to benefit conservation and to help offset pastnegative impacts of PAs on people (see Annex 8). Findings from the participatory ruralappraisals conducted by teams of state forestry officials and local NGOs identified specificpotential impacts that the project could have on tribals, women and other disadvantagedgroups. Annex 18 presents a comprehensive social assessment of the project.

5.6 Tribal Concerns Integral to Project Design. Consistent with the Bank'sOperational Directive 4.20, tribal development concerns are central to the project. Theproject would integrate tribal concerns rather than treating them as a subsidiary tribaldevelopment plan or component. I'he area-specific planning, commitments, andmonitoring would address concerns of legal and usufruct rights and status, traditionaleconomies, cultural use of natural resources, livelihood strategies, ability to adapt to newsites and economies, attitudes toward conservation, and social distribution of projectinvestments and benefits foregone. Annex 19 lists references in the staff appraisal report(SAR) annexes that further analyze prerequisites and elements specified by OperationalDirective 4.20. Annex 18 includes extensive analysis of potential project impacts on tribalpeople and suggests design measures to address special concerns of tribal people.Assurances were obtained at negotiations that GOI and GOSs ensure that projectactivities would not erode customary tenure rights over land and other assets of tribalsliving in the project areas.

People in the PAs

5.7 Current Situation. All seven PAs have people living within the PA boundaries.Most live in areas where human settlement is allowed. People living in the PAs havealready experienced losses and without the project they would face very limited and bleakoptions. At the same time, population pressures are adversely affecting PA conservation.To address and ameliorate existing conditions, SFDs and some PA residents have started

33

discussions on the possibility of participatory voluntary relocation. These discussionsindicate a strong demand for relocation from some individuals but the number of potentialparticipants is not yet clear. (Initial impressions indicate that it would be between 700 and4,000 people.)

5.8 Relocation Strategy. The project would provide support for a participatoryprocess to plan and implement "voluntary relocation". Relocation under the project wouldbe "voluntary" in the sense that it would be driven by the wishes of local people. Planningwould take place in the context of options that would not involve relocation. Relocationwould be to lands on the periphery of the PAs, rather than to distant, non-forest lands.The forest department would not cause or carry out involuntary relocation in the projectareas. All relocation planning and implementation associated with the project would beconsistent with Bank guidelines, and implementation would require prior Bank approval.In addition to providing support for voluntary relocation, the project would include specialefforts to identify and provide village ecodevelopment investments (subject to eligibilitycriteria outlined in paragraph 2.13 above) for people who do not wish to relocate.

5.9 Assurances. For all activities dealing with people in the project area that takeplace immediately prior to and during the project period, assurances were obtained atappraisal and were reconfirmed at negotiations that the state governments would:

(a) In pursusing the objectives of the Project, not carry out any involuntaryresettlement for any people resident within the PAs

(b) Ensure that any proposals for voluntary relocation would be prepared andimplemented in accordance with criteria agreed with IDA and after priorapproval of IDA

(c) For people who opt to remain in the PAs, prepare an indicative list ofappropriate village ecodevelopment investments acceptable to IDA, whichmeets project criteria, and include these people in the villageecodevelopment program

(d) Adopt an explicit strategy and plan for sustainable encroachment controlacceptable to IDA before making proposals for programs of voluntaryrelocation.

Non-project activities, including those related to resettlement, would be subject to theregional impacts covenant (see paragraph 5.4).

5.10 Annex 20 provides additional analysis and guidelines on the people in PAs issueand related project activities, including an outline of criteria and procedures for voluntaryrelocation.

D. Sustainability

5.11 By enabling forest departments to share conservation responsibilities with localcommunities, the project would improve the PAs' chances of long-term survival.Successful implementation of project processes and incentives that would ensure thissharing will therefore be crucial. Sustainability would also depend on the design ofadministrative arrangements, and on maintaining the momentum of the ecodevelopmentapproach. The use of permanent organizational structures, and the preclusion of external

34

financing for government staff salaries would contribute to sustainability. Efforts toincrease public support for PAs, to provide tangible measures of project benefits and toexplore the potential of trust fund financing and other revenue, would increase prospectsfor more adequate long-term financing from a variety of sources.

E. Risks

5.12 Risks. The project has significant risks. The degree of risk varies according to theextent of innovation in each component. The village ecodevelopment component has thehighest level of risk, both because it uses novel planning processes and because there islittle hard data on the impact of comparable programs. The environmental educationcomponent is the least risky. In spite of the risks, the project should proceed, because ofthe importance of conserving biodiversity, the critical role of local people in conservation,and the potential of this project to provide the foundation for long-term solutions toIndia's challenging problems.

5.13 Risk Factors. Significant risk factors include:

(a) Pressures of population growth, poverty, and commercial interests

(b) Dangers of unrealistic expectations in the context of high profile attention

(c) Time and commitment required to achieve participation and trust

(d) Limitations in implementation capacity (both supply of technical expertiseand experience with process-oriented design)

(e) Inadequate management support.

5.14 Measures to Address Risk Factors. Although it is not possible to fully addressproblems of population growth, poverty, and commercial interests, the project includesactivities, institutional mechanisms, and a legal covenant designed to address regionalissues. To reduce the risk of the project being blamed by association for negative trendsand unmet needs, project objectives clearly emphasize "reduction" not "elimination" ofnegative impacts. Project preparation has included extensive efforts to communicateproject objectives, and monitoring assessment criteria would further specify realisticexpectations. To encourage government commitment to participation, the project wouldallocate financing according to a continuing review of work plans and progress reportsand avoid a blueprint approach. To allow trust to develop among local communities, theproject would use participatory planning processes. To address limitations in the supply oftechnical and management expertise, assessments of capacity during preparation andappraisal helped determine project scope, and led to a project design involving extensiveuse of third party contracts (mostly NGOs). To address inexperience, detaileddocumentation is providing guidance on project processes. The detailed specification oforganizational responsibilities, administrative structures, staffing plans, contractingarrangements and ongoing planning and adjustment processes would help to ensureadequate management support.

5.15 Annex 21 provides further analysis of project risks.

35

India

Ecodevelopment Project

Estimated Project Costs(Rs. Lakh) (US$ lom%

% ToblForign Base

Local Foreign Total Local Foreign Total Exchange Costs

A. Improved PA ManagementPlanning Processes 367.2 1 1 368.3 1,046.1 3.2 1,049.3 - 2Ecosystem Prdection and Management 3,644.1 490.5 4,134.6 10,382.2 13974 11,779.5 12 19Amenities for Reld Staff 342.1 38.0 380.1 974.6 1083 10B29 10 2

Subtotal 4,353.4 529.6 4,883.0 12,402.9 1,5089 13911.7 11 22e. Village Ecodevebopnent

Participatory Micro-Planning andImplementation Support 1,681.7 119.2 1,801.0 4,791.3 339.7 5,131.0 7 8

Investments to lmplement Recipocal Commitments 7,703 7 405.5 8,1092 21,948.0 1,155 2 23,103.1 5 37Speciat Programs 1,8682 94.4 1.962.6 5,322 5 268.9 5,591.4 5 9

Subtotal 11,253.7 619.1 11,8727 32,061.7 1,763.8 33825.5 5 55C. Develop Effective and Extensive Suppoutfor Ecodevelopmfent

Conduct Environmental Education andAwareness Campaigns 316.9 78.0 394.9 902.9 222.1 1,125.1 20 2

Improve Impact Monitoringand Research Systems 1,186.7 72.8 1,259.6 3,380.9 207.5 3,588.5 6 6

Subtotal 1,503.6 150.8 1,654.5 4,283.9 429.6 4,713.5 9 8D. ProjectManagemrent 1,784.8 67.4 1,852.2 5,084.8 192.0 5,276.8 4 9E. Prepare Future Blodiversaty Proects 573.1 245.6 818.8 1632.8 699.8 2,332.6 30 4F. RelbwursenentofPPF 659.9 42.1 702.0 1,880.0 120.0 2,000,0 6 3

Total BASELINE COSTS 20,128.5 1,654.6 21,783.1 57,346.1 4,714.1 62,060.2 8 100Physical Contingencies 567.4 57.9 625.3 1,616.5 165.0 1,781.5 9 3Price Cortingencies 5,996 530.4 6,470.0 2,774.5 383.8 3,158.3 - -

Total PROJECT COSTS 26,635 5 2 243 0 28 878.5 61,737.1 5,262.9 67,000.0 8 108

Financing Plan (US$'000)IntematonalDevelopment Project State GovernmentofAssociatIon GEFTrust Beneficlaries Governments India Total

Amount Amount Amount Amount Amount Amount %

A. Improved PA ManagementPlanning Processes 562 1 5621 9.0 4.7 1,137.8 1.7Ecosystem Proection and Management 2,910.2 2,910.2 - 5,709.1 1,409.2 12,938.7 19.3Amendies for Field Starf 491.8 491.8 - - 245.9 12295 1.8

Subtotal 3,964 0 3,964 0 - 5,7181 1,659 8 15,306.0 22.8B. Vfilage Ecodevelopment

Participatory Micro-Planning andImplementation Support 1,701.8 1,667.1 - 2,050.4 214.9 5,634.3 8.4

Investments to Implement Reciprocal Comnitments 10,019.8 7,3951 4,585.8 - 2,459.1 24,459.8 36.5Special Programs 30`198 22606 - - 711,3 5 991.6 8.9

Subtotal 14,741.4 11,322.7 4,585.8 2,050 4 3,385.3 36,085.7 53.9C. Develop Effective and Extensive Support

for EcodevelopmentConduct Environmental Educatbn andAvareness Campaigns 501.1 501 1 - 985 157.9 1,258.7 1.9

Improve Impact Monitoringand Research Systems 1,813.9 1,8139 _ 204.5 103.2 3,9355 5.9

fubtotal 2,315.0 2,315.0 - 303 0 261.2 5,194.2 7.8Project Management 2,398.2 2,398.2 - 986.4 50.1 5,832.8 8.7Prepare Future Bodiversaty Projects 2,581.4 - - - - 2,581.4 3.9Reimbursement of PPF 20000- - - - 2,000 3.0if Disbursement 28,000.0 20,000 0 4,585.8 9,057.9 5,356 4 67,000.0 100.0

36

Amount and Method of Procurement (US$ '000)

Procurement MethodInternational LocalCompetitive Competitive Consulting

Bidding Bidding Other Services N.B.F. Tdal

Civigvvorks - 440.9 6,990.7 - 7,431.5(176.3) (2,796.3) (2,972.6)[176.3] [2,796.3] [2,972.6]

Vehicles - - 750.6 - - 750.6(300.2) (300.2)[300.2] [300.2]

Fumiture & equipment 329.7 - 1,585.4 - 1,915.2(131.9) (634.2) (766.1)[131.9] [634.2] [766.1]

Ecodevelopment fund - - 30,471.4 - - 30,471.4(13,050.7) (13,050.7)[9,632.0] [9.632.01

Consuitancies, studies and training - - 939.9 11,182.4 - 12,122.3(469.9) (5,591.2) (6,061.1)[469.9] [5,591.2] [6,061.1]

Supervision travel - - 669.9 - - 669.9(268.0) (268.0)1268.0] [268.01

Recurrent costs - - 9,057.9 9,057.9

Project preparation - - 258.1 2,323.2 - 2,581.4(258.1) (2,323.2) (2,581.4)

PPF - - 200.0 1,800.0 - 2,000.0(200.0) (1,800.0) (2,000.0)

Total 329.7 440.9 41,865.9 15,305.6 9,057.9 67,000.0(131.9) (176.3) (17,977.4) (9,714.4) - (28,000.0)[131.91 [176.3] [14,100.51 [5,591.2] - [20,000.0]

Note: Figures in parenthesis are the respective amounts financed by the International Development AssociationFigures in square brakets are the respective amounts financed by the GEF Trust

37

Summary Disbursement ScheduleIDA Disbursement

Category Amount Percentage of Expenditure(S'000)

Civil works for building and roads 2,700 40%

Equipment, vehicles, non-motorized transport and materials, except for 1,000 50% of foreign expenditures, 50%h of local ex-factorythose financed through the village ecodevelopment investment program costs or 40% of other local costs

Small-scale field equipment and associated running costs, materials, 13,000 50% of local costslivestock, and labor financed through the village ecodevelopmentinvestment program in accordance with procedures acceptable to IDA

Consultants (including NGOs) services, training, workshops, meetings, 4,000 50%5

publication contracts and contract staff , excluding the preparation offuture biodiversity projects

Project management travel 300 40%

Consultants (including NGOs) services, training, workshops, meetings, 2,000 100%publication contracts and contract staff for preparation of futurebiodiversity projects.

Project Preparation Facility 2,000

Unallocated 1,300

GEF Disbursement

Category Amount Percentage of Expenditure(S milblon)

Civil works for building and roads 2,700 40%

Equipment, vehicles, non-motorized transport and materials, except for 1,000 50% of foreign expenditures, 50% of local ex-factorythose finaced through the village ecodevelopment investment program costs or 40% of other local costs

Small-scale field equipment and associated running costs, materials, 9,600 37% of local costslivestock, and labor financed through the village ecodevelopmentinvestment program in accordmce with procedures acceptable to IDA

Consultants (including NGOs) services, training, workshops, meetings, 5,700 50%9

publication contracts and contract staff , excluding the preparation offuture biodiversity projects

Project management travel 300 40%

Unallocated 700

tcludes payments for travel and subsistence of government staff to workshops and meetings,noraria for external specialists and facilitators, and contracts with NGOs.

hudes payments for travel and subsistence of government staff to workshops and meetings,oraria for external specialists and facilitators, and contracts with NGOs.

38

Estimated IDA and GEF Disbursements (US$ millions)

FY97 FY99 FY99 FY00 FY01 FY02Annual IDA 0.6 2.5 5.3 8.1 6.7 4.8Cumulative IDA 0.6 3.1 8.4 16.5 23.2 28.0Annual GET 0.0 1.8 4.0 5.2 5.8 3.2Cumulative GET 0.0 1.8 5.8 11.0 16.8 20.0

Timetable of Key Project Processing Events

Time taken to prepare project: 30 months, from 1/92 to 6/94

Prepared by: Government of India with assistance from GEF/UNDP

First IDA mission: October/November 1994

Appraisal mission: May 1995

Negotiations: July 15-19, 1996

Planned date of effectiveness: December 31, 1996

Relevant PCRs and PPARs: Not applicable

The long delay between appraisal and negoatiations was due to difficulties in PPF fund flow andlack of familiarity with Bank consultant contracting procedures.

This report is based on participatory preparation work performed by local people, state andnational government officials, NGOs staff, and researchers. It reflects a project that is Indian inconceptualization and design, as appraised by a mission comprised of Jessica Mott (Task Manager), JoseFurtado, Malcolm Jansen, and Ajith Kumar (Environmental Specialists), Gordon Temple (Economist),V.P.S. Verma (Forester), Gabriel Campbell and Nandita Jain (Social Scientists), and M.S.S. Varadan(Institutional Specialist). Chona Cruz (Social Scientist) drafted Annex 4. Theodosia Karmiris, PadmaGopalan, and H. Bhavani provided secretarial support. Jenepher Moseley provided editorial assistance.The peer reviewers were Narpat Jodha (Social and Economic Issues), Gisu Mohadjer (ProjectManagement) and Susan Shen (Environment). The GEF external technical reviewers were ThomasMathew (WWF-USA) and Amy Vedder (NYZS Wildlife Conservation Society). Shawki Barghouti(Division Chief, SA2AW) and Heinz Vergin (Director, SA2DR) provided managerial oversight.

Part II: Technical Annexes

Part II: Annexes1. Biodiversity Conservation Strategy and Legislation in India 392. Current Organizational Structure and Capacity 473. Lessons Learned From Other Projects 594. Notes on Project Preparation Process 635. Rationale for GEF Funding and Incremental Costs of Biodiversity

Conservation 756. Background on the Seven Protected Areas 807. Improved PA Management 1018. Village Ecodevelopment 1179. Environmental Education and Visitor Management 14310. Impact Monitoring and Research on Issues Relevant to PA Management and

Ecodevelopment 15111. Project Management Component 17312. Preparation of Future Biodiversity Projects 19313. Summary Project Cost Tables 20314. Procurement and Disbursement 21115. Project Administration 22116. Project Performance Review and Implementation Schedule 23117. Environmental Analysis 24718. Social Assessment 25519. Indigenous People: Compliance with Bank Operational Directive 4.20: 27920. People in the Protected Areas and Voluntary Relocation 28121. Economic Analysis 29122. Documents Available in Project File 299

Maps(a) Buxa, West Bengal -- IBRD Map 27842(b) Gir, Gujarat -- IBRD Map 27843(c) Nagarhole, Karnataka -- IBRD Map 27844(d) Palamau, Bihar -- IBRD Map 27845(e) Pench, Madhya Pradesh -- IBRD Map 27846(f) Periyar, Kerala -- IBRD Map 27847(g) Ranthambhore, Rajasthan -- IBRD Map 27848

39 Annex 1

Annex 1: Biodiversity Conservation Strategy and Legislationin India

Background

1. India is uniquely rich in biodiversity due to its diverse physiographic and climaticconditions in the tropics and its location at the confluence of three major biogeographicrealms, the Indo-Malayan, the Eurasian, and the Afro-Tropical. It is a country ofmegadiversity and has 10 biogeographic zones: Trans-Himalayan, Himalayan, IndianDesert, Semi-arid, Western Ghats, Deccan Peninsula, Gangetic Plains, Northeast India,Islands, and Coasts. The main strategy for conserving species has been through theprotection of viable representative habitats and ecosystems.

2. Biodiversity conservation has an old history in India, being enshrined in the ancientreligions (Animism, Hinduism, Jainism, Buddhism) and diverse cultures of thesubcontinent and in the mythology and traditional customs of indigenous peoples (such asthe "tree of life" in the Ramayana). In recent history the first codified legislation was theWild Birds Protection Act in 1887. It was followed by the Wildlife Birds and Animals Actin 1912 (amended in 1935) and the Wildlife Protection Act 1927. After independence themost significant enabling legislation on biodiversity conservation in India was the 42ndamendment to the Indian Constitution, passed in 1976, making protection andimprovement of environment and safeguarding forests and wildlife one of the directiveprinciples of state policy. This legislation also brought wildlife and forest protection fromthe state list into the concurrent list, enabling both the central and state governments topass protective legislation, that of the former superseding the latter.

3. The most comprehensive act on biodiversity conservation since Independence wasthe Wildlife (Protection) Act passed in 1972, affording varying degrees of protection to awhole range of animal species under different schedules and enabling the setting up ofnational parks and wildlife sanctuaries. This Act has been amended subsequently: in 1982to allow capture and translocation, in 1986 to prevent trade in wild animals and animalproducts, and in 1991 to afford protection to scheduled plants and to stop commercialfelling in wildlife sanctuaries. Other important legislation includes the Environment(Protection) Act of 1986 to prevent, control, and mitigate environmental pollution and toprovide for coastal regulation zones, and the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution)Act of 1987. Another landmark in biodiversity conservation was the ratification of theConvention on International Trade in Endangered Species (CITES) in 1976.

4. Apart from legislation, a number of policy statements have also guidedconservation efforts. The National Conservation Strategy (1992) and the EnvironmentAction Plan (1993) give priority to conservation and sustainable use of biodiversity. Theconservation legislation, policies, and action plans are reflected in other related policystatements: The Policy on Abatement of Pollution (1992), the National Housing Policy(1988), the National Water Policy (1988), and the National Landuse Policy (1988).

5. A draft bill for a "Conservation of Forests and Other Ecosystems Act" is currentlybeing debated. This bill is expected to curtail commercial felling in forest areas. There are

40 Annex 1

different interpretations of how the act would affect people's participation in managementand conservation of biodiversity. Some believe it would enhance official acknowledgmentof people's participation; others believe it would restrict local rights and increasegovernment control. A draft status report on biodiversity has been formulated throughnation-wide expert contributions; and a framework has been developed for a biodiversityaction plan. A biodiversity conservation act is also being drafted in the light of theBiodiversity Convention.

Laws Governing Biodiversity Conservation

6. There are more than 40 central government acts pertaining to various aspects ofbiodiversity conservation. A much larger volume of state legislation pertaining tobiodiversity conservation is beyond the scope of this review. The Wildlife (Protection) Actof 1972 supersedes all state legislation and the Indian Forest Act of 1927. It was amendedin 1982, 1986, and 1991 and is a unified national act that enables the constitution andmanagement of such areas as national parks, sanctuaries, game reserves, and closed areas;it specifies the procedures for establishing protected areas, the management parameters forthem, and the procedures for allowing or disallowing diverse uses within them. The actalso lists the powers and functions of various officials. Under this act:

(a) National parks are given a higher level of protection, with no grazing andno private land holding or right permitted within them.

(b) Sanctuaries are given a lesser level of protection, and certain activities maybe permitted within them for the better protection of wildlife or for anyother good and sufficient reason.

Human Interactions with Protected Areas

7. Human interaction with wilderness areas is fundamental to human civilization, aslong as it does not disrupt ecological processes and the carrying capacity of ecosystemswithin such areas. More than 50 percent of the protected areas have human populationswithin and around them living under rights and leases that for the most part have not beenrecorded. The Wildlife (Protection) Act provides for denotification of sanctuaries to allowfor certain human uses..

Protective Legal Coverage Of Biodiversity Conservation

8. The range of species and varieties given legal protection under biodiversityconservation is somewhat patchy, and domesticated varieties receive less coverage thannatural biodiversity (Table 1). The institutional structures for conserving biodiversity areequally patchy. The legal and institutional coverage includes the following considerationsthat are relevant to the Ecodevelopment Project:

(a) Identification: The Botanical Survey of India (BSI), the Zoological Surveyof India (ZSI), state forest departments, universities, and severalindependent institutions are actively engaged in the identification andauthentication of species and ecosystem types.

41 Annex 1

(b) In-situ Protection: Species protection in situ is provided for in the WildLife (Protection) Act, and its 1991 amendments. Habitat (and ecosystem)protection is directly provided for in the Indian Forest Act, 1927, the WildLife (Protection) Act of 1972, the Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980, theTerritorial Waters, Continental Shelf, Exclusive Economic Zone and OtherMaritime Zones Act, 1976 and the Environment (Protection) Act of 1986.

(c) Ex-situ Protection: For rare, endangered and domesticated species livingoutside natural habitats, in gardens, zoos, aquaria, and gene banks,protection and perpetuation of biodiversity is especially important. TheWild Life (Protection) Act, 1972, provides for the protection of someanimal species in captivity. There is no legal provision for the ex situprotection of plant species.

(d) Access and Extraction: Access to biodiversity and its extraction fromnatural habitats enables it to be used for economic purposes and affects thestatus of the habitat and ecosystem type. There are no central governmentacts governing the access and property rights to animals and plants in theirnatural habitats, except by through ownership of individual, communal orgovernment property. The Indian Forest Act, 1927, governs the extractionof wild flora and fauna and the Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972, ofterrestrial biodiversity.

(e) Use: The Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972 and its amendment of 1991, andthe Prevention of Cruelty to Animals Act, 1960, regulate the use of someanimals and plants.

(f) Trade: The barter, sale, import, export, or exchange of any species or itsderivatives affects the status of that species and its habitat. The Wild Life(Protection) Act, 1972, the Destructive Insects and Pests Act, 1914, theImport and Export (Control) Act, 1947, The Customs Act, 1962, and theMarine Products Export Development Authority Act, 1972, govern thetrade of selected wild animals and plants and their products.

(g) Breeding, Cultivation and Multiplication: The breeding systems of speciesdetermine the extent of their genetic variability and the dynamics of habitatsand ecosystems they utilize. Artificial or induced breeding techniques areimportant for propagating captive populations. The Wild Life (Protection)Act, 1972 and its 1991 amendments, govern the captive breeding of somewild plants and animals.

(h) Introduction, Augmentation and Reintroduction: There are no centralgovernment acts on the introduction, augmentation, or reintroduction ofwild or domesticated animals or plants, except for specific legislation oneconomic plant products, on some domesticated animals, and on theaccidental introduction of pests.

(i) Release: There are no central government acts governing the accidentalrelease of wild or domesticated plants or animals.

42 Annex 1

(j) Movement: The movement of specific wild or domesticated plants andanimals is governed by central government acts controlling its trade.

(k) Intellectual Property Rights: The are no central government actsgoverning the intellectual property rights of wild or domesticated plantsand animals.

9. India has ratified a number of international treaties pertaining to the conservationof biodiversity.

10. Coverage of protected areas is low in the Trans-Himalayan, North East Indian ,andGangetic Plain biogeographic zones (Table 2) where endemism is high and conservation iscritical.

11. Among ecosystem types, forests (Table 3) appear better covered by conservationmeasures than wetlands, coral reefs, or grasslands. Thus, this larger area of representative,unique and fragile ecosystems, needs protection that is not only guaranteed but alsostrengthened in relation to existing measures for conservation of biodiversity.

Status of Protected Areas

12. PAs are under intense pressures from human populations living within them (>55percent of PAs) and around them (<80 percent); from traditional rights and leases 40percent), from traditional grazing by livestock (>40 percent ), fodder extraction (>15percent), timber extraction (>16 percent), and non-timber forest product (NTFP)extraction (>35 percent). In addition, a significant number of PAs are used by othergovernment agencies (>55 percent ), for public thoroughfares (>45 percent), and forplantations (>45 percent). Protected areas also experience illegal occupation and use (>8percent), encroachment (>7 percent), and poaching (>55 percent). In terms of PAmanagement, some have plans (>30 percent) with zoning (>20 percent; some havepopulations that need relocation (>5 percent); some have research and monitoring usuallyby external persons (>23 percent); some have exotic species introductions (>15 percent);and some captive breeding programs (15 percent). In terms of land use and environmentaleffects, some PAs are affected by forest fires (>20 percent), floods (>35 percent),droughts (50 percent), and/or water pollution (>40 percent). Some have trained personnel(>35 percent) and honorary wardens (>35 percent); but their association with NGOsappears weak (> 15 percent).

13. India is party to several international conventions on biodiversity, so the protectedareas system is expected to conserve biodiversity not just for India but for the Earth as awhole. That being so, this system clearly needs strengthening in a variety of ways

Future Directions

14. The Ministry of Environment and Forests (MOEF), the Ministry of Agriculture,and the Ministry of Rural Development have joint responsibility for conserving wildlifeand biodiversity, and the first ministry has lead responsibility. The policy for biodiversityconservation has been enunciated clearly in the National Conservation Strategy and PolicyStatement on Environment and Development (MOEF 1992), MOEF appears betterorganized for wildlife conservation than for biodiversity conservation. The apparent

43 Annex 1

reasons appear to be the broader scope of biodiversity conservation; the joint central andstate government responsibility for implementing biodiversity conservation in comparisonto the state responsibility for wildlife conservation, and the lack of a clearly definedinstitutional network for implementing biodiversity conservation. As a consequence, thewildlife institutions are implementing much of the terrestrial biodiversity conservation,even though they have been poorly trained for this additional responsibility. Central andstate government strategies need to be developed for understanding, protecting, and usingbiodiversity on a sustainable and equitable basis, especially to support India role as a partyto several international conventions on biodiversity.

15. By definition, the current types of protected areas permitted in the Wildlife Act of1972---national parks and wildlife sanctuaries---restrict opportunities for local people toderive benefits from PAs, and so present them with little incentive to participate inconservation. India could benefit from an expanded protective network covering othertypes of legally acceptable PAs. These might include protected landscapes, multipleresource areas, etc., where mutually beneficial human-wildlife interactions can beaccommodated and promoted and multiple, site-specific objectives incorporated intomanagement plans. Several national NGOs are now advocating the concept of communityPA management, but this idea is controversial within govermment and some conservationNGO circles.

16. The M.S. Swaminathan Research Foundation, an environmental non-governmentalorganization, has set out a list of policy actions and priority goals for biodiversity thatcentral and state governments need to consider:

(a) Save prime habitats and endangered species

(b) Conserve the entire range of species

(c) Meet the minimum needs of the people in an ecologically sustainable way

(d) Enhance conservation practices through education and awareness

(e) Facilitate community activity for biodiversity conservation

(f) Assess the implications of intemational conventions and agreements onnational sovereignty for saving and sharing biodiversity

(g) Develop and strengthen effective enabling legislation for biodiversityconservation

(h) Strengthen and integrate administrative mechanisms at the community,state, and national levels

(i) Ensure that the biodiversity conservation movement is adequatelysupported at central and state levels with financial, technical, andinstitutional resources.

17. As a sequel to Agenda 21, the Ministry of Environment and Forests is developingthe framework for a biodiversity action plan.

18. Biodiversity conservation is under human pressure from the increasing scarcity ofland due to population growth. In addition, India's biodiversity is under severe threat from

44 Annex 1

industry, especially subsidized forest-based industries . Already industrial interests aretrying to denotify established sanctuaries. Addressing the nine-point action plan of theSwaminathan Foundation is an imperative. The Bank's ecodevelopment project forprotected areas, which provides for village ecodevelopment incentives while strengtheningPA management, is a step in the right direction towards building the kinds of alliancesboth locally and nationally for biodiversity conservation.

Table 1: Legal Coverage Of Biodiversity Conservation In India

Biodiversity: Wild Domestic GeneticCoverage: Materials

Fauna Flora Fauna | FloraIdentification N N N N NProtection in-situ y NProte c tion ex-situ r N _ N co _ereUse _\ _N

ITrade 1 _ P IPIBreeding , cultivation, g e . 1. La P

multiplication D dlIntroduction, P3 P P3 P3 P

l augmentation reintroduction ....

Release N N N N r Movement p = i _

lIntellectual N N N N N lPropertyl

Rights

Note: C = Well covered; P =Partially covered; N = Not covered

Source: Kothari, Ashish, and Singh, Shekhar. 1992. Legal Provisions Relating to Biodiversity inIndia. 44 pp. New Delhi: Indian Institute of Public Administration

45 Annex 1

Table 2: Bio geographic Distribution Of Protected Areas In India

Biogeographic Zone Area Of India National Park Protected Area

(%) No. % No. %

Trans-Himalayan 3.1 1 <1.0 2 <1.0

Himalayan 7.8 10 2.5 56 5.0

Deserts 6.8 0 0.0 5 4.0

Semi-Arid 15.5 5 0.2 53 2.3

Western Ghats 4.8 7 1.3 44 9.9

Deccan 43.2 17 0.5 115 3.4

Gangetic Plain 10.9 3 0.3 25 1.3

Northeast India 5.2 4 0.6 17 1.1

Islands 0.3 6 4.7 100 8.3

Coasts 2.4 2 ? 17

Source: IIPA. 1994. Conservation of Wild Biodiversity in India. A Status Report. 347 pp. New Delhi:Indian Institute of Public Administration

Table 3: Conservation Measures For Forests In India

Measures: Threats Legal Preventive Other Institutional(Control SClemCS Regulations Stl-uctu res

Clearfelling r N Conversion To Non-Forest n . A p. 3

Shifnin Intin utoP Asion npSelective Felling . p _ _N l Conversion To Monoculture _ P.. N N l Flooding by Dams N_l l Mining _>~l Other Disturbance pNp : I

Grazing . '. : _ l) !. Fuelwood CollectionC p .pll Exotic Species Intr-oductions . . ..... l 1 lg

Fires . p : p 1Pollution . P..:P. .

Nlote: G =Good, P =Partial, N=None.

Source: IIPA. 1994. Conservation of Wild Biodiversity in India. A Status Report. 347 pp. New Delhi:Indian Institute of Public Administration

46 Annex 1

International Treaties on Biodiversity Conservation

1933 Convention Relative to the Preservation of Fauna and Flora in their Natural State. Adopted 08November 1933, London. (India ratified on 09 August 1939)

1946 International Convention for the Regulation of Whaling. Adopted 02 December 1946,Washington. (India ratified on 02 December 1981)

1951 International Plant Protection Convention. Adopted 06 December 1951, Rome. (India ratified on09 June 1952)

1954 International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution of the Sea by Oil. Adopted 12 May1954, London. (India ratified 23 May 1962)

1956 Plant Protection Agreement for South East Asia and Pacific Region. Adopted 27 February 1956,Rome. (India ratified on 02 July 1956)

1959 The Antarctic Treaty. Adopted 01 December 1959, Washington. (India ratified on 19 August1983)

1963 Treaty Banning Nuclear Weapon Tests in the Atmosphere, in Outer Space and Under Water.Adopted 05 August 1963, Moscow. (India ratified on 10 October 1963)

1971 Convention on Wetlands of International Importance especially as Waterfowl Habitat. Adopted02 February 1971, Ramsar. (India ratified on 01 February 1982)

1972 Convention Concerning the Protection of the World Cultural and natural Heritage. Adopted 23November 1972, Paris. (India ratified on 14 February 1978)

1973 Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora. Adopted 03March 1973. (India ratified on 18 October 1976)

1979 Convention on the Conservation of Migratory Species of Wild Animals. Adopted 23 June 1979,Bonn. (India ratified on 01 November 1983)

1980 Convention on the Conservation of Antarctic Marine Living Resources. Adopted on 20 May1980. (India ratified on 17 July 1985)

1982 Protocol to Amend the Convention on Wetlands of International Importance especially asWaterfowl Habitat. Adopted 03 December 1982, Paris. (India ratified on 09 March 1984)

1982 United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea. Adopted on 10 December 1982, Montego Bay.(India ratified on 10 December 1982)

1983 International Tropical Timber Agreement. Adopted on 18 November 1983, Geneva. (Indiaratified on 01 April 1985)

1989 Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and theirDisposal. Adopted on 22 March 1989, Basel. (India ratified on 15 March 1989)

1993 Convention on Biological Diversity. Adopted on December 29, 1993. (India ratified on February18, 1994)

Source: IIPA. 1993. Biodiversity Conservation in India. 86 pp. New Delhi: Indian Institute of PublicAdmninistration

47 Annex 2

Annex 2: Current Organizational Structure and Capacity

General Management, Staffing, and Financial Support

1. The seven PAs have similar institutional arrangements for PA management, with aconservator-level person in charge of the park. In some cases, like Kerala, this official'smajor responsibility is the park, with other, smaller PAs also under his or her domain. Incases like Karnataka, the conservator level-official's responsibility is much wider. In suchcases the next-level official, namely the deputy conservator of forests or the DFO, is in fullcharge of the project PA. In all cases these officials are assisted by range officers, forestersand forest guards

2. In combination the seven PAs have a total of about 1800 field executive staff,ranging from a low of 81 staff in Pench to a high of 458 in Gir. Annex 15, Table Ispecifies the existing staffing levels for each PA. The PAs combined FY95/96 budgetstotaled US$4.2 million, ranging from a low of US$250,000 in Pench to US$1,320,000 inBuxa. The "non-plan" budget for the project PAs, which is mainly for base wages,generally represents about one half of total PA expenditures. These budgets represent asignificant portion of the total state budget for wildlife activities, reflecting the priority thatthe states attach to the project PAs. Table 1 of this Annex presents the specific budgetsand financing for each PA. External project financing from IDA and GEF would be inaddition to existing levels of financial support for the project PAs and state wildlifeprograms, which would be maintained during the project period. During the projectperiod, budgets for the MOEF ecodevelopment program in project PAs would be used tocover a portion of the GOI counterpart budget requirements.

3. The Project Tiger scheme, first introduced in 1973, has enhanced support formanagement activities in the five PAs that are tiger reserves. In addition to centrallysponsored financial assistance for PA management activities in these PAs, Project Tigerprovides: (a) 100 percent of central assistance for selected new staff including researchand veterinary staff (although the lack of career prospects have prevented tiger reservesfrom attracting research staff); (b) 100 percemt of central assistance for special wagesupplements to staff at all levels; (c) 50 percent of central assistance for subsidizing cropinsurance premia of damage to property and life within 5 km of the tiger reserveboundaries; and (d) 100 percent of assistance for grants for permanent disability of staff.

4. Currently, the capacity of the Project Tiger Office is barely adequate to carry outthe Project Tiger program. The Project Tiger Office (PTO) is headed by a director,supported by a deputy director, who are both seconded to the states for a four to five yearperiod. There are seven additional clerical staff, plus two peons. Although small in size thePTO has enormous responsibilities for coordinating and supporting programs in India's 21tiger reserves. PTO's responsibilities include the management of a centrally sponsoredscheme for supporting the development and maintenance of activities in the tiger reserves,for providing secretariat support to a high-level Project Tiger Steering Committee, forsupporting MOEF ecodevelopment programs around the tiger reserves, for organizingnational and international meetings on tiger conservation, for supporting and coordinatingresearch, training, and census activities in the tiger reserves, for liaising with internationaland national donor agencies and governments, and for responding to public and

- 48 Annex 2

parliamentary queries about tiger conservation in India. The PTO has no prior experiencewith the Bank's financial, procurement, and reporting procedures. Table 2 shows theadministrative budget of the Project Tiger Office.

Existing PA Management Programs

5. Although management plans exist for all seven project PAs and cover animplementation period of 5 to 10 years, most of these plans have expired or will needupdating in the next few years. The status of the plans by PA is:

(a) Buxa 1993/94 to 1996/97

(b) Gir 1976/77 to 1990/91

(c) Nagarhole 1989 to 1994

(d) Palamau 1987 to 1997

(e) Pench 1990/91 to 1994/95

(f) Periyar 1986/87 to 1995/96

(g) Ranthambhore 1973/74 to 1983/84

6. These plans are also not as comprehensive as they ought to be, and in particularthey do not take full cognizance of the linkages between PAs and local people who dependon the resources contained within them. In addition, PA plans are not adequatelyintegrated into the broader ecological, socioeconomic, and regional sphere. PAs havelargely been managed as islands set aside from development.

7. The project PAs are some of the more important PAs in the country and havereceived more management and financial inputs than most others. However, there is stillconsiderable room for improvement.

8. All of the PAs include legally designated sanctuaries and/or parks. Several alsoinclude forest reserve areas that are managed as buffers. Four of the PAs are in theprocess of upgrading sanctuaries to parks, a process that involves identifying and settlingthe rights to meet the required prerequisite to final legal notification. Even those PAs thathave received final notification (Gir, Nagarhole, and Ranthambhore) face situations ofcontinued resource use and the possibility of legal challenges. All of the sites face thelimitations inherent in the Wildlife Act of 1972 which does not make legal provision formultiple use areas within national parks.

9. PAs have been managed as islands from surrounding areas. Forests in the PAsurroundings are under the jurisdiction of the territorial wings of the state forestdepartments, which manage the areas for timber, bamboo and other NTFPs and generallyneglect the areas' supportive role in PA conservation. Coordination between PAauthorities and agencies working in vicinity of the PA are virtually non-existent. Often,outside agencies implement activities that are detrimental to wildlife, for example., theelimination of wildlife corridors that adjoin the PAs.

10. Current PA management activities depend on availability of funds. They comprise:(a) construction of water harvesting structures such as water holes, check dams, and othersmall structures mainly for improving dry season availability of water for wildlife; (b)limited programs for removal of noxious weeds and enrichment planting of these areaswith fodder and tree species; (c) construction of electric fencing and trenches to keep

49 Annex 2

animals from straying into surrounding villages, and to keep domestic animals fromentering the PAs; (d) quarters for staff, and (e) maintenance of firelines, boundary surveys,and sign posting.

Existing Experience with Village Ecodevelopment and PA/Village Linkages

11. There are a number of existing ecodevelopment programs. Small-scaleecodevelopment programs include a centrally-sponsored MOEF scheme (withexpenditures of about US$1 million between FY93/94 and FY95/96; other schemes byNGOs (for which specific estimates of total annual expenditures are not available, but areonly a small fraction of the MOEF scheme); preparation and training assistanceadministered by the Wildlife Institute of India with funding from the United NationsDevelopment Program (US$1.3 million spread over several years); and the ForestResearch Education and Extension Project support for ecodevelopment programs in theGreat Himalayan Nation Park in Himachyl Pradesh and the Kalakad Mundanthurai TigerReserve in Tamil Nadu (US$3.3 million spread over five years). All are rather limited inscope and restricted to certain pockets. Evidence to date shows that the governmentinitiatives are generally employing traditional top-down approaches to project planningand implementation, even when program documentation has embraced the principal of amore participatory approach. The relation to reciprocal commitments and linkage toconservation objectives has generally been implicit rather than explicit.

12. Existing efforts confirm the need to develop stronger linkages between theprotected area and the local communities in order to implement effective ecodevelopmentprograms. Currently some forest departments, such as Gujarat, already have used NGOsto cultivate linkages with local communities, and other state forest departments areplanning to expand their use of NGOs. However at the moment this use of NGOs is notgenerally structured and relies on informal arrangements rather than formal contracts.

13. Experienced and professional NGOs already operate in at least four of the sitesincluding Nagarhole (MYRADA & BAIF), Periyar (Peermade), Gir (AKRSP & BAIF)and Ranthambhore (WWF/India, Ranthambhore Foundation, & CEE). MYRADA andAKRSP are nationally recognized leaders in participatory rural development and in the useof PRA methodologies. WWF/India is the leading conservation organization operatingthroughout India; and BAIF is nationally recognized for its expertise in agroforestry,horticulture, and land use. In addition there are local NGOs at these sites and Palamau,with varying degrees of experience, competence, and interest. SPWD, IBRAD, and ActionAid have played a national role in developing microplanning expertise for JFM, IIPA hasserved as the national coordinator for the project preparation, and SPWD has served as anadvisor to project design.

14. At the village level informal links with youth clubs, mahila sanghs (women'sassociations) etc. form a part of the institutional arrangements for most ecodevelopmentefforts. In many cases, larger NGOs have encouraged these groups as part of overalldevelopment efforts, without a specific focus on ecodevelopment. Forest departmentshave begun to establish contact with these groups as part of the process of preparation forthis project.

50 Annex 2

15. The extent to which forest department officials already have experience relevant tothe village ecodevelopment varies from state to state. For example, in West Bengal, thesuccess of the JFM activities has spurred many officers to start involving the communities.

Monitoring and Research

16. Monitoring. Annual census surveys have been a part of the management of manyPAs in India, especially tiger reserves, for many years. Such surveys have almost entirelyfocused on large mammals (herbivores and carnivores), and have used many methods suchas total count, block count, transect sampling, and pug marks. Such monitoring has beenthe subject of several criticisms:

(a) No coverage of the status of the habitat (which is relatively easy toquantify)

(b) The full range of biodiversity has not been covered; e.g. ecosystems,smaller mammals, lower vertebrates, invertebrates, and plants

(c) Methods such as total count and block count have no statistical base, hencehave low interpretability while making spatial and temporal comparisons

(d) Statistically robust methods such as transect sampling often require largesamples that are beyond the resources and expertise available tomanagement

(e) Tiger pug mark identification is highly arbitrary and requires a very highlevel of subjectivity and expertise

(f) Since the habitat conditions, disturbance factors, and management activitieshave not been monitored, the results of monitoring of large mammals haveto be viewed in isolation

(g) The increase in the large mammal population apparent from the annualcensus is in contradiction with the general degradation of habitat evident inmany PAs

(h) The absence of participation from others such as local people, NGOs,scientists etc., although in recent years this has not been the case in somePAs.

17. The major drawback of these annual surveys is that there has been no conceptualframework consisting of (a) clearly stated objectives for monitoring; (b) criteria forevaluating the observed trends; (c) statistical model for the survey; (d) attributes of thedisturbance and PA management activities; and (e) mechanisms for feedback to PAmanagement.

18. Research. In the past three decades a fair number of ecological studies and statussurveys have addressed conservation issues in protected and unprotected forested areas inIndia. These studies have been conducted by a few institutions in India such as WildlifeInstitute of India (Dehra Dun), Centre for Ecological Sciences (Bangalore), Kerala ForestResearch Institute (Trissur), Bombay Natural History Society (Bombay), and recently theSalim Al Centre for Ornithology and Natural History (Coimbatore). The issues addressedmostly relate to single species, often endangered large mammals and birds (e.g., elephant,

51 Annex 2

Asiatic wild ass, wild buffalo, Himalayan ibex, Asian lion, snow leopard, lion-tailed macaque,Phayre's leaf monkey, lesser florican, etc). These studies have also mostly concentrated oncertain biogeographic zones in India, for example, western Ghats, north-west India, andwestern Himalayas. Organisations such as some universities, Botanical Survey of India, andZoological Survey of India have carried out extensive inventories of flora and fauna. The abovestudies have provided considerable insights into the ecology of individual species and theirconservation requirements, and provided some information on the distribution of flora andfauna. Socioeconomic research has been scantier and has addressed issues such as localresource needs and dependency on PAs, ethnobotany, local traditions and culture, and so forth.These studies have been carried out by many organisations such as SPWD, WIl, TISS,Institute of Economic Growth, and so forth.

19. Some management decisions and actions (mostly redefinition of existing PAboundaries, creation of new PAs, and stringent policing) have flowed from such studies;by and large, however, there has been no major improvement in the understanding ofissues relevant to PA management. As a result, research as it is now practiced, although ofconsiderable academic interest, is often viewed as only of marginal relevance to PAmanagement.

20. There are several reasons for this state of affairs:

(a) Research on biological, ecological, and socioeconomic issues has oftenfollowed interests or perceptions of individuals and organizations, inisolation from PA management and other interest groups or stake holders.As a result, ecological and socioeconomic studies have often failed toaddress information needs critical to PA management, even though suchneeds have sometimes been articulated by the PA management and otherinterest groups. It is also true that mechanisms for consultations to identifyinformation needs of PAs have not existed. For example, preparation ofmanagement plans does not provide an opportunity for researchers tocontribute to them.

(b) The fair body of information on biological, ecological and socioeconomicissues relevant to PA management that have been generated over the lastmany years has remained in the custody of numerous government and non-governmental organizations and individuals. Much of this information hasnot been verified for quality, is not published in a form accessible to PAmanagement, and has not been synthesized so as to meet the informationneeds of PA management to the greatest extent possible.

(c) The lack of adequately trained personnel and well staffed and equippedinstitutions has been a major constraint in generating information that isrelevant to PA management. In such a large country as India, with a veryrich biodiversity, more than 500 PAs and large terrestrial and aquatichabitats outside the PAs, the institutions and individuals with adequateexpertise and infrastructure for research have been very limited. Only a fewnational institutions have been actively engaged in ecological and biologicalresearch. Capacity to address socioeconomic research related to PAmanagement has been even more of a constraint. There has been no serious

52 Annex 2

effort to develop research interest and capabilities among institutions (suchas universities and NGOs) around or near the PAs that could meet theinformation needs of the PA management on a sustained basis. Nationalinstitutes have been overburdened and, moreover, have had to shift theirfocus topically and geographically in order to meet their mandate at anational level.

(d) Some PAs, especially riger teserves, have tried to conduct research byappointing research officers. These attempts have mostly failed due to lackof career opportunities for researchers in the forest departments, lack ofinfrastructure, funding, and sustained commitment to research.

(e) Finally, lack of adequate funds have constrained the extent of research thatcould be carried out. Moreover with national institutions cornering most ofthe research funds by virtue of their expertise, local institutions have beenstarved of funds thus curtailing the development of expertise and researchinterests in PAs adjacent to them.

21. The emphasis on systematic information collection and use is minimal. The day-to-daypressures of PA management are very high and there is little time and motivation and fewresources to collect, manage, use, and disseminate information. For the most part, use ofinformation is reactive. Field staff spend considerable time on non-productive administrativereporting processes.

Environmental Education

22. Awareness and education programs have usually been confined to the constructionof an interpretation center for visitors and to the preparation of a few posters or leaflets. Afew of the PAs show films on wildlife and organize nature camps. Staff conduct most ofthese programs with little or no NGO participation. The PAs do not have an overallstrategy or plan that defines target groups, tools to be employed, types of materialsneeded, institutional arrangements for implementation (including NGO roles), financialcosts, and so forth.

Coordination Arrangements in Recent Multistate Natural ResourceManagement Projects

23. The World Bank has financed many multi state projects in the past, including therecently-closed National Social Forestry Project (NSFP) and Pilot Project for WatershedDevelopment in Rainfed Areas (PPWDRA), each of which covered four states. Twocontinuing integrated watershed development projects (IWDPs) are also multistateprojects.

24. In each case the nodal ministry of Government of India was responsible forclarifying and communicating project concepts to participating states, reviewing progressof project implementation through half-yearly reports and periodic visits to the states,organizing the monitoring and evaluation of the project, and coordinating trainingprograms. Special cells or offices were established in the nodal ministry to enable it toperform the assigned functions.

53 Annex 2

25. In NSFP, the central support office (CSO) suffered from lack of proper identity.and never had its own clearly designated full-time staff. It lacked adequate financial andadministrative powers, and was encumbered by a time-consuming clearance and decisionmaking-process. MOEF engaged seven regional institutions to carry out monitoring,training, and studies on mutually agreed aspects of the project. The results of theirinvestigations were rarely fed into policy-making mechanisms of the states.26. A Watershed Development Council (WDC) staffed by twenty-three persons wasconstituted in Ministry of Agriculture (MOA) to perform similar functions in respect ofwatershed development projects financed by the Bank. Periodic workshops wereorganized by WDC for exchange of implementation experience by the participating states.Besides coordinating and supervising Bank-assisted projects, the WDC supervises otherwatershed development programs sponsored by MOA.

Panchayat Raj Act

27. Apanchayat is a municipal body. The recently introduced Panchayat Raj Act mayeventually affect the project's village-level institutional structures. Only a few states havebegun to implement this act (e.g. Karnataka, West Bengal).

28. This act seeks to set in motion a decentralization process whereby the benefits ofdevelopment can reach people at the village level. While different states may have varyingstructures, in general a three-tier system puts the zilla parishad/panchayat at the district-level. Here elected representatives of the people and an administrative head chief executiveofficer (CEO), who is an Indian Administrative Service officer handle matters at thedistrict level. A level below is the taluk panchayat, where elected representatives andadministrative officers are in charge of a few taluks, each consisting of approximately 30-35 gram panchayats. A gram panchayat covers about 5000 population.

29. Where a decentralized system is in place - West Bengal, for example -implementation is quicker and people definitely participate more at the grassroots level. Itis important to note that planning, prioritization and implementation responsibilities shiftto the district level under the panchayat system.

30. Village ecodevelopment committees would not necessarily correspond to thepanchayat structure, due to their smaller size and differences between administrative andnatural resource management boundaries. However, in some states they are likely toinclude the local representative of the gram panchayat.

54 Annex 2

Table 1: Public Expenditures and Funding of Seven Protected Areas

Rs. 100,000

Protected Area Actual 93194 Actual 94/95 Estimate 95196 Planned 96197

Buxa Tiger ReserveState funded non-plan 228 236 299 266State funded plan 33 29 31 63GOI Project Tiger 53 51 45 70GOI Ecodevelopment 32 20 13 21Bank Forestry 72 100 67 87GEF/IDA Ecodevelopment 9 228Total 418 436 464 735Total without Project 418 436 455 507

Gir National Park & SanctuaryState funded non-plan 126 171 197 167State funded plan 34 42 46 45GOI Ecodevelopment 11 4 10Other GOI 12 7 9 3

| UNDP Ecodevelopment |GEF/IDA Ecodevelopment 8 215Total 183 220 264 440Total without Project 183 220 256 225

Nagarhole National ParkState funded non-plan 47 109 23 28State funded plan 35 80 32 20GOI EcodevelopmentOther GOI 126 41 40 87UNDP EcodevelopmentGEE/IDA Ecodevelopment 10Total 208 230 105 135ITotal without Project 208 230 95 135

Palamau Tiger ReserveState funded non-plan 85 83 88 110State funded plan 40 36 36 50GOI Project Tiger 54 60 36 75GOI Ecodevelopment 33 38 0 50Other GOI 63 42 7GEF/IDA Ecodevelopment 1 105Total 275 259 168 390Total without Project 275 259 167 285

55 Annex 2

Protected Area Actual 93/94 Actual 94/95 Estimate 95/96 Planned 96197

Pench Tiger ReserveState funded non-plan 15 16 23 35State funded plan 27 29 19 25GOI Project Tiger 46 34 42 90GOI Ecodevelopment 15 12 2 5Other GOI 8 6 1 10Bank forestry project 0 3GEF/IDA Ecodevelopment 2 160Total 111 97 89 328Total without Project 111 97 87 168

Per ar Tiger ReserveState funded non-plan 36 31 66 75State funded plan 100 123 115 80

= GOI Project Tiger 50 32 29 50GOI Ecodevelopment 6 13 4 10Other GOI 1 3 3World Food Program 1 2GEF/1DA Ecodevelopment 150Total 192 200 218 370Total without Project 192 200 218 220

Ranthambhore Tiger ReserveState funded non-plan 33 48 43 52State funded plan 58 45 47 57GOI Project Tiger 56 59 64 178GOI Ecodevelopment 20 23 10 90Other GOIGEF/IDA Ecodevelopment 246Total 167 175 164 623Total without Project 167 175 164 377

Total of Seven PAs 1554 1617 1473 3021Total of 7 PAs without Proj. 1554 1617 1443 1917

56 Annex 2

Table 2: Public Expenditures and Funding of Wildlife Wings

Rs. 100,000State Actual 93/94 Actual 94/95 Estimate 95196 Planned 96197

I ._West Bengal

State funded non-plan 664 735 884 918State funded plan 91 120 111 165GOI ProjectTiger 85 102 117 136GOI Ecodevelopment 58 49 41 60Other GOI 87 101 155 222

_ Bank Forestry Project 77 165 319 380= GEF/IDA Ecodevelopment 9 228

Total 1062 1272 1636 2109Total without project 1062 1272 1627 1881

GujaratState funded non-plan 157 206 248 203State funded plan 205 199 174 187GOI Ecodevelopment 17 1 12 25Other GOI 61 47 27 60UNDP EcodevelopmentGEF/IDA Ecodevelopment 4 1 8 216Total 444 454 469 691Total without project 440 453 461 475

KarnatakaState funded non-plan 491 615 602 535State funded plan 235 322 300 220GOI Ecodevelopment 58 51 69 30Other GOI 309 280 268 551UNDP Ecodevelopment 2 2GEF/IDA Ecodevelopment 10 264Total 1095 1269 1251 1600Total without project 1095 1269 1241 1336

BiharState funded non-plan 212 312 307 312State funded plan 124 119 117 100GOI Project Tiger 54 60 135 300GOI Ecodevelopment 33 38 32 50Other GOI 63 79 107 150GEF/IDA Ecodevelopment 1 53Total 486 608 699 965Total without project 486 608 698 912

57 Annex 2

State Actual 93/94 Actual 94/95 Estimate 95196 Planned 96/971

Madya PradeshState funded non-plan 423 434 547 600State funded plan 303 305 394 400GOI Project Tiger 325 306 141 350GOI Ecodevelopment 26 25 6 50Other GOI 161 300Bank forestry project 266 825GEF/iDA Ecodevelopment 2 160Total 1077 1070 1517 2685Total without project 1077 1070 1515 2525

Kerala__ _ _ _ _ _

State funded non-plan 45 76 267 470State funded plan 515 653 607 700GOI Project Tiger 176 155 106 200GOI Ecodevelopment 51 48 52 50Other GOI

_World Food Program 2Bank Forestry ProjectGEF/A DA Ecodevelopment 150Total 787 932 1032 1572Total without project 787 932 1032 1422

RajasthanState funded non-plan 400 466 366 416State funded plan 124 169 273 277GOI Project Tiger 179 187 292 178GOI Ecodevelopment 20 50 70 90Other GOIGEF/ADA Ecodevelopment 246Total 723 872 1001 1207Total without project 723 872 1001 961

Total of Seven PAs 5674 6477 7606 10829Tota of 7 PAs without Project 5670 6476 7575 9512

58 Annex 2

Table 3: Plan Budget Expenditures of MOEF Affecting BiodiversityRs. 100,000

Actual 93194 Actual 94195 Estimate 95/96 lanned 96/97

Autonomous Agencies Assisted by MOEFSACON 49 50 48 NAPadmaja Nadu Himalayan Zoo Nil Nil Nil NilCenter of Environment Education, Ahmedabad 143 116 107 107C.P. Ramaswami Aiyar Env. Ed. Centre, Madras 34 37 47 47Centre for Ecol. Res. and Training, Bangalore 37 45 30 55G.B. Pant Himalayn Paryavaran Evam Vikas Sansthan, Almora 435 503 457 457Subtotal _ 698 751 689 666

Associated Units under Administrative Control of the MinistryBotanical Survey of India 193 242 292 342Zoological Survey of India 228 268 268 273Central Zoo Authority 165 300 300 300National Zoological Park 8 6 5 5Wildlife Institute of India 325 350 350 350Subtotal 919 1166 1215 1270

MOEF DivisionsConservation and Survey 742 650 600 600VWildlife 54 53 50 100Environmental Education and Information 331 359 385 385_Projed Tiger Office - New Delhi Office (excluding GEF/IDA) Nil Nil Nil NilSubtotal 1127 1062 1035 1086

Special ProgramsProject Tiger - Funds to tiger reserves 763 798 770 770National Parks- Funds to national parks 1130 1145 1150 1150GOI Ecodevelopment Program 484 680 680 460_FREEP - Biodiversity Component Nil Nil 45 173=Other significant programs (list)_Subtotal 2377 2623 2645 2553

GEF/IDA Ecodevelopment_ MOEF 0 0 140 1197

_ Funds to states 0 0 400 2420_ Subtotal 0 0 540 3617

Total 5121 5602 6124 9191

59 Annex 3

Annex 3: Lessons Learned from Other Projects

Integrated Conservation and Development Projects

Lesson Impact on Project Design

Need for common understanding of project Project objectives defined and tested through seriesobjectives. of workshops involving local people and NGOs.

Drafting of EPS/PID used to further clarify anddevelop consensus on project objectives.

Orientation workshops planned to communicateobjectives to project staff, local stakeholders andconcerned NGOs.

Need to incorporate PA concerns into regional Project design includes specific component andplanning and regulation creates high-level committee for this purpose.

Need for linkage between conservation and Receipt of village ecodevelopment funds dependentdevelopment objectives: local people must on reciprocal agreement that specifies conservationperceive development benefits as incentives for actions of local peopleconservation.conservation. Priority given to development interventions that

directly depend upon or enhance biodiversityconservation.

Need for active participation of beneficiaries. Participatory rural appraisal used for indicativeplanning during project preparation.

Participatory microplanning during projectimplementation.

Adjustment mechanisms to facilitate changes inapproach during implementation.

Need to define project's scope (geographic reach, Careful analysis of potential implementationdiversity of activities, and time period between capacity and relative importance of various humaninception and implementation) within realistic, pressures used to select project areas and to defineachievable limits in ways that will maximize project scope for each PA.efficient use of implementation capacity.

Risk of project investments acting as magnet Project design incorporates items (a) through (g).reduced by: (a) voluntary relocation; (b) notproviding social services or most investments i Item (h) is beyond scope of project but reflectscore areas; (c) strong encroachment control; (d) poli santargeting buffer investments that provide pocy.substitutes to harmful PA uses; (e) limiting level offinancial support for enterprise investments; (f)careful monitoring of migration activity; (g)selection of project areas with relatively sedentarypopulations rather than frontier situations; (h)promoting employment and economic growth inareas that have no influence on PAs.

60 Annex 3

Integrated Conservation and Develop ent Projects continued

Lesson Impact on Project Design

Need to identify parties to disputes and involve Project monitoring, improved PA plans,them in conflict resolution. incorporating PA concerns into regional planning,

and village microplanning would identify disputeparties, and provide mechanisms for resolution.

Need to plan safeguards for climatic crises. Included in agenda of improved PA managementplans and research.

Forestry Projects in India

Lesson Impact on Project Design

Joint Forest Management (JFM) provides Project would directly support JFM activities inexamples of successful (a) participatory buffer areas.microplanning methodology, (b) relatively smalland homogeneous villages or hamlets, (b) Arrangements for village ecodevelopment directlyparticipation of disadvantaged groups, (d) apply items (a) through (e) and make adjustmentspatcmpotion an sisa of .icropan ad to item (f) to take into account the fact that PAscomposition and skills of m-licroplanning and assets would not usually provide future cashimplementation support teams, (e) contractual income to local people comparable to the JFMagreements between state forest departments and timber and non-timber forest product assets.local communities, and (f) cost and benefit sharingarrangements.

Economic incentives were essential to success of Because main purpose of village ecodevelopmentfarm forestry programs: farmers preferred high investments is to provide sufficient incentive forvalue timber over lower value fuelwood; timber agreements, choices would not be limited totransport and price restrictions acted as subsistence activities or other paternalisticdisincentives to investment; guidelines. Local communities would select

ecodevelopment investments. Analysis ofinvestment options includes identification ofsignificant policy constraints (although policyreform would be outside project scope).

Farm forestry programs introduced locally Local communities would select species, usingunfamiliar species for commercial sale and their indigenous knowledge of plants and markets.monoculture practices that did not provide soil and All project supported ecodevelopment investmentwater conservation. options, including forest technologies, would be

reviewed to ensure consistency with the project'sbiodiversity conservation objectives

Forest plantation programs on public lands did not JFM or equivalent arrangements would be adoptedsucceed unless there were participatory for all forest plantation investments on public landmicroplanning and benefit sharing arrangementslike JFM.

Forest plantation programs did not adequately Participatory microplanning would review allincorporate multiple uses of public lands. current uses of public lands.

61 Annex 3

Rural Development Projects in India

Lesson Impact on Project Design

Numerical targets of physical outputs undermined No numerical targets for physical outputs.participatory objective and monitoring of these Emphasis on process orientation.targets and did not measure social and economicimpact.

Top down planning leads to inappropriate Participatory approach and criteria. Topical PRAinvestments; development of participatory rural used during project preparation and furtherappraisal methodology. developed during implementation. Criteria and

procedures designed to ensure participation oflocal people in village ecodevelopment decisions.

If individuals are the unit of assistance, some Families and cormnunities will be the unit offamilies can have several beneficiaries and others assistance.none.

Importance of taking into account local level Site-specific microplanning would address thisinitiatives and regional characteristics. concern.

Importance of input requirements, training Microplanning process would include feasibilityrequirements, marketing potential, and other review.technical and financial feasibility considerations.

Special efforts required to include disadvantaged Microplanning process would include steps tobeneficiaries. facilitate participation of most disadvantaged

groups, which would subsequently be monitored.

Government procedures required that all money be Provision to carry funds forward to subsequentallocated before end of the fiscal year. fiscal years.

Emphasis on wage employment has biased Linkage of investments to biodiversityinvestments toward infrastructure rather than conservation objectives will bias expendituresnatural resource management and not reached toward natural resource management and willmany remote areas. operate in remote areas closest to PAs.

Importance of accurate monitoring and evaluation. Provision for extensive monitoring and evaluationby field, state, and national officials and byindependent contractors, with reports widelycirculated to ensure verification, transparency, andcredibility.

Emphasis on learning and constructive problemsolving rather than accusatory reporting.

Importance of adequate training. Provision of extensive training tied to specificproject objectives.

Restriction to government channels contributes to Involvement of NGOs and strong public disclosureleakages. policy.

Normal government procedures lead to long-time Explicit delegation of expenditure authority tolags between plans and implementation and local level including steps and channels for flowrequire high transaction costs for beneficiary. of funds and simple, low cost transaction

Drocedures.

62 Annex 3

Rural Development in India continued

Lesson Impact on Project Design

Low opportunity cost to beneficiary of investment Provision of cost sharing to ensure ownership anddevelopment capital contributes to misuse and lack sustainability.of subsequent maintenance.

Use of existing organizational structures rather Project will use existing forest departmentthan temporary project implementation units structures, NGO support structures, andincreases sustainability. community structures wherever possible.

Requirements for efficient administration at thePA level and for appropriate community groupswill lead to the creation of new structures, butthese will be permanent, not temporary.

Use of appropriate technical staff in existing line Provisions for inter-agency collaboration and foragencies or externally contracted specialists, rather contracted specialists.than relying on staff of the lead implementingagency to provide technical advice outside theirnormal field of specialization improves success. I

Multi-state Projects in India

Lesson Impact on Project Design

Disbursement to states based on past performance Annual review of progress and work plans;and on work plans meeting clearly specified allocation of project funds based on quality ofcriteria rather than on allocation determined at performance and work plans.appraisal provides incentives for project success.

State governments will have more incentive for State governments would provide funding for allproject success if they have a significant financial state government staff involved in project.stake in project.

Need for national coordinating unit to have clear Central Coordinating Unit designed accordingly.identity and mandate, designated full-time staff,and adequately delegated financial andadministrative powers, and not be a cell within theministry subject to normal government procedures.

63 Annex 4

Annex 4: Notes on Project Preparation Process1. Preparation of the India Ecodevelopment Project, including indicative planning,has been a country-driven and participatory process. These activities were carried out inthis way so that the project design and implementation would reflect the needs of affectedpopulations and the concerns of major stakeholder groups. The Ministry of Environmentand Forest (MOEF), in partnership with a national coordinating non-governmentorganization (NGO), the Indian Institute of Public Administration (IIPA), was responsiblefor project preparation. The Indian government submitted the Indicative Plan to the GlobalEnvironment Facility (GEF) and the World Bank for funding in June 1994. This part if theexercise was financed using project preparation funds provided by the GEF and channeledthrough UNDP.

2. By that time, MOEF and IIPA had expanded involvement in preparation to thefollowing: seven government line agencies, ten state forest departments (SFDs)---theeight proposed project SFDs plus the two SFDs implementing the Forestry ResearchEducation and Extension Project ecodevelopment components---and more than 40 NGOs.

3. Project preparation took place in four stages; and stakeholder involvementprogressively increased at each stage. The four stages were as follows:

(a) Defining project scope and selection criteria

(b) Consulting with national, state, and local institutions

(c) Performing participatory rural appraisals (PRAs) for indicative planning

(d) Strengthening, and in some cases, establishing village groups and initiatingstart-up activities.

Representative forestry NGOs and state and project officials undertook joint activities,including at least 38 recorded meetings between March, 1992 and May, 1995 to discussproject design and detailed work plans. The MOEF and IIPA also co-sponsored andactively participated in 11 national and multisectoral consultation workshops, and 4interstate and 14 state or project wide PRA training sessions.

Defining Project Scope and Selection Criteria4. Ecodevelopment has come to serve as a means for gaining local support forconservation and for reducing impacts on biodiversity. This reflects lessons learned fromthe Indian government's experiments with decentralized rural development programs and fromsocial forestry and joint forest management projects (JFM). For example, the policy paperon ecodevelopment, issued by Project Tiger in 1991, consolidated findings on JFMexperiences as well as suggestions from previous papers (e.g., Eliciting Public SupportforConservation in India, Indian Board for Wildlife, 1983; Wildlife and People, WildlifeInstitute of India, 1985). Background work also included numerous studies on the benefitsand failures of the panchayat (municipal government) system, including lessons on themanagement of village based development assistance. Several workshops were also held in1991 to incorporate these lessons into the developing ecodevelopment activities in and

64 Annex 4

around national parks and reserves (e.g., Planning Commission workshop in Madras;Wildlife Institute of India (WII) and Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO) seminar).

5. The MOEF workshop in 1992, which involved representatives from protectedareas throughout the country and from key NGOs, set the stage for a multilevelconsultation process. MOEF later held a day-long meeting to discuss key issues in projectpreparation, such as defining the project's objectives, limiting its scope, and developingsite selection criteria.

6. As stated in the Preinvestment Action Brief submitted by MOEF and IIPA to theUnited Nations Development Program (UNDP), the agreed-upon selection criteriaincluded: (a) biogeographical representation; (b) degree of threat (mixture of problemsrelated to population pressures); (c) institutional framework (specifically, strength ofofficials' interest in the project and presence of NGOs working in the area); (d) socialcohesiveness (presence of local groups); and (e) existence of people-oriented projectactivities. Eventually, in interpreting these criteria, MOEF selected the proposed sites onthe basis of the importance of the site's biodiversity resources, regional representation, andpotential for success in implementing ecodevelopment activities. MOEF projected aproject site's chances of success on the basis of the nature and extent of human pressureson biodiversity, protected areas (PA), ( management capacity and experience, existinginfrastructure (which accounted for the inclusion of six tiger reserves in the MOEFproposal), accessibility, state and national government support, and state responsivenessto community and NGO involvement. During the selection process, MOEF also decided toinclude those sites highly motivated to implement ecodevelopment activities and with theguaranteed capacity to do so.

7. Preparation also included a survey of about 64 percent of all national parks,reserves, and sanctuaries and a few site visits to establish a profile of potential projectsites. IIPA and two MOEF consultants evaluated findings from the survey and site visitsthrough a matrix analysis. They used this analysis to initially identify eleven potential sites(Ranthambhore, Kalakaad, Pench, Periyar, Similipal, Buxa, Gir, Great Himalayan, Sariska,Nagarhole, Palamau). MOEF subsequently selected Kalakaad and Great Himalayan forsupport under the IDA financed Forestry Research Education and Extension Project.Sariska was eliminated to avoid having more than one protected area per state.

8. The 1994 government proposal was for eight sites, but in March, 1995, the Bankreduced them to seven by excluding the Similipal Tiger Reserve in Orissa. This wasbecause Orissa did not provide the Bank with transparent, credible, and verifiableassurances that all relocation after preappraisal would be consistent with the projectstrategy for people in the PAs. (See Annex 20.)

Consulting with National and State Institutions

9. IIPA served as the national coordinating NGO for project preparation but nineother national NGOs actively participated in the conduct of special studies or throughparticipation in brainstorming meetings and national consultations (see List of NGOs).MOEF and IIPA files have records of about 38 of these meetings and consultations(seeList of Consultations).

65 Annex 4

10. In addition other national NGOs and multilateral funding agencies participated inproject design through three nationally organized consultation workshops. The objectivesof the first workshop, sponsored by MOEF's Project Tiger, were to define objectives forecodevelopment projects and to develop selection criteria. The objectives of the other twonational workshops, financed through GEF/JNDP preparation funds, were to discuss theindicative planning process (workshop in October 1993) and to evaluate results of PRAsconducted in the eight sites then proposed (workshop in February 1994).

11. In April 1994, at a meeting of the project steering committee, UNDP andGEF/World Bank representatives, IIPA and other NGOs reviewed proposed projectactivities in the Indicative Plan. MOEF, state, and NGO representatives held four furthermeetings to respond to comments on this plan and to develop more detailed financial andadministrative procedures.

12. More than 30 environmental NGOs attended a workshop in September 1994,organized by the World Wide Fund for Nature-India (WWF-India). This workshopendorsed ecodevelopment as a viable approach to human and environmental issues andstressed the importance of sustaining NGO involvement in project decision making.

13. At the local level, several village meetings and group consultations were held butmostly remained undocumented.

Performing Participatory Rural Appraisals

14. As part of site selection, IIPA conducted reconnaissance visits to seven sites, usingrapid assessment techniques, such as checklists and key informant interviews. After thesites were identified, participatory rural appraisals (PRAs) were then conducted in localcommunities. These were used to establish baseline profiles of affected populations and toassess the capacity of local institutions to implement ecodevelopment activities.

15. State or park officials---usually the assistant conservator of forest (ACF) or the rangeofficer---and a local NGO conducted several joint PRAs in sample villages for each projectsite. To ensure consistency of data collection and to allow many respondents toparticipate, IIPA and the Society for Promotion of Wastelands Development (SPWD)conducted two training exercises on PRAs in February and July 1993. These focused onmobilizing villagers and encouraging their participation. Several local PRA training sessionswere also held for project staff and local NGOs assigned to do data gathering using PRAs.Concurrently WII, with financing from UNDP/FAO, organized a six week trainingprogram in ecodevelopment planning where officers from selected PAs, including somefrom this project, were trained.

16. However, not all sites completed PRAs as scheduled sometimes becauseparticipation was limited by the skills, training, and orientation of the PRA teams. SomePAs had to expand PRAs to villages not covered in the first round (such as villages insideprotected area boundaries). In many cases, additional information was required.Therefore, NGOs made a second set of PRAs to augment data earlier generated by projectofficers and consultants.

17. IIPA also collected baseline information from secondary sources across all sites tosupplement the PRA findings. This secondary data included the number, distribution, and

66 Annex 4

composition of people in and around the PAs, socioeconomic parameters, and socialorganizations and culture. IIPA was in charge of consolidating PRA findings andsecondary source data and presenting a set of proposed activities. Government and NGOrepresentatives provided feedback on these findings through technical reviews nationalconsultation, and project planning workshops. PRA results have yet to be formally presentedto local communities at organized village meetings, but some project sites have discussedpossible project activities and key issues, and a few of these meetings are documented (seeList of Consultations, below). Village ecodevelopment committees will be set up under theproject to sustain the participation of local people in the microplanning for ecodevelopment andm the monitoring of project activities.

Update on Preparation

18. Role of Indicative Plan. The indicative planning during project preparationreflected only a sample of views; it was never intended to be comprehensive in scope, norto incorporate the views of all potential project participants. During project preparation ithelped to identify (a) the nature of typical village ecodevelopment investments and otherproject investments and the participatory planning processes to be used to identifyreciprocal commitments and investments (Annex 8), and (b) preliminary backgroundinformation and social assessment findings (Annexes 6 and 20). During the Bankpreappraisal and appraisal missions, many improvements to the explicit criteria and theplanning processes were incorporated into the project design. The project alsoincorporated new activities (e.g., incorporating PA concerns into regional activities) thatwere not originally included, and expanded others (e.g., ecosystem management andprotection, impact monitoring and research) beyond levels envisaged in the originalproposal. The indicative plans have never been regarded as approved microplans,approved PA management plans or other approved investment proposals. The projectdesign is not a blue print of tangible investments; rather it is a set of agreed processes andcriteria that would be used for the project duration. The project even includes provisionsto improve the processes and criteria during implementation, in response to experience.

19. Gaps in Consultation. After the original project preparation efforts that finishedin early 1994, until the negotiations in July 1996, not all PA managers have regularlycommunicated with local people and NGOs about the project. The Bank provided a PPFAdvance in early 1995, in part to facilitate such communication, but PPF expenditures didnot begin until 1996. In some PAs, gaps in consultation have contributed tomisunderstandings. The resulting problems have highlighted the importance ofgovernment managers, NGOs, local people, and others making special efforts to buildeffective, sustainable, communication channels.

67 Annex 4

List Of Institutions Involved In Project Preparation

Project Implementing Institutions:

(1) Government:Ministry of Environment and Forest (MOEF)State forestry departments (SFDs)National parks and tiger reserves (PAs)

(2) National Consulting Government Institutes:Salim Ali Centre for Ornithology and Nature (SACON)Wildlife Institute of India (WII)

(3) Non-Government: National Coordinating NGO:Indian Institute of Public Administration (IIPA)

Institutions Involved Through Special Studies, Expert Consultations, Other

Consultations

(1) Government:Ministries of Agriculture, Animal Husbandry, Human Resource Development,Finance, Rural Development, Integrated Tribal Development

(2) Government Institutes:Botanical Survey of India (BSI)Zoological Survey of India (ZSI)Indian Institute of Forest Management (IIFM)Wildlife Institute of India (WII)Kerala Forest Research Institute (KFRI)

(3) National NGOs:Society for the Promotion of Wastelands Development (SPWD)Nature Conservation SocietyNature ClubDevelopment Research GroupWorld Wild Fund for Nature -India (WWF-India)Bombay Natural History Society (BNHS)Indian National Trust for Arts and Cultural Heritage (INTACH)Ranthambhore Development FoundationIndira Gandhi Conservation and Resource Monitoring Center

1Consultations have revealed a range of perspectives among NGOs. While most are supportive of theproject objectives and many have made constructive suggestions for design improvements, somehave expressed their distrust of any activities receiving financial support from the Bank or of anyactivities being implemented in part by the government.

68 Annex 4

(4) State/Project Site NGOs:

Buxa TR: Regional Centre Afforestation and Ecodevelopment BoardJadhavpur UniversityRama Krishnan Mission

Gir NP: National Nature Education Foundation, JunagarghAga Khan Rural Support Programme (AKRSP)Bharat Agro-Industries Foundation (BAIF)Forest Club of Dhari

Nagarhole NP: Mysore Resettlement and Development Agency (MYRADA)Society for Ecodevelopment Through TechnologyBAIF Development Research Foundation

Palamau TR: Nature Conservation Society, Daltonganj

Pench TR: Indian Institute of Forest Management, Bhopal

Periyar TR: Landpeople, TrivandrumPeermade Development SocietyH ighrange Social Development Society

Ranthambhore TR: Ranthambhore FoundationCentre for Environmental Education (CEE)WWF-IndiaBAIF

List Of Consultations

(1) Nationally Organized ConsultationsMarch 1992 MOEF-Project Tiger Workshop on EcodevelopmentJune 1992 Multisectoral meeting to discuss proposed Ecodevelopment ProjectJuly 1993 MOEF meeting to discuss initial PRA results with state and park

officials and national consulting NGOsOctober 1993 Multisectoral Consultation Workshop to discuss indicative planningFebruary 1994 MOEF multisectoral workshop to discuss PRA results and consultants' reportsApril 1994 MOEF Project Steering Committee and NGO and UNDP representatives

meeting to review Indicative PlanAugust 1994 Meetings to revise Indicative Plan

69 Annex 4

October 1994 State and PA officials meeting to discuss PRA findings and present initialproject plans

February 1995 IIPA briefing to state and PA officials on supplementary planning and designof the Indicative Plan, together with national consulting NGOs

May 1995 Presentation of work plans and budgets by state and PA officials includingIIPA and other local NGOs

(2) Interstate Consultations and Training ProgramsJune 1992 Meeting of state forestry officials and project officers to discuss proposed

Ecodevelopment ProjectDecember 1992 State and project meetings with IIPA and other NGOs; start of PRAsFebruary 1993 Two interstate PRA training workshops involving PA officials and NGO

representatives organized by SPWD and IIPAJuly 1993 Two interstate PRA training workshops involving PA officials and NGO

representatives organized by SPWD and IIPASeptember 1993 Continuation of PRA activities; IIPA follow-up of PRAsApril-Sept 1994 IIPA site visits and follow-up of PRAs; at least three field visits per site done

by IIPA, SPWD, and WU.

(3) Examples of Other Consultations

Village meetings were held in all PAs where the majority of villages within the projectboundaries were represented; average number of people attending village meetings was about 20,with a balanced mix of men and women; most of the meetings were presided over by projectofficials, but other meetings were also facilitated by trained community officers from local NGOsor IIPA. Topics in these meetings covered information dissemination about the proposed project(e.g., description of possible activities, objectives); needs and problems of local residents; feedbackon proposed activities. Attendance in the meetings was high and the format allowed participation ofmost community members. There were occasions when separate meetings with women's groupswere held to enable them to voice their opinions freely.

Small group meetings were useful in the conduct of PRAs. These meetings were held ingroups of six to ten people and, in some cases, in focus groups, such as groups of women, tribals,or livelihood groups. Social mapping and illustrations were often done through small groupmeetings.

PRA exercises not only provided useful baseline information but were valuable inencouraging local people to participate in project planning and design. Six projects have on filethe results of detailed social mapping, which were later used in the identification of keyproblem areas. Synchronized calendars provided information on planting and collectionschedules that were used in determining the timing of credit and input procurements. Otheruseful information, PRA consultation, and data gathering tools included group construction ofmatrices on non-timber forest products, value and species of trees, and problem-solutiondiagrams. Some PRAs applied transects to depict geographic variations across the site. Theextent of PRAs in each site is described in the table below.

70 Annex 4

Summary of PRAs for Indicative Planning

Project Site, Number of Government/NGOs Comments on Methodology, Results,State Villages Conducting PRAs Problems

Bu.xa, West 2 Asst. Cons. of Forest Tools used: mapping, matrices,Bengal (ACF) trained by WII seasonality calendar; held 6 village

____________ (???spell out) meetings

.1sir, Gujarat 5 National Nature Park ranger assisted in PRAs; usedEducation Foundation mapping, seasonality calendar,

checklist

Nagarhole, 8 Society for Retired forest officer and MYRADAKamataka Ecodevelopment Through held village meetings; tools used social

Technology; Mysore mapping, transects, seasonalityResettlement and calendar, matrices, trees assessment;Development Agency small-scale start-up activities done by(MYRADA) MYRADA in 2 villages

Palamau, Bihar 10 Nature Conservation 20 of the 139 villages (including 10Society and Park officials with PRAs) interviewed by park

officials using checklist format; toolsused: social mapping, seasonalitycalendar, matrices

l'ench, Madhya 16 Indian Institute of Forest Tools used: transect, social mapping,Pradesh Management drawings, seasonality calendar

Pcriyar, Kerala 10 Land People, Trivandrum Retired forester and an anthropologistfrom Peermade Development Society(a church-based NGO) used socialmapping, focus group meetings,drawings, seasonality calendar

Ranthambhore, 15 Ranthambhore Tools used: transect, social mapping,R.ajasthan Foundation gender games, trees assessment,

seasonality calendar

71 Annex 4

Participatory Rural Appraisal Findings

ECODEVELOPMENT ISSUES _FSTRATEGIES(1) LIVESTOCK GRAZING

Livestock grazing within PA: a. Promote fodder production on villagewastelands outside PA

* Livestock: Cattle 105,000 / ha. b. Reduce number of cattle per familyc. Improve cattle breeds for high

* Fodder consumption: 10.74 t/fanmly/yr productivityd. Introduce stall feeding of cattle

(2) FUELWOOD COLLECTIONDomestic fuelwood collection within PA: a. Develop fuelwood plantations outside

PA* Fuelwood consumption: 3.6 t/family/yr b. Establish non-conventional source of

energy (biogas, solar, wind)* Fuelwood species c. Introduce fuelwood saving devices

(e.g., smokeless stoves)d. Increase sustainable access to fuelwood

in forest reserves through joint forestryactivities

(3) LOW AGRICULTURAL PRODUCTIVITYRainfed monsoonal agriculture within PA: a. Provide small-scale irrigation schemes

for farms around PAs:* Marginal lands: * Tubewells and pipelines

* Impoundments on small streams with* Small farm size: minor irrigation schemes

b. Increase agricultural productivity on* Crops per year: I per monsoon, existing farms by:followed by fallow * Providing inputs (e.g. seed, fertilizer)

* Encouraging use of biofertilizers, andcompost

(4) POACHINGPoaching within PA: a. Induct local tribes into anti-poaching

squads* Location: Non-inhabitants b. Develop anti-poaching campsites

c. Solicit cooperation of communities near* Animals: Mainly herbivores PA in anti-poaching programs

(5) NON-GOVERNMENTAL ORGANIZATIONS (NGOs)Lack of NGOs in vicinity of PA: a. Involve and prepare local community

groups for NGO tasks* For undertaking ecodevelopment work b. Persuade establish NGOs at State level

to assist in planning and implementingactivities

(6) CROP DAMAGECrop damage within PA: a. Introduce crop protection measures,

mainly electric fencing* Mainly by elephants b. Promote participative patrolling of fields

c. Promote crop insurance

72 Annex 4

Participatory Rural Appraisal Findings (continued)

(7) EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNIMESLack of employment opportunities within PA: a. Increase involvement of local

community in management and* 100 days employment / forest village environmental regeneration work withinfamily in forestry PA

b. Employ local people in biomass* 1991: 277,500 person days/Forestry work regeneration and land improvement

1993: 594,000 person days/Forestry work schemes in areas adjacent to PAc. Establish environmentally sustainable

income generation activities(8) TIMBER EXTRACTION

Illegal timber extraction from PA: a. Discourage the establishment of wooddemanding industries in vicinity of PA

* Due to establishment of wood veneer b. Acquire boats and train anti-poachingfactories near PA squads, involving the local community,

to guard stream banks and therebyprevent timber smuggling

(9) FLOODINGFlooding within PA: a. Increase studies to understand

flooding within downstream PAs caused* Especially in West Bengal and especially by human perturbations indownstream of Bhutan upstream parts of the watershed

b. Examine land use patterns in watershedsthat prevent downstream floods

Source:IIPA, 1994. Biodiversitv Conservation through Ecodevelopment: An Indicative Plan.303 pp. New Delhi: Indian Institute of Public Administration

73 Annex 4

Indicative List of Possible Village Investments.

On the basis of PRA surveys in sample communities in and around the PAs, theproject preparation teams have identified an indicative list of possible ecodevelopmentinvestments. These investment ideas will require additional site-specific review to judgewhether they meet the above criteria. Not all investments would necessarily be adopted;others may be identified during more detailed planning. The activities can be grouped asfollows:

T'ype VarietyParticipatory forestry Joint Forest Management

Private timber and fuelwood plantationsEstablishment and operation of nurseries

PA protection Community patrolling TrenchesElectric fences

Energy conservation Improved stovesBiogas plants

Livestock improvementand fodder production Cattle breed improvement Pasture regeneration

Fodder plantations Facilities for stall feeding

Ecotourism Nature guidesTourist accommodationsOperation of visitor attractions, e.g., museumsOther ecotourism service concessions

Non-timber forestproduct cultivation(NTFP) NTFP cultivation NTFP collection & marketingAlternative incomegeneration Sericulture Lac production

Bee keeping Food processingPig rearing Rope productionPoultry WeavingMushroom cultivation Paper productionInland fisheries TailoringRabbit rearing Lantana chip board production

Soil and waterconservation Vegetative treatments

Small stabilization structuresReducing wildlife Electric fences Trenchesdamage Alternative crops Community patrolling

75 Annex 5

Annex 5: Rationale for GEF Funding and Analysis ofIncremental Costs of Biodiversity Conservation

1. Consistency with Biodiversity Convention. The project would fully conform tothe Convention on Biological Diversity and guidance from the Conference of the Parties.The Indian government has identified ecodevelopment as a national priority in thebiodiversity action plans and policy statements. Consistent with the convention, projectactivities would:

(a) Strengthen conservation, management, and sustainable use of eocsystems andhabitats in environmentally vulnerable areas including semiarid and mountainregions

(b) Conserve biodiversity and its sustainable use through innovative measuresincluding economic incentives and compensation to local communities foropportunity costs

(c) Strengthen local and indigenous people's involvement in conservation policiesby integrating social dimensions, with particular regard to poverty

(d) Promote conservation and sustainable use of endemic species

(e) Serve as demonstration projects and encourage scientific excellence.

2. GEF Operational Strategy. The project would also be consistent with the GEFoperational strategy. It would:

(a) Meet incremental costs to achieve agreed global benefits (see analysis below)and ensure cost-effectiveness

(b) Be country-driven and based on national priorities

(c) Provide full disclosure, and provide for stakeholder consultation andparticipation

(d) Leverage financing from other sources

(e) Be monitored and evaluated

(f) Support long-term protection and sustainable use of biodiversity in forest,semiarid, and mountain ecosystems.

3. Global Significance. The project meets GEF criteria by addressing urgent globalbiodiversity conservation needs. The project would conserve biodiversity in seven criticalareas, in this megadiversity country. One of the seven protected areas, Gir, has theworld's only population of Asian lions. The other six project sites support vitalpopulations of tigers, among the world's most endangered carnivores, as well as other rareand endangered flora and fauna . Five sites are included in the internationally recognizedProject Tiger program, which uses the tiger as a symbol of national heritage in order toprotect a wide range of ecosystems and the other species that depend on them. Reviewsand programs sponsored by United Nations agencies have given official recognition to fiveof the sites, including both of the sites that are not part of Project Tiger. In combination,these sites give good biogeographic and habitat coverage (e.g., dry deciduous open

76 Annex 5

forests, semi-evergreen forests, moist deciduous open forests, and wet evergreen forests).The project would conserve ecosystems in danger of fragmentation and degradation. Thelevel of threats to biodiversity in the seven sites is high and requires a substantial effort onan urgent basis. The project, combined with the country's demonstrated commitment toconservation, should help to counteract these threats on a sustainable basis. The project,with IDA financing, would also help the Indian government to prepare future projectsaddressing other critical biodiversity issues.

4. Overview of Incremental Cost Analysis. The analysis of "incremental costs" inaccordance with GEF guidelines shows baseline costs of US$19 million, which would befinanced locally and incremental costs of US$48 million, which would be financed by GEFand IDA. The Government of India realizes that, in view of the scale of external fundingrequired, it cannot expect to receive a GEF grant sufficient to cover the entire incrementalcost of the global alternative. However, it is so strongly committed to the objectives of theproject that it is willing to borrow up to US$28 million of IDA resources to cover 58percent of the incremental cost. A GEF grant of US$20 million would cover the remaining42 percent of the incremental cost.

5. Baseline Scenario. Under the baseline scenario (i.e., without the global project),state and national governments would continue to provide the current level of funding fortraditional PA management. This level of funding compares extremely well with that ofother developing countries. During FY 95/96 this funding was US$4.2 million for theseven project sites (see Annex 2); continuing this level would imply an expenditure ofUS$21.0 million during the five year project period. However, it is assumed that much ofthis funding is not directly related to the project focus and therefore only US$10 million ofthis sum is included in the baseline scenario (for breakdown see table below). In addition,the national government would provide over US$2 million for additional villageecodevelopment funds flowing to individual communities, on top of the US$ 1 millioncurrently provided through the existing MOEF program. The baseline also includes US$2million in increased operation and maintenance, because these expenditures would providenational as well as global benefits. Local people would contribute US$5 million. The totalcost of the projected baseline activities is therefore estimated at US $ 19 million. Both thenational and state governments recognize the importance of the ecodevelopmentapproach, but widespread poverty is causing many competing demands for scarce publicfunds.

Base Cost Scenario (US$ million)Existing Increases in Expenditures of

Government Government Local PeopleExpenditures Expenditures

Works and goods 2Village ecodevelopment funds 1 2 5Salaries 5Operation and maintenance 2 2

Total 10 4 5

6. Under the baseline scenario, the negative environmental impacts of local people onbiodiversity, and the negative trends in the richness, complexity, diversity, connectivity,and regeneration of ecosystems and species would continue to accelerate. The baselinescenario would not include resources for contracting NGOs, for intensive staff training, or

77 Annex 5

or for supervisory travel. The increase in ecodevelopment funds, while significant, wouldstill be insuffient. The baseline financing would not provide the critical mass of financingthat is required to address the increasing pressures on the project PAs. The extent and rateof degradation among the project PAs would vary, but in all cases it would causesignificant losses in global biodiversity. It is likely that some of the most vulnerable PAs(e.g., Ranthambhore) would lose much of their valuable biodiversity within the next 20years.

7. Global Alternative. With GEF and IDA financing, the national and stategovernment would be able to undertake a much more ambitious protection/buffer zonedevelopment program in and around the seven PAs.This larger scale of funding is neededto address urgent threats to biodiversity, to ensure coverage of globally significant sites, totest the ecodevelopment concept in a representative range of climatic, habitat andsocioeconomic environments, to develop alternative livelihoods, and to develop aframework for expanded future support. The conservation agenda is burgeoning. GEFwould meet a significant portion of the gap between increasing conservation requirementsand limited budget resources. One of the most important requirements is the application ofthe new, initially more costly, participatory approaches (including the negotiation andimplementation of reciprocal commitments between local people and PA authorities) thataddress the increasing pressures on PAs. The global alternative would slow, halt, orpossibly even reverse negative environmental impacts and ecological trends. It wouldoffset negative economic and cultural impacts of PAs on local communities (anopportunity cost of global conservation which is rarely acknowledged and compensated),and empower communities to meet their needs in an environmentally sustainable manner.It would provide a firmer base of public support for the PAs, and increase theunderstanding of PA biodiversity, local people, and their interactions. In addition toconserving globally significant biodiversity in the seven PAs, the global alternative wouldalso develop capacity for increased conservation in the future through preparation offuture projects, financed by IDA. The benefits of the global alternative correspond ingeneral to the project benefits. For more detailed analysis of benefits, see Annex 21.

8. No Net National Benefits From Additional Initiatives. There would be no netnational benefits from these additional initiatives. The village ecodevelopment programwill substitute roughly equal quantities of sustainable, conservation-compatible incomesfor resources for incomes and resources that are currently adversely affecting biodiversity.National benefits associated with other components are covered in the baseline case.

78 Annex 5

9. Incremental Costs. The costs of the Baseline Scenario and the GEF Alternativeare presented below, by major project component (in US$ mln):

Major Components Baseline GlobalAlternativeUS$ million US$ million

PA management 8 15Village ecodevelopment 10 36Env. ed., monitoring & research 0 5Project management 1 6Preparation of future projects 0 3

2 0 2Reimbursement of PPF

Total 19 67

The comparison of baseline scenario costs (US$19 million) with the costs of the GEFalternative (US$67 million) results in an incremental cost of aboutUS$48 million to achieve global benefits. The GEF grant of US$20 million wouldcontribute substantially to financing these incremental costs.

10. Use of Project Funds and Additionality. In the context of scarce publicresources, tight budgets, and competing demands, it is important that all project funds beused in accordance with the project design for the agreed project objectives and thatfinancing be provided as an additionality. The project includes contracted consultants whowould review the project expenditures and procurement (for terms of reference, seeAnnex 11). To provide information related to additionality the progress reporting wouldinclude data on biodiversity conservation expenditures (see Annex 16).

Financed exclusively by IDA; not financed by GEF.2

Financed exclusively by IDA; not financed by GEF.

Annex 6: Background on the Seven Protected Areas

Table 1: Protected Areas: Biogeographical Features

Protected Area Area Biogeographic Zone and Major Vegetation Biodiversity Values Important SpeciesState (sq. kn. Province

Buxa Tiger Reserve, 761 2C: Central Himalaya Tropical moist & subtropical hill forests High floral & faunal diversity Large prey-predators. Elephant.West Bengal 315 7B: Lower Gangetic Plains Regional PA connectivity Clouded leopard, Small mammals,

55 lLower vertebrates & invert. Lower vertebrates, invertebrates,391 Orchids & other plant forms

Gir National Park, Gujarat 1412 4B: Semi-arid: Gujrat-Rajwara Very dry teak forests The only Asiatic lion population Lion258 Dry deciduous scrub forest

11540

Nagarhole (Rajiv Gandhi) National 643 6A: Deccan Peninsula: Deccan Tropical Semi-evergreen; In Nilgiri Biosphere Reserve Large prey-predators,Park, 192 Plateau South Southern Tropical moist & dry Large prey-predator system ElephantKarnataka 451 deciduous; Regional PA connectivity Small carnivores,

l Man made wetlands Lower vert. & invert.; Wetlands Waterfowl

Palamau Tiger Reserve, Bihar 1026 6D: Deccan Peninsula: Chota Sal dominated & mixed deciduous, & Large prey - predator system Large prey-predators213 Nagpur bamboo forests Regional PA connectivity766 Largest forested area in state _

0IPench Tiger Reserve, 758 6E: Deccan Peninsula: Central Southem Tropical dry deciduous: teak Large prey - predator system Large prey-predatorsMadhya Pradesh 293 Highlands dominated & mixed Regional PA connectivity

157308

Periyar Tiger Reserve, 777 5B: Western Ghats Mountain Tropical wet & semi-evergreen, & Very high diversity & endemism in plants, invertebrates Large prey-predators, Butterflies,Kerala 350 moist deciduous forests; & lower vertebrates Herpdtofauna, Small mammals,

427 Montane grasslands Orchids, fers, & other plant forms0

Ranthambhore Tiger Reserve, 1335 4B: Semi-arid: Gujrat Rajwara Tropical dry & northern dry deciduous; Large prey-predator system Lage prey-predators,Rajasthan 393 Dry deciduous scrub; Wetlands Hyena,

801 Man made wetlands Caracal.,0 [Water fowls

First line shows total sq. km. of protected area (either tiger reserve or in the cases of Gir and Nagarhole, national park); second line shows sq. km. of core area, third line show sq.km. of non-core sanctuary & park area, and fourth line shows sq. km. of forest reserve & enclave area. Does not include periphery within project area but outside PAs. (In case ofGir and Nagarhole, the estimated size of the core area reflects past management practice rather than official designation of entire PA as national park which legally treats entirearea as core.)

Table 2: Project Areas: Demographic Features

Protected Area Area (sq. Population Population Tribal Percent Commentskm.) Density Population Tribal

Buxa Tiger NA 36,000 NA (47) 15,700 44% No settlemcnt in intended National Park (NP); 37 Forest Villages in Reserve, of which 8 inReserve, 761 15,600 20 6,500 42% excluded enclaves & 29 in Sanctuary, In addition there are 5 in fixed demand holdings in forestWest Benal 315 0 0 0 0% reserve.

Gir National Park NA 72,000 NA (51) 2,800 4% Hamlets (Nesses) in long-standing NP (core) were resettled in 1970-1986; 54 remaining Nesses inand Sanctuary, 1412 7,100 5 2,800 39% notified NP (pop 2540); Notified NP also includes 3 temple complexes (pop 65) and 14 forestGujarat 258 0 0 0 0% villages in periphery (pop 4494).Nagarhole (Rajiv NA 70,000 NA(108) 17,500 25% 54 settlements in notified NP, including interior landlcss laborers and periphery agriculturishs.Gandhi) National 643 7,100 °I 7,000 99%Park, Karnataka 192 0 0 0%Palamau Tiger NA 75,000 NA (73) 55,600 76% 3 Forest Villages in intended NP (pop 630). 102 villages in legally excluded enclaves in SanctuaryReserve, Bihar 1026 39,000 38 29,600 76% of which 27 are subject to relocation proposed by the Irrigation Dept

213 630 3 0 100%Pench Tiger NA 48,000 NA (64) 23,000 46% No settlements in proposed NP; already resettcd.Reserve, Madhya 758 12,000 16 5,800 48%Pradesh 293 0 0 0 0%Periyar Tiger NA 62,000 NA(80) 15,500 25% 3 Tribal settlements (pop 2036) and I agricultural settlement (pop 1820) in Sanctuary periphery.Reserve, 777 3,900 5 2,000 51% There are 225,000 people living within a 2 km. radius of the PA. 00Kerala 350 0 0 0 0% oRanthambhore, NA 64,000 NA (48) 36,500 57% 4 villages in and on boundary of notified NP (pop 1210); 25 villages in Sanctuaries (pop 3067).Tiger Reserve, 1335 4,300 3 1,000 26%Rajasthan R 393 1,210 3 1,000 83%

Total Seven PAs NA 427,000 NA (64) 166,600 39% If Nagarhole regarded as 100% core, then core = 2,465 sq. km., total numn of people in core areas6714 77,000 11 48,800 63% 8 8,940, and average pop. density of core = 4 persons per sq. km.2014 1,840 1 1,630 89% _

Area: The project area comprises land within a 2 km. radius of the Protected Area (PA). The first line shows that the sq. kin. of project area is not available (NA). Second line givestotal area of PA (either tiger reserve or in case of Nagarhole, the notified national park, and of Gir, the notified park and sanctuary) including both core and other areas. The third lineindicates area of core (in case of Nagarhole, the core is defined in accordance with past management practice rather than current official designation of entire PA as national park whichlegally treats entire PA as core).

Population: First number includes all project beneficiaries (some but not always all of the people living within 2 km. of the PA boundary). Second number indicates people livingwithin the Protected Area (PA), many of whom live outside the core conservation areas, in enclaves and other parts of tiger reserves where human settlement is allowed. Third numbergives number of people who live in core area, as defined above.

Popultion Density: First line shows that persons per sq. km in total project area is not available. Number in parenthesis indicates relative pop. pressures with ratio of people livingwithin 2 kn radius to total area of Protected Area (PA). Second line shows number of persons per sq. km in total PA. Third lines shows persons per sq. km. in core.

81 Annex 6

Table 3: Commercial Collection of NTFP

Buxa Gir Nagarhole

Annual permits for the Rayan - fruit and thorns Hunse (Tamarindus indica)following amounts: (Manilkara hexandra) Alalae (Terniinalia chebula)

Kakkebark (Cassia fistula)Totala pods Karamdi (Carissa carandas) Honge (Pongamia pinnata)(Oroxylum indicum) - 20,000 Seege (Acacia coucinna)

Amla (Emblica officinalis) Antuvala (Sapindus emarginatus)Naglata shoots Bela (Feronia elephatum)(Bauninia anguina) - 50,000 Bher (Zizyphus mauritiana) Nelli (Emblica officinalus)

Dhupa (Ailanthus triphysa)Decorative Golden fungus Aritha (Sapindus trifoliatus) Gulaganchi (Abrus precatorius)(Polyporus spp) - 5,000,000 GaDjige (Caesalpina bounducella)

Honey Thupra (Diospyrus melanoxylon)Decorative Sponge fungus Wax Dalechini (Cinnanonum zeylancium)(Agaricus spp) - 9 tones Geru (Anacardium occidentale)

Muthuga leaves (Butea monosperma)Narkeli leaves Sagade (Schleichera oleosa)(Pterygota alata) - 200,000 Maggare seeds (Randia dumetorum)

Kasarka (Strychnos nux-vomica)Dhundul dry fruit Kadugera (Semicarpus anacardium)(Luffa aegyptica)- 200,000 Lichens

Wild tumericWild gingerEachalu (Phonix sylvestris)MakliberuHalmaddiKalabaleWaxHornsLacHoneyBones

82 Annex 6

Table 3 contd. Commercial Collection of NTFP

Palamau Pench Periyar Ranthambhore

Mahua - flowers Tendu patta (Dispyros Cinnamon bark Permits are given& fruits melanoxylon) (Cinnanonum zeylancium) for the following:LacTussar Mahua fruit and flowers Kulamavu oil Butea leaves (ButeaCane (Mahua indica) (Kingiodendron monosperma)Honey pinnatum)

Chironji (Buchanania lanzan) Tendu pattaThelli powder (Carnarium (Diospyros

Gum (Stercula urens) strictum, Vatteria indica) melanoxylon)

Mahul bhel (Bauhania vahli) Reeds Roofing materials(Grewia spp.)

Bamboo CaneLacGrass HoneyPalm leavesAntlers of Cheetal & Sambar

83 Annex 6

Buxa Tiger Reserve

Location

1. Buxa Tiger Reserve is situated in northem West Bengal's Jalpaiguri district, on theborder with Bhutan and the state of Assam. It covers an area of 761 sq. km, with a core zoneof 314.5 sq. km designated as sanctuary (117 sq. km proposed the national park), and theremaining 391 sq. km categorized as forest reserve.

2. The Protected Area includes two distinct types of topography: the southern plains,at an elevation of 150 m, and the northern hills, with elevations up to 1750 m. Severalseasonal and perennial rivers, the largest being the Sankosh River, drain the hills. Theannual rainfall is about 400 cm, mostly from the southwest monsoon; annual temperaturesrange from -10' to 40°C.

3. Buxa's combination of habitats - semi-evergreen and subtropical hill forest withtropical moist forest and wetland - shelters a particularly wide and unusual variety ofwildlife. Human occupation of the Gangetic Plains has been intensive for so long thatrepresentative natural areas are few. The Central and Eastern Himalaya, on the other hand,are a treasure trove of diversity, and a great many floral and faunal elements from theEastern Himalaya spill into Buxa.

People

4. According to the 1991 census, 15,608 people inhabit "forest villages" and fixeddemand holdings within the Protected Area. The indigenous population includes Bengalis,Nepalese and members of Scheduled Tribes (primarily Rava, Bhutia, Bodo, Garu andSantal) and the Scheduled Rajbanshi Caste. The British established forest villages at theturn of the century; settlers received up to 0.2 ha of homestead land and permanentcultivation areas up to 0.4 ha in hill areas, or 0.8 ha in the plains. Bangladeshi immigrants,among more recent arrivals, reside on the outskirts of the PA.

5. At present there are 37 forest villages inside reserve boundaries, and eight withinthe park. Forest villagers derive their income from sources including employment in ForestDepartment operations (decreasing due to restrictions resulting from the establishment ofthe PA); intercropping or 'taungya' in plantation areas; collection of NTFP for non-resident permit holders (see Table 3) and other NTFP for themselves, for which noroyalties are charged; and traditional agriculture.

6. Forest Department operations account for five fixed-demand holdings withinreserve boundaries. For a number of years, the practice of renewing annual fixed demandlicenses has lapsed, due to concern that leasing of forest areas for non-forest purposeswould contravene provisions of the Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980; technically, thesesettlements could be considered illegal.

7. Forty-four revenue villages, with a population of 84,648 (1991 census), surroundthe project area. Scheduled Tribes form 44% of this population; 36% belong to ScheduledCastes. PA authorities have targeted a population of 36,000 for the ecodevelopmentproject.

84 Annex 6

8. Urban settlements within 5 km of the reserve include Alipurduar (pop. 26,000), aswell as a few large villages. 25 tea estates adjoining the reserve add a population of125,601 of which over half belong to Scheduled Tribes.

9. Agriculture is the principal activity in the revenue villages adjoining the PA, withrain-fed paddy rice, jute and tea as the main crops. Land is primarily under privateownership (raiyat), but some wasteland is held by the Government as vested land. Teagarden lands are allocated on a long-term basis by the Land Revenue Department. About20% of rural households are landless or sharecroppers. There are 279 recognizedfirewood dealers, 26 sawmills, 45 cane processing units and four veneer units in closeproximity of the reserve.

10. Approximately 29,000 people visited Buxa Tiger Reserve during 1992-1993.Three-quarters come for riverside picnics around Jainti, others visit two holy caves withinthe project area, and a small number venture further inside the reserve in order to trek athigher elevations. At present there is little opportunity for local residents to participate intourism activities, since operations are controlled by the Forest Department.

Biodiversity Values

11. Nearly 120 sq. km. of lowland moist forest and large areas of the hill forests are stillrelatively undisturbed. These forests contain the best remnants of the rich biodiversity in thisarea. Nine distinct forest types have been identified within PA borders, and 1,000 species ofplants, including ferns.

12. The clouded leopard, goral, Malayan giant squirrel, parti-colored flying squirrel, hoary-bellied squirrel, Himalayan palm civet and yellow-throated marten represent larger Central andEast Himalayan mammals. Characteristic animals of the Gangetic plains, now rare, includetiger, leopard, elephants, sambar, chital, and otter. Two species historically reported, the wildbuffalo and the Great Indian rhinoceros, are no longer found at Buxa but occur in adjoiningPAs.

13. This PA is too small in area to sustain populations of large mammals over time. WithJaldapara situated to the west, Butan to the north, and Assam to the east, efforts to maintainand improve wildlife access to other protected areas will be vital to the long-term survival ofbig animals such as elephants.

14. Birdlife includes the Bengal florican and black-necked crane (only a few sightings),along with a full compliment of Himalayan birds- the 185 reported species are likely to be onlya sample. A great variety of smaller mammals, lower vertebrates (fishes, amphibians andreptiles), invertebrates, such as butterflies and moths, and plant forms such as orchids remain tobe studied.

Biodiversity Pressures15. Settlements within and adjoining the reserve put great strain on natural resources.(Peculiar to this site is the inability of PA authorities to deal directly with tea estates, asthey are considered an organized industry beyond the mandate of the Forest Department.)

85 Annex 6

16. Compounded by timber and fuelwood collection (for day-to-day needs and for sellingto tea estates), crop cultivation disturbs and degrades habitat. Feeding 105,000 head of cattleon PA vegetation furthers degradation and invasion by weeds. Crop depredation by elephantsand other ungulates causes conflict between local people and forest managers. Ivory poachinghas recently become a major threat to the elephants.

17. Local people collect a wide variety of non-timber forest products - bamboo, cane,fruits, seeds, simul floss, Dioscoria tubers, edible and decorative mushrooms, resins - withlittle regard for future supplies.

18. Seventy-three fixed-demand licensees and 181 other individuals (includingresidents of forest villages) have encroached onto Reserve forest lands to establish 300 haof orange orchards.

19. Forestry operations have had significant impact on native biodiversity with large areasbeing logged, primarily for sal-wood railway sleepers, and about 28% of the area planted withteak. Mining dolomite from a 12-ha site within the PA is causing major disturbance, siltationand pollution.

20. Flooding occurs and rivers change course every year, damaging large areas and oftendestroying critical habitats.

Social Considerations

21. Since 1991 PA authorities have been using Project Tiger funding forecodevelopment activities that include crop protection measures, land improvement,fuelwood plantations, energy conservation efforts and education programs. SixteenEcodevelopment Committees have been established in the project area, which also comesunder a JFM Government Order. Villagers and the Forest Department jointly operateseveral Forest Protection Comrnmittees.

22. Authorities plan to relocate a number of forest villages, with their consent, duringthe course of the project period. Currently, officials are discussing relocation of one forestvillage from the reserve. The terms of agreement include provisions for each household toreceive one hectare of irrigated land plus housing outside the reserve plus access to forestland, while remaining outside the panchayat system for the time being. PA authorities planto raise fodder/fruit plantations on the vacated land. Two other forest villages are in morepreliminary stages of discussing relocation.

23. The nature of planned ecodevelopment activities raises a number of key socialissues which need to be addressed prior to implementation. The effectiveness of themicroplanning process will clearly be hindered by the absence of NGOs in the area.Relocation plans for settlements currently within the PA require further elaboration,particularly for those settlements at higher elevations, and for fixed demand holdingswhere the security of tenure is unclear. As employment opportunities with the ForestDepartment decrease, the feasibility and appropriateness of alternative income generationitrategies, especially for the landless, tribals and women, will require considerablettention.

86 Annex 6

Gir National Park

Location

24. Gir National Park is located in the Kathiawar Peninsula in Saurashtra, Gujarat. The PAcovers 1,412 sq. km. of which 258 sq. km is National Park and the remaining area is sanctuary.

25. The rugged, hilly terrain ranges in altitude from 152 m to 528 m. Most of the 100-cmmean annual rainfall comes from the southwest monsoon; temperatures range from 100 to 440C. There are seven perennial rivers, four man-made irrigation tanks, and 18 year-round tanks.

26. Though the entire park is considered semi-arid, a sharp decrease in rainfall from westto east is reflected in the vegetation, with very dry teak forest in the west giving way to drydeciduous scrub and dry savanna forest in the east. Significantly different vegetation grows innarrow bands along the rivers. A limited area was planted with teak in 1961-62. About 400species of flowering plants have been reported.

People

27. Over 70,000 people lived in the intended project area as of the 1981 census. In1981, 1,491 (1%) were Scheduled Tribes and 7,486 (6%) were Scheduled Castes. PAauthorities have identified a population of 72,000 within a 2-km radius of park boundaries,in 97 revenue villages, to participate in ecodevelopment. Within the park itself are 54pastoral settlements or 'nesses' inhabited by 2,540 Maldharis; 14 forest villages, with apopulation of 4,500 residents including 239 Siddis, a Scheduled Tribe of African origin;and three temple complexes occupied by 65 people.

28. Neighboring villagers mostly grow groundnuts, cotton, sorghum and sugarcaneand raise livestock. Especially during the monsoon, grazing territory lies primarily withinthe PA.

29. Maldharis, with settlement and grazing rights in the park, raise livestock and sellmilk products (usually clarified butter and milk for those with access to markets). Between1972 and 1986, 580 Maldhari families were resettled from the area currently defined asnational park to new locations, with land for cultivation, on the periphery of the PA. Somehave continued in livestock production, while others have taken up wage labor.

30. The temple complexes of Kankai, Banej and Tulsishyam occupy 3,522 ha of landin the protected area, some of which is given over to cultivation, and 20 ha of which isleased from the Forest Department. Though the park is closed to tourists during themonsoons, pilgrims tend to visit throughout the year. 1992-93 saw some 80,000 pilgrims,mainly from Gujarat, accommodated in a variety of temple-owned, private and state-government facilities.

31. In 1992-93, 45,000 tourists came to see the animals. The Forest Departmentoperates a guesthouse in Sasan, and an Interpretative Park for tourists in Devalia. Localsbenefit from tourism by operating several small lodges in Sasan and are employed asguides.

87 Annex 6

Biodiversity Values

32. In the 64,000 sq. km of the Saurashtra peninsula, Gir remains the only patch of naturalforest. Its unique importance is as the only home for the last surviving Asian lions in the wild,currently thought to have recovered from fewer than 50 to an estimated population of 284. .

33. The highly productive grass-and-shrub landscape supports large numbers of grazinganimals including four-homed antelope and Indian gazelle as well as chital, sambar and nilgai.Large carnivores include leopards and striped hyena as well as lions; noteworthy smallermammals include the rusty spotted cat.

34. Also notable are the lesser florican and a rich assortment of birds of prey (especiallyduring migration) and substantial populations of marsh crocodile and starred tortoise. Smallermammals, lower vertebrates and invertebrates have not been studied.

Biodiversity Pressures

35. In the past, Gir NP has experienced considerable trouble from timber smugglingand animal poaching. With the active cooperation of local people, much of this illicitactivity has been successfully controlled. The cumulative effect of human activities such aslogging, plantations, fire and grazing has resulted, however, in the dominance of thorny andfire-hardy plant species and an abundance of weeds. Moreover, the total conversion ofsurrounding land to intensive agriculture has isolated the ecosystem.

36. Continuing issues concern the impact of local demand for grazing and fuelwood;crop loss caused by wild animals; loss of livestock, and human lives, to lions.

37. Residents of 54 Maldhari settlements and 14 forest villages within the park andvillagers from around the protected area maintain 100,000 head of cattle on Gir's vegetation.Human settlement and the intense grazing pressure have severely impacted biodiversity, thoughthe ungulate population rebounded when some of the grazier community resettled outside thePA.

38. Traffic: four public roads that pass through the PA are heavily used by pilgrims,tourists and the local populace; three temple complexes are located on disputed lands inside thePA; the number of tourists is increasing; and a railway line passes through the PA. Increasedhuman traffic increases the chance of fire.

39. The singularity of the Asiatic lion population leaves it extremely vulnerable to localcatastrophe, such as drought and disease. This isolation is relatively recent, since lions wererecorded in adjoining states even early this century. There are plans to translocate lions fromGir, to create a second population.

Social Considerations

40. The Maldharis have a long and close association with the fauna and flora of Gir.While many have moved away from their traditional grazing areas and some from theirtraditional livelihoods, their indigenous knowledge of the area could play an important rolein managing the PA for biodiversity conservation.

41. Key social issues in Gir concern the process of relocation, the implications oftenure for forest villagers and the relationship between PA authorities and local people.

88 Annex 6

Long-term, the Forest Department has a relocation plan for another 361 families presentlyliving in the Sanctuary. Some families appear willing to relocate in order to obtain bettereconomic returns by selling milk rather than milk products, and to gain access to healthand education facilities. A key factor in successful voluntary relocation of Maldharigraziers will be the ability to provide alternatives that provide facilities and income equalor superior to current conditions. The inability of forest villagers to obtain credit increasespressures on PA authorities to change tenure status or provide income-generatingactivities.

42. In addition to small-scale agriculture and NTFP-collecting, (see Table 1), forestvillagers continue to work in the shrinking forestry operations. As they lease their landfrom the Forest Department for 15-year periods, they are unable to obtain mortgages inorder to raise funds for investment and are asking the Forest Department to convert leasedland to revenue areas. Although this demand clearly raises concern, PA management hasno plans to relocate forest villages.

Nagarhole National Park

Location

43. Nagarhole National Park, in the Kodagu and Mysore districts of Karnataka state,covers an area of 643.4 sq. km, with a core zone of 192 sq. km. and a tourism zone of 110 sq.km.

44. The mostly undulating terrain ranges in altitude from 701 to 959 meters. Annual rainfallruns about 177 cm, and temperatures range from 170 to 300 C. Sources of water include fivelarge perennial rivers and about 40 artificial water tanks, many used year-round.

45. Forests dominate the area: southern tropical moist mixed deciduous forests, southerntropical dry deciduous forests, southern tropical semi-evergreen forests (found only in patchesin the westem shelter parts of the park), teak plantations and, in the eastem parts of the park,scrub forests resulting from heavy human pressure on the original dry deciduous forests. Smallareas of low-lying swamps, locally known as 'hadlus', are a unique and critical habitat,providing ungulates with water and forage during the summer.

46. Although some elements reflect its Western Ghat classification, the Nagarhole NationalPark resembles the Deccan Peninsula biogeographic zone in topography, vegetation and animallife. Larger carnivores include tiger, leopard and wild dog; large ungulates include gaur, sambarand chital. Four-homed antelope are found in the drier parts. Numerous bodies of watersupport a rich assortment of birds such as the lesser whistling teal, adjutant stork, osprey,shahin falcon and spoonbill. Marsh crocodiles are also important. Lower vertebrates andinvertebrates have not been studied at all.

People

47. The total population in the project area was 72,652 as of the 1981 census. Over6,888 (8%) belong to Scheduled Tribes of Jenu Kurbas, Betta Kurbas, Hakki-Pikki andYeravas, who live inside the park along with five non-tribal families. Within a 5-km radius

89 Annex 6

of the boundaries PA authorities have identified a population of 66,507, in 96 revenuevillages, to participate in project activities. Findings from a PRA carried out in 14 of thesevillages also identified Gowdas, Lingayaths, Odigas and Kodavas, as prominent socialgroups in the area.

48. The tribal groups who live in the park collect NTFP such as honey and fruit fortheir own consumption (see Table 1) to supplement their income from labor at nearbycoffee estates and forestry operations. Some groups have already been resettled from thecore zone to areas they are no longer permitted to cultivate. Tribal groups still grow 40-50ha of ragi and paddy in the park, however, supplemented by wild-collected foods. Non-tribal people cultivate another 10 ha in a revenue enclave. On the fringes of the park aresettlements mainly of Odigas who cultivate 300 ha of land leased annually from the ForestDepartment, and 300 ha of land for which they have tax receipts but no pattas. In additionthe tribal Yeravas encroach on another 300 ha of forest land in the north west.

49. Outside the park, the primary occupation is agriculture. Most farmers grow ragi,jowar, paddy and livestock; those with larger holdings grow tobacco and cotton as cashcrops. Marginal cultivators and the landless earn money by working at nearby coffeeestates and forestry operations, and collect NTFP.

50. Nagarhole has demarcated two tourism zones. PA authorities provideaccommodation near the eastern side, where a complex has also been built by governmentand leased to a private company for operations. On the southern boundary the Karnatakastate government operates a lodge near the Kabini Reservoir. Approximately 21,000people from the region visited the park in 1992-1993. Local people gain little fromtourism other than the opportunity to labor in guesthouses.

Biodiversity Values

51. The most important biodiversity value is the large predator/prey system. Herd densitiesare amongst the highest in India, comparable even to the African savanna. The abundance ofsmall carnivores and water birds, again one of the highest in protected-area forests, is anothernotable feature.

52. As part of the 4500-sq. km Nilgiri Biosphere Reserve, Nagarhole is a significantcomponent of one of the largest conservation areas in India, and a central link in the seasonalmigrations of elephants to Bandipur National Park in the southeast and Wynad WildlifeSanctuary in the southwest.

Biodiversity Pressures53. The high density of wildlife in the park and the varied activities of the large humanpopulation on its periphery result in problems for PA authorities and local people.Important concerns include losing crop and livestock production, and human lives, toelephants and other animals (somewhat contained by elephant-proof trenching); meetinglocal demand for fuelwood (particularly for curing tobacco), timber and grazing (becauseaccess to park resources is restricted); losing income because collecting NTFP is nowprohibited; poaching of elephants for ivory; and increasing tourism and tourism facilities inthe area.

90 Annex 6

54. Agriculture inside the park threatens wildlife as swamps are drained and converted togrowing fields. About 5,000 head of cattle graze inside the park, mostly in the buffer zone,leading to habitat degradation and weed invasion.

55. Ninety sq. km of the park are planted with teak; large grazing animals may survive, butbiodiversity in general suffers.

56. Considerable areas in the eastern parts are heavily degraded due to human pressures.Ecorestoration efforts are going on in these areas with the planting of native species.

57. The dry deciduous forest is very prone to fire during the dry season. In recent years,major fires have caused extensive damage.

Social Considerations

58. Tribal groups in the park have strong cultural attachments to their forests.Traditional livelihoods and social organization depend on forest ecosystems, and forestresources are key to local belief systems.

59. Under the terms of the Indian Wildlife Act (1972) settlements within a nationalpark are considered illegal. PA authorities had therefore proposed that between 1993 and1996, 1550 households currently residing within the park be relocated to forest areas onthe periphery. To date no relocation has occurred since funds for the approved plan haveyet to be released by the Government of India. A local human-rights NGO (Fedina Vikas)has expressed concern over the relocation process, especially as it affects tribal non-cultivators. Evidence suggests that they may be more willing to relocate, however, thanthose who own or have access to arable land. Redefining park boundaries could be moreeffective than resettlement as a means of resolving illegal habitation by farmers.Meanwhile, plans to continue with relocation have been halted in order to gatherinformation on the extent of consent and possible terms of agreement, and to carry out asmall-scale anthropological and ecological study on tribal groups and their relationshipwith natural resources in the area.

60. A critical social issue in Nagarhole concerns tribal groups in the PA. Theestablishment of a PA has restricted access to forest resources and affected traditionallivelihoods. Tribal groups are being incorporated into the larger commercial economyoutside the PA, as they pursue wage labor in nearby estates for necessary supplementalincome. Questions arise over the loss of indigenous knowledge and tribal cultural heritage,and their ability to integrate successfully into a cash economy. The issue of current limitedaccess to PA resources, and possible further restrictions resulting from the new ForestConservation Act, will continue to strain relationships between PA authorities and otherstakeholders.

91 Annex 6

Palamau Tiger Reserve

Location

61. Palamau Tiger reserve, located in the Palamau district in southwest Bihar, is 1026 sq.km. in area. The core zone encompasses 213 sq. kin, 766 sq. krn of the buffer zone form thePalanau Wildlife Sanctuary, and 47 sq. km is reserve forest. Some 29 sq. km of this area isdesignated as a tourism zone. An area of 225 sq. km covering the current core area plus aportion of the sanctuary is the intended area of the proposed Betla National Park. In thesouthwest, the PA shares a border with the state of Madhya Pradesh.

62. The terrain of the PA is undulating and hillier to the south, with altitudes rangingbetween 300 m and 1140 m. Most of the annual 105-cm rainfall arrives with the southwestmonsoon; temperatures range from 10 C in winter to 480 C in summer. Only one river and afew water tanks provide water year-round.

63. The PA falls within the Deccan Peninsula biogeographic zone, in the ChhotanagpurPlateau province. Forests are largely deciduous and, especially in the moister south, dominatedby sal. Vegetation is classified as moist and dry peninsular sal forests; northern secondary moistand dry mixed deciduous forests; dry bamboo brakes; teak plantations; and grassy blanks(discarded shifting cultivation areas).

64. The large predator/prey system includes tiger, leopard, striped hyena, wolf, gaur,sambar, barking deer and chital. More than 170 species of birds have been recorded. Lowervertebrates and invertebrates have not been studied at all.

People

65. Three villages (pop. 630, BSFD 1990) are found in the core zone; most of thesepeople are Scheduled Tribes of Oraon, Kherwar, Korwa, Munda and Brijia. According to1991 census data, 30,795 people, in 102 villages, are located within legally excludedenclaves in the sanctuary buffer area. Another 89 villages within a 5-km radius of thesanctuary have been selected to participate in ecodevelopment activities, to give a totalpopulation of 75,000 targeted for this project. While exact demographic figures are notavailable, 1991 census data for the larger surrounding population of 99,907 indicate that56% belong to Scheduled Tribes and 15% to Scheduled Castes. In addition to thosealready mentioned, Scheduled Tribes in the area include Chero, Parahia and Birhor. Thetarget population includes 27 villages in and around the western portion of the sanctuarywhich will be submerged and whose people will be resettled if the Kutku dam is built asplanned.

66. Since forestry operations have been cut back, forest dwellers have becomeincreasingly dependent on agriculture and other forms of wage labor made available by PAauthorities. As with many similar settlements in India, security of tenure depends onadministrative decision-making by the Forest Department, which usually allows limitedaccess to grazing, fuelwood and small timber. Villages in the sanctuary are legallyexcluded from the core zone but retain rights, subject to permission from the Forest

92 Annex 6

Department, to grazing, fuelwood, small timber, some NTFP and the production of lacand tussar on the payment of royalties. The primary occupation of villagers in thesanctuary is crop and livestock production, with some supplemental income from PAmanagement activities.

67. Agriculture is also the main occupation of the population residing in revenuevillages in the remaining project area. Similar access to forest resources is permitted, andadditional benefits have been made available by the management of new protected forests.

68. Tourism is currently restricted to the northern portion of the reserve. There areplans to extend it, however, into part of the intended national park and current sanctuary.The reserve had approximately 35,000 visitors in 1992, with October being the mostpopular month. The extent of local participation in tourism is not known, but is unlikely toextend beyond the provision of vehicles and occasional employment as guides.

Biodiversity Values

69. The most important and characteristic value this PA has to offer is its highly-diverselarge predator/prey animal community, which includes a large population of elephants. Thefairly extensive and not severely-disturbed sal that covers most of the southern parts is amongthe best forest in the state of Bihar. Several plants used in traditional medicine grow here.

Biodiversity Pressures

70. Annual census estimates of larger mammals indicate that many species have increasedin number since 1987, while none have declined. Agriculture and subsistence gathering bynearly 630 tribal people, however, and grazing by their nearly 700 head of cattle, strain theresources of the core zone.

71. Timber-smuggling and the ongoing extraction of bamboo and non-timber forestproducts are a major source of disturbance and degradation in the buffer zone. 180 villages inand around the buffer zone, with a cattle population of about 85,000, place heavy demands onfuelwood, timber and fodder. Farmers resent crop and livestock losses due to predation.Humans often cause forest fires, which destroy some 1.3% of the PA every year, degradingnatural forests and hampering regeneration in degraded areas.

72. The Kutku Dam of the North Koel Multipurpose Hydroelectric Project, whichwould flood 15 villages (of which 5 are within the tiger reserve), and affect access toanother 12 villages (of which 8 are within the tiger reserve), could indirectly threatenPalamau. A ten-point action plan regarding relocation resulting from the Kutku Damwould, according to PA officials and NGOs, prevent encroachment on the PA, but has yetto be implemented. The Water Resources Department has not yet met the conditions inthe action plan. If nevertheless the dam proceeds, the Forest Department is concerned thatdisplaced villagers will seriously encroach on the reserve. Another possible area to besubmerged, the Auranga Reservoir in the western part of the reserve, also raises problemsof resettlement, but is currently only in an exploratory stage.

93 Annex 6

Social Considerations

73. No information is available on sites of cultural significance in the project area.However, tribal groups are likely to have strong cultural associations with forestecosystems, which supply key aspects of local indigenous belief systems.

74. In 1984 a relocation plan for the three forest villages located in the core zone wasprepared and potential sites selected by villagers. Currently the PA has no plans forrelocation.

Pench Tiger Reserve

Location

75. Located in the Seoni and Chindwara districts of Madhya Pradesh, Pench Tiger Reservecovers an area of 757 sq. kmi, with a core zone (intended national park) of 293 sq. km, atourism zone (intended national park) of 55 sq. km., a wildlife sanctuary of 118 sq. km and 308sq. km of reserve and protected forests.

76. The PA covers the southem lower ranges of the Satpura Hills and forms the catchmentfor the Pench River, which runs through the center of the reserve. Rolling terrain includes hillsup to 650 m. Annual rainfall, mostly from the southwest monsoon, is about 120 cm;temperatures range from 2.7°C in winter to 47.60C in summer. Most streams and rivers areseasonal; the main source of water during dry months is the Totladoh Reservoir, in the southcentral part of the PA, formed as part of the Pench Hydel Project in 1990.

77. As part of the Deccan Peninsula biogeographic zone, the reserve has extensive standsof the dry deciduous teak and mixed forests typical of the central Indian highlands, thoughmuch of the teak has been drowned. The area has been worked and subjected to shiftingcultivation in the past.

78. The more open woodlands and savanna-type habitat support many herbivores and theirpredators. Nearly 40 species of mammals and 168 species of birds have been recorded. Lowervertebrates and invertebrates have not been studied.

People

79. The 1981 census counted 50,000 people in the intended project area (99 revenuevillages), of whom Scheduled Tribes, primarily Gonds and their sub-divisions, comprise46% and Scheduled Castes, 8%. Other social groups found in the area are Patels (usuallyland-owners), Kirars and Ahirs (a Scheduled Caste). There are no villages within theintended national park boundaries. Findings from the PRA carried out in over 10 villagesaround the national park suggest that 80% of families suffer from varying degrees ofpoverty, and that most of these families belong to Scheduled Tribes.

80. For villagers living in and around the PA, agriculture and livestock production arethe primary occupation, with wheat, soybean and maize as the major crops and vegetableproduction. Since many are marginal cultivators, and 45% of the employable workforcedoes not have access to land, employment in forestry operations, wage labor, NTFP

94 Annex 6

collection (for food and supplemental income, see Table 1) and fishing are also importantsources of income. Villages on the south-eastern border (Seoni district) tend to be moredependent on forest resources for both food and income. Scheduled Tribes and otherforest-fringe dwellers also have nistar rights, which subsidize access to forest resources(primarily fuelwood).

81. At present, visitors are allowed in a tourism zone in the eastern section of theintended park, but future plans include another entry point in the southwest. Visits to thereserve dropped dramatically from approximately 3,000 to 1,000 in 1992-93, when entrywas restricted to petrol vehicles. The limited accommodation available helps keep visitornumbers low. Opportunities for local participation are restricted to occasional employmentas guides for visitors, a policy which the Forest Department hopes to promote further.

Biodiversity Values

82. Although endemism and species richness per se are low (as is typical of Central Indianhighland regions), the PA maintains regional connectivity that is critical to the largepredator/prey system, by providing access to Kanha National Park through Rukhad forests.

Biodiversity Pressures

83. Extensive harvesting of teak through the early 1900s drastically altered the originalvegetation in most of the forest. Grazing and fuelwood collection continue to degrade largeareas in the buffer zone. The core zone has been free of such impacts for many decades,allowing restoration.

84. There are no villages in the national park area, but with one in the sanctuary and a largepopulation on the periphery, human pressures continue to have a major impact on biodiversity:

(a) Forest fires, at a rate of about 5 sq. km per year, degrade forests and preventregeneration.

(b) Overgrazed areas have been invaded by weeds.

(c) Crop depredation by chital, nilgai and wild boar is a major source of conflictbetween villagers and forest managers.

85. Many issues center around limits on access to forest resources brought about bythe establishment of the national park (grazing is still allowed in parts of the sanctuary):NTFP collection, especially the extensive collection of tendu patta for cheroot production;antler collection; fisheries program in the reservoir and restrictions on fishing (and poaching inresponse to outside-agency control of irrigation tanks and fisheries); declining employmentopportunities in forestry operations. Water shortage is a problem.

Social Considerations86. Ecodevelopment efforts funded by Project Tiger currently extend to seven villagesand include irrigation improvements, pasture development and the provision of drinkingwater.

87. Relocation of villages inside the proposed National Park was completed in 1994,with the relocation of 27 households from Chhedia. Under the terms agreed, each

95 Annex 6

household received 2.5 ha of unirrigated revenue land, housing, access to forest resourcesplus employment opportunities in forestry operations. Forest Department officialsestimated that the process incurred expenses of Rs 49,000 per family. Forest Departmentofficials continue to support earlier relocated villages, providing employment opportunitiesin forestry activities and general infrastructure.

88. Key social issues in Pench include finding appropriate mechanisms for the activeparticipation of marginal social groups, such as women, landless and Scheduled Tribes, inthe microplanning process. The absence of NGOs able to participate in microplanning andlarger-scale monitoring activities is a concern. As access to forest resources andemployment decreases, successful alternative-income generating strategies will have toadequately address the economic needs of those concerned without undermining theircultural heritage. More information is required on local indigenous knowledge and culturalassociations with the PA.

89. Data on cultural associations with the reserve is very limited, although informationon Gonds exists on a more general level for the state. Local people consider the PenchRiver an important site for performing birth and death rites, and local tribal groupscelebrate several festivals in the PA.

Periyar Tiger Reserve

Location

90. The Periyar Tiger Reserve, located in the Idukki district of Kerala, covers an area of777 sq. km, of which 350 sq. km is the core zone (intended national park), 377 sq. km issanctuary buffer zone and 50 sq. km is a sanctuary tounsm zone.

91. In the southern half of the Western Ghat mountain range, the PA encompasses one ofIndia's 18 'biodiversity hot spots'. Situated at a general elevation of about 1,000 m (the highestpeak is 2,119 m), the hilly terrain gives rise to perennial and seasonal streams and rivers andcollects water for power generation in the Periyar reservoir. The area receives an annual rainfallof about 250-3 50 cm, from the southwest and northeast monsoons; temperatures.

92. Typical of the Western Ghat biogeographic province to which it belongs, thevegetation consists mostly of closed forest, dominated by tropical wet evergreen and moistdeciduous forests and often including large areas of bamboo brakes. Montane grasslands takeover above 1500 m. The wet evergreen forests are most important in terms of biodiversity; themore open moist deciduous forests host a large predator/prey system.

People

93. PA authorities and national consultants (IIPA) identified a population of 225,000(1981 census) within 2-km of the reserve for inclusion in the project. However, given thelimited duration of the current phase of the project, project planners need to reduce thetarget population to a more manageable size. A revised target population of 58,144 wouldselect villages within the 2-km radius. Of these, 25% belong to Scheduled Castes and 4%to Scheduled Tribes.

96 Annex 6

94. At present there are four settlements, total population 3,856, in the reserve. Three(pop. 2,036) are tribal settlements of Mannans, Paliyans, Uralis and MalaArayans,resettled from the core zone in the 1950s. The fourth settlement (pop. 1,820) is of landlessfamilies given land in 1962 under the "Grow More Food Scheme". There are no plans torelocate these groups who resettled just 30-40 years ago.

95. Tribals living within the reserve pursue a variety of livelihood strategies. In thecase of Mannans, incomes often fluctuate dramatically, with 60% of the population beingseasonally poor. Fishing provides their primary source of income, supplemented bycultivating pepper, collecting honey and resin and working for wages at nearby estates.

96. Paliyan tribals sell fuelwood and honey and work in forestry operations, in additionto farming. Urali tribals grow cash crops such as cardamon, oranges and coffee, inaddition to staple foods. Similarly, MalaArayans are agriculturists growing cash crops ofrubber, coffee and pepper as well as collecting NTFP (see Table 1). None of the resettledtribal groups have title to the land they occupy and cultivate.

97. Outside the reserve, in addition to working individual agricultural holdings, localpeople earn wages at tea, coffee, cardamom and rubber estates. Households are notclustered in traditional villages or hamlets but scattered throughout the landscape. Land iscultivated intensively, producing both staple foods and cash crops. Some encroachmenthas occurred on the northern boundary of the buffer zone.

98. Periyar Tiger Reserve is a very popular destination for tourists and pilgrims.During 1992-1993 an estimated 350,000 tourists and 30 million (from Forest DepartmentPlan; IIPA estimates 10 million) pilgrims visited parts of the reserve. The negative effectsof such huge numbers intensify as they cluster around river trips, popular driving routesand the Sabarimala Shrine.

99. Local people earn more from tourism as they establish tea-shops and lodges on theperiphery to serve visitors. Pilgrims also provide local economic opportunities, mostly as amarket for fuelwood rustled from the reserve.

100. The temple dedicated to Lord Ayyappa at Sabarimala and, to a lesser extent, theMangaladevi temple, are important religious sites attracting large numbers of pilgrimsfrom the region and elsewhere. Tribal groups, particularly those residing on the fringes ofthe reserve, also have strong cultural associations with forest areas, with forest resourcesforming key components of indigenous belief systems.

Biodiversity Values

101. About 5,000 of India's 15,000 species of flowering plants are found in Periyar'sexpanse of wet evergreen forests (often called 'rainforests'). More than 150 new species and15 new genera have been described in the last 30 years (Nair & Daniel, 1986). About 60genera, mostly monotypic, and 2,100 species are endemic to Western Ghats. Species richnessis especially high among bryophytes, pteridophytes, orchids and some select families.

102. The wet evergreen forests also harbor a rich and endemic fauna., particularly amonglower vertebrates. Of 205 species of amphibians reported in India, some 120 are from theWestern Ghats and 85 are endemic. Large proportions of whole groups of amphibians are

97 Annex 6

endemic; for example, 14 out of India's 17 species of limbless amphibians (Caesilians). Somegroups of reptiles, such as lizards, show similar propensities. Al 33 species of burrowinguropeltid snakes in India are from the Western Ghats. Among fishes, nearly 60 species areendemic to the Western Ghats.

103. Species richness among birds and mammals isalso high with most of the species in thepeninsula represented. Endemism is largely confined to smaller mammals such as the Ijon-tailedmacaque, Nilgiri langur and the stripenecked mongoose. About 15 of 560 species of birds areendemic.

104. Available information on invertebrates indicates great species richness and endemism,much of which remains to be documented. Western Ghats forests exhibit great richness andendemism among butterflies (nearly 350 species) and moths (nearly 700 species) -the secondhighest count in India.

105. Apart from supporting a rich and endemic flora and fauna, the Periyar Tiger Reservealso supports large populations of many species found elsewhere in India. The largepredator/prey system is complex. There is a large population of elephants. The small carnivorecommunity is also well-represented, with 15 species.

106. Periyar's forests connect with others outside its boundaries, especially to the south andsoutheast. Although the Western Ghats region has one of the best systems of protected areas inIndia (Rodgers & Panwar, 1985), the forests are highly fragmented. Periyar plays a key role inmaintaining the regional connectivity that ensures seasonal migration, dispersal, and geneticflow of large- and medium-sized mammals, and birds.

107. The area is the source of well-known and widely-used spices such as cardamom, blackpepper and cinnamon. Other plants are used in traditional and modern medicine, and inindustry.

Biodiversity Pressures

108. Critical environmental issues for PA authorities concern the impacts of largenumbers of visitors and of commercial forestry within the reserve. Past investments in a26-sq. km reservoir and in 55-sq. km of eucalyptus plantations are a significant presence. Veryfew humans are in residence. Wildlife monitoring during the past few years shows no reductionin numbers of large carnivores and ungulates. There are localized problems associated withcrop depredation by wild animals and demand for natural resources, particularly grazingand fuelwood. Finally, PA authorities face a range of illicit activities such as timber-smuggling, animal-poaching, NTFP collection and marijuana cultivation within the projectarea.

109. Threats to biodiversity include:

(a) Pilgrimage: millions enter the reserve every year between November and Juneto visit the Sabarimala Temple. Tree-cutting for fuelwood and mninorconstruction needs, accumulation of solid wastes, accidental fires anddisturbance to wildlife are serious problems.

(b) Tourism: in the absence of alternative energy sources, fuelwood needs forlarge numbers of tourists are mostly being met from within the PA.

98 Annex 6

(c) Hindustan Newsprints Ltd: the very existence of 55-sq. km of eucalyptusplantation has a negative impact on the PA, since monocultures support only afraction of the native biodiversity. Felling operations disturb animals and oftenlead to poaching.

(d) Ganja cultivation is a major threat, because forests are often clear-felled for thispurpose and cultivators often engage in poaching. It is also a serious law-and-order problem.

(e) NTFP: a wide variety of non-timber forest products such as cinnamon,dammar and honey are collected indiscriminately. Some of these activities havedirect impact; harvesting cinnamon bark often kills the tree. Indirect impactsinclude accidental and intentional fires.

(f) Fire: dry-season (December to May), forest fires are often man-made. Theyaffect mostly grasslands and the drier, often degraded, forests, hamperingregeneration.

Social Considerations

110. Key social issues in Periyar concern the difficulties faced by tribal groups and themanagement of cultural sites. Mannan tribals experience seasonal poverty due to aninability to manage large amounts of cash influxes from cash crop sales. Coordinatedefforts are clearly required to address this problem and help integration into the largereconomy. Given increasing restrictions on access to forest resources, alternativelivelihoods for traditional forest-dwellers will need to be both culturally sensitive andeconomically feasible. There is also a need to manage cultural sites and visitors in the PAin a manner which would minimize negative environmental impacts and increase supportfor biodiversity conservation.

Ranthambhore Tiger Reserve

Location

111. Located in the Sawai Madhopur district in southeastern Rajasthan, the RanthambhoreTiger Reserve covers an area of 1334.6 sq. km, consisting of a national park of 392.5 sq. km,(274.5 core zone and 118 sq. km buffer zone) the Sawai Man Singh Sanctuary (127.6 sq. km),Keladevi Sanctuary (674 sq. kin), Kawalji Garne Reserve (7.6 sq. kin) and some reserved andprotected forests (132.9 sq. km).

112. The Aravallis and Vindhyan mountain ranges meet in this area, presenting two differentgeological formations. Altitude ranges from 215 m to 507 m, temperatures range between 40and 470 C, and the annual rainfall is about 80 cm. There are six lakes and three perennialstreams within the PA.

113. Classified as being in the semi-arid biogeographic zone, Gujrat-Rajwara province, thedominant vegetation in the reserve is tropical dry deciduous and dry mixed deciduous forest.Human impact in many areas has reduced the original vegetation to dry deciduous scrub and

99 Annex 6

grasslands, the latter presently having important wildlife values. The vegetation in the plateau isgrassland and open woodland, dominated by drought-resistant species such asAnogeissuspendula, Acacia catechu and Boswellia serrata

114. The rich assemblage of large predators/prey includes tiger, leopard, striped hyena,chital, sambar, nilgai and Indian gazelle. Other species of interest are caracal ruddy mongoose,several water birds and marsh crocodile. Nothing is known about the lower vertebrates andinvertebrates.

People

115. National consultants identified 211,695 people within 10 km of the reserve to beincluded in the project. Considering limits on time and facilities for the current phase ofthe project, this number has been reduced to 64,000.

116. WWF-India (1994) identified 85,000 people, in 85 villages, for possible inclusionin ecodevelopment activities. Four more villages, with a population of 1,210, are on orvery close to national park boundaries; another 3,067 people live in Kailadevi and SawaiMansingh sanctuaries. Project activities would need to address major urban settlementsnear reserve boundaries, such as Sawai Madhopur, Khandar and Karauli (combinedpopulation, 82,000). Data on the reduced target population indicate that 13% are Berwas(a Scheduled Caste) and 32% Meenas, the dominant Scheduled Tribe. Other groupsinclude Gujjars (25%) and Malis (15%). (Khan, 1994)

117. Most area villagers live on crop and livestock production, supplemented by someincome from NTFP (see Table 1). Agricultural villages occupy revenue land and havevariable access to communally-held forest land and various types of state forests. Primarilypastoralist communities of Gujjars keep buffaloes and cattle, and depend economically onthe sale of milk products. The reserve, and particularly the outlying sanctuaries, lie on themigratory routes of nomadic sheep herders. Tourism is becoming an increasinglyimportant activity for urban settlements, especially Sawai Madophur, although it is unclearwhether local residents capture much of the tourist expenditure.

118. Approximately 29,000 tourists and 180,000 pilgrims visited the reserve during1992-93. Most tourists base their visits in Sawai Madhopur, where a number of privateand state hotels and guest-houses are run mostly by out-of-town entrepreneurs. PAauthorities have made efforts to increase local participation by training guides, whoseemployment represents only a small part of tourist expenditure. Other opportunities forlocal people appear to be limited to employment in hotels and guest houses.

119. Ranthambhore Tiger Reserve protects a significant cultural heritage in addition towildlife. Like the Kailadevi and Ganesh temples, which attract large numbers of pilgrims,Ranthambhore Fort (built in 994 AD) has come to define the landscape around it.Resettled villagers continue to visit places of religious significance associated with theiroriginal village location.

120. Twelve villages were resettled from the national park between 1976 and 1979.Terms agreed at the time have gradually materialized; e.g., legal title to land and facilitiessuch as schools. There are proposals for relocation of four more villages, inhabited mainlyby Gujjars, from close to the park boundary. Two villages, Padra and Kuthkuli, have

100 Annex 6

expressed some interest. As elsewhere, those without cultivable land appear to be morewilling to relocate than those with access to land. The other two villages, Indala andMohdungri have also reported some interest in moving if they receive land of their choice.

Biodiversity Values

121. In undisturbed semi-arid areas, palatable grass and shrubs support one of the highest-biomass livestock populations, although species diversity and endemismper se are low.Ranthambhore, with its complex grazing system and rich assemblage of large predators/prey,typifies its biogeographic zone. Pure stands ofAnogeissuspendula, characteristic of theAravilli Hill ranges, has almost disappeared from most of its range except the RanthambhoreTiger Reserve. As a forested hill tract, the reserve plays an important role in soil and waterconservation.

Biodiversity Pressures

122. Not extensively worked in the past, the core zone remains free of the heavy humanpressure suffered by the rest of the PA in the present. Villagers and urban residents placeintense demand on natural resources in other zones, particularly for grazing and fuelwood,which at present cannot be satisfied outside the reserve. As fuelwood requirements fornumerous villages and a few large towns are gathered from the PA, large areas are severelydegraded, affecting plant and animal communities.

123. Nearly 250,000 head of cattle are seasonally dependent on resources in the PA, mostlyoutside the core zone, further degrading large areas. Wildlife and livestock end up in directcompetition; native vegetation lacks time to regenerate; weeds invade. Meanwhile, somevillagers on the periphery report losing up to 30% of their crops to wild animals.

124. Although poaching, often by the Moghia tribe, had been chronic to this area, in recentyears there has been a reported increase that especially threatens PA tigers.

125. The increasing numbers of visitors to the reserve pose problems of PAmanagement, since tourists concentrate in the core zone, and pilgrims at temple sites.

Social Considerations

126. Ranthambhore has a history of hostile relationships between local people and PAauthorities, problems of coordination among NGOs and PA authorities, delays in termsand processes of resettlement, and increasing pressures on resources from growing urbanand rural populations. Outsider encroachment on village common lands removes that landfrom use for fuelwood and fodder plantations. Indigenous and local knowledge can makeimportant contributions toward ecological restoration in the buffer zone and relieving thepressures on the PA.

101 Annex 7

Annex 7: Improved PA Management':

Overview

1. Improved PA management would use specialist advice, studies, workshops,associated travel costs, training, and staff to:

(a) Improve PA planning processes and building capacity to

(i) improve PA management plans

(ii) incorporate PA concerns into regional planning and regulation

(b) Protect and manage ecosystems and habitats within the PA to:

(i) restore ecosystems and habitats

(ii) control fire, poaching, and animals

(iii) manage enterprise and visitor enclaves and

(c) Upgrade PA amenities for field staff.

Improving PA Planning Processes

Strengthening PA Management Plans

2. Context. Management plans exist for all seven project protected areas (PAs). Theyusually cover a 5 to 10 year implementation period. However, most of these plans haveexpired or will need updating in the next few years (see Annex 2). These plans are also notas comprehensive as they ought to be; in particular they do not take fully into account thelinks between PAs and the local people who depend on the resources contained withinthem. In addition, PA plans are not adequately integrated into the broader ecological,socioeconomic and regional sphere. Forest department staff have largely managed as PAislands set aside from development

3. Additions. Revision of PA plans would include, in addition to normal updating,specific consideration of

(a) More complete incorporation of ecological considerations in PAmanagement

(b) Broadening participation and cooperation of local people and outsidegroups

(c) Incorporation of initiatives supported under other project components.

4. Incorporation of Ecological Considerations. Management of ecological systemswithin PAs requires an understanding and appreciation of ecological principles andprocesses operating in and around the PA and the acceptance of the concept that PA

IGuidelines subject to revision to reflect experience in practice. Revision will be documented throughexchanges of letters and comprehensive updating as needed.

102 Annex 7

management is a specialized form of land use. The context of the project PAs gives scopefor improving ecological planning and management. Some specific issues for considerationin PA planning are:

(a) Rationalization of PA boundaries. Most PA boundaries and thedemarcation of core, buffer, tourism, and other use zones are largelydefined on administrative or legal bases. They often do not reflectprotection requirements for the full range of ecosystems or species in thearea. Ecological considerations include the protection of representativesamples of ecologically important habitats and migratory routes of farranging species, and the adequacy of the shape and size of PAs needed tocover the entire range of botanical, ecological, and geomorphologicalfeatures. Ecological boundaries used as the basis for defining PA limits andzoning may also increase the potential for maintaining and establishing linksor corridors between isolated wildlife populations whose members havebeen fragmented by human interference and physical barriers.Rationalization would also take into account the tenure rights of localpeople (including customary tenure rights of tribals) living within theprotected areas. Currently there is very little information available for eachPA to provide a sufficient basis for an ecological approach to PAmanagement. The project would therefore support the preparation ofbaseline ecosystems maps for each PA. These maps would includeinformation on the distribution and diversity of ecosystems within andadjacent to the PAs. They would also include other information such asgeomorphological features, distribution of communication systems,regional development features, location of villages, land use, and so forth.They would be used for making decisions as to the management and zoningof land within and outside the PAs. Boundary changes, if any, resultingfrom the rationalization analysis would be envisaged as a one-time decision;because continuing boundary changes could undermine regulatoryeffectiveness.

(b) Management of forests and other lands surrounding PAs. A crucialelement in conservation strategies is the protection of biodiversity outsidethe PAs as well as inside. Reliance on PAs alone risks creating a siegementality rigorously protective of species and communities inside theboundaries, while exposing those outside to practices that promote theirexploitation or destruction. Most of the project PAs are bordered byreserve forests managed for timber, bamboo, and non-forest products, withlittle or no consideration for the conservation of biodiversity. The projectwould consider mutually enhancing ways to promote conservation in bothPAs and their surrounding areas. This would enable PA plans torecommend improvements to operations in surrounding areas that wouldenhance biological diversity and ecological conditions in buffer and fringezones. The plans would include workshops and technical support for thereview, development, and coordination of ecologically friendly guidelines

103 Annex 7

to be incorporated into forest working plans and other land use operationsand mechanisms. PA authorities should coordinate with the territorial andproduction arms of their respective forestry departments and other landdevelopment agencies in developing and implementing the new guidelines.

(c) Protection of ecosystems and habitats. More often than not, PAs aremanaged with an emphasis on the conservation of the larger, charismaticspecies found within the PA (tiger, elephant, leopard, lion, etc.). Thesespecies are the more important, and often the most threatened species inthe PAs. However, specific strategies and management interventions arenecessary not only to protect the individual species, but to also preserve thelarger ecosystems in which they live, and to meet India's obligations underinternational conventions (e.g., Ramsar). PA planning updates shouldtherefore emphasize an ecological approach with a view to managing thetotality of botanical and zoological species and ecosystems in the area,including boundaries and linkages between ecosystems such as riparianfringes, floodplains, and other similar habitats.

5. Broadening Participation and Cooperation of Local People and OutsideGroups. Since ecodevelopment is considered to encompass all interactions betweenpeople and PAs, the full range of options available to PA managers to enhance the inter-relationships should be taken into consideration in PA planning.

(a) Processes for stakeholder participation in decision making throughdirect consultation, representation on committees, participation inplanning workshops, etc. People living in and around PAs are dependenton PA resources and are the most affected by the establishment of a PA,but are rarely invited to participate in decisions regarding its management.This has often alienated PA neighbors. Similarly PAs have lost support andface increased outside threats from other agencies and stakeholders whohave been left out of PA planning. PA planners would provide anopportunity for these groups, including NGOs, to take part in the updatingof PA plans. Planning workshops and informal village-level meetings wouldidentify ways of involving local groups more directly in PA management..

(b) Mitigation (within the PA boundaries) of negative impacts of PAs onpeople. Damage to crops and livestock caused by wildlife in areassurrounding PAs is a major cause of hostility towards PAs. Such hostilitywill block effective village ecodevelopment programs if relations betweenPAs and local people are not improved through measures to reduce theimpact of crop damage. The problems of crop damage would be discussedas a supplement to the participatory microplanning of villageecodevelopment. Measures for their mitigation could include research onanimal behavior, and the location of site-specific solutions to problemswithin the PA boundaries in consultation with the affected people.

(c) Winning cooperation of local people by sharing PA byproducts andemployment opportunities. Past experience has shown that PA relations

104 Annex 7

with local inhabitants can be enhanced when people see the PA asproviding them with direct benefits and hav,e a long-term stake in sustainingresources. Such opportunities exist. An interpretation of the WildlifeProtection Act allows the chief wildlife warden of each state to restorehabitats within the PA to improve conditions for wildlife. If properlystructured and implemented, this provides for generous benefit sharingarrangements of PA byproducts such as teak removal, employment,cutting grass from firelines, sustainable NTFP collection, etc. Thesebenefits would be of mutual benefit to both the PA and local people andforge cooperation. Similarly tribal villagers with intimate knowledge of thePA can be given preference for employment as PA staff Employmentopportunities also exist in infrastructure construction, road maintenance,anti-poaching programs, community protection groups, etc.

(d) Developing cost and benefit sharing arrangements for PA enterprises.New strategies for tourism and visitor management in PAs could alsoprovide direct benefits to local people and scope for broadening localparticipation in management and benefit-sharing. Such opportunities couldinclude enterprise operation and ownership of tourism facilities, provisionof guide services, handicrafts, catering, etc. Revenue could be captured andshared by designating a portion of entry fees, licenses, concessions,royalties, commercial use of indigenous knowledge, and so forth to localparticipants. Of particular importance to the project would be studiesaimed at ensuring financial sustainability of PAs beyond the life of theproject and at developing participatory ecotourism strategies.

(e) Developing inter-agency linkages in support of PAs.. Alliances wouldbe forged through formal (state or PA-level coordinating committees,planning workshops, etc.) and informal mechanisms. Such linkages haveseveral purposes.

(i) Leveraging financial and political support. Agencies whosework depends on the benefits derived from the protection of naturalareas can be supportive of the PA authority even when they are notdirectly involved. Examples are links between the irrigation sectorthat depends on the watershed value of the PA to supportdownstream water development works, or the public and privatetourism development agencies that depend on PA resources forattracting visitors. In some of the project PAs there areopportunities for direct cooperation with these agencies to generateresources and benefits for local people and thereby win support forthe PA. In Nagarhole, PA authorities and the Taj Group of Hotelshave a common interest in maintaining the health of the PA andshould work together to ensure the reduction of threats to the PAand the protection of its resources

(ii) Disseminating PA plans Political support is needed for adequatefunding. PA management plans would be widely circulated in a

105 Annex 7

form and content that is easily understood by local people who tendto see PAs as chunks of productive land that are legallyinaccessible.. Specific awareness and publicity programs should belaunched in each PA to gain support for conservation.

(iii) Debating critical PA issues. Such issues are usually complex andsociopolitical and can have such wide ranging repercussions, that aresolution may lie beyond the scope of the PA manager. Theproject establishes channels for ensuring wider discussion of theseissues that include PA planning workshops, inter-agencycoordination fora, special studies, etc. In resolving interagencyland-use conflicts and overlaps in planning, it is suggested that PAmanagement authorities strive to establish such a relationship withinthe overall framework of the state-level coordinating committees.PA management authorities should have at their disposal sufficientresources to bring technical support for examining the conflicts anddefining mutually beneficial resolution of them based on scientificstudy and analysis.

(iv) Integrating implementation with efforts by different localagencies and specialized groups. Channels of coordination,collaboration, and information sharing would be created under theproject with research, education, and planning programs and NGOnetworks to help harmonize activities. PA management authoritiesshould take the initiative in using these channels to ensurecomplementarity of activities and a more effective deployment offinancial and manpower resources. For example, hydrologicalinvestments could include the protection of reservoirs or catchmentareas that would cover a portion of the PA management costs.Another possible result would be the modification of timber harvestpatterns in PA surroundings to reduce damage to the environmentor wildlife.

6. Financial Sustainability Strategy. The project would support a state-levelstrategy study on financial sustainability. For most states, it would not be politicallyfeasible to expect to adopt this strategy within the first two years of the project, so the PAmanagement plan would reflect the current status of the strategy. Terms of reference forthe strategy study, are included at the end of this annex.

7. Incorporation of Initiatives Supported Under Other Project Components.The revised PA plans would also incorporate project initiatives such as the integration ofPA concerns into regional plans (described below), the operation of villageecodevelopment activities (Annex 8), environmental education and visitor management(Annex 9), monitoring and research (Annex 10), project management(Annex 11),environmental review (Annex 17) social assessment (Annex 18), and people in the PAs(Annex 20).

106 Annex 7

8. Steps to Improve PA Management Plans. In order to address currentinadequacies and bring in new considerations for improving PA plans, the WildlifeInstitute of India (WII) would be contracted to review existing PA plans, develop draftguidelines for plan update, organize a national workshop to consider the draft guidelines,and provide training to PA staff for preparation of revised plans, (see terns of reference inAnnex 11). The project would also support interdisciplinary planning teams, PA-levelworkshops, publicity for management plans, and arrangements for plan updating on acontinuing basis. The process would include the following steps

(a) Establishing Broad Operational Framework. WIl would review theexisting PA plans of the seven project areas to deternine how far they meetthe considerations described above. A national workshop, includingrepresentatives from the seven project PAs, would formulate guidelines forupdating PA plans. The strategy would incorporate procedures forupdating the plans, would identify technical and scientific support needed,and define a schedule for preparing the plans.

(b) Agreement on PA-Level Framework. The broad national strategy wouldprovide the basis for adjustment to meet site-specific needs. Workshops atthe PA level would identify key issues and define approaches for identifyingand integrating regional and local concerns. Regional development agenciesand other stakeholder groups, NGOs, local community representatives, etc.would be consulted and participate in these workshops.

(c) Special studies to address PA concerns. As part of the plan revisionprocess, the project would support specific studies for each PA. Studieswould include, for example, development education and awarenessstrategies, assessment of environmental impacts of specific regionaldevelopment programs on PAs (e.g. impact of the North Koel hydropowerproject on Palamau in Bihar, impact of fisheries development in Pench inMadhya Pradesh, etc.). Strategies to be supported under the project wouldinclude ecotourism development strategies for Periyar in Kerala, Pench inMadhya Piadesh, and Ranthambhore in Rajasthan; a strategy formanagement of the Sabrimala Temple enclave in Periyar (Kerala), etc.Since baseline maps of the PAs are not comprehensive or do not exist, theproject would provide support for the preparation of these maps. Therecommendations of the studies would be incorporated into the respectivePA plans.

(d) Form Planning Team. Previous PA plans have been prepared by a singleindividual or a small group of forest department staff. However, theupdatef. - snre new components, such as regional and policy evaluations,that, vxv. .d need the services of an inter-disciplinary team. The necessarymix of sk;ls in planning, ecology, sociology, regional development, etc. isnot available within the PA staff. These services would, therefore, have tobe drawn from outside agencies, NGOs, and planning institutions so theproject would provide financial resources for PA update, including the

107 Annex 7

hiring of specific technical services, as and when required. PA managerswould select a planning officer for each PA who would coordinate andguide the revision of the plan. The planning officer would either be the PAmanager himself (if he has the time) or another officer, working in closecollaboration with him. These officers would be provided training at theWII in plan preparation.

(e) Gather basic background information and prepare the plan. To bedone after the PA-level workshops and concurrently with the special policyand technical studies in support of PA planning. This will consist of reviewof all materials available, enabling legislation, socioeconomic and culturalinformation; field inventory and collection of new and additional data;review of potential effects of regional development activities and specialrequirements of adjacent inhabitants; and compilation of the plan Thisprocess is expected to take about 8 to 12 months and would includeregular consultations with technical specialists, regional developmentagencies, NGOs, local communities, etc.

(f) Finalize and publicize plan. Before finalization, all stakeholder groups,regional, local, and national, as well as the Bank would have theopportunity to review the plan and to comment on its recommendations inorder to better ensure consensus and understanding. An environmentalimpact review by a national institution contracted for the purpose, wouldensure that plan recommendations are in keeping with the objectives ofconservation of biodiversity and beneficial to the environment. This isrecommended to give more legitimacy to PA plans, since they currentlyhave no legal status or approval process. PA managers would ensurepublicity for finalized plans, to broaden understanding, awareness, andacceptance among regional agencies, community groups, and politicians.

(g) Establish arrangements for plan updating on a continuing basis in thefuture.

Incorporating PA Concerns into Regional Planning and Regulation9. Context.. Local and regional activities in the vicinity of PAs, including theprograms of other development agencies, may threaten the integrity of PAs or theimplementation of the ecodevelopment strategy.. Examples of possible threats in the sevenproject PAs include the North Koel multipurpose hydroelectric project in Palamau, thepotential reservoir and irrigation conveyance project in Buxa, and fisheries development inthe reservoir in Pench (for more information and other examples see Annex 6). PAs can besuccessful in realizing their long-term conservation goals only to the extent that theirpriorities can become integrated into large scale land use planning initiatives andregulations at the local and regional levels. To attain this, PA managers need to identifyand assess at an early stage, activities with the potential for harming PAs.

10. Project Covenant on Regional Impacts. On a more specific level, projectinvestments would be cost effective only to the extent to which activities outside the scope

108 Annex 7

of the project do not undermine the project objectives and strategy. To address thisconcem, assurances were obtained at negotiations that the state and national governmentswould take steps acceptable to the Bank to ensure that activities outside the scope of theproject would not undermine biodiversity conservation within the PAs, and would notundermine the implementation of the ecodevelopment strategy in and around the PAs. Toaccomplish this, the government would apply its own environmental assessmentregulations and would also incorporate additional standards described below. If thegovernment proceeded with an activity that undermined conservation or theecodevelopment strategy according to the criteria listed below, the project would cease toprovide financing to that PA.

11. Criteria to Assess Adverse Impacts. Regional activities would underminebiodiversity conservation in a project PA or undermine the ecodevelopment strategy ifthey cause:

(a) A probable increase in the level of encroachment into the PA that is notadequately mitigated. This would include displacement of people bysubmergence from a dam in the vicinity of a PA without an effectiveresettlement and rehabilitation program to mitigate PA encroachment.Bank experience has demonstrated that careful consultation with affectedpeople and restoration of the incomes would be essential in this situation.

(b) Probable disruption of migrations of ecologically important species---forexample, net loss of wildlife corridors.

(c) Fragmentation, or other change in legal status of any part of the PA thatwould materially and adversely affect the viability of ecologically importantecosystems and species

(d) Fragmentation, or other change in legal status of any part of the PA thatwould materially and adversely affect the ecodevelopment strategy ofdecreasing negative interactions and increasing collaboration between localpeople and government managers. To be consistent with theecodevelopment strategy, conversion, fragmentation, or changes in legalstatus would need to comply with the Bank's Operational Directive 4.20on Indigenous People, which is described in Annex 20. This would includerecognizing and resolving the customary tenure rights of indigenouspeople.

(e) Displacement of people in and around the PAs in ways that wouldmaterially and adversely affect the project strategy of decreasing negativeinteractions and increasing collaboration between local people andgovernment managers. As in the case of (a) above, Bank experience hasdemonstrated that that careful consultation with affected people andrestoration of the incomes would be essential.

12. Application of Criteria. Project support for regional planning and regulationwould provide the mechanism for the project staff to ensure compliance with the projectcovenant on regional impacts. During the first year of the project there would be an initial

109 Annex 7

inventory and preliminary assessment of existing and proposed activities that wouldinclude advice on extent of adverse impact and need for environmental assessment orother follow-up actions (see terms of reference in Annex 11). This exercise would result inone of the four possible outcomes:

(a) The CCF (Wildlife) may be able to immediately certify that the activitieswould have no adverse impacts.

(b) Situations where impacts are minimal and do not require full assessmentmay, instead of a full environmental assessment, require interagencydiscussions and adjustment to meet PA and wildlife interests as representedby the CCF (Wildlife).

(c) The CCF (Wildlife) may be able to immediately recognize that the likelyimpact of the activities would be adverse according to the above criteria,would not be possible to mitigate, and therefore should not proceed.

(d) PA authorities may decide that the activities need a full environmentalassessment and/or resettlement plan including scoping/baseline survey,consultation, management plans, and monitoring plans. MOEF would thenreview this environmental assessment and/or resettlement plan, making useof existing environmental protection regulations and the project guidanceon resettlement best practise. MOEF would then require that the proposeddevelopment program include adequate funds to implement, manage andmonitor the environmental management and/or resettlement plan. Duringthe review, MOEF may conclude that the likely impact of the activitieswould be adverse according to the above criteria, would not be possible tomitigate, and therefore should not proceed. In addition to monitoring bythe sponsoring agency, the CCF, Wildlife, with support of contractedspecialists as necessary, would independently monitor the implementationof the environmental mangement and/or resettlement plan on behalf ofMOEF.

13. Conflict Resolution. Conflicts raised by stakeholders, NGOs, and others over theapplication of criteria that cannot be resolved by the state CCF, Wildlife or by MOEFofficials responsible for environmental assessment compliance, would be refered to theProject Steering Committee, which would include NGOs and other contracted specialistsinvolved with the project at the national level. The Bank would be kept informed of theseconflicts and their resolution. The project also provides monitoring and independent NGOstudies which may identify potential conflicts and suggest possible resolutions. The Bankreview would focus on whether the Government is complying with the agreed guidelinesand procedures. The Bank would also retain the authority to interpret and apply theregional impacts covenant as necessary.

14. Capacity Building. Project support would not focus solely on enforcement of thelegal covenant. The project would help PA authorities to develop appropriate mechanismsthat would provide the continuous and sustainable detection and monitoring of outsideactivities. Under a project contract, an expert instititution would develop guidelines for theintegration of PA concerns into regional planning and regulation, including detection,

110 Annex 7

assessment, and monitoring (see Annex 11 for terms of reference). The contractedinstitution would investigate the application of the Environmental Protection Act (EPA) inthe PA context. In particular the contractor would identify the nature and scope of actionsto be prescribed, describe the permissible limits of applicability of the law, and recommendthe next steps to strengthen appropriate monitoring, regulation, and enforcementmechanisms. The contractor would also identify adjustments required for investmentproposals that have already received environmental clearnance based on earlier, lesscomprehensive standards. Where necessary, contractor would obtain assistance from otherspecialists (e.g., resettlement specialists, anthropologists and tribal representatives). Theproject would help PA authorities to acquire the minimum skills needed to recognize themajor potential impacts of surrounding developments. The project would also fundtechnical expertise to analyze conflicts and develop appropriate strategies for mitigationand avoidance.

15. Environmental Site Review. When used wisely and early in the planning phase,site review associated with environmental assessments (EA) can be an importantregulatory control for protection of PA resources. Wherever possible, PA authoritiesshould attempt to persuade agencies concerned to consider alternative sites or routesoutside the PAs, or to take adequate precautions to avoid or reduce adverse impacts onthe PA. For large-scale proposed investment proposals in the vicinity of the PAs, theproject would make use of existing environmental protection regulations that give specialnotified status to the areas surrounding PAs. The project would also include provision toanalyze smaller-scale activities in the vicinity of the PA at the local level, as well asproject-related investments themselves. Each PA would obtain the services of anecologist and sociologist on contract to assist the PA authorities address theenvironmental and social concerns of both project and non-project activities. The projectwould also include guidance and specialized support for continuing environmental reviewand social assessment of proposed project investments.

16. Resettlement Caused by Non-Project Activities. Non-project activities causingresettlement could affect the project either by contributing to encroachment into fragileparts of the PA or by undermining the spirit of collaboration being established through theecodevelopment strategy. To prevent these negative impacts, resettlement andrehabilitation for these activities would need to incorporate best practice, including (a) anaccurate and current baseline survey, (b) careful and comprehensive consultation withlocal people and host communities, (c) restoration of living standard of local people, (d)full compensation for land and other assets including those of indigenous people heldunder customary tenure, (e) support acceptable to affected persons during transitionalphase, and (f) an explicit strategy and plan for sustainable encroachment control. Thedetailed plan documentation would confirm consistency with these best practices. Subjectto decisions to be taken during microplanning, village ecodevelopment investments in andaround the PAs may help to restore the living standards of local people. Subject to theadditional consultation, the special voluntary relocation program of the EcodevelopmentProject might also provide additional financing for people living within the PAs. However,such financing by the Ecodevelopment Project would be incidental, and would be directedtoward ecodevelopment objectives, not the needs of non-project investments. Agencies

111 Annex 7

initiating the non-project activities (e.g. irrigation department, electicity board), not thestate forest departments, would be responsible for the full costs of resettlement andrehabilitation associated with their investments.

17. Liaison. The project would also support the incorporation of PA considerationsinto regional planning on a more general and comprehensive level. Assessment andmitigation of regional impacts and integration of PA concerns into regional developmentplans requires good working relationships with local and regional planning andmanagement authorities and with local communities. These relationships can be based on aclear formulation of local conservation needs and objectives that can in themselves usefullycontribute to the development of regional plans Such plans should attempt to set goalsand standards for the development and conservation of natural resources since these willhelp to guarantee that the output of multiple land-use systems can be sustained withoutforec'osing options for future use.

Ecosytem Protection and Habitats

18. Protecting and Managing Ecosystems and Habitats. During projectpreparation, the PA authorities developed an indicative list of activities based on existingplans and available information. The scope and nature of these activities differ from PA toPA and in most cases would be very site specific. The broad categories of activities are:

(a) Ecosystem and habitat restoration

(b) Improving fire, poaching, and animal control

(c) Managing enterprise and visitor enclaves.

The updated PA management plans described above, once completed, would determinethe specific content of investments in this subcomponent. For each PA, the states wouldsubmit the updated PA management plans for approval by the Bank prior toimplementation of the plan. However, investments in ecosystem protection andmanagement would be required prior to the likely completion of the PA management planupdating..

Initial Investments

19. Eligibility Criteria of Initial Investments. To ensure the environmentalsoundness of such interim activities, PA officials would have to demonstrate first that theactivities would:

(a) Conserve biodiversity

(b) Be urgently needed

(c) Not foreclose option1s being considered for the updated PA managementplans

(d) Be consistent with existing PA management plans

(e) Be technically feasible

(f) Not erode customary tenure rights of tribals and

112 Annex 7

(g) Be environmentally sustainable.

20. Planning and Clearance Process for Early Investments in Protecting andManaging Ecosystems. To accomplish the above, PA managers would follow the stepslisted below:

(a) Preparation of annual operational work plan and endorsement of work planby PA Coordinating Committee

(b) Review of annual work plans by PA director in collaboration withcontracted organizations to ensure activities meet the eligibility criteriaoutlined above (although subject to further environmental and socialreview)

(c) Preparation of site plans, engineering specifications, layouts, etc. for eachactivity, including a review of their environmental and social impact; andreview and approval of site plans and designs by the World Bank, asappropriate

(d) Implementation of activities according to workplan

(e) Monitoring of progress, performance, and impact of PA managementactivities in collaboration with contracted organizations

(f) Incorporation of monitoring findings and interim status reports on PAmanagement plan updating into subsequent annual work plans.

Types of Investments

21. Ecosystem and Habitat Restoration. The project would aim to restore andmaintain biodiversity in the PAs through well targeted and researched restoration worksand associated staff supervision aimed at improving the viability of habitats andpopulations in the PAs and immediate surroundings. Although restoration technologiescannot quickly restore the diversity that existed prior to degradation, they can break thecycle of resource degradation and re-establish a community of indigenous organisms. Inthe project PAs, existing restoration plans include eradication of weeds, improvingconditions for natural regeneration of food and fodder species, stabilizing and improvingconditions in areas prone to extensive soil erosion; and special control structures such aselectric fencing and stone walls to reduce grazing pressure on fragile areas from domesticanimals. Additional programs in indicative plans include the water conservation works inareas where there is a serious shortage of water for endangered animals during the dryseasons. The location and extent of the ecosystem and habitat restoration works wouldevolve from the project-initiated PA management planning process. These interventionswould be site-specific and based on a careful consideration of alternatives and the need tomaintain or enhance ecosystem integrity of the PA.

22. Fire, Poaching, and Animal Control. Effective conservation of PAs can only beachieved by restricting or controlling activities that might have a detrimental impact on PAresources. Investments would include communications equipment, a limited number ofvehicles and boats, minor access track improvements, fire watch towers, sign boards, andboundary markers. Enhanced training on fire management would also be supported. The

113 Annex 7

project would also encourage and support programs for enlisting the support of PAneighbors in PA management related activities, including employment as guards andwatchers, anti-poaching squads, community protection groups, etc. Special animal controlmeasures including structures such as electric fencing and stone walls would help preventelephant straying out into the wider areas of human habitation surrounding Buxa, Palamauand Nagarhole. Site-specific animal damage control structures directed at villages in theimmediate periphery would also be supported under the ecodevelopment component ofthe project.

Upgrading Amenities for PA Staff

23. The selection of the seven PAs was premised in part on the fact that these PAsalready had good facilities and would not require extensive infrastructure improvements.Nevertheless, some upgrading of the amenities for field staff would be required and wouldcomprise limited staff quarters for the lowest ranked PA staff, patrol camps, and drinkingwater and electricity supplies for some locations. In addition, career development trainingand field kits for staff would be supported under the project.

Technical Assistance

Draft Terms of Reference for Mapping of the PA and Surrounding AreasReports to: PA Field Director

Objectives Produce a baseline map of the PA and surrounding areas consisting of featuresrelevant to PA management and ecodevelopment activities. Such a map would alsoform a basis for monitoring changes in subsequent years.

Responsibilities: Review and catalogue the availability of satellite imageries, maps, and otherdocuments relevant to the production of a baseline map of the PA and surroundingareas;

Produce geocoded baseline maps of the PA and surrounding areas consisting ofclassified vegetation, topographical and drainage features, location of villages andtowns, water bodies, major infrastructure facilities, etc. on an appropriate scale,using existing maps, digital analysis, satellite imagery, and ground truthing;

Provide a document for interpretation of the map, consisting of extent, status, andspecies composition of various vegetation types, etc.; and

Provide a set of guidelines for periodic updating of the maps.

Duration: One year

Qualifications: Qualifications and experience in the interpretation of satellite and photo imageries,particularly relating to natural vegetation and land use. Experience in thepreparation of baseline land use maps.

Draft Terms of Reference for PA EcologistReports to: PA Field Director

114 Annex 7

Objectives To update PA management plans to ensure improved incorporation of ecologicalconsiderations; the effective involvement of local communities and otherstakeholder groups; to integrate PA concerns into regional planning andregulation; to undertake environmental review of PA management and villageecodevelopment investments; and to develop and strengthen policy andmanagement framework for improved PA management planning.

Responsibilities: To assist PA authorities to:

- coordinate PA management planning updating processes, includingincorporation of ecological considerations and conduct of planning workshops;liaise with outside agencies, NGOs, research institutions and universities duringthe planning exercise; and provide support for plan preparation.

-prepare action plans for ecosystem protection investments prior to updatedmanagement plans, arrange appropriate review of investment proposals to ensurethat they meet eligibility criteria for financing, and document review process andconclusions;

- conduct environmental review including developing documentation of PAmanagement and village ecodevelopment investments; and

- training PA staff to perform environmental review functions.

Duration: Five years.

Qualifications: Master's or higher degree in wildlife conservation, resource management orrelated subject. Five or more years of field management or research experience innatural forests, wetlands or other terrestrial ecosystems.

Draft Terms of Reference for PA-Level Financial Sustainability StudyReports to: Secretary, State Forest Department

Responsibilities: Analyze existing funding sources and financing mechanisms used for the PA andfor similar entities in the state.

Analyze the opportunities for recovering costs of selected services.

Analyze the range of potential funding sources and financing mechanismssuggested in the overseas examples identified by the national-level study. Thisanalysis would include consideration of entrance fees, transport rental fees,camera/video rental fees, guide fees, guesthouse fees, concession fees, royalties,donations from the public and from the private sector.

In consultation with the PA Field Director, make rough projections for the post-project budget required to maintain and further restore biodiversity in the PA.

In consultation with the support teams facilitating the village ecodevelopmentactivities, make rough projections for the post-project budget required to maintainand further implement reciprocal agreements.

Consider options of PA versus state-wide sources and mechanisms.

Identify and meet with key stakeholders who could proactively promote theadoption of new funding sources and mechanisms.

Recommend strategy on how the PA and the associated village ecodevelopmentprogram can achieve financial sustainability.

115 Annex 7

If appropriate, draft formal proposals and/or government orders required for therecommended sources and mechanisms.

Present draft report (in English and in the official state language) covering theabove to a workshop of key decision makers, and produce a final report whichresponds to comments made during the workshop

Duration: Two to six months, depending on the state, over a two year period.

Qualifications: Financial and Legal expertise. Would have qualifications and experience thatcommands high degree of professional respect and prominence. Strong writingskills.

Training

24. A major training program would be supported under the project to build capacitywithin the PAs for improved management of the PA system. Each State has developed atraining plan for PA planning and management. As listed in the indicative training planpresented below, this will include participation in training courses, workshops, study toursand seminars at both national and international levels. In particular, higher level staff(range officer grades and above) would be trained in wildlife management at the WII,participate in specialized workshops in various national and international institutions, andundertake study tours.

25. Guards and foresters who are the most important, but often most ignored, unit inthe PAs would be specifically incorporated into the project training programs. In-servicetraining programs would be developed particularly for these personnel within the State.Specially tailored study tours would be organized on a regular basis for these personnel tovisit PAs within the state or neighboring states, so that they would be exposed to newmanagement activities.

Indicative Training Plan - PA Management, E E - T ~~~~...... .- . -E--Ei--E-iE. .-.-.E ...... ..-... ..E..Ei-EE.--

Course Topic Type: : of cri pr burcAei Duration: Frequecy... .. .:'c o u rse ~ . . ....... _ _ _ _ _ _ .. _ _.. . ._... . . .. _.. ... _... ..

Wildlife management diploma DCF and ACF Management strategies, planning and WII, Dehradun 9 months Average of 2 pert&hniques for management of wildlife and PA for life of project

l __________________ . _____________ protected areas. _ _____

Certificate in Wildlife certificate RO Practical aspects of wildlife management WII, Dehradun 4 months 2 -5 per PA for lifeManagement and field techniques and application. of project

Specialized topics training CF, DCF, ACF, Training in specialized aspects of PA WII and others I to 3 weeks Average of 2 perRO management, including chemical year for each PA

immobilization and translocation, censusmethods, interpretation, diseasemanagement, data management, animalcontrol, etc.

Specialized workshop/ CF, DCF, ACF Interaction/dissemination on specialized Various institutions 3 to 5 days 3 -8 per PA for lifeManagement topics seminar RO topics such as PA planning and in-country of project a'

management, interpretation, ornithology,l ___________________ ________________ _____________ captive_brcaptive breeding, data management, etc.

Wildlife Orientation training course Guards, Introduction to wildlife management within State 2 to 4 weeks Average of 2Foresters courses per year for

each PA (30-40trained per year for

l _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ each PA )Wildlife and study tour Guards, Exposure to PA and wildlife management within state and I week 1-2 study tours perProtected Area Foresters approaches neighboring states year for each PAManagement (10-20 participants

per year for eachl _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ P A )Specialized topics international CCF, CF, DCF, Specialized topics such as natural resource Various countries, I to 6 weeks 1-2 per year for each

seminar and ACF management, park interpretation, habitat in particular Asia PAstudy tour management, biodiversity assessment,

resource economics, park management,l _________________ ______________ ______________ remote sensing, tourism development, etc. etc.

117 Annex 8

Annex 8: Village Ecodevelopment

A. Overview

1. Village ecodevelopment would reduce negative interactions of local people onbiodiversity and increase collaboration of local people in conservation. Under thiscomponent the project would:

(a) Conduct participatory microplanning and provide implementation support,using contracted local NGOs, expert advisors, workshops, materials,training (of government officials, NGOs, and local people), PA staff, andassociated travel

(b) Implement reciprocal commitments that foster alternative livelihoods andresource uses to be financed by a village ecodevelopment program and thatspecify measurable actions by local people to improve conservation

(c) Conduct special programs to:

(i) support additional joint forest management in reserve forests in theimmediate vicinity

(ii) develop the voluntary relocation option for people in the PAs inways that are consistent with project objectives and Bank policies(See Annex 20) and

(iii) provide other supplemental investments through a discretionaryreserve for PA managers to allocate to areas with special needs.

B. Participatory Microplanning and Implementation Processes2. Microplanning support teams composed of PA personnel, collaborating NGOs andvillagers (each team with at least one woman and with members able to easilycommunicate with tribals) would assist village communities to develop and implementsite-specific reciprocal plans on a continuing basis throughout the project period. In orderto ensure that these plans meet project objectives and embody the active commitment andparticipation of local people, focused guidelines, clearly determined investment criteria,supportive training programs and carefully scheduled planning would be critical. Since thisform of roiling, participatory planning represents a radical departure from current projectpractices, it would require sustained support throughout project implementation.

Methodology

3. Key Elements. The project would develop and employ methodologies best suitedto village ecodevelopment through:

lGuidelines subject to revision to reflect experience in practice. Revision will be documented throughexchanges of letters and comprehensive updating as needed.

118 Annex 8

(a) active participation of all segments of society in plan formulation anddecision-making through a community institutional framework that elicitsthe widest possible consensus.

(b) participatory rural appraisal (PRA) focused on the mutual interactionsand reciprocal arrangements between the PA and people;

(c) simplified microplan format allowing the village group to be the authorof the plans jointly with the PA authorities, directly incorporating theresults of the focused PRA exercises, and summarizing the mutuallyapproved investments, objectives, inputs, mutual obligations, schedule, andmonitoring indicators that together form the reciprocal commitments;

(d) arrangements for cost and benefit sharing within all reciprocalcommitments;

(e) assessments of proposals to determine whether they meet eligibility andfeasibility criteria for project investment, and to incorporate lessons fromongoing monitoring;

(f) administrative arrangements to simplify and speed fund allocations andcommunity-led implementation

(g) community and support team capacity built through on-going trainingand study tours.

4. Further Development of Methodology. Many elements of this methodology havealready been developed during the preparation process. A national level NGO would becontracted to further refine these elements to meet project needs. This refinement wouldbe done in collaboration with local NGOs, project staff, and trainers, and would alsoproduce guidelines for local adaptation and use in the field and for incorporation intotraining programs.

Village Institutions and Marginal Sub-groups

5. Group Size and Composition. The project would operate at the level of a singlevillage or hamlet constituted into an ecodevelopment committee (EDC), except whereexisting forest protection committees have already been established for joint forestmanagement (JFM). This design reflects well-documented lessons from participatory.forestry programs in India (such as JFM) and elsewhere identifying appropriate villageinstitutions as the best units for microplanning and as the basis for community action. Ingeneral, the best results have been obtained from relatively small and homogeneousvillages, hamlets, and user groups (i.e., 30-60 households) in which all households arerepresented in the decision-making body by both men and women members of the

2household . Frequently, informal groups that are smaller than the revenue village and

2In several cases, in the interest of minimizing administrative complications, forestry officials haveincluded projections for larger groups when compiling cost estimates for the project. However, theproject review would include close monitoring on the extent of marginal peoples' participation inthese groups and group size would be reduced if necessary.

119 Annex 8

separate, though inclusive of, the political panchayat bodies have proven the mosteffective and sustainable units for joint forest management and community based ruraldevelopment. The formation of groups should reduce herogenity within, thus enabling therepresentative to speak for the entire group, while encouraging heterogenity betweengroups negotiation and conflict resolution to take place between groups. However, equityconsiderations require that ecodevelopment committees are composed of all members ofthe village/hamlet and include women representatives from each household as well as men.

6. Inclusion of Marginal Sub-groups. Many villages contain sub-groups thatdifferentiate resource use and income strategies by both social and economic status and bygender. Participatory rural appraisal (PRA) microplanning exercises will need to makespecial efforts to ensure that less vocal and powerful sub-groups fully participate. Coursereference material collected by Wildlife Institute of India (WIl), documents one of themost effective means of ensuring this participation. This is to hold separate exercises witheach identified sub-group and then discuss the results in a general assembly meeting. Thisensures that discussions with different ethnic and social groups are conducted in ways thatare sensitive to their cultural norms.

Government Orders

7. Relation to Joint Forest Management. New government orders (GOs) would berequired to establish the EDCs and enable them to implement village ecodevelopmentactivities and share in project benefits, including forest resources. Many, but not all, of thestates have issued GOs allowing joint forest management (JFM) on reserve and protectedforests. These specify membership, rights and responsibilities, and benefit sharingarrangements for various products such as grass, non-timber forest products (NTFP),poles and timber. Where these arrangements are in place, they would automatically applyto JFM activities in peripheral reserve forest areas. JFM activities are widely expected tobe the most effective ecodevelopment investment available to the project. Where GOs arenot yet issued, it is critical that they be so, to allow JFM to be instituted around PAs..

8. EDC Government Orders. The project has stressed the need for the states todevelop GO to establish ecodevelopment committees and define their rights andresponsibilities. While initial village ecodevelopment investments can proceed without aformal legal framework, for large-scale implementation of the village ecodevelopmentstates will need to have an appropriate GO consistent with project design. The orderswould need to address the strategy of mitigating negative impacts on vulnerable groups,by providing for such measures as resource-sharing from operations. Such operationswould include habitat manipulation; other such sources would be tourist entry fees,confiscated produce etc.

9. Status of Government Orders. All participating states have drafted GOs onestablishing EDCs.. Assurances would be sought that states would issue these GOs bySeptember 30, 1998. Although the specification of benefit sharing from PA areas isseverely constrained by existing legislation, most PA managers are of the opinion that it ispossible to come to specific agreements with EDCs regarding distribution of benefits fromPA operations.

120 Annex 8

10. Minimum Required Contents of Government Orders. These orders wouldfollow the pattern of GOs for JFM committees, with suitable modifications to comply withthe laws governing national parks and sanctuaries. At the very least they must) specify thefollowing:

(a) Composition of the EDC in each village would comprise all eligiblehouseholds including those headed by women, all scheduled castes(SCs),and all scheduled tribes (STs). Women would have equal rights with malehousehold members. Women and STs/SCs would be included on theexecutive committee; a mechanism for registering members with the forestdepartment would be established and a bank account, to be jointlyoperated, would be authorized

(b) Rights and responsibilities of the EDC members and the forest departmentto protect the PA and carry out ecodevelopment activities would beestablished

(c) Provisions would be made for sharing of revenues or produce fromspecified operations such as habitat manipulation (e.g. fire line grass andbrush cutting, elimination of undesirable species, etc.), tourism revenues,confiscated produce, and so forth

(d) Provisions would be made for conflict resolution and revocation ofagreement.

Protected Area Mutual Interactions Assessment

11. Focused Assessment. Sustained focus on PA relationships is necessary if PRAexercises are to lead to reciprocal commitments that meet project objectives rather thanleading off into general rural development. This would require the use of what the AgaKhan Rural Support Program calls a "Topical PRA", which is centered on the analysis ofinteraction between the PA and local people. Such a PRA could be termed a protectedarea mutual interactions assessment (PAMIA). Its constant object would be to mediatedisagreements and find mutually agreed solutions, either by directly decreasing the sourceof disagreement or by finding compensatory mechanisms. (See Box 1 for a list of possiblePRA tools to carry out this planning.) The strength of a PRA comes in part from itsholistic analysis of problems, needs, and opportunities and their inter-linkages. But bothPA authorities and village communities must agree that any proposed investment or actionwill result in measurable improvement to sustainable biodiversity conservation. Otherissues in community development are only relevant if they contribute to project objectives;they can be eliminated from PRA and microplanning exercises unless identified by thecommunity as their highest priority for helping to conserve the PA. This focused approachreduces the amount of time and resources required to extend PRA based microplanning toeach of the proposed EDCs as well as increasing the potential for sustained mutualcooperation.

121 Annex 8

Box 1: PAMIA: Protected Area Mutual Interaction AssessmentConsiderations for a Topical Ecodevelopment PRA

Topic Possible Tools

Mutual Interaction IdentificationProject objectives & constraints flip chart for discussion of objectives, benefits, conditions, and

constraintsPA resource use map of resource use (grass, NTFP, roads, temples, etc.)(by people) seasonality chart

ranking of resource importance (dependency) by sub-groupchanges in use vis-a-vis PA Establishmentranking of impacts of PA restrictions on income by groupsustainability of resources

Private resource use map of crop depredation(by PA wildlife) seasonality chart

ranking of impact by species, crop and affected householdsmap of livestock depredation areasexisting protection and compensation measures

Other interactions ranking existing sources of PA employment by sub-groupVenn diagram of PA-people interactionsranking of positive and negative interactions

Identification of Possible SolutionsPA resource use potential for limited PA resource use e.g. fire line grass, etc.Conmmunty resource use map of potential JFM in peripheral forests

within village area/farm resource creation potentialPA wildlife damage control identification and ranking of potential protection measuresOther interactions methods for targeting future FD employment

methods for improving human interactionsidentification of alternate income sources associated with PA

Other priorities community investment prioritiesranking of existing government sponsored development schemes ofinterest to communityidentifying and ranking alternative individual income schemes

Proposed Reciprocal CommitmentsProposed activities ranking of potential investments and activities by project criteria:

conservation potential; willingness to cost-share; equity;incrementality; and social, financial, technical and environmentalfeasibility

122 Annex 8

12. Assessment Process. Following the establishment of EDCs, team training, and thecollection of background materials and maps, the microplanning teams would conductPAMIAs through a series of village meetings. At the outset of the microplanning process,the teams would need to make a clear presentation of the project conditions forecodevelopment investment proposals. These would include the fixed amount determinedby the number of households; the necessity for village contributions and procedures formaking them; the nature of the reciprocal commitment that is the microplanning outcome;and the feasibility criteria that all eligible investments must meet. Clear and widespreadunderstanding of the objectives, benefits and constraints of project investments will helpfocus PAMIA discussions and ensure that they lead to reciprocal commitments of mutualbenefit.

Eligibility Criteria for Investments

13. To be eligible for inclusion in the reciprocal commitments, village ecodevelopmentinvestments would have to follow specific eligibility criteria listed below:c

(a) Conserve biodiversity either directly or indirectly by creating sufficientincentives for a consensus to commit local people to specific, measurable,actions that improve conservation

(b) Provide equitable share of benefits to and mitigate negative impactson tribals, women, and poor disadvantaged groups who are currently mostdependent on the PA

(c) Add supplemental resources, i.e, alternative sources of funding andsupport are not available

(d) Be socially and institutionally feasible, ensuring that, e.g., associatedactivities are culturally acceptable and that local institutional capacity isadequate to organize rotating forest protection, distribute benefits fromcommon resources, provide physical maintenance, keep accounts, meetcontribution requirements, etc.

(e) Be financially feasible, e.g. , costs are within norms or cleared by PAmanager; returns are sufficient to compensate for PA resources foregone;and, for all investments intended to produce cash revenue or benefits thatcan be monetized, market linkages are adequate, cash flow requirementsare viable, and returns compare favorably with alternative investmentoptions

(f) Be technically feasible, e.g., inputs and technical advice are adequate;physical conditions are suitable; activity is technically sound

(g) Be environmental sustainable: confirm that, e.g., adverse environmentalimpact of exotic species, agro-chemicals, construction activity, can beameliorated or avoided

(h) Be selected and owned by EDCs; ensured through by budget constraintmechanism and contribution requirement.

123 Annex 8

14. Eligibility Review. Local EDCs and PA project managers would both beresponsible for applying eligibility criteria to proposed ecodevelopment investments. Localpeople would assess these criteria using their fund of indigenous knowledge and localexperience, but would have access to expert advice where necessary. Project managersand microplanning teams would also supplement their existing knowledge with expertassessments and the results of ongoing monitoring and research. The project managerswould then be responsible for ensuring that the microplan proposals forwarded to themmeet these criteria before authorizing their implementation by completing a reciprocalecodevelopment agreement with each village community. It would be impractical andexorbitantly expensive to have outside experts assess each microplan. Therefore,consultant experts in each technical, economic, and social subject likely to be at issuewould be engaged to examine the range of potential investments and create specificguidelines for the appraisal of microplan investment. In many cases, such information isalready available with specialized government departments, universities, and NGOs andneed only be duplicated and summarized for use of project authorities. However, manyspecial cases are likely to arise during the course of the project that may require some on-going expert input. In addition, project managers would be responsible for regularlydisseminating the results of ongoing monitoring and research to all PA staff andecodevelopment committees for discussion and incorporation into their planning andimplementation activities.

15. Actions that Improve Conservation. EDCs would specify their commitment inadvance of the investment, but the commitment could be for actions that would usuallybegin upon the completion of the investment. Examples of specific measurable actionsinclude avoidance of grazing or fuelwood collection or NTFP collection in a specifiedarea, operation of a regular village patrol, arrangements to assist in poaching control, etc.It would be important for the commitments to be realistic and to be based on a fillconsensus of the EDC.

16. Feasibility Considerations. Project preparation included the development ofgeneric cross-sectoral feasibility guidelines and examples of sector-specific guidelines.Both the project preparation facility (PPF) and the project include support fordevelopment of additional sector-specific guidelines and ongoing revision of existingguidelines based on project experience. Ecodevelopment investments would be restrictedto types of investments that were already covered by sector-specific feasibility guidelinesacceptable to IDA. Part C of this Annex lists questions directed to the EDCs on genericconsiderations for all investments, and Part D provides an example of sector-specificquestions.

17. Acceptability of Investment Costs. Proposed investment costs for all projectsselected by EDCs would be required to fit within state norms unless granted a waiver bythe PA director. EDCs would select investments within a pre-established budget and withimplicit consideration of relative costs.

18. Budget Constraints: Level and Phasing. The total costs of the ecodevelopmentinvestments would not exceed Rs. 10,000 (US $285) in constant 1996 prices per family,plus Rs. 500 (US$14) per family at preinvestment (i.e., during initial microplanning) toestablish credibility. The funding would usually be spread out over a three year period,with one third of the total resources available each year. The budget constraint per EDC

124 Annex 8

would be calculated on a per household basis, multiplied by the total number ofhouseholds. For example, a forty-family hamlet would make decisions within a bindingbudget constraint of Rs. 133,333 (US$3.800) for the first year, or Rs. 400,000(US$ 11,400) over the three years.

19. Basis for Determining Budget Constraints. The participatory rural appraisalexercises during project preparation provided the basis for determining an appropriatelevel for the budget constraint. First, this level would provide sufficient incentive for localpeople to commit to reciprocal commitments. Second, it would require that local peopleuse the budget constraint to help determine their investment priorities and ensure financialand economic viability. Budget data on unit costs of possible investments would provideuseful information for local communities, allowing them to be fully aware of relative costsin determining their priority investments in relation to the budget constraint.

20. Use of Budget Constraint. Evidence that the community has allocated investmentfunds on the basis of a budget constraint would include data on:

(a) The number of households,

(b) The standard budget constraint multiplier (including adjustment forinflation)

(c) The standard budget constraint for the EDC

(d) The provision of additional funds from the discretionary reserve andjustification (description of special needs) of this supplemental allocation(see paragraph 72 below)

(e) The total value of all desirable investments, which presumably wouldexceed the budget constraint, and the unit costs and quantities used tocalculate this total value

(f) The list with quanitities, unit costs, and value of the proposed investments(of which the total would not exceed "c" plus "d").

It would also include a brief description of the decision making process (e.g., how manymeetings? who participated?) and the important factors (e.g., unit cost of investmentoption relative to size of projected benefit?, total number of beneficiaries affected byinvestment option?, extent of forest dependence of beneficiaries?) that the communityused to decide how to reduce the list of investments to fit within the constraint.

Contributions of Local People

21. Overview. The project design specifies that local people contribute at least 25percent of the total village ecodevelopment investment in cash, kind, or labor, and thatpayment for the market value of contributions be made available to the local people foradditional community investments

22. Contributions Required Only for Regular Village EcodevelopmentInvestments. The requirement for local people to contribute to investment costs appliesonly to the regular village ecodevelopment investments. It does not apply to improved PAmanagement activities, planning and implementation support for the villageecodevelopment program, research/impact monitoring and environmental education

125 Annex 8

activities, project preparation, nor to the project management activities. The requirementwould not necessarily apply to the special programs for the periphery, although some ofthese programs (e.g. participatory forestry) also involve arrangements for localcontributions.

23. Reasons for Requirement. One of the most important eligibility criteria of villageecodevelopment investments in the main program is that they "conserve biodiversity by ....creating sufficient incentives for a consensus that commits people to specific, measurableactions that improve conservation." The local people will need to believe that they willdirectly benefit from and own the investment to be willing to commit to such actions. Thehistory of rural and urban development investments has shown that where the objective ofan investment is to benefit local people (including the poorest of the poor), it is essentialto require some form of cost sharing. Without cost sharing, such investments are highlylikely to fail. If the village ecodevelopment investments fail, local people will not continueto commit to the actions that improve conservation.

24. Contribution Requirements. Accordingly contribution requirements would be asfollows:

(a) Local people would provide a minimum of 25 percent of the totalinvestment costs for all regular village ecodevelopment investments,including community oriented activities

(b) For investments that benefit individuals, local people would provide aminimum of 25 percent of the investment costs or the established stategovernment norms for that type of investment, whichever is higher,

(c) For investments that take place over several years (e.g., joint forestmanagement) the minimum cost sharing in any one year would be at least15 percent of that year's investment costs, with arrangements to ensure 25percent cost sharing over the total investment period

(d) Local cost sharing would consist of direct contributions of cash, labor, orphysical resources; arrangements for the Forest Department to provide acash advance or credit would not fulfill cost sharing requirement

(e) The total investment cost would be calculated as the sum of all resources,cash and non-cash; the value of labor and other in-kind contributions wouldbe calculated on the basis of local market value

(f) In order to ensure that cost sharing influences the choice of the specificinvestment, such sharing would be based on directly related investmentcosts. Implied labor costs of local people participating in nicroplanning,and opportunity costs of resources that have been foregone due to theestablishment of the PA would not be eligible).

25. Simplified Calculations. The above specifications are designed to minimizeadministrative complexities. Therefore, a formula that changes over time or costs of itemswhose value is difficult to measure are not included.

26. Reinvestment of Contribution. The project funds would provide the value of the25 percent contribution through a community investment fund of the village

126 Annex 8

ecodevelopment committee. This fund would be used for community investments inaccordance with participatory microplanning procedures, incorporating the agreedreciprocal commitments needed to meet project objectives. This arrangement would thushelp to extend the incentive mechanism beyond the period of the initial project investment.An illustrative example is presented below:

Cash expenditures for Value of volunteer labor EDC Totaldirect contract civil contributed by local people community

works for direct contract civil investment fundworks__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Cost of 75,000 25,000 100,000investment in

3plantationCost of well for 25,000 25,000domestic water

supplyTotal value 75,000 25,000 25,000 125,000

PRA Record Keeping and Microplan Proposals/EcodevelopmentAgreements

27. Documentation of Background Analysis. The results of PRA exercises need tobe transferred to paper and ample copies provided to the EDC and the officials concernedwith project implementation, These officials would include forest guards, foresters, rangeofficers, and those involved in project management. The documents---whether in the formof maps, lists, diagrams, or discussion minutes (including answers to feasibility questions)---can serve as the background information to the microplan proposals. They can alsosubstitute for the lengthy data collection exercises sometimes required at present. Theywould be written in a language that is readily understood by the local people. As the directproduct of village deliberations, they are "owned" by the village. They can also serve as apowerful tool for participatory monitoring of project progress.

28. Format. The format of the microplan proposal itself can be relatively simple. Onceapproved by signature of PA authorities and all members of the EDC, this proposal canbecome the ecodevelopment agreement that is the basis for activity implementation. Box 2outlines the elements of such a microplan:

3Statement of expenditures information for withdrawal application (in format specified in Annex 14):JFM Investment: Civil Works: Direct contracting = 100,000, Total = 100,000.

4Not included in total project costs. No withdrawal application submitted.

127 Annex 8

Box 2: Microplan Contents

Project Description, including location, agreed activities, and direct participants (villages& households)

Objectives, including biodiversity (stop grazing in certain areas, reduce incidence of fireby 50 percent, reduce green fuelwood collection by 90 percent, etc.), socioeconomic (10percent increased income from milk sales for 20 households, 25 percent reduction in cropdepredation by wild boars, better relations between people and forest department staff,etc.)

Indicators of success (e.g. increased herbivore population in PA, increased regenerationof species that are not fire-tolerant, increased yields from fields subject to cropdepredation, increased milk production, more positive park staff - people interactions,etc.) agreed assessment measures (may be based on group observations and reportingrather than scientific)

Inputs and activities to be provided by project and village group, including cost sharingand project financing requirements (which inter alia, demonstrate that investments fitwithin budget constraint, applicable cost norrns, and meet contribution requirements);

Benefit distribution & access to resources, including how expected benefits will bedistributed and the resource using rights and concessions of participants (e.g., grasscollection and distribution arrangements, access to NTFP products, water distributionarrangements, etc.)

Other mutual obligations and responsibilities, including on-going decision making(e.g., responsibility to stop grazing or green fuelwood collection, responsibility fororganizing community protection, responsibility to pay prompt livestock compensation,responsibility to prevent outsider timber smuggling, responsibility to allow EDC to dealwith minor offenses, mechanism to deal with conflicts and plan revisions, etc.);Community organizations and individuals responsible for implementation would be clearlyidentified; Individuals within the organization with responsibility for management of fundswould also be specified;

Work schedule, including schedule for delivery of inputs and implementation, schedulefor review meetings, etc.;

Public dissemination activity, including intervillage study tours, etc.

Conflict resolution procedures to be followed in the case of conflicts within EDCs,between EDCs, or between EDC and PA authorities.

Planning and Processing Steps

29. Steps. The agreed steps for undertaking participatory village ecodevelopmentinvestments and activities include the following:

128 Annex 8

(a) Establish and train microplanning teams, including through contractualarrangements with NGOs and other contracted staff (e.g., sociologist)

(b) Establish and train implementing team, including through contractualarrangements with NGOs and other specialized technical experts

(c) Constitute EDC or existing forest protection committee (FPC) and registerall members in accordance with state GO

(d) Collect and assess background information for planning, including mapsand any baseline or previous PRA data

(e) Conduct PAMIA (ecodevelopment PRA), to identify potential investmentsand activities

(f) Assist EDCs to establish bank accounts dedicated to agreedecodevelopment activities, with signatories as decided during theecodevelopment planning

(g) Review feasibility of identified village ecodevelopment investments byplanning team and experts according to the agreed criteria (conservation ofbiodiversity, equity, incrementality, social and institutional feasibility,financial and technical feasibility, and environmental sustainability)

(h) Review by PA director and allocation of funding level for finalization ofplans in microplanning according to the number of households in themicroplanning unit (at Rs. 3,325 per household per year, including thevillager contribution, for three years)

(i) Complete site specific (EDC) microplan agreement for villageecodevelopment activities, including project description, objectives,monitoring indicators, inputs and activities, benefit distribution and accessto resources, mutual obligations and responsibilities, work schedule, publicdissemination activity, and conflict resolution mechanism

(j) Prepare microplan estimates and get approval by disbursing officeraccording to delegation of powers; to reduce administrative delays the statelevel committee would delegate authority to the PA director to approveand make payments for eligible ecodevelopment activities

(k) Collaborate with EDC to implement agreed ecodevelopment activitiesaccording to the workplan with support of any other communityorganization that has been mutually identified with payments charged to aspecially created accounting sub-head

(1) Monitor progress, performance, and impact of ecodevelopment activities incollaboration with contracted organizations and EDCs

(m) Ensure annual audits of all fund accounts, including EDC accounts, andinspect EDC accounts when required

(n) Conduct annual microplan review meetings with EDC and update plan forfuture years as required.

129 Annex 8

Organizational and Planning Needs

30. Logistic Complexities. Orchestrating personnel and resource needs for carryingout the extensive microplanning and village ecodevelopment investment program will be acomplex endeavor. The average PA is planning to target approximately 60,000 peopleconsisting of an average of about 10,000 households in villages varying in size from lessthan 30 households to more than 200. At full project development, microplanningactivities will often be going on in at least 20 - 40 villages and, simultaneously in each PA,implementation support in 50 - 200 villages. Two to four microplanning andimplementation support teams per PA in addition to forestry staff assigned to each EDCwill be required to carry out project activities. Extensive personnel planning and trainingof these staff has been built into the project. This is designed to ensure that there will beenough time and resources to nurture true participation and avoid the temptation to groupseparate villages into larger and more diverse units for ease of administration. To do thiswould probably defeat the purpose of this part of the project by discouragingparticipation.

31. Support Teams. Composition of planning and implementation support teams willvary by PA. In general, a senior PA officer (e.g., ecodevelopment officer, deputy director,attached officer) will provide overall guidance and supervision with the assistance of thecontracted sociologist and ecologist. Two to four teams composed of assigned rangeofficers and contracted NGOs will conduct microplanning and form microplanning teamsfor each EDC with the addition of the locally assigned forester and forest guard as well assome members of the EDC selected by the village. In general, PAs plan to form separateimplementation support teams with PA personnel and NGOs, although there will probablybe overlap between these two sets of teams. during both microplanning andimplementation, provision has been made to enlist additional specialized technicalexpertise from local government departments and private firms.

32. NGO Support. Through contractual arrangements with each state's projectauthorities, NGOs would provide personnel and expertise in participatory approaches tosupport the microplanning and implementation teams (see section G below for terms ofreference).

C. Generic Feasibility and Eligibility Considerations for All Investments

Biodiversity Conservation

33. The following list of questions would be used by EDCs and by those responsiblefor reviewing reciprocal commitments for compliance with the eligibility criteria and thevillage ecodevelopment investment for feasibility:

34. Direct or Indirect Linkage

(a) Does the proposed activity directly lead to increased biodiversityconservation? If the biodiversity of the region were to be seriouslydegraded, would the proposed enterprise fail?

(b) If linkage to conservation is not direct, does investment provide adequateincentives for changes to specific behaviors that threaten the biodiversity of

130 Annex 8

the adjacent PA? Is there widespread agreement on specific measures toincrease conservation as a result of indirect benefits

35. Agreement.

(a) What measurable improvements in interactions with the PA will result fromthis activity or investment?

(b) How will this agreement be monitored?

(c) What would be the sanctions for non-compliance and the rewards forcompliance with this agreement?

Impacts on Vulnerable Groups and Benefit Distribution

36. Overview.

(a) Based on the PAMIA, who will benefit the most and who will suffer themost from the proposed (or already instituted) changes in traditional PAresource use?

(b) How have population currently dependent on the PA, especially tribals,women, and other disadvantaged people participated in discussions and thedecision making process?

(c) What provisions would ensure that the concerns of marginal groups such astribals, women, and other disadvantaged groups are specifically addressed?

(d) How would these provisions be monitored?

37. Tribal Population.

(a) Based on social assessment, what special measures are included to ensurebenefits for tribals and to mitigate negative impacts on tribals?

(b) How will these measures be monitored?

38. Women.

(a) Based on social assessment, what special measures are included to ensurebenefits for women and to mitigate negative impacts on women?

(b) How will these measures be monitored?

Additionality

39. Existing Program Options. What existing schemes and programs fromgovernment agencies and private programs might potentially support the proposedactivity?

40. Access. How could the ecodevelopment support team help with access theseprograms as either an alternative or supplement to funding from the EcodevelopmentProject? Are there specific constraints to accessing these programs.

131 Annex 8

Institutional and Social Feasibility

41. Cultural Acceptability.

(a) Are the proposed investment and associated activities socially andculturally acceptable to all participants?

42. Local Institutional Capacity.

(a) Who are the individuals who would be involved in managing theenterprise? Do they have prior experience in operating an enterprise of thistype?

(b) If there are no members of the community who have experience in this typeof enterprise, who would provide the short-term expertise and training?What steps are needed to provide the essential support?

(c) Can the group organize essential activities and provide physicalmaintenance (e.g., rotating responsibilities for forest protection,maintaining small scale irrigation or check dam)? What are the proposedarrangements?

(d) What are the arrangements for financial administration? Who would keepgroup accounts? Are there appropriate procedures and accounting systemsfor handling funds, including payments for the market value ofcontributions that may be made available for additional communityinvestments?

(e) What are the arrangements for monitoring and reporting on implementationprogress?

43. Enterprise Participants

(a) Who are the individuals who would be either employed by the operation orsupplying raw materials to the operation?

(b) Who would have ownership of the enterprise? Who would make thedecisions? What form would this ownership take?

(c) What are the arrangements to distribute benefits from common resources?

44. Contribution Requirement

(a) Based on perceptions of the potential likely benefits from the investment,can at least the minimum required local contribution be provided? (Seeparagraphs 18-20 above for specific guidelines on requirements.)

(b) What are the arrangements for distributing the allocation of localcontribution responsibilities?

132 Annex 8

Financial Feasibility

45. Village groups would consider the full range of financial feasibility issues for allthose investments intended to produce cash revenue or to produce subsistence benefits

with a value that can be converted to a monetary equivalent. For investments that wouldnot produce quantifiable benefits, village groups would consider financial issues related tothe basic overview, costs, funding, and conclusions but would not consider marketopportunity, competition, and profit/loss.

46. Basic Overview of Investment.

(a) What is the specific product or service to be offered?

(b) How would the product or service be produced?

47. Market Opportunity

(a) Who would be the intended customers?

(b) What is the history of the intended market?

(c) Why would customers buy this product or service? What gap(s) in themarketplace would it fill? Does the opportunity exist because there isexcess demand and insufficient supply? Could it be sold at lower cost thanothers? Would it be of higher quality than that offered by others?

(d) How much of the product or service would customers buy?

(e) What prices would intended customers be willing to pay? How were theestimated prices determined?

48. Competition

(a) Is there any competition for this product or service? Who are thesecompetitors? Are they selling the same product, or a close substitute?

(b) What advantage would this enterprise have over the competition? Why?

(c) Would the advantage be sustainable over the long term?6

49. Variable Costs

(a) What items (e.g., labor, materials, energy) contribute to the variable cost?How much for each item?

5For example, alternative fuel sources and village water supplies can produce benefits that can beconverted to a monetary equivalent by calculating the income women could potentially earn in thetime they save by having fuel or water nearby. Such benefits may vary throughout the year dependingon the seasonal demand for labor. Investments to prevent crop and livestock depredation would havebenefits calculated by the value of crop or livestock multiplied by the reduction in risk resulting fromthe investment.

6Costs that vary directly and proportionately with volume.

133 Annex 8

(b) What would be the total variable cost of the good or service offered?7

50. Fixed Costs

(a) What are the types and amounts of investment required at the start of theprogram?

(b) Does the investment cost fit within the state norms? If not, has the PAdirector granted a waiver?

(c) What are the administration costs of the enterprise?

(d) What are the costs of enterprise facilities (e.g., land, office space, etc.)?

(e) What are the annual replacement costs of equipment and vehicles?

51. Profit/Loss Projections and Cash Flow

(a) Develop a worksheet that shows combined cash and non-cash profits andlosses of the business over five years

(b) Develop a worksheet that shows expected cash receipts and expendituresover five years

(c) Analyze the distribution of costs and benefits to the individualsparticipating in the enterprise.

52. Funding

(a) What are the sources of funds?

(b) How will the community provide funds and manage operation andmaintenance after the investment phase has been completed?

(c) Will the project create cash-flow problems for participants during theinvestment period, before revenues are generated (a particular problemwith forest plantations)?

53. Conclusions

(a) Is the proposed investment financially viable?

(b) Will it provide sufficient returns to ensure local commitment toecodevelopment agreement?

(c) Are there alternative investments that would have a greater impact on thelocal community?

7

Costs that do not vary directly with volume (e.g., administration and management costs,communications costs, marketing costs, equipment).

8

Calculated by taking the initial value of the equipment and dividing by the expected number of yearsof use.

134 Annex 8

Technical Feasibility

54. Is proposed activity technically feasible? Does it use the best (e.g., cost effective,locally suitable, etc.) technical alternative available?

55. Are there existing government or private schemes that can provide the technicalassistance and inputs needed?

Environmental Feasibility

56. Are there adverse environmental impacts? If so, what are the options and costs ofmitigation?

9

D. Sector Specific Feasibility (selected examples for illustration only)

57. PPF and project financing would support development of comprehensive checklistsfor a greater range of investments. These lists would cover additional considerations forsoil conservation, small irrigation, water supply, fuelwood alternatives, livestockimprovement, ecotourism, and crop and livestock protection structures.

Joint Forest Management.

58. Government Resolution.

(a) Has the state government issued a resolution detailing the institutionalarrangement for JFM and established guidelines for the sharing ofresponsibilities and benefits between people and government agencies?

(b) Has a plan been prepared to bring the peripheral forest areas under JFM,giving the area to be covered and benefits expected from the efforts?

59. Stock Map. Has a stock map of your proposed JFM area and surroundings beenprepared, demarcating the following sections:

(a) Area outside core PA of dense forest with overhead canopy exceeding 40percent canopy closure

(b) Area outside core PA of degraded forest with 10-40 percent canopy coverand/or live stumps of overhead species of at least 250 per ha

(c) Area outside core PA of blank areas, i.e., the areas with less than 10percent cover and/or less than 250 live stumps of the overhead species

(d) PA areas in the vicinity of village and JFM area where harvesting and otherresource use is prohibited or restricted.

60. Dense Forest Area.

(a) Is a uniform system, a selection system, or a coppice system planned?

(b) How will the proposed system parameters minimize

9PPF and project financing would support development of comprehensive checklists for a greaterrange of investments.

135 Annex 8

(i) felling damage (deterioration of residual crop and forest floor),

(ii) road construction

(iii) transportation of forest products?

(c) What are the plans for fire watching and protection against vandalism andtheft?

(d) What are the plans for rotational grazing to allow time for the felled area toregenerate?

(e) What are the plans to survey regeneration at regular intervals to monitorprogress? What are the plans to provide sample plots to measure thegrowth statistics? What provisions are there to modify the treatment andharvesting plan if desired regeneration does not materialize?

(f) What are the plans to maintain proper forest hygiene, e.g., climber cutting,removal of dead and dying and pest-affected trees?

(g) Are NTFP harvest methods and levels sustainable? How do they take intoaccount requirements of pollination, regeneration, seed dispersers, seedpredators, and plant health? How will NTFP collection be regulated toensure that it remains sustainable?

61. Degraded Area

(a) What are the plans to naturally regenerate these areas? Are the speciespresent coppicable?

(b) What are the plans to close the area initially for a specific period tocollection of forest products and grazing?

(c) What are the plans for fire prevention fire and protection against vandalismand theft?

(d) What are the plans for removing dead and dying trees and stumps and thinstools?

(e) What are the plans for introducing

(i) grass cutting, controlled grazing, collection of non-timber forestproducts, fuelwood thinning

(ii) light thinning for poles and plough pieces?

(f) Are NTFP harvest methods and levels sustainable? How do they take intoaccount requirements of pollination, regeneration, seed dispersers, seedpredators, and plant health? How will NTFP collection be regulated toensure that it remains sustainable?

(g) Is the soil eroding into gullies? If so, are there plans for vegetative gullycontrol?

136 Annex 8

62. Blank Areas.

(a) When selecting species, has appropriate vegetation in the successional scalebeen selected, keeping in view the altered micro climate of the degradedarea? (For afforestation areas, a common mistake is to select those speciesfor planting that occur in the contiguous undegraded dense areas.Degraded areas, however may only be suitable for vegetation that precededthe current ones in the successional scale. For example, in an area with salas a crop in the dense section, the contiguous afforestation sites may haveto be planted with semul, sissoo, etc. instead of sal.)

(b) Have exotics been proved to be environmentally benign before planting?

(c) What are the arrangements for avoiding monoculture and preservingexisting biodiversity values?

(d) What are the plans for collecting seeds from good phenotypes?(Afforestation work should not be started unless good seeds are assured).

(e) What are the plans for soil and moisture conservation, (e.g., contourplanting of shrubs and/or preparing contour V ditches and planting inditches)?

(f) In areas that are sources of perennial streams, does the plantation modelinclude an adequate amount of ground flora (shrubs and grasses) to reducesoil erosion without significantly reducing the lean period stream flow?

(g) Are there plans for production of intermediate products and intercroppingof shrubs, grasses, and/or bamboo? If so, have tree densities been setaccordingly? (The tree density in such areas should not exceed 300trees/ha)

(h) What are the plans for weeding, fire watching, and controlled grazing forthe first three years?

63. PA Area. Has the annual loss of harvests foregone by community members beenquantified? (The only harvesting allowed in core areas of PAs is that which would improvethe biodiversity status of these areas.) What measures have been taken to ensure there isno collection of NTFP in core conservation areas within the PA?

Feasibility Worksheet.

Total JFM Outputs Resource Use in PAs Compensatory Impact of Community views onForegone JFM Activities acceptability of JFM

(items and quantity) (items and quantity) (comparison between plancolumns 1 and 2)

137 Annex 8

Farm Forestry.

64. Planting system.

(a) Will the planting be peripheral (in lines around the agricultural field), block(solid tree planting in agricultural waste or fallow land), or alley cropping(growing agricultural crops between shrubs or trees)?

65. Peripheral Planting

(a) Do selected species have deeper root systems, lighter crowns, andrelatively low water demand? (These features minimize loss of agriculturalproduction brought about by peripheral plants through their shade effectand use of surface soil water. The cultivation of such trees does notsignificantly affect the water table). Has traditional knowledge availablewithin the community been consulted as to species selection that wouldaddress the local water situation?

(b) Are the selected species relatively fast-growing so that they can beharvested quickly? Is there a good market for the smaller timber sizes ofthe selected trees. (If trees can only be sold in large timber size, the treewill have to grown over a longer period and the tree shade and root systemwill cover a larger space, which would negatively impact agriculturalproduction).

(c) Has monoculture been avoided by the planting of more than one species?(This would reduce the chances of tree pest attack.)

66. Block Planting

(a) Has at least a two-tier species mix been selected, with both the higher andlower layers having market or subsistence value?

(b) Do plans for planting density vary according to the planned final products?

67. Alley Cropping

(a) Have places where there is drought stress been avoided?

(b) Have you focused on leguminous or other nitrogen-fixing species?

(c) Does the tree/shrub and agricultural crop mixture have a complementaryphysiological relationship?

(d) What are the plans to prune the woody crop at interval to keep its shadeeffect to a minimum?

68. Nurseries

(a) Is there a good source of high quality seeds or seedlings? Have an adequatenumber of nurseries to supply the seedlings of desired species to thefarmers been planned at a reasonable distance from the planting sites?

(b) Are there plans for training local people, particularly women and otherdisadvantaged groups, in nursery work?

138 Annex 8

69. Other Considerations

(a) What is the planting objective (e.g., cash income from tree products)? Ifobjective is cash income, are existing marketing arrangements adequate? Ispolicy reform required to remove transport restrictions and other marketdistortions?

(b) How do the selected tree system and species take into account resourceusufruct rights and land capability?;

(c) Is fertilizer organic?

(d) If land is sloping, do you plan to plant along contours?

(e) Is grazing control needed? If so, what arrangements have been made?

E. Implementation Plan for Microplanning

Initiation of Microplanning

arhole Rantham-GIrrevenue GirfOrest forest Nagarhole Palamau Pench Perlyar bhore Tdal

Buxa EDCs villages village Gir Nesses settlement villages EDCs EDCs EDCs EDCs Project

___.~~~~ - -. __ .2 ______ ____ ____ _____

PPF 0 5 0 0 0 5 8 6 0 5 29

98/97 10 5 2 7 5 8 16 8 5 5 7197/98 7.5 12 5 4.5 17 14 20.5 35 18.5 15 12 156.5

98199 15 16.5 5 20 18 5 25 38 22 30 30 220

99/00 7.5 9 2.5 10 9.5 25 38 23 30 30 184.5

00101 0 0 0 0 0 12.5 37.5 16.5 25 30 121.5

01/02 0 0 0 0 0 0 18.5 5 0 0 23.5

Total Groups 40 48 14 54 47 96 191 99 105 112 806

Average HHI/Group 150 225 54 8 35 120 65 85 80 95

Total HH 6000 10800 756 432 645 520 12415 8415 84D0 1064D 71023

Total Pop/PA 36000 71926 78990 | 74490 50490 50400 63840 426138

T | r 9 Nagarhole r 1 Rantham-Gir revenue Gir forest forest Nagarhole Palamau Pench Penyar bhore

| ____ ____B_xa_ EDCs_ villages A l llyg" Gir Nesses settlenent Villge 6ECs |ECs EDCs EDCe Total HH

Implementmatn Perioo 4 3 3 4 2 3 _ 3Lag after inial micrplanni 1 1 1__ 1 1 1 1

PPF 0 _______ 260 0_ 0 26096@97 750 0 0 0 0 0 1300 255 0 950 325597/98 1875 562.5 0 56 175 - 600 2275 935 400 1140 8018.598/899 2250 1687.5 108 136 490 - 960 2470 1 1572.5 12 0 2850 1372499/00 1125 _2812.5 243 160 647.5 2460 2470 1870 2400 2850 1703801/02 0 371 2025 j 7135 0 O 3001202.5 1402.5 400 0 1176500010 0 72.25 27 8 335 3000 12437.5 190255 24000 280 1170375

| Total HH I 6000 10800 | 756 432 1645 10020 12415 7990 10400 10640 71098

Total PopuLatiotPA 36000 71928 - 69990 74490 47940 62400 63840 4265a8

F. Special Programs for the Periphery

70. Additional Joint Forest Management. These investments would follow theregular village ecodevelopment procedures, except that they would not be subject to thehousehold-based budget constraint. They would follow applicable state procedures andgovernment orders for joint forest management, and where possible, be planned within aper hectare budget constraint, with a contingency reserve for more expensive treatmentsthat address site-specific considerations.

71. Voluntary Relocation. Annex 20 outlines the guidelines for these activities.

139 Annex 8

72. Supplemental Investment. The project includes discretionary funds for PAmanagers to supplement regular ecodevelopment funding above the budget constraint toareas with special needs (e.g., special watershed management priorities in buffer areasabove the PAs, communities that are especially dependent on forest resources, or villageecodevelopment investment opportunities with economies of scale). For each PA, thediscretionary fund investments would not exceed 18 percent of the regular villageecodevelopment investments. PA managers would allocate the funds in accordance withsite-specific needs, which generally would result in an uneven allocation of the fund acrossEDCs. All discretionary fund investments would be subject to approval by the affectedEDC, but could reflect PA rather than EDC priorities. When the discretionary fundinvestments reflect PA rather than EDC priorities, the investments would not subject to

10the contribution requirements or the budget constraint , and the PA manager wouldprovide a clear explanation of how the investment would directly benefit the PA.Frequently such investments would not produce benefits that could be easily convertedinto a monetary equivalent. In all other regards, discretionary reserve investments wouldbe subject to the agreed eligibility criteria and feasibility considerations.

G. Terms of Reference

Draft Terms of Reference for Participatory Microplanning andImplementation Support (Usually Local NGOs)

Reports to:: Sr. Executive Field Officer in PA in charge of Village Ecodevelopment

Responsibilities: provide qualified personnel to participate in microplanning, includingestablishment of EDCs, carrying out of PAMIA, and drawing up of reciprocalcommitments;

provide any required training in microplanning techniques for team members andEDCs;

provide personnel to conduct feasibility analysis of proposed villageecodevelopment investments;

provide technical and managerial assistance to EDCs during implementation ofactivities;

participate in monitoring of village ecodevelopment activities and assist EDCs inconducting participatory monitoring;

participate in annual review of village ecodevelopment activities;

provide periodic financial and progress reports to PA authorities as mutuallyagreed; and

promote good relations between PA authorities and EDCs and help in preventionand resolution of conflicts.

Duration: Five years. In some cases initiated during PPF period.

Qualifications: Organization with long-term field experience in facilitation of participatorymicroplanning and implementation support for small scale community-basednatural resource management investments. Fluency in local languages.

10Although the per PA limit to 18% of regular ecodevelopment investments would apply.

140 Annex 8

Draft Terms of Reference for PA Social Scientist

Reports to: Sr. Executive Field Officer in PA in charge of Village Ecodevelopment

Responsibilities: To conduct village microplanning as part of core planning team and inconjunction with local-level FD staff, NGOs and local people

To assess feasibility of village ecodevelopment investments with emphasis onsocioeconomic criteria and report findings to FD and villagers

To identify socioeconomic related training needs and sources for villageecodevelopment activities

To monitor socioeconomic aspects of village ecodevelopment investments as partof overall monitoring plan for project area

To prepare annual reviews of socioeconomic aspects of village ecodevelopmentactivities including microplanning

Duration: It is anticipated that this sociologist would be hired during the PPF period and thecontract extended pending a review for project duration.

Qualifications: Professional experience in rural development at village level with interest innatural resource management issues, especially PA management, experience withindigenous people, women ,and other marginalized groups, and working inmultidisciplinary teams; at minimum Bachelor's degree in relevant subject e.g.,sociology, anthropology; relevant Master's degree desirable.

H. Training Requirements

73. Scope. In addition to the direct in-situ training provided by this on-going technicalassistance, NGO skills would be mobilized to provide specialized training courses inparticipatory methods and areas of technical competence. Since many smaller local NGOsmay also lack these skills, training courses will also need to include their personnel.Guidelines will be developed by national NGO consultants to provide a basis for thistraining and further refine the roles and responsibilities of the microplanning team.

74. Indicative Training Plan. Each State has developed a training plan formicroplanning and implementation support personnel as well as EDC members. As listedin the sample training plan in the table below this will likely include: microplanning teamtraining by qualified NGOs and training institutes, intensive training of senior PApersonnel at the Wildlife Institute of India's ecodevelopment course, management andtechnical training for inexperienced local NGOs, and study tours for PA field staff andEDC members to other ecodevelopment areas. Such study tours for the teams and villageecodevelopment leaders have proven an effective tool for introducing new ideas andbuilding confidence in achieving results in participatory settings. In addition to the trainingcourses listed in the indicative training program, the village ecodevelopment investmentfunds themselves would used to provide training to EDC participants wherever required.

Indicative Training Plan: Village Ecodevelopment Component

Course Methodology Participants per Objectives Resource Agencies Duration FrequencyCourse

Microplanning team course with PA staff, NGOs Learn microplanning methodologies, Regional NGOs & 1-2 weeks 2-4 per year intraining practical including PRA, group dynamics, technical Training Institutes Years 1-3

training options

NGO training short course local NGOs NGO management skills, including Regional NGOs & 2 weeks 1-2 per year inaccounting, administration & technical Consultants Years 1-2exposure

Ecodevelopment intensive short Ecodevelopment Impart skills in PRA techniques, WII Dehradun 4 months 1 per year in Yearscourse Officer/ACF preparation of microplans, and 1 to 4

implementation of ecodevelopmentprograms

EDC study tours study tour EDC members, Exposure to approaches in Other PAs in 2 weeks 2-4 per year in ;RO & FG ecodevelopment, EDC operations, country Years 1 to 5

biodiversity conservation

Seminars/ workshops workshop PA personnel, biodiversity conservation, ecodevelopment, Various institutions 1-2 days 2 per yearNGOs & EDCs participatory monitoring

Staff study tours study tour ACF, RO, FGs Exposure to park management, Other PAs in 1-2 weeks 2 per year in Yearsecodevelopment, interpretation, tourism country 1-4development, revenue generation

0a

143 Annex 9

Annex 9: Environmental Education and Visitor Management

Background

1. The theoretical possibility of conserving resources within a forest or protected area(PA) by closing it to all external disturbances and threats by force is remote. Such an approachmight succeed in those few PAs located in remote and low-population density areas, but inreality most PAs (particularly those in India) are located in close proximity to dense humansettlements. Their survival therefore depends heavily on the attitudes of the local people, andthe public and political support for the PA at local, state, and national levels. An important partof the PA authorities responsibility is therefore to justify the existence of the PA and themanagement policies chosen and implemented in it to politicians, bureaucrats, and the widerpublic.

2. In India, decisions for establishing PAs were largely made by governmentadministrators. Although there has been political support for the establishment of the PAs,it is questionable whether politicians and the public will continue to accept the status quo,as pressures for land and resources increase. PAs, therefore, are unlikely to survive in theffiture unless the real benefits they confer are appreciated by the whole community.

3. Visiting PAs can help build appreciation, but but without good management,visitors can also adversely affect the bioidversity. All the project areas contain a variety ofvisitor facilities in and around the PAs that tend to put a strain on environmentalresources. In some cases these facilities are based around such established infrastructure ashunting lodges, forest rest houses, forest roads. In others new facilities have beendeveloped in the past 20 to 30 years to meet visitor demand. The pressure is most acute inPeriyar, which annually receives 10 million pilgrims and 350,000 tourists andRanthambhore which receives 30,000 tourists and 20,000 pilgrims. In Periyar, the negativeeffects of such large numbers of visitors is particularly intense as they cluster around rivertrips, popular driving routes, and the Sabrimala shrine. Local people and otherentrepreneurs establish lodges and tea-shops along the route to the temple and removefirewood to supply the lodges and tea-shops from the PA.

4. The village ecodevelopment component would include significant support forenvironmental education and participtory ecotourism programs integrated into the overallmicroplanning support activities. To avoid overlapping categories, the environmental educationactivities would be aimed at audiences outside the target villages of the village ecodevelopmentcomponent and the visitor activities would be aimed at the broader management framework.

Design of the Environmental Education and Awareness Strategy and Plan

5. Each PA would develop its own environmental education and awareness (EEA)strategy and plan. It would include identification of the different issues and target groupsto be covered by the program; the nature and types of activities for each target group; theprograms to link PA interpretation centers with extension and education; linkages withother EEA programs of NGOs, universities, and schools; and institutional, informational,research, training, manpower, financial, and organizational needs for its design andimplementation.

144 Annex 9

6. Professional educators, communicators, scientists, sociologists, NGOs, schoolteachers and PA staff would collaborate in a workshop to reach consensus on the broadconcepts of the EEA strategy and the technical and specialist services needed for itspreparation. Preparation of the plan could be contracted out to a nodal organization orNGO, like the Center for Environmental Education (Ahmadabad), Wildlife Institute ofIndia, etc.

Visitor Information and Interpretation Services

7. Interpretation centers would be developed to educate the visitor on the PA, theobjectives of the PA, and the policies that govern its management. A properly designedPA interpretation program would serve to awaken public awareness of the park purposesand policies and develop a concern for its protection. It would also educate the visitor toappreciate the importance of the PA to the region and the nation and thereby create aconstituency in support of the PA. This group can become an important ally in lobbyingfor political support for conservation.

8. There are a number of techniques available to communicate information about thePA. All have particular uses and it is usually advisable to use several methods to getmaximum impact. The following are widely used methods for communicating withvisitors: brochures and leaflets, specialized guides and checklists, nature camps, self-guided and guided trails and tours, audio-visual presentations, field demonstrations andexhibits, etc. These are not discussed further as a number of reference manuals areavailable for developing them. However it must be recognized that for maximumeffectiveness, these programs must be simple, easy to interpret and understand, in the locallanguage, directly related to the local situation, with low technology inputs and costs, andeasy to maintain.

9. PA authorities will contract the services of an architectural consultant or firm todesign the interpretation center to fit, as far as practical, with the local architecture,landscape, and environment of the area. The design and installation of the interpretationprogram and materials would also be contracted out to a suitable NGO or institution. Theprograms implemented through the interpretation centers would be designed around thelanguages, customs, and lifestyles of the local people, keeping in mind the particular localrelationship between people and PA.

Education Programs for School Children

10. Educating school children in PA neighborhoods on the values and importance ofPAs is an effective strategy for getting broad-based long-term support for conservation.School children and youth can be brought to the PA to provide them with an experienceand understanding of its role and importance; or the conservation message can be taken tothe classrooms (through lectures and talks, audio-visual presentations, etc.). The formercould use day visits to the PAs and nature camps; or it could involve groups (particularlyof higher grade students) in short assignments to get them involved in PA activities (suchas setting up nature trails, animal surveys and census, establishing botanical collections orstudy topics of interest, etc.). These programs would require simple and inexpensiveaccommodation facilities such as dormitories or tents.

145 Annex 9

11. A major component of the environment education program for children would beprovided through training workshops for school teachers. There are many tools availablein India (WWF Biodiversity Conservation Teaching Manual), but they are in English andnot in local languages . The EEA therefore, must try to produce a teacher's sourcebook oradapt nationally-available materials to the local situation and language to help the teacherin his or her presentation of the PA's special features and values and on generalenvironmental issues relevant to the area. Providing the teachers with these materialswould free PA staff time for other critical work.

Mass Media Campaigns for Creating Public Awareness

12. The use of mass media in developing countries has shown phenomenal growth inrecent years. India's rapid advance in opening up its markets and liberalizing its economy,is likely to increase enormously the use of radio, television, print media, and othercommunication media. The mass media can and should be used for urban receivers. At thislevel, schools and universities, policy makers, and bureaucrats can all be successfullyreached through distance education and general programs; the wide reach of mass mediagives it enormous potential for disseminating and educating the general public and nationaland state level decision-makers of the country. At the rural level, however, being tailoredto local-specific issues, it has less flexibility in providing education and awareness.

Alternate Methods for Creating Environmental Awareness in PASurroundings

13. India and the region as a whole has many examples of alternate methods foreducation in the rural sector that would be easily adapted to this project. Examples includestreet or village theater a powerful tool for communicating socially meaningful messages;street plays, processions and protest marches to bring awareness on scientific andenvironmental matters; slide shows, posters, leaflets, exhibitions, street cornerdiscussions, and magazines; video linked with other media (example: discussions,lectures, visits, etc.); local extension radio giving advice and hearing complaints on issuesrelevant to the locality; puppetry to make people aware of their rights; and folk mediasuch as folk epics and ballads, folk songs and dances, and folk tales.

14. These alternate methods would persuade rural audiences to support conservationof PAs and nature in general. They provide an opportunity to gain a better understandingof people's needs and ti establish confidence through dialogue. They also permit a veryflexible approach to communication and can emphasize personal communication and localtraditions in ways that may be more easily accepted by local people.

15. Involving children in these programs is important for two reasons. First, manychildren in the remote rural areas of India do not attend school so an alternativeenvironment education program outside the school is necessary to reach them. Second,children's concerts and activities always evoke greater participation on the part of localpoliticians, mothers, and, gradually, fathers also. Children can also be trained ascommunicators and made to talk to rural folk in their villages and at organized localmeetings.

146 Annex 9

16. Environment education must not only focus on conservation issues. It must alsoreconsider the importance of human economic needs and cultural traditions in developingideas on conservation. In developing the communication strategy, the following pointsmust be kept in mind: (i) communication should not be in isolation; (ii) a multi-mediaapproach is more effective; (iii) the content of the program is important; (iv) there shouldbe sharing of ideas; (v) and there should be continuation. To determine the right kind ofmedium and message for a particular audience both should be pre-tested and re-cast asand when required on the strength of feedback from the audience. This would requiresome monitoring and frequent evaluation of the program. The design and implementationof the outreach education and awareness programs for the PAs would be largely managedthrough NGOs in the area. Some of the NGOs would have experience working withtribals. The project provides resources for contracting NGOs, for education vehicles,equipment and materials.

Visitor Management and Participatory Ecotourism Strategy

17. To minimize the threat to the environment from visitors, and maximize benefits tolocal communities in ways that increase their stakes in long-term conservation, each PAwould prepare a management and participatory ecotourism strategy that would addressthe following questions.

(a) Is the scale of development appropriate for the local community and for thecapacity of the environment to support the facility?

(b) What zoning measures are needed to reduce the threat to the environment?

(c) Are roads and any trails placed to minimize intrusion on the environment?

(d) What measures need to be taken during construction to minimize negativeeffects on the environment?

(e) Does the design for the facility make use of indigenous cultural buildingforms and materials found in the surrounding areas?

(f) Are energy sources environmentally sound and sustainable?

(g) Are appropriate technologies employed for the treatment of organic andother wastes?

(h) What measures have been taken to prevent erosion?

(i) How far do modifications and/or additions divert existing visitor pressureson the PA?

( j) How far were local people actively involved in planning and construction?

(k) How far are local people involved in current operations?

(1) In existing facilities, is the number of resident employees within theenclaves necessary or is there scope for reduction?

Terms of reference for this study are included at the end of this annex.

147 Annex 9

Managing Enterprise and Visitor Enclaves

18. The project would support investments associated with implementing theecotourism and visitor strategies and with improving the management of public andprivate infrastructure and facilities within enclaves or adjacent to the PAs. In some PAsexisting facilities have a large residential population of staff and laborers or attract largenumbers of visitors, which results in disturbance to wildlife and depletion of forestresources to meet fuelwood, grazing, and food needs of the residents and visitors. Whereappropriate the project would support investments of civil works, equipment, andmaterials, that the visitor management and ecotourism strategies recommend in order tobetter manage energy, water and timber, solid waste disposal, and access needs of thesefacilities, as well as the number of resident employees. The project would also help tosupport proposed investments arising from research on the impacts of these installationson wildlife and biodiversity.

Draft Terms of Reference: PA Environmental Education and AwarenessStrategy and Action Plan

Reports to: PA Field Director

Objectives: To develop a strategy and action plan that communicates reasons for the existenceof the PA and associated PA management policies.

Responsibilities: Identify and evaluate existing programs of environmental education and awarenessof PA aathorities, NGOs, and other groups in and around the PA.

Identify and evaluate the existing capacity and capabilities of local and regionalinstitutions fForest departments, NGOs, educational institutions, etc.) for planningand conducting education and awareness programs around the PA.

Identify the different target audiences (local communities, visitors, politicians anddecision makers, school children and youth, PA staff, other regional developmentagencies, etc.) that should be covered in a PA education and awareness program,and review their education status and perceptions about the PA.

Identify key issues that need to be covered in an education and awareness programin the PA.

Define the range or types of tools and programs that need to be aimed to thedifferent target groups.

Based on the above, define an education and awareness strategy for the PA. Thisstrategy should provide broad guidance on the focus of PA interpretationprograms; linkages between education programs of other agencies and NGOs;institutional, informational, research, training, manpower, financial, andorganizational aspects of education.

Develop an action plan for implementation of the strategy, including activities forvisitor information and interpretation; education activities for school children,specific programs for local communities and linkage with the villageecodevelopment activities; mass media campaigns and programs; programs ofalternative media for creation of awareness among rural audiences, etc. This planshould include institutional arrangements, training, and research needs and costsfor implementation.

148 Annex 9

In the preparation of the above strategy and action plan, conduct participatorymeetings, seminars, and workshops in order to solicit views and comments of thefull range of stakeholders and potential target audiences.

Duration: Approximately four months.

Qualifications: An organization or NGO with experience in design and implementation ofenvironmental education and awareness programs for over five years. Preferencewould be given to organizations or NGOs that have prepared or implementededucation and awareness programs on PA conservation, wildlife, or relatedsubjects, and demonstrated sensitivity to tribals and other disadvantaged groups.

Draft Terms of Reference: Design/installation of Interpretation Center andProgramReports to: PA Field Director

Objectives: To design the interpretation center building and equipment supported under theproject that meets the objectives of the PA's environmental education program.

Responsibilities: Consult with the PA authorities to ascertain the objectives, scope, and extent of thePA interpretation and education program that needs to be implemented in the PA,and how it fits within the broader environmental education and awareness strategy(see preceding TOR).

Identify an appropriate location for the construction of the interpretation center,keeping in mind issues of visitor access and numbers and availability of utilities.

Prepare a lay out plan for the interpretation facility and its immediatesurroundings.

Design the center, taking into consideration the location, objectives and content ofthe interpretation program, visitor numbers, local environmental conditions,landscape and local architecture.

Provide supervisory support to the PA authorities during the construction of thebuilding and development of its surroundings.

Design and install the interpretation equipment and materials within the center,keeping in mind the need to provide an interactive education experience on theobjectives and value of the PA and the resources contained therein, create anawareness of the linkage between conservation of the PA and the villageecodevelopment program, and provide an overall education experience to PAvisitors and neighbors.

Duration: Approximately two years

Qualifications: A firm or individual with architectural and education qualifications. Experience inthe design of public use buildings and in education and awareness equipment andmaterials.

Draft Terms of Reference: Environmental Education ImplementationReports to: PA Field Director

Objectives: To implement a broad based education and awareness program (based on agreed

149 Annex 9

strategy and action plan) for the PA, including education programs in schools,villages, and rural audiences .

Responsibilities: Conduct lectures, talks, and audio-visual presentations in schools.

Organize nature camps, demonstrations, and short field exercises for schoolchildren and youth.

Establish and/or promote school nurseries, small environmental projects, and otherinnovative education programs.

Plan and conduct alternative media programs for rural audiences, including streettheater, marches, slide shows, folk dances, etc.

Provide education and extension support to the village ecodevelopment program.

Implement other activities identified in the environmental education andawareness strategy and action plan.

Duration: Five years

Qualifications: Local NGO with experience in the conduct of enviromnental education andawareness programs at the local level for at least five years, and with the capacityto implement a five year program.

Draft Terms of Reference for PA-Level Visitor Management andParticipatory Ecotourism StrategyReports to: PA Field Director.

Responsibilities: Overall, to develop a participatory ecotourism strategy that would includenecessary elements of local participation, sound environmental design, visitormanagement, marketing, conservation education, training, financial sustainabilityand monitoring and evaluation.

More specifically, to assess current:

- tourism situation and potential; to determine a desirable tourism situation andidentify steps to reach this situation; to prepare a Participatory EcotourismStrategy for the project area. The development of the strategy should beparticipatory actively involving stakeholders through workshops, meetings, etc.The strategy should also address the following necessary elements:

-potential PA attributes relevant for ecotourism, identification of sites forecotourism activities, development of mechanisms to monitor ecological impact oftourism;

-visitation information and levels, identify marketing opportunities forecotourism; development of guidelines for visitor and staff behavior in PAs,identification of educational requirements for visitors and staff e.g. visitor center,brochures, development of mechanisms to collect and monitor visitation data formarketing and management purposes;

- infrastructure, development of plan for future modification if required,development of guidelines for environmentally sound and culturally appropriatedesigns,

- appropriate PA staffing levels for tourism, identification of future requirementsand training needs and sources for PA and other stakeholders;

150 Annex 9

participation in tourism; identify appropriate organizational structure formanaging ecotourism; identify mechanisms to increase long-term localparticipation in both benefit-sharing and decision-making, identify local trainingneeds, development of monitoring and evaluation plans to assess localparticipation and benefit-sharing;

- linkages with regional infrastructure and attractions, identify areas formodification and development, identify relevant government and private sectorparties;

- legal framework for tourism activities, establish administrative and legalrequirements for any proposed changes e.g. zoning, entry-fees, revenue-sharingwith local communities, identify policy considerations for ecotourism strategies,assessment of current financial provisions for tourism management, identifyactivities for modification or introduction of practices to improve financialsustainability;

-private-public sector linkages related to tourism, identify opportunities for futurecollaboration, develop guidelines for collaborations;

- and required skills and possible individuals and organizations required to carryout above activities plus time schedules, budgetary requirements and possiblefunding sources for above elements;

Duration: six to nine months.

Qualifications: Organization with experience in ecotourism management and participatoryplanning. Expertise in project analysis and preparation; consensus building andtraining skills. .

151 Annex 10

Annex 10: Impact Monitoring and Research on IssuesRelevant to PA Management and Ecodevelopment

A. Introduction

1. Monitoring (of project impacts, institutions and processes) and research are tworelated, but different and equally important activities of the project. Through repetitivedata collection, monitoring assesses the ecological and socioeconomic impacts of theproject to determine whether these are in agreement with those anticipated. Monitoringwould also assess the effectiveness of project institutions and processes in meeting projectobjectives. In contrast, research would meet the critical information needs for PAmanagement and village ecodevelopment activities. While research discovers usefulguidelines for management, rationalization of PA boundaries, and zonation, monitoringuses scientific and other evidences to assess whether a particular management action hadthe desired results.

2. Monitoring and research are, however, parallel activities with continuous feedbacks. A comprehensive monitoring strategy for PA management is being developed forthe first time in India. Considerable research input is necessary therefore to design amonitoring system, that will identify indicators, sampling and analytical methods, and feedbacks. Similarly, monitoring would generate research questions on cause-and-effectrelationships that need to be answered in order to make recommendations for projectadjustment.

B. Monitoring

Strategy

3. Conceptual Framework. The monitoring of ecological and socioeconomicimpacts of this project would be based on a conceptual framework that would address theobjectives of the project. The framework would embrace PA values, anticipated changes,indicators, sampling methods, analytical methods, mechanisms of feedback and projectadjustment, roles and responsibilities for monitoring, and other considerations. Morespecifically, the conceptual framework for the monitoring would address the followingquestions:

(a) What is the purpose of the monitoring and who are the clients?

(b) What key questions require answers?

(c) What indicators, methods of measurement and analysis would be used (andwhat criteria were used to determine their selection)?

(d) What would be the roles and responsibilities of state forest development(SFD) staff and cooperating institutions, (including of local communities)in participatory monitoring?

(e) What would be the mechanisms for incorporating information into projectsalready in progress?

152 Annex 10

4. Objectives of monitoring. Monitoring through a consistent set of measureswould periodically do the following:

(a) Provide an integrated view of the present status of biodiversity in the PA

(b) Provide an integrated view of the socioeconomic conditions andinteractions between PAs and people inside and immediately around the PAthat are relevant to the project

(c) Assess their trends in conditions and interactions

(d) Evaluate whether the project activities, institutions, and process have hadthe desired and anticipated effects

(e) Identify project components, the absence, inadequacy or ineffectiveness ofwhich cause non-compliance with expected values

(f) Provide guidelines for project adjustment in the light of evaluation.

5. PA values. The PAs coming under the project have important biodiversity valueswhich are of regional, national, and international significance. The progressive erosion ofthese values is of concern and their restoration is the objective of the PA management andof this project. These values range from habitats of single species (e.g., lion in Gir), largeprey-predator systems (e.g., Pench and Ranthambhore), to ecosystems with very highspecies richness and endemism (Periyar and Buxa). Other values relate to PA-peopleinteractions such as traditional knowledge systems (e.g., ethnobotany), tourism, watershedetc. One or more measurable indicators that together describe the values would form thebasis for evaluation.

6. Anticipated changes. A statement of anticipated changes on the status ofbiodiversity in the PA, disturbance factors, and relevant socioeconomic attributes wouldform a set of predetermined standards, or template. Against this template, the findingsfrom monitoring would be compared and evaluated. Such statements would address thecurrent status (e.g., pristine, sustainable, and degraded use areas) and expectedtrajectories. In the case of project activities, institutions, and processes, the statementwould reflect what is expected from project plan.

Indicators

7. Ecosystems in the PAs and the mutual impact of their interaction with people areso complex that an assessment of their status and trends would be based on a set ofindicators. In order to develop a conceptual framework and guide their selection,measurement, and evaluation, indicators, would be placed in several categories. Thesecategories reflect the values for which the PA is being managed, the control and mitigationof threats to the project, and project institutions and processes.

8. Response Indicators. Response indicators closely and clearly relate to thebiodiversity values of the PA and of PA-people interactions, in a practical context.Response indicators include ecosystem structure, function, and processes. They must besensitive to disturbance but stable under natural conditions so that changes due todisturbance and management can be detected. Assemblages of several species often found

153 Annex 10

together have considerable conservation value in indicating endemism, rarity, regionalcharacteristics, etc. Typical examples would be herpetofauna in the rain forests of thewestern Ghats (Periyar) and the large prey-predator and associated floral community incentral India (e.g., Pench). Such characteristic faunal and floral assemblages would beused as key indicators to detect and measure change. This approach would be preferableto the past practices of using a few indicator species or an inventory of all the species.Indicators of ecosystem processes would include productivity, regeneration etc.

9. Habitat Indicators. These would be used to estimate the expected range ofecological conditions and to identify the likely causes of changes in response indicators.These indicators would include physical structure of the habitat (e.g., soil types, habitatcomplexity), or processes (e.g., siltation, erosion, water flow).

10. Stress or Disturbance Indicators. These measure the activities (often human) andother processes (natural) that are the sources of disturbance, and cause changes in theresponse indicators. Typical examples would include grazing, fuel wood removal, andtourism

11. Socioeconomic Indicators. These reflect attributes of human populations in andaround the PA that are of relevance to PA management and this project because of mutualinteractions and impacts between them and the PA. Particular attention should be paid toimpacts on vulnerable groups, especially tribals and women.

12. Reciprocal Commitment Indicators. Indicators of reciprocal commitmentspinpoint activities that are expected to affect both the socioeconomic and disturbanceindicators and thus to have positive effects on the response indicators.

13. PA Management Indicators. These indicators would measure the effect of PAmanagement activities proposed in the project.

14. Institutions and Processes. These indicators would assess the impacts andeffectiveness of the new institutions and processes of each project component and theproject as a whole.

15. Selection Criteria for Indicators. The following considerations would be used onthe selectopm of indicators:

(a) Would closely and clearly relate to the predetermined benchmarks

(b) Possibility of integrating over time and space to enable comparisons

(c) Availability of historical data for retrospective monitoring

(d) Applicability to a wide variety of areas to enable consistency across PAs

(e) Cost-effectiveness: maximum information with minimum sampling time andeffort.

(f) Amenable to sampling by non-specialists; e.g.,. quantification should besimple

(g) Detectability of trends

154 Annex 10

(h) Ability to distinguish between succession, cycles, random changes,disturbance, and mitigation

(i) Wide dissemination of knowledge about indicators

(j) Simplicity and elegance without over simplification.

Sampling

16. The sampling design would address methods, intensity and interval, precision,interobserver reliability, personnel and logistic needs, and data storage and retrieval. Oncethe indicators have been selected there is often a wide range of methods available tomeasure them. The overall sampling area for each PA would be estimated from remotesensing and/or field surveys. Vegetation status would be determined by remote sensing,transects, or quadrants. Animal presence/absence or absolute/relative abundance would beassessed from quadrants or line transects (either through direct sightings or indirectevidences such as pellets and scats); invertebrates by soil samples, light traps, butterflynets, etc. The sampling locations could be temporary or random. Socioeconomic samplingwould be field based, interview based, or both; interviews would be closed- or open-ended.

17. The time interval between sampling could be annual, biannual (dry and wetperiods), seasonal, or monthly. Since for most living organisms a year forms a naturalcycle, yearly monitoring would be sufficient in most cases. However, many indicators ofprocesses (e.g., productivity, grazing) are seasonal in nature, and thus would requirebiannual or even seasonal sampling. The sampling design would also address requirementsfor personnel and their expertise and the scope for participatory monitoring, especially ofsocioeconomics and disturbance indicators. Generally, the sampling design would:

(a) Be sensitive to the nature and extent of change anticipated

(b) Allow relocation of sampling points

(c) Allow objective and verifiable recording

(d) Have recording procedures within the capability of the local management

(e) Ensire that significant but unforeseen changes do not go unnoticed

(f) Use optimal sampling precision is optimal in relation to sampling intensity

(g) Use sampling interval that reflects seasonal cycles.

Development Process:

18. Analytical Framework for Analysis and Decision Making. The analysis andinterpretation of indicator and other data would be in the context of ecosystem theory,known threats, and project activities. The results would be integrated into informationuseful to decision makers and other interest groups. The analytical framework wouldconsist of the following:

(a) A conceptual model of the mutual interactions and relationships among thevarious sets of indicators

155 Annex 10

(b) A statistical model for testing trends in response indicators in relation tochanges in other indicators. More specifically,

(i) determine whether the nature and extent of changes on PA valuesreflected in the response indicators correspond to

(ii) quantitatively associate such changes with other specific indicators

(c) An appropriate set of summaries and aggregations of indicators andderived indices that facilitate easy perception of trends and changes in PAvalues and the impacts of specific project components.

(d) Clearly stated subjectivity in the selection, monitoring, and interpretation ofindicators and derived indices

(e) Guidelines on reporting intervals and formats.

19. Mechanisms for Project Adjustment. Mechanisms for feed back into project andPA management would ensure project adjustment in response to findings from monitoring.Active participation of PA management personnel and local people would ensure thatthere is an ongoing interaction between monitoring and management. More over, periodicreports and guidelines from the monitoring organization would also ensure changes tosubstantive project design.

20. Development of Monitoring System. The impact monitoring system wouldconsist of:

(a) Conceptual framework addressing the above issues

(b) A potential set of indicators for each PA

(c) Sampling design, to meet personnel, logistic, and training needs

(d) Participatory monitoring

(e) A framework for analysis and decision making

(f) Mechanisms for feedback and project adjustment

The conceptual framework would be developed into a monitoring system throughconsultations with other scientists, PA management, local people, and NGOs; throughpilot studies on some PAs to assess sampling precision, resource needs, etc.; and throughpeer review

21. Operation of Monitoring System. Once an impact monitoring system has beendesigned to cover all PAs, monitoring would be carried out by the research coordinatingorganization in each PA. The first step in the process would be the adoption of thenational monitoring system design to local conditions through a consultative process. Thisis the first time that India is developing a comprehensive monitoring system, and the initialstages would be a learning exercise requiring the total attention of a dedicated team ofscientists interacting closely with PA managers and other interested groups. Thecoordinating organization would oversee the following:

156 Annex 10

(a) Estimation of the current status, extent, and trends in response indicators,and associated human threats

(b) Measuring the response, habitat, and disturbance indicators, and indicatorsof project activities, institutions, and process

(c) Providing periodic reports on impacts and effectiveness of projectactivities, and guidelines on project adjustment.

(d) Periodic review of monitoring design to incorporate new information.

22. Other Design Considerations. The following are the other considerations in theimpact monitoring design:

(a) Monitoring is a long term activity that needs organization, long termfunding, and commitment. Simplicity at every stage of monitoring,especially in data collection and analysis, would minimize personnel,expertise and financial requirements for long term monitoring. Moreover,the association of local research organization in monitoring would ensurethe availability of local expertise if needed

(b) The monitoring system adopted at the beginning of the project would beupdated based on the experience gained as the project progresses

(c) Quality control at every stage of monitoring would be enhanced bytraining, standardization of data collection procedures, and peer review

(d) Developing a comprehensive monitoring program for complex terrestrialecosystems with many pathways of impact is a challenging task. Since acomprehensive monitoring system is being developed in India for the firsttime, the conceptual model and its elaboration into a monitoring systeminitially would depend largely on experiences elsewhere in the world,supported with only limited field tests. This monitoring system would beconstantly upgraded (ensuring continuity) through feedbacks from research

(e) In order to create awareness among the public on the status of biodiversityin the PA and about project impacts, the findings from monitoring wouldbe made available to a wider audience other than the PA management andproject personnel. The environmental awareness program of the project,project newsletters, periodic review meetings, and scientific meetings andpublications would be used as media for this. Participatory monitoringwould also ensure that the local people, NGOs, etc., are aware of theproject impacts. The monitoring data would be made available to those notassociated with the project, for further analysis and peer review. Theorganization that designs the monitoring system would elaborate on themechanisms for dissemination of findings from monitoring.

23. Performance Monitoring Indicators. After the impact monitoring system isdesigned, a summary of its key feaatures will need to be integrated into the PerformanceMonitoring Indicators Matrix (Annex 16).

Table 1: Impact Monitoring Matrix

PA values/Project Indicators Sampling tools Sampling Assessment criteriaactivities interval

I PA VALUES

1.1 Regional Landscape

Physical habitat & Land cover types, vegetation status, Remote sensing, GIS, ground Retrospective, Changes in ecosystemecosystem richness & isolation and fragmentation, spp surveys, spp inventories, baseline, annual richness & diversity, extentcomplexity, Collective spp richness, percentage of endemic and vegetation studies and end point of degradation, changes inrichness and endemism, rare spp, status of corridors for presence of spp or sppRegional connectivity animal movement assemblages of significance,

regional connectivity

Watershed values Water flow in streams, rivers, Meteorological data, water flow Retrospective, changes on water tablesground water level etc. measurements seasonal

1.2 Ecosystem/community

Types and extent, Ecosystem types and area, Remote sensing, GIS, ground Baseline, Changes in area,continuity, spp richness, fragmentation, vegetation status spp surveys of vegetation structure biennial, end fragmentation andrarity, and endemism, composition, richness, diversity, and composition, faunal point; and degradation, speciesecosystem integrity abundance, percentage, rarity & abundance studies, biomass seasonal composition, productivity,

endemism, exotics, weeds, estimation, visual damage nutrient cycling,productivity, nutrient cycling, survey regeneration, weed coverageregeneration.

spp=species

Note: This matrix lists possible options. Specific indicators and tools would be selected from this list on the basis of maximizing the cost-effectiveness ofmonitoring expenditures.

m(DxI-

PA values/Project Indicators Sampling tools Sampling Assessment criteriaactivities interval

1.3 Species/populations

Endangered spp, prey- Abundance, life history, population Presence/absence & abundance Annual, Changes in populationpredator system, key-stone growth rate, distribution, effective estimates, age/sex composition seasonal, & abundance, age/sexspp population size, dispersal, prey-base, studies, mortality & natality continuous composition, predation

predation pattern estimation, scat & kill analysis, pattern, demography, prey-radio-telemetry base

1.4 PA-people interactions

Traditional knowledge Oral & visual knowledge Ethnographic records, Baseline, end Changes in traditionalsystems Direction of information flow community survey, informant point knowledge systems

interviewResource management Traditional land tenure laws, Change in resource usesystems individual land holdings, local management.

resource extraction, gender roles inresource use, local regulation inresource use t

2 DISTURBANCEINDICATORS

2.1 Landcover changes Human land use pattern in and Remote sensing, GIS, ground Baseline, Changes in land use patternaround PA surveys annual, end around & and inside PA

point2.2 Human resource needs, Human & live stock density, gazing Ground surveys, vegetation Baseline, annual Changes in grazing and

grazing, fuel wood intensity, biomass loss due to studies, interviews. and seasonal removal of fuel wood andremoval, NTFP removal. grazing and fuel wood removal, NTFP, persons involved,

weed incidence, NTFP removal, changes in vegetation statusspatial variation, temporal variation.

2.3 Fire damage Incidence of fire, area affected, Annual ground surveys, official Baseline, annual Changes in the incidence ofcritical ecosystems or habitat records, local information fire, extent of area affected,affected status of affected habitats.

2.4 Regional impacts Nature and types of regional Regional plans, ground surveys annual Impacts on project objectivesactivities, impacts on PA ecosystemarea, connectivity, species etc.

x

Note: This matrix lists possible options. Specific indicators and tools would be selected from this list on the basis of maximizing the cost-effectiveness ofmonitoring expenditures.

PA values/Project Indicators Sampling tools Sampling Assessment criteriaactivities interval

3 SOCIOECONOMICS3.1 Cultural diversity and Ethnic groups, composition, Census, administrative records, Baseline, Changes in socioeconomic

Impacts demography, socioeconomic and special studies, PAMIA (PRA) annual; ongoing statuscultural dynamics, and impacts studies

3.2 Resource use pattern Occupation, consumption pattern, Census, administrative records, Baseline, annual Changes in land tenure,land tenure, access to PAs for interviews, field studies resource use pattern, accessresource, gender roles to PAs

3.3 Social infrastructure Housing, nutrition, education, Interviews, administrative Baseline, annual Changes in socialmarketing, recreation, records infrastructuretransportation, customary laws

3.4 PA impacts crop damage nature and extent, Interviews, field measurements Retrospective, Changes in the incidence andcompensation, livestock loss, lost of crop damage, claims for baseline, annual, intensity of crop andgrazing opportunity, other lost compensation seasonal livestock loss, compensationresources

4 PA MANAGEMENT4.1 PA boundaries and Changes in management plans, PA Administrative records and Baseline, annual Changes in ecological

zonation boundaries, zonation maps boundaries of PA andzonation within PA,percentage of critical areasprotected

4.2 Infrastructure Infra-structural development Administrative records, physical Baseline, annualdevelopment (physical), functional indicators verification

4.3 Animal damage control Erection of animal damage control Administrative records, physical Retrospective, Changes in the extent of cropstructures, nature and extent of verification, estimation of crop annual, seasonal damage due to wild animalsanimal damage damage

4.4 Fire control measures Erection of fire control structures, Administrative records, Retrospective, Changes in the incidence andincidence of fire, extent of fire verification, field estimation of annual, seasonal intensity of fire, and habitatdamage incidence of fire, retrospective improvement

data

4.5 Habitat enrichment Area of habitat enrichment, animal Administrative records, Annual, seasonal Changes in animal use ofmeasures use of those areas verification, field studies on manipulated habitats 0

animal use of the area x

Note: This matrix lists possible options. Specific indicators and tools would be selected from this list on the basis of maximizing the cost-effectiveness ofmonitoring expenditures.

PA values/Project Indicators Sampling tools Sampling Assessment criteriaactivities interval

5 PROJECT PROCESSES

5.1 Community role in Devolution of authority to Local records, minutes of Baseline, annual Changes in community rolesmanaging PA communities meetings, interviews in PA management

5.2 Community enforcing PA Evidence of community role in PA Local records, minutes of Baseline, annual Changes in community rolesprotection protection meetings, interviews in protection

5.3 Community role in Participation in microplanning Local records, minutes of Annualmicroplanning meetings, interviews

5.4 Community participation in Participation in monitoring Local records, minutes of Annualmonitoring impacts meetings, interviews

6 PROJECT INSTITUTIONS

6.1 Regulatory responsibilities Regulations enforced, compliance Executive orders, inspection Baseline, annual Changes in regulatorymonitored, records, administrative records responsibilities and

functioning o6.2 National coordinating body Issues coordinated, training Agendas, meetings, minutes Baseline, annual Issues resolved

organized

6.3 Staffing Changes in staffing Budgets, staffing records Annual Adequacy of staff6.4 Infra-structure Equipment and other facilities Equipment inventories Annual Adequacy of equipment6.5 Financial resources Changes in financial resources Budget requests, annual reports, Annual Meeting targets

financial reviews

Note: This matrix lists possible options. Specific indicators and tools would be selected from this list on the basis of maximizing the cost-effectiveness ofmonitoring expenditures.

D

x

161 Annex 10

C. Research

Research Strategy

24. In order to achieve the objectives of better PA management and ecodevelopment forconservation of biodiversity, a better understanding of the relevant issues is necessary. Analmost total paucity of information on the ecological and socioeconomic issues in five of theseven PAs (in Gir and Periyar some research has been carried out), makes necessary astrenuous effort to generate the critical information through research. Such research shouldalso address long term information needs of the PAs

25. In view of the constraints described in Annex 2, research for generating criticalinformation needs of this project requires a novel and strategic approach. This approach shouldaddress the following:

(a) The consultative processes and mechanisms necessary to ensure that researchaddresses information needs that are critical to this project and to the long termmanagement of the PA

(b) The need to develop research interest and expertise in local institutionsaround the PAs so that information needs of the PAs are met locally in thelong run

(c) Mechanisms to ensure that project PAs support and attract sustainedresearch that would meet their information needs

(d) Mechanisms to ensure that research findings guide PA management andecodevelopment activities on a sustained basis

(e) Mechanisms for coordination of research both at the national and PAlevels.

26. The strategic approach to identify critical information needs of the PAs would include(a) a national level framework that would identify information needs common to all PAs; and(b) PA level research planning to adapt the national level framework to PA level so as toinclude site specific information needs. This planning would not be done by professionalresearchers in isolation, but rather through a consultative process involving PA management,local stake holders, and other interest groups.

27. Although critical information needs might vary among PAs to some extent, mostinformation needs are common to them. These needs relate to:

(a) PA-people interactions; these are:

(i) impacts of legal or customary human uses such as grazing andNTFP collection

(ii) illegal human activities: encroachment, poaching

(iii) human, livestock and crop depredation

(b) PA management, which comprises:

(i) impacts of PA management

162 Annex 10

(ii) zonation and PA boundary with reference to the types and extent ofvarious ecosystems, and animal ranges

(iii) impacts and control of forest fire

(iv) fragile ecosystems or habitats

(v) key species requiring attention

(vi) connectivity with surrounding areas

(vii) population relocation initiatives

(viii) tourism

(c) Village ecodevelopment, including:

(i) structure and dynamics of local communities; cultural heritage andinstitutions; traditional knowledge systems

(ii) socioeconomics: tenure rights, participatory processes in traditionalorganizations, access to, use and management of resources

(iii) income generation opportunities: subsistence employmentopportunities

Table 2 provides examples of research questions related to these topics.

Table 2: Research & Monitoring Approach(A) "PRESSURE" POINTS FOR MANAGEMENT

kPA P;IORITIES:RESEARCH QUESTIONS NOTES

(1) Human Impacts due to What is the sustainable yield of Livestock Grazing, FodderRights & Leases in PA (e.g., products or carrying capacity of uses Extraction, Fuelwoodgrazing, NTFP collection) under traditional rights and leases? Collection, Timber

What are acceptable mechanisms or Extraction, Non-Timberincentives to mitigate, offset or control Forest Products (NTFP)excessive pressures on PA? Collection, Government

Uses, Thoroughfares,Tourism, Plantations

(2) Illegal Activities in PA What motivates illegal activities in PA? Occupation and Use,(e.g., poaching, What mechanisms or incentives can be Encroachment (e.g.encroachment) employed for its prevention, mitigation, Agriculture, Ganja

or off-set? Cultivation), PoachingOffenses (e.g. Elephants,Ungulates, Teak)

(3) Habitat Degradation and What causes habitat degradation and Exotic Weeds and Pests,Exotic Infestations in PA exotic infestations in PA? What Erosion, Quarrying

mechanisms or incentives can beemployed for its arrest, reversal, orcontrol?

(4) Human or Livestock What causes human and/or livestock Tigers, LionsDepredation by Carnivores depredation by large carnivores outsideoutside PA PA? What mechanisms can be used for

its prevention, mitigation, or control?

163 Annex 10

PA PRIORITIES RESEARCH QUESTIONS NOTES

(5) Crop Damage outside PA What causes crop damage outside PA Elephants, Wild Boar,by Large & Small by herbivores or detritivores? What Langur, Neelgai, PeafowlHerbivores & Detritivores mechanisms can be used for its

prevention, mitigation, or control?

(6) Management Practices of What are the effects of PA management Fuelwood and FodderPA practices on biodiversity conservation, Plantations, Population

if any? What mechanisms can be used Relocation, Compensations,to minimize adverse effects? Tourism Control, Public

Awareness, Extension

(7) Watershed or Land Use What is the nature and magnitude of Fires, Floods, Droughts,Effects on PA land use and watershed environmental Water Pollution, Frosts and

effects on PA and biodiversity Storms, Epidemicsconservation? What policies ormechanisms can be used to prevent,mitigate or off-set these effects?

(B) VILLAGE ECODEVELOPMENT IN & AROUND THE P.A.

PA PRIORITIES: RESEARCH QUESTIONS NOTES

(8) Forest Communities How dependent is the livelihood of Tribal or Non-tribalUsing PA and Village forest communities on PA? What hamlets or villagesEcodevelopment development incentives could help

reduce this dependency whileconserving biodiversity?

(9) Socioeconomics of What are the socioeconomic features Tenure and Rights,Community for Village governing the livelihood of local Participatory Process,Ecodevelopment communities? How can these be used Access to Resources,

synergetically to enhance their Cultural Heritage,sustainable livelihood through Traditional Resourceecodevelopment'? Management Systems

(10) Scarce Employment What is the cause for low productivity Improved agriculturalOpportunities for and income from traditional activities "seeds", Cash Crops,Indigenous Peoples supporting forest communities? What Village Industries

opportunities allow for theirimprovement through value-added andemployment'.

(11) Public Use of PA for What is the nature of these public uses Temple Pilgrimages,Village Enterprises and of PA? What policies and incentives Tourism, ThoroughfaresEmployment would encourage local community

enterprises and income-generation inthese public uses?

NOTES:

KEY SPECIES: Dominant or Unique Producers (trees, shrubs, grasses, weeds), Consumers (vertebrateherbivores and carnivores, pests, parasites), Decomposers (termites), Pollinators (bees, thrips), Vectors(seed dispersal)

ECOSYSTEM TYPES: Major, Unique, Threatened or Degraded Habitats, and Ecosystems

164 Annex 10

Research Coordination

28. Since attempts at research by the PA Management have often been unsuccessful,research is best entrusted to research organisations, universities, and independent researchers.However, the capacity for research is limited at both the national and local levels, and researchplanning, therefore, should address these constraints and consider the capacity that could bedeveloped during the project. National research institutions have national level mandates andhave to shift their research focus topically and geographically when required. It is, therefore,inevitable that much of the research must be carried out by local institutions located near thePA and individual researchers working in the area. This would also build up research interestand expertise around the PA and support informal groups of scientists who are working in aparticular PA. With adequate financial support PAs would then have a sustainable source ofinfornation for PA management. Only very few PAs have local institutions (Kerala ForestryResearch Institute (KFRI) for Periyar and State Forestry Research Institute (SFRI) for Pench)and have informal groups of scientists (Nagarhole and Ranthambhore) that can independentlyconduct socioeconomic and ecological research. Some human capacity development isnecessary for local institutions and individual researchers, for example through training andcollaborative projects with national institutions. A preliminary list of potential local institutionsfor conducting research in the PAs is given below. The research strategy would include anexpansion of this list and an additional inventory of the availability and capabilities of individualresearchers.

29. Given the limited capacity at national and local levels to conduct research in the shortterm, research activities in the project should be phased so that the national and localresearchers can absorb the work load and develop their capacity to meet further requirements.

30. Effective coordination of research both at the national and PA levels is necessary inorder to ensure (a) that research addresses issues of imnmediate and long term relevance to PAmanagement and ecodevelopment; (b) that these issues are identified through a consultativeprocess; (c) efficient funding; (d) adequate training for the research staff, (e) smooth conduct offield studies; (f) timely compilation, evaluation, and dissemination of results; (g) ongoinginteraction among the researchers, PA management, and other interest groups that facilitateincorporation of research findings in PA management and ecodevelopment activities.

31. To free PA management from responsibility for administering research funds on a dayto day basis, the entire research funds for a PA may be entrusted with one coordinatinginstitution. This institution should have the expertise to conduct and coordinate research, andhave adequate financial and administrative flexibility to contract, administer, and subcontractthe research funds if needed. Research coordination in each PA is perhaps best entrusted to alocal research institution, with whom the PA management could interact on a day-to-day basis.It would be the responsibility of the coordinating research institution to (a) contract researchfrom PA; (b) subcontract research projects to other individuals and organisations if needed andto administer the funds; (c) produce periodic and final reports of the research projects; (d)arrange for periodic independent review of the projects, (e) arrange for short term studies whenrequested by the PA management; (f) interact with PA management to facilitate incorporationof research findings into management.

165 Annex 10

32. Although some PAs have local institutions with the capability to coordinate research(e.g. KFRI for Periyar and SFRI for Pench), others do not have such institutions that arereadily identifiable. An assessment of the capabilities of the local institutions to coordinateresearch is thus necessary. In the absence of capable local institutions, research coordination insome PAs may have to be done by a national institute.

Research Projects

33. The research requirements are best organized into distinct projects, although thesewould not necessarily be mutually exclusive. Some of these would be long-term projects(2-4 years), while others would be of short duration (up to 18 months). The former wouldoften address long-term information needs of the PA, the latter would often addressimmediate information needs. Short duration projects would also cover information needsthat are identified on a contingent basis as the project progresses. It should be theresponsibility of individuals and organizations contracting individual research projects tohire research staff (e.g., research fellows) and procure equipment etc., as and whenrequired. A few potential research projects, that combine several information needs, aregiven below. The current limits on capacity for conducting research, mean that only about4 to 8 major research projects (including ecology and socioeconomics) can be taken up ineach PA during the next five years without substantial reduction in quality. Similarly, onlyup to a maximum of about 10 short term projects can be taken up.

34. The following steps are suggested in the implementation of research in each PA:

(a) Identification of information needs in consultation with PAs, NGOs,national and local research institutions, and local people

(b) Review of existing information to identify gaps

(c) Formulation of distinct research projects

(d) Contracting of all research projects to one institution identified as thecoordinating institute

(e) Continuing interaction between the PA management, researchers, andcoordinating institutions to facilitate the conduct of research and to ensurethat research addresses issues of relevance to management and that PAmanagement and ecodevelopment activities are guided by research findings

(f) Periodic compilation, evaluation and dissemination of research findings tothe PA management, scientists, and the public.

35. Individual research projects are estimated to cost about Rs. 900,000 for long-termprojects (2-4 years) and Rs. 250,000 for short-term projects. The cost of individual projects is,however, expected to vary by about 20 percent. These costs include equipment neededspecifically for the project, fuel and hiring of vehicle, fellowships, travel and per diem, etc, anda contracting fee at a specified percentage.

Research Facilities

36. None of the PAs have basic facilities for research and these would be provided bythe PA management. These would include (a) a research building with accommodation for

166 Annex 10

field researchers; (b) a vehicle for research, the use of which would be moderated by theresearch coordinating institution; and (c) basic equipment such as a refrigerator, oven, etc.that would be shared by researchers in the field. Equipment required for specific projectswould be acquired as part of the project. Some PAs would also provide one or two fieldstations, for short camping trips away from the main base.

D. Terms of Reference

Terms of Reference for Local Research and Impact MonitoringCoordinating Organization

Reports to: PA Field Director

Objectives: To (a) identify and formulate research projects; (b) call for, evaluate, andsubcontract research proposals; (c)facilitate research and impact monitoring, andproduce periodic reports and reviews; and (d) interact with PA management so asto incorporate findings into PA management and ecodevelopment. The PAmanagement would follow the guidelines developed by the national researchcoordinator while selecting and contracting the local level research coordinator.

Responsibilities: Contract the entire research funds from the PA and administer them effectively;this includes subcontracting to other organizations and individuals if needed;

Identify research issues in consultation with PA management, national researchcoordinating institution, and other interest groups;

Formulate research topics and terms of reference, call for, evaluate, and selectresearch proposals on the identified topics;

Provide training to the research staff so as to develop their capacity to conductresearch;

Facilitate the conduct of research in the field by interacting with local researchadvisory committee, PA management, and researchers to ensure availability offunds, accommodation, vehicle, and basic laboratory equipment provided by thePA management;

Produce periodic compilation of reports from all the projects, and other reports asrequired by the PA management;

Arrange for periodic review and evaluation of research projects;

Interact with PA management and local level research advisory committee tofacilitate incorporation of research findings into PA management andecodevelopment activities;

Provide expertise to forest department on other matters related to informationneeds.

SFD Obligations: The PA management would provide (a) funds for research at appropriate intervals;(b) a contracting fee at a specified percentage of the research funds; (c) baseaccommodation and laboratory consisting of basic equipment, including acomputer; (d) one vehicle the use of which would be moderated by thecoordinating organization.

Duration: Five years

Qualifications: As specified by national coordinator for research.

167 Annex 10

Preliminary List of Potential Institutions that Qualify For Research in PAs.(Potential institutions for coordination of research are marked with *)

1. Buxa Tiger ReserveCalcutta University, CalcuttaBurdwan UniversityNorth Bengal University, Siliguri, West Bengal *Regional Remote Sensing Agency, Kharagpur, West BengalCentre for Social Studies, CalcuttaNational Education and Wildlife Service, Calcutta.WWF-CalcuttaRamakrishna Mission, CalcuttaLok Shiksha Parishad, CalcuttaJadavpur University

2. Gir National ParkSaurashtra University, Rajkot, GujaratM. S. University, Baroda, GujaratBombay Natural History Society, BombayGujarat Agricultural University, Junagarh Campus

3. Nagarhole National ParkCentre for Ecological Sciences, Bangalore *Mangalore University, Mangalore *Salim Ali Centre for Ornithology and Natural History, Coimbatore *Centre for Wildlife Studies, Mysore *Mysore University, MysoreMYRADA, Bangalore

4. Palamau Tiger ReserveRanchi University, RanchiNature Conservation Society, Daltonganj

5. Pench Tiger ReserveState Forest Research Institute, Bhopal *Tribal Research Institute, BhopalTropical Forest Research Institute, JabalpurIndian Institute of Forest Management, BhopalNational Environmental Engineering Research Institute, NagpurSagar UniversityMAPCOST, Bhopal

6. Periyar Tiger ReserveKerala Forest Research Institute, Trissur, Kerala *

168 Annex 10

Kerala University, Tiruvananthapuram, KeralaGandhi University, Kottayam, KeralaCalicut University, Calicut, KeralaSalim Ali Centre for Ornithology and Natural History, Coimbatore*Centre for Earth Sciences, Tiruvananthapuram, KeralaTropical Botanical Garden, Tiruvananthapuram, Kerala

7. Ranthambhore Tiger ReserveDepartment of Environment, J.N.V UniversityRajasthan University, JaipurRajasthan Agricultural University, BikaneerCentral Arid Zone Research Institute, JodhpurJawaharlal Nehru University, New Delhi *

Examples of Potential Research Projects

37. Although the information needs vary among the PAs, much would be common andbasic, since very little research has been carried out in most PAs. The potential forresearch depends on:

(a) The ecological complexity of the PA, a PA with greater biological diversityat ecosystem or species levels (e.g., Periyar) has greater research potential,

(b) Complexity of management; a large predator-prey system (e.g., inRanthambhore) when confined to a small PA would require greaterinformation for effective management

(c) Complexity of human interactions; a PA with a large human populationinteracting with it in diverse ways would also require a greater informationinput for effective management

38. The potential for research is also dictated by the capability of local and otherresearch institutions to conduct research.

39. Landscape/Ecosystem level studies. Of fundamental importance to PAmanagement is information on regional landscape (consisting of the PA and surrounds)and extent and status of communities/ecosystems contained within. This information isnecessary for

(a) Setting ecological boundaries of the PA

(b) Zonation of the park into core, buffer, and tourism zones

(c) Identifying degraded and fragile ecosystems

(d) Identifying critical animal movement corridors within the PA and inadjacent areas

40. (e) A proper understanding of the role of the PA in regional conservation.

169 Annex 10

41. This baseline data, however, is not available for any of the PAs in a form that is ofpractical value to the management. This information would also be helpful as a majorelement in setting up the monitoring program

42. The questions addressed could include:

(a) Types, distribution, extent, fragmentation and linkages at landscape andecosystems levels

(b) Major disturbance regimes at landscape and ecosystem levels; (c) land usepattern trends

(c) Fragile ecosystems or habitats

(d) Size and proportion of ecosystem types protected etc

43. Research methods would include analysis of satellite images and aerialphotographs with ground truthing, and ground studies on vegetation composition andstatus, and disturbance types.

44. Outputs would include maps showing topography, major land features, waterbodies, classified vegetation, major disturbance regimes, trends in land use changes,important animal movement corridors etc.

45. Species/population level studies. Faunal and floral distribution and abundancewith reference to the landscape and ecosystems are critical to PA management for manyreasons:

(a) Rationalization of PA boundaries and zonation with reference to animaldistribution and movement

(b) Identification of habitat features (e.g., fodder distribution, water holes) ormanagement measures (e.g., tourism management, roads) that are criticalto animal distribution

(c) Identifying seasonal movement pattern of animals, especially largemammals and its implications for PA management (e.g., crop damage,water hole management)

(d) Monitoring the status and management requirements of species or speciesassemblages or communities that need particular management attention.

46. The questions addressed could include:

(a) The distribution and abundance pattern of species or species groups withreference to ecosystems or communities and seasonal trends

(b) Relation of patterns to habitat features and management activities

(c) The extent of fragmentation of population of species of concern andmanagement implications

(d) The life history and demographic characteristics of keystone or threatenedspecies

(e) The dietary and other habitat requirements of important species.

170 Annex 10

47. The methods employed could include studies on species composition in variousecosystems on a seasonal basis, population density or other abundance estimates,estimation of age/sex composition and birth and mortality rates, analysis of habitatfeatures, etc.

48. The outputs could include an overlay of animal and plant distribution on theecosystem maps, identification of habitat features critical to animal distribution, populationprojections of threatened species, etc.

49. Crop and livestock depredation: Crop damage by wild ungulates and cattlelifting by large carnivores is a major management problem in many of the PAs. Many ofthe PAs have already taken management measures, often on an ad hoc basis, to containthese problems. These measures include payment of compensation, erection of wildlifecontrol structures such as electric fencing and stone walls and trenching. However, acomprehensive assessment of the nature and extent of damage in terms of spatial andtemporal distribution and economic loss to villagers has not been done in any PA. Thiswould thus form a typical short term project.

50. Long-term biological research studies. Even though the major focus of researchwould be on issues of immediate concern to PA management and village ecodevelopment,research during the project period would also begin to address issues of long-termconcern. these would include grazing impacts under different management arrangements,the role of fire in maintaining critical habitats, and long-term studies on criticallyendangered species. The phasing of these studies would, however, depend on the capacityavailable to undertake research.

51. PA/People Interactions. Effective PA management will require a betterunderstanding of relationships between PA resources and human populations. Thisinformation will be essential for assessing the social and economic impacts of PAestablishment and ecodevelopment activities, providing opportunities for localparticipation in PA management, improving and contributing knowledge on PA resourcesfor management purposes, and examining the impact of indigenous and traditionalpractices. Generally, the level of research activity on PA/people interactions across theeight sites is low, if not absent. Some research has been carried out in Gir, Ranthambhoreand Periyar. The scope of research into PA/people interactions is extensive. Potentiallyuseful projects could include investigations into the following areas.

52. Indigenous knowledge systems. Indigenous knowledge systems used by humanpopulations, especially tribal groups, and their contribution to biodiversity conservationare important. Studies would investigate:

(a) Cultural aspects of relationships between natural resources in PAs andpeople, especially tribal gr-oups

(b) The management of natural resources through traditional systems oforganization and implications for PA objectives

(c) The economics of livelihood strategies based on forest resources withspecific foci on women, tribal groups, and other marginal communities.

171 Annex 10

Studies of this nature are likely to be long-term efforts, although some could be brokendown into short-term research projects. A typical short-term project could investigate thecultural aspects of collection of a particular non-timber forest product, providinginformation within a larger project investigating cultural and ecological aspects of theactivity.

53. Social organization and participation studies. The village ecodevelopmentcomponent of the project relies on a high level of local participation in the proposedactivities. For this and other similar projects it will be important to investigate the processand outcomes of participation in ecodevelopment activities. The information will becritical in refining the microplanning process, developing monitoring plans, and improvingrelations between PA authorities, NGOs, and local people. Again, the scope ofinvestigations in this area is extensive. Potentially useful studies could include thefollowing:

(a) The nature and extent of participation in village ecodevelopment activities

(b) Relationships between the social organization of local communities andparticipation in ecodevelopment activities

(c) Nature of decision-making in local communities and implications formicroplanning and implementation of reciprocal commitments

(d) Conflict resolution mechanisms in local communities.

54. Socioeconomic impacts of PA establishment. It will be important to have moreinformation on the impact of PA establishment on the socioeconomic status of residentpopulations and coping strategies adopted. This research would help policy makers tobetter understand the dynamics of PA establishment and to evaluate the level ofappropriate compensatory assistance for groups negatively affected, and to evaluate theminimum level of incentives required.

173 Annex 11

Annex 11: Project Management Component

A. Overview

1. The project would continue development of the project implementation strategyand guidelines initiated with Project Preparation Facility financing. All national-levelsupport for implementation and capacity development, publicity and disseminationcontracts, implementation reviews and policy and strategy studies, guidelines, and trainingprograms, is included in the project management component.

2. National-level Implementation Support and Capacity Development. Specifictasks would include:

(a) PA management planning: guidelines and training

(b) Regional planning and regulation: capacity development

(c) Environmental review: guidelines and initial scoping,

(d) Participatory microplanning and development of training program,

(e) Social assessment review: guidelines and initial scoping

(f) Village ecodevelopment investments: feasibility and eligibility guidelines

(g) Environmental education and awareness: guidelines and capacitydevelopment

(h) Impact monitoring: guidelines

(i) Research/impact monitoring: strategy and national-level interchange

(j) Project performance review: guidelines and format

(k) Broad project management issues: multi-state learning and dissemnination.

3. Publicity and Dissemination Contracts. The project would include contractualsupport for translation of the entire staff appraisal report and selected portions into Hindiand into native languages of local NGOs and for the public dissemination of the staffappraisal report, the indicative plan, other relevant project documents, and a semiannualnewsletter; it would also support production of a video on project activities.

4. Implementation Reviews. The project would support a series of national levelimplementation reviews some of which would have a specific focus. In many cases theproject implementation reviews would build upon the initial assessments and guidelinesdeveloped with Project Preparation Facility support, and take a facilitative approach.However, the project also includes support for independent assessments by specialists nototherwise involved in the project, in order to ensure transparency and accountability.Specific task would include:

(a) Intensive project performance review

(b) Project expenditure and procurement review

(c) Annual independent review.

174 Annex 11

5. Policy and Strategy Studies. In the cases of financial sustainability and theecotourism strategy, states would conduct their own studies which would be followed by anational study on each topic that would summarize and integrate the state-level findings,and address national-level issues. The policy and strategy studies on issues affecting thelong-term institutional arrangements for ecodevelopment would include:

(a) Financial sustainability

(b) Ecotourism and visitor strategy.

(c) Ecodevelopment incentives and income impacts study

6. Administrative Support. Government staff would be responsible for most of thedirect and routine PA and national-level project administration, in accordance with staffplans outlined in Annex 15. They would receive contractual support for projectadministration and contract management.

B. National-level Implementation Support and Capacity Development

Draft Terms of Reference: Project Implementation Support on PAManagement Planning Guidelines and TrainingReports to: Director, Project Tiger Office and PA Field Directors

Objectives To prepare guidelines for PA management planning and facilitate theimplementation of the the PA management planning subcomponent

Responsibilities: Review Annex 7 and develop workplan to develop guidelines that would addressissues raised regarding the strengthening of PA management plans.

Prepare guidelines and help PAs to identify stakeholders in the PA, assess currentlevel of participation of local people and other stakeholders in PA managementand planning process, and suggest mechanisms to improve it, if necessary

Prepare guidelines and help PAs to examine current boundaries of the PAs todetermine if any biologically significant ecosystems have been left under-represented in the PA. Examine the current/proposed focus of ecodevelopmentaround the PAs and suggest changes if necessary, to focus it on more demanding(biologically more important) parts of the PA;

Prepare guidelines and help PAs to examine current or proposedmanagement/working plans dealing with the buffer zones (designated or not),identify prescriptions/proposals conflicting with the objectives or methods of PAmanagement (if any), and suggest ameliorative and/or alternative approaches tomake management of PA and surrounding lands fully compatible with each other

Prepare recommendations for approaches, tools, and formats for addressing otheritems in the project PA management planning subcomponent;

Visit PA sites, and hold discussions and collect field information. State/PAauthorities would make all necessary documentation available and facilitate fieldwork and interaction

Facilitate national level workshop to review recommendations for plan updates

Prepare and submit a consolidated report outlining strategies and approaches forupdating PA plans and submit site specific reports for each PA

175 Annex 11

Provide training to selected officers from each PA in PA management planpreparation, and

Provide guidance to States during the updating of individual PA managementplans, if necessary.

Duration: Two years

Qualifications: Extensive experience in preparation and implementation of PA managementplans, training and/or research in PAs in the country. Knowledge of naturalresource management issues and environmental assessment site review.Experience in facilitation of training, workshops, and meetings.

Draft Terms of Reference:Regional Planning and Regulation: Capacity DevelopmentReports to: Director, Project Tiger

Objectives To facilitate the provision of basic information for managing land surrounding PAin manner compatible with conservation and for integrating PA concerns intolarge scale land-use planning initiatives and regulations at local and regionallevels. To facilitate the identification and assessment of activities outside the PAthat might potentially undermine conservation within the PA and to seek newapproaches to deal with these threats, using criteria and procedures outlined inAnnex 7.

Responsibilities: Review Annex 7 and develop workplan to develop guidelines that would addressissues raised regarding the incorporation of PA concerns into regional planningand regulation.

Help PAs to identify existing or proposed development plans of agencies(irrigation, power, agriculture, tribal development, district development, five-yearplans, forestry, livestock development and others) in and around the PA.

Examine the current procedures and guidelines for the preparation of districtdevelopment plans (5-year or annual), discuss and propose ways for integratingecodevelopment concerns of PAs into the district development plans

With reference to the criteria and procedures outlined in Annex 7, help PAs todetermine if these plans contain investments that have the potential to directly orindirectly impact the PA and its long-term viability, and to the extent to whichsuch plans include or require studies and assessments to address these impacts.Focus on (a) potenital increase in the level of encroachment into the PA that is notadequately mitigated, (b) potential disruption of migrations of ecologicallyimportant species---for example, net loss of wildlife corridors, (c) potentialconversion of existing or proposed "core" areas of PAs as defined in PAmanagement plans, and (d) conversion, fragmentation, or change in legal status ofany part of the PA that would materially and adversely affect the viability ofecologically important ecosystems and species.

With reference to the criteria and procedures outlined in Annex 7, help PAs todetermine if these plans contain investments that have the potential to materiallyand adversely affect the ecodevelopment strategy of decreasing negativeinteractions and increasing collaboration between local people and PA managers,and the extent to which such plans include or require studies and assessments toaddress these impacts. Focus on (a) potential conversion, fragmentation,, or

176 Annex 11

change in legal status of any part of the PA (especially that affecting customaryrights of indigenous people), and (b) on potential displacement of people and theextent to which resettlement plans include (i) accurate baseline studies, (ii) carefulconsultation, (iii) restoration of living standards, (iv) full compensation for landand other assets including customary rights of indigenous people, and (v) astrategy for sustainable encroachment control.

Analyze the extent of dialogue, communication and consultation between keydevelopment agencies and PA authorities, and the extent of public consultation onthese issues and the channels available for this purpose. Suggest mechanisms toimprove these activities and the decision-making associated with MOEF and forestdepartment review processes.

Propose mechanisms for ensuring coordination of regional activities with PAmanagement programs.

Analyze MOEF procedures and practices and suggest improvements.

Monitor the incorporation into the updated PA management plans of improvedprocesses that address regional issues. Monitor compliance with the projectcovenant on regional activities. Monitor performance of regional planning andassessment activities for the project duration. Facilitate improvements.

Duration: Project duration

Qualifications: Over five years experience and expertise in regional planning and development.Understanding of ecological processes and interactions. Experience inparticipatory mechanisms and environmental analysis. Familiarity withresettlement and indigenous people's development planning, including guidelines,and access to additional expertise in these areas as necessary.

Draft Terms of Reference:Environmental Review Guidelines and Initial ScopingReports to: Director, Project Tiger

Responsibilities: Review Annex 17 and develop workplan to develop guidelines that would addressissues raised regarding environmental review.

Further consider site-specific environmental impacts of activities proposed for PAmanagement improvements and in village ecodevelopment microplans,complementing the preliminary environmental analysis carried out during projectpreparation and summarized in Annex 17.

Recommend measures for strengthening environmental management andmonitoring procedures during implementation of the project, includingrecommendations for the cost-effective conduct of site-specific assessments ofproject investments prior to execution.

Recommend guidelines for environmental review work of PA ecologist and forIntensive Project Performance Review Team.

Duration: One year

Qualifications: Professional competence and extensive experience in the conduct of environmentalassessments related to biological resources. Expertise in biological assessmentsand surveys and PA management activities.

177 Annex 11

Draft Terms of Reference: Development of Participatory Microplanning andDevelopment of Training ProgramsReports to: Director, Project Tiger

Responsibilities: Review Annex 8 and to continue to develop and modify, as necessary for Indianconditions, (a) guidelines for participatory microplanning, and (b) guidelines fortraining programs to implement the above. The contractor would build upon theguidelines outlined in the staff appraisal report.

Particular emphasis will need to be paid to:

* Strategies for mitigating negative impacts on especially vulnerablestakeholders of tribal groups, women, and the poor

* Increasing effective participation by stakeholders in project activities, withemphases on ecodevelopment activities and decision-making in projectmanagement

* Strengthening and developing mechanisms for conflict resolution between thevarious stakeholders

* Establishing a system for periodically reviewing the effectiveness of socialmonitoring in improving ongoing planning and implementation,incorporating the recommendations of the Social Assessment Review (seebelow).

Specific areas to be covered will include:

* Providing practical advice on how carry out participatory microplanning

D Developing guidelines for appropriate training programs.

To develop the training programs the specialist would:

* Review currently available training programs in microplanning techniques

* Identify training needs for local and national NGOs involved in participatoryvillage ecodevelopment microplanning

* Propose training programs for NGOs and other groups appropriate to localconditions - of various duration

* Prepare handbooks in appropriate languages for those conductingmicroplanning

* Coordinate microplanning training programs across project areas

* Conduct monitoring of training programs and prepare recommendations forfuture training needs

Duration: Project cycle including PPF

Qualifications: Organization with professional experience in facilitating participatorymicroplanning for indigenous people, women, and other marginalized groups,social impact assessment, and training. Organization with long-term capability todevelop training programs; proven track-record in developing and implementingtraining programs. Prior experience of protected area and natural resourcemanagement desirable..

178 Annex 11

Draft Terms of Reference:Social Assessment Review Guidelines and Initial ScopingQualifications: Professional competence and extensive experience in the conduct of environmental

assessments related to social resources. Expertise in social assessments andsurveys and PA management activities.

Reports to: Director, Project Tiger

Responsibilities: Review Annex 18 and further consider site-specific social impacts of activitiesproposed for PA management improvements and in village ecodevelopmentmicroplans, complementing the preliminary social assessment analysis carried outduring project preparation.

Continue to develop and modify, as necessary for Indian conditions theparticipatory framework of social assessment analysis that was developed duringproject preparation and appraisal and mechanisms to ensure that social monitoringfindings are used to mitigate negative impacts in ongoing implementation

Particular attention would be paid to:

* Predicting the social consequences of project activities and alternative coursesof action on stakeholders, identifying unanticipated options, identifyingadverse impacts on ongoing projects. Areas of concern include socialorganizational structures and decision-making processes, sociocultural issues,distributional impacts, land tenure arrangements, access to and managementof natural resources

* Identifying strategies to mitigate or minimize negative impacts prior to andduring implementation

* Incorporating findings from impact monitoring and project performancereview of effects through the social assessment framework, providingfeedback to change project components, increase institutional learning andbuild trust among project stakeholder

Recommend measures for strengthening management and monitoring proceduresduring implementation of the project, including recommendations for the cost-effective conduct of site-specific assessments of project investments prior toexecution.

Recommend guidelines for social assessment review work of PA sociologists andfor Intensive Project Performance Review Team.

Duration: One year

Qualifications: Professional competence and extensive experience in the conduct of socialassessments related to natural resource management. Expertise in socialassessments.

Draft Terms of Reference: Review and Revision of Feasibility andEligibility Guidelines for Village Ecodevelopment ActivitiesReports to: Director, Project Tiger

Objectives: Strengthen existing guidelines and review selected site-specific issues to ensurethat microplans meet project objectives, fulfill eligibility criteria, and are feasible.

Responsibilities: Review Annex 8 and other project documentation. Obtain a clear understanding of

179 Annex 11

the concepts, objectives, planning and implementation arrangements for thevillage ecodevelopment activit;es and the potential range of possible investmentsthrough review of project documents and discussion with national and stategovernment staff, NGOs and others.

Review the existing feasibility and eligibility guidelines developed forecodevelopment investments and identify gaps and areas that requirestrengthening, with a specific focus on sector specific issues. Make field visitswhere necessary.

Review technical, environmental, social, institutional, and financial guidelines forcomparable types of investments used by government agencies, commercial banks,NGOs, and donors.

Recommend revisions and additions, building on experience of others, andproduce an expanded list of sector-specific feasibility considerations and a separatelist of annotated references.

Field test the revised and expanded list of feasibility considerations to ensure theirapplicability.

Recommend measures, including arrangements of staffing, inter-agencycoordination and training needed to implement the guidelines.

Duration: Five year retainer contract. Initial support included in PPF.

Qualifications: Firm, institution, or NGO with extensive experience in the planning, research, andimplementation of community-based investments, especially those related tonatural resource management. Must have capacity and experience in inter-disciplinary work, particularly in social, environmental, and institutional aspects,and access to highly qualified technical experts.

Draft Terms of Reference: Environmental Education and Awareness:Guidelines and Capacity DevelopmentReports to: Director, Project Tiger

Objectives: To develop a strategy for implementation of an enviromnental education andawareness programs that would be directed at all audiences: policy makers,politicians, visitors, local communities, school children, etc., that would providethe basis and guidance for the later development of environmental education andawareness program at each project PA.

Responsibilities: Review Annex 9.

Review and assess the range of education and awareness programs beingimplemented for PAs and biodiversity conservation in general and anunderstanding of the effectiveness of these programs and the institutions carryingout these programs.

Examine the range of education and awareness methods and tools being used inthe project PAs and assess the effectiveness of these methods on the targetaudiences.

Assess the capacity and capability of the institutions carrying out these educationand awareness program and the effectiveness of programs being carried out byforest departments in the respective project PAs.

Identify existing constraints to improving education and awareness programs in

180 Annex 11

PAs and define measures to address same.

Based on the above analysis, propose a strategy to improve education andawareness programs in PAs and specifically to promote a better understanding andacceptance of the concepts and objectives of the Ecodevelopment Project. Thestrategy should provide guidance on the nature and scope of methods to beemployed to reach the different target groups, including outreach programs;training, technical assistance, and institutional needs for implementation of thestrategy; and propose next steps or procedures for preparation and implementationof education and awareness action plans in the individual PAs.

Conduct a series of workshops at the national level, with state-level participation,to review the study's analysis and proposals, and to reach consensus on a finalstrategy, and to review implementation experience.

Provide additional guidance to state forest department staff and NGO staffcontracted by the states who are implementing the environmental education andawareness programs

Duration: Project duration.

Qualifications: Experience and prominence at the national level in environmental education andawareness program formulation. Willingness and ability to work as a coordinatorand facilitator of local environmental education institutions.

Draft Terms of Reference: Impact Monitoring GuidelinesReports to:: Director, Project Tiger

Objective To provide guidelines to (a) identify project activities, institutions and processeswhich are associated with biodiversity changes in the PAs, and socioeconomicchanges in and around the PAs; (b) measure the nature and extent of suchchanges; (c) assess whether these are in compliance with those expected; and (d)suggest guidelines for project adjustment if needed. This monitoring system shouldbe consistent across the project PAs, but can be adapted to meet ecological andsocial conditions in each PA. The monitoring system would consist of a conceptualframework that would then be elaborated into a monitoring system, throughconsultation, field studies, and peer review. Once designed and field tested, themonitoring system would be adapted to each PA and implemented.

Responsibilities: Review Annex 10 and (a) further develop a conceptual framework for designing amonitoring system for the project, and (b) based on consultations, test studies andpeer review elaborate the framework into a monitoring system.

The framework would include:

* The biodiversity and other values for which the project PAs are beingmanaged, major threats, anticipated project impacts, and objectives ofmonitoring

* A tentative selection of indicators of PA values, threats, socioeconomicconditions of relevance, and protect activities, institutions and processes

* The logic and criteria behind the selection of indicators

* Preliminary selection of sampling methods, intervals, and intensity.

* Preliminary assessment of resource and logistic requirements for monitoring

181 Annex 11

* A preliminary analytical framework, including possible summaries,aggregations and indices, and reporting format and intervals

* Mechanisms for feedback and project adjustment

* Mechanisms to ensure flexibility in the design for adoption in other areas, andfor inclusion of other indicators

The above conceptual framework would be elaborated into a monitoring system onthe basis of consultations, test studies and peer review. Ensuring maximumconsistency across the PAs, the monitoring system would consist of:

* Clear statements on the biodiversity and other values (e.g. PA peopleinteractions) of the project PAs

* Clear statements on the major PA-people mutual impacts and threats to PAvalues

* A selection of appropriate indicators which closely and clearly reflect the PAvalues, PA-people interactions and threats to PA values, and the criteria fortheir selection (including those field tested)

- A set of indicators that reflect important project activities (PA managementand village ecodevelopment), institutions and processes

* A conceptual model and statement of anticipated project impacts on PA valuesand threats to them from associated project activities

e A sampling design for the measurement of indicators, covering samplingmethods, interval, intensity, and precision

* Assessment of resource (expertise, personnel, funds, and time) and logisticrequirements

* Scope and mechanisms for participatory monitoring

* Analytical framework consisting of a statistical model for analysis of data todetect changes and trends in order to meet monitoring objectives, including anappropriate set of summaries and aggregations for easy perception of trendsand changes in PA values in relation to disturbance indicators, and projectactivities, institutions and processes

* Clearly stated subjectivity in the selection, monitoring and interpretation ofindicators and derived indices

* Reporting format and intervals

* Mechanisms for public dissemination of findings from monitoring

* Guidelines on reporting intervals and formats

* Mechanisms for ongoing feedback from monitoring to PA management andfor project adjustment

* Mechanisms for quality control at all levels, including training needs, andpeer reviews

• An assessment of institutional capability to undertake monitoring.

Duration: Eight Months.

Qualifications: Extensive experience in the design and conduct of multi-disciplinary monitoringprograms, in particular, those that include biological and socioeconomic aspects.

182 Annex 11

Demonstrated capacity to work with other professional agencies and institutions.

Draft Terms of Reference: National Level Implementation Support onResearch/lmpact Monitoring Strategy and National-level InterchangeReports to:: PA field directors

Responsibilities: Review Annex 10.

During the initial phase the consultant would:

* Identify critical pressures for PA management and ecodevelopment at each ofthe seven sites, and the ecological and socioeconomic constraints for theirunderstanding

* Identify discrete multidisciplinary projects for generating the informationrequired involving ecological (e.g. livestock predation, crop damage, canopydynamics), biological (e.g. wildlife population and vegetation dynamics,endemism), ethnobiological (e.g. indigenous resource management systemsfor NTFP), sociocultural (e.g. group organization and participation in NRM),economic, and policy (e.g. impact of agricultural policies on PAs) studies onissues pertaining to human impacts, wildlife impacts, and the livelihood oflocal people

* Identify of a network of research institutions and individual researchers forparticipation in the research and impact monitoring programs and providinginformation at the local level

* Identify approaches for conducting the studies at each site, including thehiring of contract staff and the provision of research fellowships to graduatestudents for 1-3 years

* Identify criteria for selecting research staff and fellows to conduct researchand contractual impact monitoring

* Identify training in research/impact monitoring methodology andmultidisciplinary teamwork

* Identify equipment and facilities required for undertaking the required studies

* Evaluate the merits of existing state-level research advisory committees forproject PAs, where relevant, and recommendations for the establishment of aresearch advisory committee where none exists now (comprisingrepresentatives from PA management, relevant specialized institutions,relevant government agencies, and NGOs) to advise on research projects, andresearch fellows

* Identify procedures and guidelines for inviting and evaluating researchproposals

* Formulate cost estimates for specific research and contractual impactmonitoring activities including overheads

* Conduct workshops and expert consultations for the above purposes

* Formulation of research strategies for each of the PAs.

In addition, the consultant would continue to provide oversight, guidance andadvice to the PAs on their research and impact monitoring activities throughout

183 Annex 11

the life of the project. Specifically, the consultant would:

* Provide guidance to the PAs in the implementation of their respective researchprograms, including assistance in setting priorities for research, identifyingresearch institutions, etc.

* Conduct regular national-level seminars to discuss research and impactmonitoring results and disseminate information among the PAs staff andothers

* Evaluate the research and impact monitoring programs on a regular basis toascertain its effectiveness and its impact on management, and recommendchanges to the programs, if necessary, to meet program goals.

Duration: five years

Qualifications: Experience in formulating research projects. Expertise in biological, socialscience, policy research and multidisciplinary research. Experience in monitoringand evaluation.

Draft Terms of Reference:Project Performance Review: Guidelines and Format

Reports to: Director, Project Tiger

Objectives: To establish a progress reporting system that provides information needed forproject management decisions and that provides accountability to projectfinanciers.

Responsibilities: Review Annex 16 and further refine benchmarks for project performance,incorporating (a) measures of project impacts to the extent they are available fromthe impact monitoring system, (b) measures of the extent to which the projectmeets design specifications (e.g. participatory processes, etc.), (c) measures ofproject outputs, (d) measures of project financial performance, and (e) measures ofproject inputs.

Establish a standard format for semi-annual progress reports on projectperformance that incorporates the benchmarks and other requirements (see Annex16), keeping the system simple and cost-effective with an orientation on providinguseful information for project management decisions, and providing accountabilityto project financiers (domestic and external).

Facilitate the installation and use of the project reporting system in each PA,including hands-on training where needed.

Duration: one year

Qualifications: Experience in project reporting systems. Experience with World Bank financedprojects especially desirable. Conceptual ability to identify benchmarks thatmeasure extent to which project is meeting project objectives and fulfilling projectdesign specifications.

Draft Terms of Reference: Multi-state Learning and Communication onBroad Project Management Issues

Reports to: Director, Project Tiger

184 Annex 11

Objectives: To provide a national forum for NGOs, indigenous peoples' organizations andothers to exchange experience and views on the project as a whole, building uponthe consultation and transparency established during project preparation...

Responsibilities: Review current project documentation and conduct periodic workshops andconsultations to discuss project experiences, either in general or on specific topicsnot otherwise handled in other national-level contracts.

Conduct or arrange for special studies on project issues not otherwise handled inother national-level contracts.

Facilitate cross-sectoral communication linkages between interested NGOs,indigenous people's organizations and other stakeholder institutions at both thenational and local levels.

Duration: Project duration

Qualifications: Experience in conducting workshops, consultations, and studies on naturalresource management projects. Ability to work with a wide range of NGOs,indigenous people's organizations and other interested stakeholders. Strongcommunication skills.

C. Publicity and Dissemination Contracts

The project would include contractual support at the national and local levels for:

(a) Translation of the entire staff appraisal report into Hindi (with wording thatis readily understood)

(b) Translating selected portions of the staff appraisal report into nativelanguages of local NGOs who would be working on the participatorymicroplanning (with wording that is readily understood)

(c) Publication of the staff appraisal report, the indicative plan, and otherrelevant project documents for public dissemination

(d) Publication of a semiannual newsletter for public dissemination reportingon project developments, and

(e) Production of a video on project activities.

D. Implementation Reviews

Draft Terms of Reference: Intensive Project Performance ReviewReports to: Director, Project Tiger

Objectives: To provide continuing implementation review to the Project Tiger Office

Responsibilities: Undertake field visits to project sites and provide guidance and advice in mattersrelating to environmental, socioeconomic, management, and technical issues.

Provide feedback to change project components, increase institutional learning andbuild trust among project stakeholders. Provide advice and technical support forplanning, coordinating, and implementing project activities when required.

185 Annex 11

Provide advice and support in the preparation of project progress and completionreports.

Provide guidance and advice in review of project documents and plans.

Recommend measures for strengthening environmental management andmonitoring procedures and programs during implementation of the project,including recommendations for the cost-effective conduct of site-specificassessments of project investments prior to execution. Provide oversight andspecialist series required to facilitate the implementation of these measures. Usethe environmental assessment framework to assess environmental impacts inongoing implementation.

Use the social assessment framework to (a) assess the social impacts of projectactivities on stakeholders and (b) the effectiveness of responses to the impactmonitoring in mitigating negative impacts in ongoing implementation.

Use project design and preparation work to assess effectiveness of projectadministration arrangements. Suggest improvements where needed.

Participate in project technical workshops, review meetings, and coordinatingcommittees, and provide resource personnel when required.

Participate in meetings, discussions, and supervision missions involving the Bankas and when required.

Provide other relevant technical support and advice when required.

The Project Tiger Office would provide a minimum of six portable computers andauxiliary equipment on a full-time basis to the review team.

Duration: Five years.

Qualifications: Three full time senior specialists and three full time junior specialists in ecology,social science, and project administration/institutional development. Ecologistswould have professional competence and extensive experience in protected areamanagement, biological assessments and surveys, and the conduct ofenvironmental assessments related to biological resources. Social scientist wouldhave experiences in social impact assessment, monitoring and evaluation, andfacilitating planning for indigenous people, women, and other marginalizedgroups. The administration/institutional development specialists should havestrong project management skills. Additional short-term technical experts wouldalso be provided on retainer. All individuals should have demonstrated ability towork with national and state level governments, and national and local NGOs.They should have strong analytical and writing skills, and ability to communicateeffectively with senior government officials. They should be willing to operate infield in self-contained fashion without secretariat support. Assignment involvesextensive travel. Individuals would be contracted through an institutionexperienced in recruiting qualified specialists for projects, and would operate as"adjunct" staff to the Project Tiger Office.

Draft Terms of Reference: Project Expenditure and Procurement ReviewReports to: Director, Project Tiger

Objectives: To provide incentives, accountability, and transparency that ensure that projectexpenditures conform with the project objectives and design, and that projectprocurement meets requirements for economy, efficiency, fairness, and

186 Annex 11

transparency

Responsibilities: To randomly check whether specific project expenditures on goods and works haveconformed with project objectives and design. This would include checkingwhether the planning and implementation have met project guidelines. Forexample the consultant would review whether village ecodevelopment investments(a) were selected in accordance with participatory rnicroplanning process outlinedin staff appraisal report, (b) met eligibility criteria, (c) were designed to addressrelevant feasibility considerations, (d) met beneficiary contribution requirements,complied with budget constraint. The consultant would also review thedocumentation of forest department travel expenditures used for participatorymicroplanning. The consultant would review whether the ecosystem protectionand management investments have met eligibility criteria.

To review whether project procurement of goods and works have met requirementsof economy and efficiency, taking into consideration both the unit cost of items,the full transaction costs of procurement process, and technical, quality, capacity,and conununity participation considerations. For village ecodevelopmentinvestments, check compliance with requirement that costs fit within state normsunless granted a waiver by the PA director.

To review whether (a) the procurement provided an opportunity for providers ofgoods, and works to compete or (b) project officials provided strong justificationfor direct contracting or sole sourcing.

To review whether the procurement process was transparent.

To write semi-annual reports that summarize findings, recommend correctiveactions, and suggest improvements in project procurement and expenditureprocedures.

The random check would cover about 10% of all project expenditures on goodsand works.

In order to limit the scope of work, to maximize the comparative advantage of anational firm, and to not duplicate routine internal reviews and audits, theconsultant would not be responsible for reviewing compliance with specific stategovernment procurement and accounting procedures.

Duration: Five years.

Qualifications: A highly reputable, major accounting firm with experience in procurement post-review.

Draft Terms of Reference: Independent Implementation ReviewReports to: Chairperson, Project Steering Committee

Objectives: To provide independent review of project performance to ensure accountability andtransparency.

Responsibilities: To review project performance reports, make field visits, and report findings toProject Steering Committee.

Duration: Three weeks per year

Qualifications: Highly qualified and respected specialists in ecology, social science, and projectadministration, who are not otherwise contractually associated with the project.

187 Annex 11

E. Policy and Strategic Framework Studies and Workshops

Draft Terms of Reference: National-Level Financial Sustainability StudyReports to: Assistant IG, Wildlife and Ecodevelopment Project Steering Committee

Responsibilities: Analyze a wide range of potential funding sources and financing mechanisms usedin a variety of overseas parks (except for endowments, which would be covered ina separate study). This analysis would include consideration of entrance fees,transport rental fees, camera/video rental fees, guide fees, guesthouse fees,concession fees, royalties, donations from the public and from the private sector.Programs analyzed should be from a wide range of countries. Provide this analysisto the state-level study teams.

Make rough projections for the post-project budget required to maintain andfurther restore biodiversity in the PAs throughout India.

Make rough projections for the post-project budget required to maintain andfurther implement reciprocal commitments in PAs throughout India.

Analyze existing funding sources and financing mechanisms used for the PAsthroughout India, incorporating the analysis provided by the state study teams (seeAnnex 7).

Incorporate analysis of financing mechanisms and sources from national-levelecotourism strategy study.

Identify and analyze potential sources of national and international-level donorsupport. Incorporate conclusions of national-level study of endowment feasibility.

Identify and analyze potential changes in national policies that could create and/orfacilitate improved funding sources and mechanisms. If appropriate, draft formalproposals and/or government orders required for the recommended sources andmechanisms.

Identify and meet with key national-level stakeholders who could proactivelypromote the adoption of new fuinding sources and mechanisms.

Recommend strategy on how the PAs and the associated village ecodevelopmentprogram could achieve financial sustainability.

Present draft report (in English and in the official state language) covering theabove to a workshop of key decision makers, and produce a final report whichresponds to comments made during the workshop

Duration: Six months, spread over an 18 month period.

Qualifications: Financial and Legal expertise. Would have qualifications and experience thatcommands high degree of professional respect and prominence.

Draft Terms of Reference:National-Level Ecotourism and Visitor StrategyReports to: Assistant IG, Wildlife and Ecodevelopment Project Steering Committee

Responsibilities: Overall, to articulate a national-level Participatory Ecotourism Strategy whichwould include necessary elements of local participation, sound enviromnental

188 Annex 11

design, visitor management, marketing, conservation education, training, financialsustainability and monitoring and evaluation.

More specifically, for PAs throughout India, to assess current:

-Tourism situation and potential; to determine a desirable tourism situation andidentify steps to reach this situation; to a generic participatory ecotourism strategyfor PAs that incorporates the best practice of the PA-Level strategies (see Annex9). The strategy should also address the following necessary elements

- Generally assess current and potential PA attributes relevant for ecotourism,identify site selection criteria and processes for ecotourism activities, developmechanisms to monitor ecological impact of tourism

- Recommend procedures to calculate visitation information and levels, to identifymarketing opportunities for ecotourism; to develop guidelines for visitor and staffbehavior in PAs, to identify educational requirements for visitors and staff e.g.visitor center, brochures, to develop mechanisms to collect and monitor visitationdata for marketing and management purposes

-Develop generic guidelines for environmentally sound and culturally appropriatedesigns

- Establish guidelines on PA staffing levels for tourism, identify training needs andsources for PA and other stakeholders

- Identify appropriate organizational structures for participatory management ofecotourism; identify mechanisms to increase long-term local participation in bothbenefit-sharing and decision-making, develop monitoring and evaluation plans toassess local participation and benefit-sharing

- Identify relevant government and private sector stakeholders

- Develop national-level legal framework for tourism activities, identify national-level policy considerations for ecotourism strategies, assess current national-levelfinancial provisions for tourism management, identify activities for modificationor introduction of practices to improve financial sustainability

- Identify potential private-public sector linkages related to tourism, identifyopportunities for future collaboration, develop guidelines for collaborations

-Recommend an action program for follow-up, discuss at national-level workshop,and revise final report in response to comments.

Duration: Six to nine months.

Qualifications: Experience in ecotourism management and participatory planning. Strong writingskills, oral communication skills, and training skills.

189 Annex 11

Economic Analysis of Reciprocal Commitments and Associated Investments. Theproject design set the budget constraint for village ecodevelopment investments at Rs10,000 per family. This was based on two things. First on implicit contingent valuationderived from the participatory rural appraisal exercises undertaken during projectpreparation; second on budgets used to pay for protection by local people undercomparable joint forest management programs. During the project, and prior toimplementation of a follow-on project, a study would further analyze the impacts of thevillage ecodevelopment commitments and investments on family incomes and theadequacy of the village ecodevelopment investments as incentives to permanently curtailunsustainable use of PA resources. The budget for transitional support for voluntaryrelocation is based on Bank experience with involuntary resettlement in India. The studywould also review the extent to which the regular village ecodevelopment investment bothby itself and in combination with transitional support for voluntary relocation compensatefor losses due to the original establishment of the PAs.

Draft Terms of Reference:Ecodevelopment Incentives and Income Impacts Study

Reports to: Assistant IG, Wildlife, and Ecodevelopment Project Steering Committee

Objectives Evaluate the impacts of the village ecodevelopment commitments and investmentson family incomes and the adequacy of the village ecodevelopment investments asincentives to permanently curtail unsustainable use of PA resources.

Responsibilities: Part I. On the basis of a desk study, develop conceptual framework, quantifyassumptions

Analyze with and without PA situations (i.e., PA impact)

* Estimate the cash and subsistence income foregone per family due to thecreation of a PA. Use data from the Joint Forest Management Incentives Studyand other readily available and relevant sources to estimate the value offuelwood foregone, grazing foregone, non-timber forest products foregone,and daily wvage labor from logging foregone. Indicate both the medium perfamily and medium and range among groups that win or lose (e.g., specializedresource using groups such as headloaders and graziers; people living insidethe PA, on the PA periphery, and in communities affecting the PA that do notparticipate in the project; and within group gender and tribal differences).Note seasonal dimmensions of income, patterns of time allocation, andoccupational structure.

* Analyze the extent to which the village ecodevelopment investmentscompensate for incomes that are foregone due to the creation of the PAs.Using the assumption that the village ecodevelopment investments wouldyield an income (cash and subsistence) stream that would yield at least a 10% internal rate of return (IRR), compare the net present value (NPV) of thestream of income with estimated NPV of income foregone due to the creationof the PA. For groups living within the PA, also compare the combined totalof income from the combination of regular village ecodevelopmentinvestments and the transitional support associated with voluntary relocation,using the same 100 IRR assumption. Note seasonal dimmensions of income,patterns of time allocation, and occupational structure.

Analyze with and without reciprocal commitments and village investments

190 Annex 11

situations (i.e., Project Impact)

* Estimate the cash and subsistence income per family that comes from PAs inspite of current enforcement efforts. Analyze the potential impact of villagecommitments to curtail future unsustainable use of PA resources on familyincomes. Indicate both the medium per family and medium and range amongkey groups (e.g., specialized resource using groups such as headloaders andgraziers; people living inside the PA, on the PA periphery, and incommunities that do not participate in the project; and within group genderand tribal differences) of the potential income foregone. Note seasonaldimmensions of income, patterns of time allocation, and occupationalstructure.

* Analyze the adequacy of the village ecodevelopment investments as incentivesfor village commitments to curtail unsustainable use of PA resources. Usingthe assumption that the village ecodevelopment investments would yield atleast a 10 % IRR, compare the NPV of the stream of income with theestimated NPV of income potentially foregone due to commitments.

• Analyze the impact of village ecodevelopment investments on overall familyincomes, using the 10% IRR assumption. Indicate both the medium per familyand medium and range among key groups (e.g., specialized resource usinggroups such as headloaders and graziers; people living inside the PA, on thePA periphery, and in communities that do not participate in the project; andwithin group gender and tribal differences) of the potential net income due toinvestments.

* Analyze incremental impact of the combination of per family of potentialincome foregone due to the commitments and the potential income due to theinvestments.

* Analyze structural impacts such as changes in patterns of time allocation oroccupational structure.

Identify completed and ongoing studies that potentially might provide detailedfield data on resource use in PAs (e.g., studies on NTFP use funded by FordFoundation).

Design a study using field data to test the assumptions on project impact on alllocal people in three villages in the light of project experience. In one village, alsoanalyze the extent of compensatory support for participants in voluntaryrelocation.

Present draft report (in English) covering the conceptual framework, methodology,quantified assumptions, and field study design to a workshop that includes MOEFstaff, PA staff, NGOs, and consultants working on monitoring, feasibilityanalysis, social assessment, and preparation of the Second EcodevelopmentProject, and revise the report in response to comments. Report must be written inlanguage that is easily understood by non-economist decision-makers.

Part II. Field Study and Program Design Recommendations

Implement the field study that tests assumptions in three villages

Apply the results of the field study, develop recommendations for futureecodevelopment programs, (e.g., size of village ecodevelopment investment budgetper family).

191 Annex 11

Present draft report (in English) on the field study results and ecodevelopmentprogram design recommendations to a workshop that includes MOEF staff, PAstaff, NGOs, and consultants working on monitoring, feasibility analysis, socialassessment, and preparation of the Second Ecodevelopment Project, and revise thereport in response to comments made during the workshop. Report must be writtenin language that is easily understood by non-economist decision-makers.

Duration: Three months initial desk study and workshop, followed by field study of 6 monthsspaced over 15 months in years two and three of the project, and 2 months forpolicy report and. workshop in year three.

Qualifications: Economist experienced in project analysis and field studies. Strong writing skillsand demonstrated experience in drafting reports that are easily understood by non-economist decision makers.

F. PA and National-level Administration

Draft Terms of Reference:Project Administration Support and Contract Management Overhead

Reports to: Director, Project Tiger

Objectives: To provide ongoing implementation review to the Project Tiger Office

Responsibilities: Provide advice and technical support in procurement and contract management,financial administration, information technology, and coordination.

In close consultation with Director, Project Tiger, arrange recruitment of theindividuals who would work on the intensive project performance review contract.

Provide other relevant administrative support and advice when required.

Duration: Five years on retainer basis.

Qualifications: Institution that has experience and capacity in project administration and contractmanagement.

Indicative PA-Level Training Plan: Project ManagementCourse I ~~~Methodology Participants ~No! Objectivs Rsuc gnsDrto rqec

per co urse course : : ___________i __________: ________ _____________i _______ __________

Project Management short course Sr. Executive 2 Impart skills in management Management Training 2 weeks 1997 andField Staff techniques Institution 1999(ACF - CCF)

Financial short course Sr. Executive 2 Impart skills in financial Management Training 1 week 1996 andManagement Field Staff management Institute 1998Monitoring and short course ACF, DCF 2 Impart skills in project performance Management Training 2 weeks 1996evaluation monitoring and evaluation InstituteComputer short course Office staff 3 hands on training in applications Computer training 2 weeks 1996,applications software institute 1997,

_____1998

193 Annex 12

Annex 12: Preparation of Future Biodiversity Projects

Overview

1. The Ecodevelopment Project would provide a framework and financing to preparelarge future projects listed as priorities in India's Environmental Action Program.Experience shows that larger biodiversity projects usually take three to five years toprepare and appraise; if the government uses the period of the Ecodevelopment Project toinitiate future projects they could be implemented four to ten years from the timepreparation begins. The concepts behind the proposed projects would reflect lessonslearned during the implementation of relevant smaller scale, more immediate projectscurrently being financed by the UNDP, other international agencies, bilateral agencies, orNGOs, (including any projects receiving GEF support channeled through UNDP). TheEcodevelopment Project support for preparing later proposals would help develop apipeline of large-scale biodiversity projects potentially eligible for future consideration bylarger financiers such as IDA or by combinations of cofinanciers (including GEF).

2. The project concepts outlined below were developed largely through consultationswith a wide variety of interested stakeholder institutions and individuals. The project filesinclude more extensive descriptions and include lists of those consulted.

Ecodevelopment Project 11

3. Background. MOEF's original proposal for India's first biodiversity project withGEF was for a more extensive undertaking, and MOEF has repeatedly expressed interestin such a project for the future. Potential sites include additional biosphere reserves, virginforest areas, a wide range of areas currently protected under Project Elephant and ProjectTiger and other protected areas with special botanical significance. Possible sites mightalso include those nine currently receiving technical assistance and training support undera UNDP/FAO financed project being implemented by the Wildlife Institute of India (WII).Preparation would develop indicative plans and preliminary social assessments for specificproposed project areas. It would explore the use of an endowment or trust mechanism,using experienced financial, legal, and institutional experts. It would also reflect lessonslearned from the first ecodevelopment project.

4. Objectives. The second ecodevelopment project---Ecodevelopment Project II---would extend the ecodevelopment strategy to additional PAs, establish a nationalecodevelopment program and test the ecodevelopment strategy on a pilot basis in selectedmultiple use areas (MUAS). As in the first ecodevelopment project, the main objectiveswould be to:

(a) Improve the capacity of PA management to protect and conservebiodiversity; increase opportunities for local participation in PAmanagement activities, decisions

(b) Reduce negative impacts of local people on biodiversity and vice versa;increase collaboration of local people in conservation efforts

194 Annex 12

(c) Establish a national capacity to prepare, appraise, fund, and supervise acentrally sponsored program of state-level ecodevelopment projects;provide environmental education, impact monitoring, and research support

(d) Test the ecodevelopment strategy on multiple use areas

(e) Ensure effective management.

5. Summary of Project Content. The components that correspond to the objectiveslisted above comprise:

(a) Extend Ecodevelopment Strategy to Selected PAs, i.e., to continue theprogram begun under Ecodevelopment Project I (current proposal) to PAsidentified during the preparation of Ecodevelopment Project II through:

(i) Improved PA management by:

* improving PA planning processes

* protecting and managing ecosystems within the PA

* upgrading PA amenities for field staff

(ii) Village ecodevelopment that reduces negative interactions of localpeople on biodiversity and increases support of local people forconservation by:

conducting participatory micro-planning and providingimplementation support

* implementing reciprocal commitments that foster alternativelivelihoods and resource uses to be financed by a villageecodevelopment program

special programs in joint forest management, participatoryvoluntary relocation, and discretionary reserves forsupplemental investments

(b) Develop a national ecodevelopment program that would promote and fundstate-level ecodevelopment activities throughout India through:

(i) a project formulation and supervision cell that would work withGOSs to identify, prepare, appraise, fund, and supervise stateecodevelopment projects;

(ii) a national ecodevelopment trust, the annual income from whichwould fund ecodevelopment reciprocal investments in stateecodevelopment projects;

(iii) national funding for state programs that develop more effective andextensive biodiversity conservation by:

* promoting public support for conservation through stateenvironmental education and awareness campaigns;

195 Annex 12

* monitoring and research to improve understanding of issuesand solutions relevant to PA management and interactionsbetween PAs and people

* integration of experience and strengthening the frameworkfor future ecodevelopment activities.

(c) Test ecodevelopment strategy in multiple use areas to bring the benefits ofecodevelopment to areas that are outside the PA system

(d) Overall project management.

Biodiversity Information Project

6. Project Objectives. The Biodiversity Information Project would organize a demand-driven system for biodiversity information that would:

(a) Strengthen systems for gathering, organizing, and storing useful infonmation

(b) Strengthen distributed system for providing access to information

(c) Enhance analysis and application of information for decision-making

(d) Enhance effective project preparation and management

7. Project Content. More specifically, the Biodiversity Information Project would:

(a) Strengthen systems for gathering, organizing, and storing useful informationby:

(i) establishing a demand-driven ranking of needed information

(ii) strengthening surveys for collecting specimen-based information inpriority areas

(iii) stimulating collection of new data on Indian biodiversity

(iv) designing structures for information fields as follows:

* organize local fields for source institutions

* organize shared fields for all users

(v) establishing protocols for quality control of information collected

(vi) establishing computerized systems for the capture and management ofspecimen-based data

(vii) enhancing taxonomic, ecological, ethnobiological, and specimencuration capacity to international standards

(viii) expanding existing databases to:

* record disappearing informnation

* link with old and established information repositories

* strengthen systems for identifying and monitoring threatenedspecies and ecosystems

196 Annex 12

authenticate species of significant economic or medicalimportance

* prospect for species or taxa of commercial value.

(b) Strengthen the distributed system for providing access to information by:

(i) expanding and modernizing the electronic network to link informationcenters, information users, and conservation decision makers

(ii) establishing a mapping system on information available and lacking

(iii) establishing a management system for responding to clients and users

(iv) enhancing the technical capacity for maintaining an up-to-date andfunctioning system.

(c) Enhance analysis and application of information for decision making by:

(i) promoting better utilization of information available by users for theirneeds

(ii) strengthening the development of information applications by users fordecisionmaking

(iii) promoting the generation of new information from available data fordecisionmaking

(iv) enhancing the capacity for information analysis and application fordecisionmaking.

(d) Enhance effective project management by:

(i) coordinating work plans, budgets, flow of funds, withdrawalapplications, accounting, audits, and related financial administration forproject activities

(ii) facilitating contracting of goods and services

(iii) coordinating progress review and reporting and other project relatedcommunication.

8. Suppliers. A wide range of institutions of different shapes and sizes supply and usebiodiversity information at different points in the research and development (R&D) orknowledge spectrum, ranging from the generation of basic scientific information to theapplication of information for commercial and management purposes. At the upstream end ofthe spectrum, institutions such as the following collect and supply biodiversity informationmostly for their own use: the Botanical Survey of India (BSI), the Zoological Survey of India(ZSI), the Bombay Natural History Society (BNHS), the Salim Ali Centre for Ornithology andNatural History (SACON), Indian Council for Forestry Research and Education (ICFRE), theNational Bureau of Plant Genetic Resources (NBPGR), the National Bureau of AnimalGenetic Resources (NBAGR) and the National Bureau of Fish Genetics (NBFG) of the IndianCouncil of Agricultural Research (ICAR), the National Botanical Research Institute (NBRI)and the Central Drug Research Institute (CDRI) of the Council of Scientific and IndustrialResearch (CSIR), and other academic and basic research institutions.

197 Annex 12

9. Users. The Central Institute for Medicinal and Aromatic Plants (CIMAP) and theCentral Drug Research Institute (CDRI) of the Council of Scientific and Industrial Research(CSIR), the Indian Council of Agricultural Research (ICAR) and the Ministiy of Agriculture,the Foundation for Revitalization of Local Health Traditions (FRLHT), the All India MedicalResearch Council (AIMRC), the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MOEF), and agro-based and pharmaceutical industries use biodiversity information for commercial ormanagement purposes. Most of these institutions lie at the downstream end of the R&D orknowledge spectrum.

10. Existing Networks and Information Systems. An Environmental InformationSystem (ENVIS) has been established, and is operational under the Ministry of Enrvironmentand Forests (MOEF) with 20 centers that are potential sources and users of environmentalinformation. Two of these centers, the Botanical Survey of India (BSI) and the ZoologicalSurvey of India (ZSI) are dedicated nodes for the supply of biodiversity information. India hasother information systems in place such as district level information nodes through the NationalInformatics Centre (NIC). The Foundation for Revitalization of Local Health Traditions(FRLHT) in Bangalore is a non-governmental organization that has established a network ofdistributed databases called INMEDPLAN, The Indian Medicinal Plants Distributed DatabasesNetwork; this links 10 nodal agencies concerned with the collection, preservation, propagation,and uses of medicinal plants in India, which cover more than 8,000 plant specimens and a chainof 48 in situ and ex situ conservation parks. The Indira Gandhi Conservation MonitoringCentre (IGCMC) of the World Wide Fund for Nature (India) (WWF-I) is a non-governmentalinstitution dedicated to organizing, maintaining and disseminating biodiversity conservationinformation, especially in relation to the management of land, water, forests, and protectedareas (PAs).

Ex-Situ Genetic Resources Conservation

11. Long-term Goals. The ex situ Genetic Resources Conservation Project would overthe long-term undertake to:

(a) salvage selected species and genetic variability that would otherwise be lost ifleft in situ within protected or multiple use areas

(b) Increase access to these genetic materials through their replication,manipulation and exchange for priority uses

(c) Manage these genetic materials safely, reliably, and efficiently

(d) Promote public awareness and education of ex situ genetic resourcesconservation.

12. Project Objectives. The ex situ Genetic Resources Conservation Project wouldundertake a nationally-coordinated and user-oriented effort to:

(a) Expand the stock of ex situ generic resources

(b) Strengthen the capacity to replicate, manipulate, and exchange geneticresources

(c) Improve safety, reliability, and efficiency of genetic resources management

(d) Develop and establish a legal framework for ex situ conservation

198 Annex 12

(e) Promote public awareness and education of ex situ genetic resourcesconservation

13. Project Content. Specifically, the ex situ Genetic Resources Conservation Projectwould undertake to:

(a) expand the stock of ex situ genetic resources:

(i) collect and document germplasm

* from priority biogeographic zones where habitats outside the insitu protected areas system are threatened by agricultural orurban-industrial transformations

* of important species and genetic resources especiallythreatened by extinction

* of poorly covered taxa including oceanic, invertebrate, andmicrobial species and varieties

* from cultivated or husbanded areas

* from captive or experimental breeding programs.

(ii) use standardized protocols for systematic exploration, collection, anddocumentation of germplasm collected

(iii) strengthen management-oriented research to provide sound technicalservices for germplasm exploration and collection

(iv) provide technical field training for effective field exploration, collection,and documentation

(b) strengthen the capacity to replicate, manipulate, and exchange ex situgermplasm collections:

(i) in terms of their:

* characterization and evaluation

* linkage to in situ conservation areas;

* storage especially over the long term under normal, reduced,and suspended growing conditions

* storage in established gene banks with operating standards andwith a range of facilities

* propagation and quality assurance or genetic integrity afterstorage

(ii) enable participating institutions to acquire as necessary thetechnological sophistication for genetic characterization, evaluation,and enhancement such as for DNA fingerprinting and in recombinantDNA technology

199 Annex 12

(iii) develop analytical and management methodologies for geneticcharacterization and evaluation, storage, propagation, and qualityassurance or genetic integrity

(iv) strengthen management-oriented R&D to provide sound scientific andtechnical services

(v) provide technical training in all aspects of ex situ germplasmreplication, manipulation and exchange, and research and managementmethodology for effective conservation

(vi) strengthen the information collection, storage, and retrieval systemusing a national database, and information analysis and use byresearchers, entrepreneurs, and policy-makers.

(c) Improve safety, reliability, and efficiency of genetic resources management by:

(i) introducing and exchanging germplasm for research purposes

(ii) examining and quarantining germplasm exchanged for the inadvertenttransmission of pests and pathogens

(iii) strengthening management-oriented R&D to provide a technicallysound quarantine services

(iv) providing technical training in quarantine methods

(d) Develop and establish a legal framework by:

(i) including:

* all critical aspects of ex situ conservation, both in vivo and invitro

-- domesticated as well as wild species and varieties

* patents and all forms of intellectual property rights (IPR)

(ii) strengthening management-oriented research to provide technicallysound legal services

(iii) providing technical training in legal aspects of ex situ conservation;

(e) Promote public awareness and education on ex situ genetic resourcesconservation

(f) Ensure effective management of the project by:

(i) coordinating work plans, budgets, flow of finds, withdrawalapplications, accounting, audits, and related financial administration forproject activities

(ii) facilitating contracting of goods and services

(iii) coordinating progress review and reporting, and other project relatedcommunication.

200 Annex 12

14. Suppliers and Users. A wide range of institutions with different objectives supplyand/or use genetic resources conserved ex situ at different points in the R&D or knowledgespectrum. On the one hand, academic and basic research institutions supply genetic informationto, on the other, agriculture-based and pharmaceutical and health-based industries applyinggenetic technologies for commercial and industrial purposes. Major institutions supplying andusing genetic materials from ex situ conservation include the National Bureau of Plant GeneticResources (NBPGR), the National Bureau of Animal Genetic Resources (NBAGR) and theNational Bureau of Fish Genetic Resources (NBFGR) of the Indian Council of AgriculturalResearch (ICAR), Ministry of Agriculture; the Central Institute for Medicinal and AromaticPlants (CIMAP), the National Botanical Research Institute (NBRI) and the Central DrugResearch Institute (CDRI) of the Council of Scientific and Industrial Research (CSIR), and theDepartment of Biotechnology (DBT), Ministry of Science and Technology; and the All-IndiaCouncil of Medical Sciences (AICMS), Ministry of Health. Genetic prospecting andcommercial gene trading by private entrepreneurs would need to be developed for India, andcould be promoted by hybrid public-private sector institutions like the Biotech Consortium ofIndia Limited (BCIL).

15. Existing Arrangements. A number of different networks exist for ex situ geneticconservation in India. For example, the Indian Council of Agricultural Research (ICAR)coordinates in vivo and in vitro conservation of primarily domesticated species of agriculturalimportance. The Central Zoo Authority of India (CZAI), Ministry of Environment and Forests(MOEF) coordinates in vivo conservation of wild fauna, mainly endangered species. TheConservation Division of the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MOEF) coordinates in vivoconservation of wild flora in botanic gardens and arboreta. The Department of Biotechnology(DBT), Ministry of Science and Technology coordinates in vitro conservation of microbialorganisms. In spite of these arrangements for the ex situ conservation, there is a need for auser-oriented coordination of in vivo and in vitro genetic resources conservation at the nationaland state levels.

Preparation Activities for All Projects

16. The preparation activities for the above are still being identified but would involvethe following:

(a) Consensus building

(b) Expert advice on applying state-of-the-art experience from other countries tothe Indian situation; on-the-job training

(c) Training needed during the preparation phase, prior to project implementation

(d) Estimating project costs in accordance with the project objectives

(e) Arranging project financing

(f) Compilation of background information including:

(i) government policies on biodiversity and project focus (e.g., biodiversityinformation

(ii) existing institutional responsibilities, capacity, and coordination

(iii) lessons from other projects

201 Annex 12

(iv) strategy for project focus (e.g., biodiversity information)

(v) Rationale for donor financing.

(g) Addressing Project Management Considerations including

(i) allocation of implementation responsibilities, staff plans, plans forcontractual support, and coordination mechanisms for specific projectactivities;

(ii) development of the implementation schedule,

(iii) arrangements to ensure the flow of funds;

(iv) arrangements to

* meet other financial administration requirements;

* facilitate procurement and contracts for goods and services;

* coordinate progress reviews and reports;

* promote communication on project status and impacts

* evaluate and audit the project.

(h) Justification and analysis of project impacts including descriptions of theproject benefits, environmental and social impacts, sustainability, and risks.

Initial Documentation

17. Initial documentation describing the project preparation activities of the SecondEcodevelopment Project, the Biodiversity Information Project, and the Ex-Situ GeneticResources Conservation Project would include the

(a) Initial project concept paper covering the title, justification, objectives, andestimated scope of the proposed project

(b) List of stakeholders who will be involved in project preparation consultations;

(c) Schedule of preparation tasks currently anticipated

(d) Draft terms of reference for consultants (including NGOs and autonomousagencies) and government agencies to undertake specific preparation tasksduring the next 18 months

(e) Description of how project preparation activities relate to ongoing work inprograms supported by other donors (such as the Sustainable DevelopmentNetwork of UNDP and the ODA support to IGCMC; in the case of theBiodiversity Information Project)

To the extent that the GEF is being considered as a possible source of financing, it would beimportant to include as part of the preparation an explanation of the project's global significance, itsrole in addressing priority GEF concerns, and its compliance with the incremental financingrequirement (which is likely to involve the analysis of costs of a hypothetical project that wouldexclude globally significant activities financed by GEF).

202 Annex 12

(f) Processes of planning, administering, and monitoring the preparation work, andcommunicating/consulting with project stakeholders who are not directlyresponsible for carrying out project preparation tasks

(g) Estimated costs of project preparation work.

The above documentation would reflect the consensus developed during the initialconsultations on project design.

Second Ecodevelopment Project PreparationDraft Terms of Reference for National-Level Trust Feasibility Study

Reports to: Assistant IG, Wildlife and Ecodevelopment Project Steering Committee

Responsibilities: Review findings of financial sustainability study (see Annex 11). Review otheroptions besides endowments that could be legally constructed as a trust and maynot already have been used in parks. Assess relative advantages of using anendowment rather than, say, a sinking fund, a revolving fund, a social fund, or aventure capital fund. Consider what justifies the use of a trust versus classicinvestment assistance.

Determine the most appropriate mecanism in terms of (a) conservation issues to beaddressed, (b) mecanisims to address these issues that are most appropriate forIndia, (c) justification for locking up capital and incurring transaction costs ofdesigning and operating such a mecanism.

Review available information on overseas endowments and study programs formanagement of trusts in India. Give special consideration to nature andcomposition of government boards, professional staff, financial managementarrangements, funding criteria, decisionmaking processes, disclosure anddissemination policies, involvement of stakeholders (including NGOs), fund-raising processes, and funding sources

Identify stakeholders including NGOs and any others who should be involved indesigning, creating, and managing a trust

Identify funds and potential sources of funds; identify and analyze scope withinnational policy or potential changes in national policies that would allow thecreation of a trust for ecodevelopment; identify and meet with key national-levelstakeholders interested in an endowment for ecodevelopment.

Recommend strategy on the creation of a trust, including a process that wouldpromote broad consensus-building. If appropriate, draft formal proposals and/orgovernment orders.

Present draft report (in English) covering the above to a workshop of keystakeholders and decision makers, and produce a final report that responds tocomments made during the workshop.

Duration: Six months, spread over an 18 month period.

Qualifications: Financial, Legal, and Institutional Development expertise. Would havequalifications and experience that will facilitate broad consensus-building.International experience helpful. .

Annex 13: Summary Project Cost Tables

IndiaEco-Development ProJect

Expenditure Accounts by Components - Totals Including Contingencies(US$ '000)

Develop Effective andExtensive SupporiVor

EcodevelopmentVillage Ecodevelopment Improve

Improved PA Management Participatory Investments Conduct ImpactEcosystem Micro-Planning to Environmental Monitoring PrepareProtection Amenities and Implement Education and and Future

Planning and for Field Implementation Reciprocal Special Awareness Research Project BlodiversityProcesses Management Staff Support Commitments Programs Campaigns Systems Management Projects PPF Total

L Investment CostsA. Civil works - 5,786.8 1,229.5 - - 157.4 257.8 - 7,431.5S. Vehicles 359.5 118.6 - - 135.2 105.3 31.9 750.6C. Furniture and Equdpment

Field - 497.9 - - - - - 10.7 - - - 508.7 O

Office 96.7 - - - 18.4 - - 115.1Laborabiry - 41.7 - 41.7IfromnationTechnology - 114.9 - - - - 68.4 82.1 180.4 - - 445.9Materials 23.5 - - 351.7 - - 428.7 - - - - 803.8

Subtotal 23.5 709.6 - 351.7 - - 497.1 153.0 150.4 - - 1,915.2D. VIllage ecodevelopmeent program - - - 263.2 24,459.8 5,748.4 - - - - - 30,471.4

E. Consultant, training and contractual services1. Training

Govemment elicials 379.1 35.5 - 142.2 - - - 20.5 84.7 - - 662.0Fellowships 101.6 - - - - - - 76.8 - - - 178.5Tours 31.0 - - 105.6 - - - - 133.2 - - 269.8

Subtotal 511.7 35.5 247.8 - - - 97.3 217.9 - - 1110.22. Specialist services

NGOservices - - - 1,271.2 - 179.4 187.1 - - - - 1,637.8

National experta 489.6 116.9 - 556.7 - 63.8 162.0 58.6 2,879.8 - - 4,817.3

Subtotal 489.6 116.9 1,827.9 - 243.2 349.1 548.6 2,879.8 - 6,455.0

3. Planning workshops 104.1 - - 333.1 - - 21.3 149.1 - - 607.64. Special studies - 31.0 - - - - - 1,457.6 164.9 - - 1,653.55. Monitoring expertise - - - - - - - 962.4 1,333.5 - - 2,295.9

Subtotal 1,105.4 183.3 2,408.9 - 243.2 370.4 3,215.0 4,596.1 - 12,122.3F. Travel for project supervision - 190.3 - 441.5 - - - 38.1 - - 669.9

G. Funds for new projects - - - - - - - - - 2,581.4 - 2,581.4H. Reimbursement of PPF - - -- - - - - - - 2,000.0 2,000.0

Total invement Costs 1,128.8 7,229.6 1,229.5 3,583.9 24,459.8 5,991.6 1,160.1 3,731.0 4,846.4 2,581.4 2,000.0 57,942.1

IL Recurrent CostsA. Salarie 9.0 2,619.6 - 1,888.6 - - 2.5 29.5 728.0 - - 5,277.2

B. Operation and maintenanceBuildinrgs and laboratcries - 2,657.3 -- - - - - - - 2,657.3Vehicles - 41.0 161.9 - - 96.0 809 229 - - 402.6 M

Equipment - 388.2 - - - - - 59.5 86.7 - - 534.3

Subtotal - 3,086.5 161.9 96.0 140.4 109.5 - 3,594.2C. Periodicals 3.0 - - 34.6 148.8 - - 186.4

Total Recurrent Cost 9.0 5,709.1 - 2,050.4 - - 98.5 204.5 986.4 - - 9,057.9

Toal PROJECTCOSTS 1,137.8 12,938.7 1,229.5 5,634.3 24,459.8 5,991.6 1,258.7 3,935.5 5,832.8 2,581.4 2,000.0 67,000.0

Taxes 2.3 712.3 61.5 101.5 - - 77.5 57.2 58.4 - - 1,070.7Forelgn Exchange 3.6 1,579.3 126.0 382.2 1,272.1 298.9 248.7 227.7 208.0 796.4 120.0 5,262.9

IndiaEco-Development Project

Expenditure Accounts by Components - Totals Including ContingenciesBihar (USS '000)

Develop Effective andExtensive Support\for

EcodevelopmentVillage Ecodevelopment Improve

Improved PAManagement Participatory Investments Conduct ImpactEcosystem Micro-Planning to Environmental MonitoringProtection Amenities and Implement Education and and

Planning and for Field Implenentation Reciprocal Special Awareness Research ProjectProcesses Management Staff Support Commnihents Programs Campaigns Systems Management Total

I. biveatment CostsA. Clvil works 1,1284 1452 - - - 260 193 - 1,318.8. Vehicles - 561 - 11.2 - - 193 112 - 97.8

C. Furniture and EquipmentFIeld 76.1 - - - - - 1.8 - 78.0 0Office - 12.3 - - - - - 31 - 15.3Labortory - - - - - 3.1 3.1Informabon Techncdogy - 16.2 - - - 12.4 12.2 - 40.8Materals 3.1 - 30.2 - - 66.0 - - 99.4

Subtotal 3.1 104.6 - 30.2 - - 78.5 20.2 - 236.5D. Vilage eccdevelopment program - - - 3,852.7 693.5 - - 4,546.2E. Consultad, traidng and contractual services

1. TrainingGoemrnment officiabs 43.7 29.5 - 6.2 - - - 2.9 11.8 94.2Tours 22.4 - - - - - 22.4

Subtotal 43.7 29.5 - 28.6 - - - 2.9 11.8 116.62. Specilkt servkes

NGO serices - - 187.5 - - 32.8 - - 220.3Natbnal experts 107.1 116.9 - 60.7 - 25.9 52.9 18.7 382.2

Subtotal 107.1 116.9 - 248.2 - - 58.7 52.9 18.7 602.53. Planning workshops 15.3 - - 48.4 - - 3.0 20.2 - 87.04. Speclalstudhes - - - - - - - 172.3 15.6 187.85. Monltorlngexpertise - - 141.1 9.4 150.5

Subtotal 166.1 146.4 325.2 61.8 389.4 55.5 1,144.4F. Travel for project supervision - 38.1 - 40.6 - - - - - 78.6

Total Investment Costs 169.2 1,473.5 145.2 407.3 3,852.7 693.5 185.5 440.1 55.5 7,422.4B. Recurrent Costs

A. Salaries 347.4 - 254.4 - - - - 182.0 783.8. Operation and maintenance

Buildinges- 466 - 2. - - 1 - - 4669.Vehicles - - - 27.9 - - 139 80 - 49.8 9Equipment - 57.4 - - - - 7.6 - 65.0 X

Subtotal - 524.3 - 27.9 - - 13.9 15.6 - 581.7C. Perlodicals - - 4.5 4.5

Total Recumrnt Costs - 871.7 - 282.3 - - 13.9 20.1 1820 13700Total PROJECT COSTS 169.2 2,345.2 145.2 689.6 3,852.7 693.5 199.3 460.2 237.5 8,792.4

IndiaEco-Development Project

Expenditure Accounts by Components - Totals Including ContingenciesGujarat (USS '000)

Develop Effecdive andExtensive Supportffor

EcodevelopmentVillage Ecodevelopmeuit improve

Improved PA Management Partidpatory Investments Conduct ImpactEcosystem Micro-Planning to Environmental MonitoringProtection Amenfites and Implement Education and and

Planning and for Field Implementation Reciprocal Spedal Awareness Research ProjectProcesses Management Sta Support Commitnnts Programs Campaigns Systems Management Total

L Investment CostsA. CivA vworks 5638 1922 - - 615 817.5B. Vehicles 303 28.9 193 112 89.7C. Fumiture td Equipment

Field 501 - - - 50.1Office 123 61 18.4Labortory - - 21.4 21.4IrfornationTechnology - 162 93 10.4 35.8Mateils 3.1 - 59.8 59.2 122.1

Subtotal 3.1 78.5 59.8 - 68.5 37.9 247.9D. VNag. ecodvebopent prorarn - 3 407.0 6145 - 4,021.5E. Consuhntw tralning and conractual services C

1. TralinhgGaoerrt odricials 653 - - 14.1 - - - 2.9 21.8 104.1Toaurs 10.4 - - 10.4

Subtotal 65.3 24.6 - - - 2.9 21.8 11462. Specalist servis

NGO serivces - - - 170.9 - - 32.8 - - 203.7National aq)ret 52.7 - - 1041 - 16.0 14.4 80.7 356.8 6246

Subtotal 52.7 - 275.0 - 16.0 47.2 80.7 3568 828.43 Piannhngworkshops 6.1 - - 60.2 - - 3.0 37.3 - 106.74. Spedal studies - - -- 188.1 31.0 219.16 Monitoringexpetse - - - 141.1 141.1

Subtotal 124.1 - - 359.8 16.0 50.3 450.2 409.5 1,409.8F. Traveltorprojectsupervision - 38.1 - 62.7 - - - - - 100.7

Total Investment Costs 127.2 710.7 192.2 511.2 3,407.0 630.4 138.0 560.7 409.5 6,687.1II Recurrnt Costs

A. fSins - 2545 - 400.2 - - 25 29.5 69.2 7559B. Opeation and nulitenanca

Bildinss and labataries - 285.0 - - - - 285.0VeNcies - - - 27.9 - - 13.9 8.0 - 49.8Equixment - 50.4 - - - - - 7.6 - 58.0

Subtotal 335.3 27.9 - - 13.9 15.6 392.7C. Perodcals - - 15.0 15.0

Total RecurrentCosts 589.8 - 428.1 - - 16.4 60.2 69.2 1,163.7Tota PROJECT COSTS 127.2 1,300.6 192.2 939.3 3,407.0 630.4 154.5 620.9 478.7 7,850.7 D

IndiaEco-Development Project

Expenditure Accounts by Components - Totals Including ContingenciesKarnataka (USS '000)

Develop Effective andExtensive Support\for

EcodevelopmentVillage Ecodevelopment Improve

Improved PA Management Participatory Investments Conduct ImpactEcosystem Micro-Planning to Environmental MonitoringProtection Amenities and Implement Education and and

Planning and for Field Implementation Reciprocal Special Awareness Research ProjectProcesses Management Staff Support Commitments Programs Campaigns Systems Management Total

I. investment CostsA. Civil works - 641.7 167.6 - - - 25.8 41.9 - 877.0B. Vehicles - 51.0 - 22.5 - - 193 11.2 - 104.0C. Fumiture and Equipment

Field 71.1 - 1.8 - 73.0Office - 12.3 - - - - - - - 12.3Labarabry - - - - - - 3.1 - 3.1Informalon Technology - 16.2 - - - 9.4 15.0 - 40.5Materials 3.1 - 64.5 - - 78.4 - 146.0

Subtotal 3.1 99.6 64.5 - - 87.8 19.9 274.80. Vilage ecodevelopment program - - - - 4274.3 899.5 - - 5,173.8 CE. Consultant trainhig and contractual services

1. TraIningGemrnment officials 83.9 - - 16.9 - - - 2.9 2.3 106.1Tours - - - 14.9 - - - - 14.9

Subtotal 83.9 - - 31.8 - - - 2.9 2.3 121.02. Specialist servIces

NGO services - - - 265.2 - 82.1 24 6 - - 371.9National experts 67.1 - 48.2 - 16.0 161 69.5 298.3 515.1

Subtotal 67.1 - - 313.4 - 980 407 695 298.3 886.93. Plandlngworkshops 18.6 - - 59.2 - - 30 12.4 - 9334. Special studies - - - - - - - 200.4 31.0 231.45. Monitoring expertise - - - - - - 128.4 39.0 167.4Subtotal 169.6 - - 404.4 - 98.0 43.7 413.6 370.6 1,500.0F. Travel for project supervision - 38.1 - 96.6 - - - - - 134.7

Total lmvestm nt Costs 172.7 830.4 167.6 5880 4,274.3 997.5 176.6 486.5 370.6 8,064.3I1 Recurrent Costs

A. Salaries - 341.8 - 1543 - - - 6.2 502.2B. Operation and maintenance

Buildings and laboratbries - 3434 - - -4 - 343.4Vehicles 35.2 13.9 16.7 - 65.8Equipment 57. - 7.6 65.0

Subtotal - 400.7 - 35.2 - - 13.9 24.4 474.1C. Periodicals - - - 3.0 - 3.0Total Recurrent Costs - 742.5 - 189.4 - - 13.9 27.4 6.2 979.4

Total PROJECT COSTS 172.7 1,572.9 167.6 777.5 4,274.3 997.5 190A4 513.9 376.8 9,043.6

IndiaEco-Development Project

Expenditure Accounts by Components - Totals Including ContingenciesKerala (US$ '000)

Develop Effective andExtensive SupportWor

EcodevelopmentVillage Ecodevelopment Improve

Improved PA Mhnagement Partidpatory Investments Conduct ImpactEcosystem Micro-Planning to Environmental MonitoringProtection Amenities and Implement Education and and

Planning and for Field Implementation Reciprocal Special Awareness Research ProjectProcesses Management Staff Support Commitments Programs Campaigns Systerm Management Total

I. Investment CostsA. Clvil vorks - 604.2 210.7 - - - 26.1 64.4 - 905.4B. Vehicles - 86 4 - 11.2 - 19.3 19.1 - 135.9C. Furniture and Equipment

Field - 84.5 - - 1.5 - 86.0Office - 21.5 - - - - - 3.1 - 24.5Laboratory - - - 31 3.1InformationTechrtology - 16.2 - - - - 9 5 10.4 - 36.0Materials 6.3 - - 75.5 - - 47 2 - - 128.9

Subtotal 6.3 122.1 - 75.5 - - 56 6 18.0 - 278 5D. Village ecodevelopment program - - - - 3,556.4 640 2 - - - 4196.6E. Consultant, training and contractual services 0

1. TrainingGoverrmentdficials 792 - - 291 - - - 29 119 1232Tours 13 3 - 20.7 - - - - - 34 0

Subtotal 92.5 - - 49.8 - - - 2.9 119 157 1Z Specialist services

NGO seMces - - - 228 0 - - 16.4 - - 244.4National experts 73.5 - - 101 1 - - 55 5 82.7 497.5 810.2

Subtotal 73.5 - - 329.1 - - 71.9 82.7 497.5 1,054.63. Planning workshops 16.8 - - 57.8 - - 3 0 20.2 - 97.84. Special studies - 31 0 - - - - 299.2 - 330.25.Monitoringexpertise - - - - - - - 141.1 37.1 1783

Subtotal 182.8 31.0 - 4367 - - 749 546.2 546.5 1,8181F. Travel for prqect supervision - - - 82.6 - - - - - 82.6

Total nvestment Costs 189.0 843.7 210 7 606 0 3,556.4 640 2 176.9 647.8 546.5 7,417.1II. Recurrent Costs

A. Salaries 9.0 630.5 - 541.5 - - - - 202.3 1,383.3B. Operion and maintenance

Buildngs and laboratories - 312.8 -- - - - 312.8Vehicles - 41.0 - 1.0 - - 13.9 13.7 - 69.6Equipernt - 69.2 - - - - - 15.2 - 84.5

Subtotal - 423.0 - 1.0 - - 13.9 28.9 - 466.9C. Periodkials - -- - 5 4.5

TotalRecurrentCosts 90 1,053.5 - 542.6 - - 13.9 33.5 202.3 1,854.7 aTotal PROJECTCOSTS 1980 1,897.2 210.7 1,148.5 3,556.4 640.2 190.8 681.2 748.8 9,271.8 X

I-.

IndiaEco-Development Project

Expenditure Accounts by Components - Totals Including ContingenciesMadya Pradesh (USS '000)

Develop Effective andExtensive Supporttfor

EcodevelopmentVillage Ecodevelopment Improve

Improved PA Management Participatory Investments Conduct ImpactEcosystem Micro-Manning to Environmental MonitoringProtection Amenities and Implernent Education and and

Planning and for Field Implementation Reciprocal Special Awareness Research ProjectProcesses Management Staff Support Commitments Programs Campaigns Systems Management Total

I. Investment CostsA. Civil works - 929.4 - - - 26.1 161 - 971.5B. Vehicles - 48.7 - 11.2 - - 19.3 11.2 - 90.4C. Furniture and Equipment

Field - 53.1 - - - - - 1.8 - 54.9Office - 15.3 - - - - 3.1 - 18.4Labcratory - - 4.9 4.9Information Technology - 16.2 - - - - 7.8 10.4 - 34.3Materials 3.2 - - 46.7 - _ 55.1 - - 105.0

Subtotal 3.2 84.6 - 46.7 - - 62.8 20.2 - 217.5D. Village ecodevelopment program - - - 2,224.3 940.8 - - - 3,1651E. Consultant, training and contractual services

1. TrainingGovernmentoffaials 362 26.3 - --- 119 74.5Felloaships 31.6 - - - - - - 76.8 - 108.4Totirs - -- 10.4 - - - 10.4

Subtotal 67.9 36.8 8768 119 19342. Specialist services

NGO semces - - - 133.6 - - 24.6 - - 158.2National experts 56.2 - - 86.2 - - 259 651 142.6 376.0

Subtotal 56.2 - - 219.8 - - 505 651 142.6 534.23. Planning workshops 19.1 - - 44.0 - - 30 218 - 8794. Specialstudies - - - - - - 1106 31.0 141.65. Monitoringexpertise - - - 1284 14.8 143.2

Subtotal 1432 - - 300.6 - 536 4027 200.3 1,100.2F. Travel for project supervision - 381 - 23.3 - - - - - 61.4

Total lnvestment Costs 146 3 1,100.7 - 381.8 2,224.3 940.8 161.7 4501 200.3 5,606.1D. Recurr nt Costs

A. Salaries - 110.1 202.0 - - - - 37.6 349.7B. Operaton and maintenance

Buildings and labcratoies 344.0 - - 344.0Vehicles - 21.8 - 13.9 8.0 - 43.6Equipmert - 50.5 - - - - - 6.2 - 56.7

Subtotal - 394.5 - 21.8 - - 13.9 14.1 - 444.3C. Periodicals - 3.0 - - - - 3.0 6.0

TotalRecwrentCosts - 507.6 - 2238 - - 13.9 17.2 37.6 80.0 xTotal PROJECT COSTS 146.3 1,608.3 - 605.6 2,224.3 940.8 175.6 467.3 237.9 6,406.1

IndiaEco-Development Project

Expenditure Accounts by Components - Totals Including ContingenciesRajasthan (USS '000)

Develop Effective andExtensive Support\for

EcodevelopnentVillage Ecodevelopmernt Improve

Improved PA Management Participatory Investnents Conduct ImpactEcosystem Micro-Planning to Environmental MonitoringProtection Amenities and Implement Education and and

Planning and for Field Implementation Reciprocal Special Awareness Research ProjectProcesses Management Staff Support Commitments Programs Campaigns Systems Management Total

I. Investment CostsA. Civilworks - 4191 2772 - - - 25.8 321 - 7543B. Vehicles - 30 4 - 22 3 - - 19 3 112 - 83 2C. Furniture and Equipment

Field - 71.4 - - - - - 1.8 - 732Office - 108 - - - - - - 108Laboratory - - 3.1 31Information Techndogy - 16 2 - - - - 12 4 13.4 - 42 0Materials 31 - - 51.4 - - 69 2 - - 123 7

Subtotal 3.1 98 3 - 514 - - 81 6 18 3 - 252.8D. Village ecodevelopment program - - - 4,345.2 849 9 - - - 5,195 0 OE. Consultant, training and contractual services

1. TrainingGovernment officals 40.7 60 - 24 9 - - - 2 9 - 74 5Fellowships 39 3 - -- - - 39 3Tours - - - 89 - - - - 8.9

Subtotal 79.9 6.0 - 33 8 - - - 2 9 - 122.62. Specialist services

NGO services - - - 219 0 - 65 0 32 8 - - 316 8National experts 73 7 - - 106 5 - 159 9.6 63.9 270 8 540 4

Subtotal 737 - - 325.5 - 809 42 4 639 270 8 857 23. Planning workshops 91 - - 42.9 - - 3.0 18 6 - 7374. Special studies - - - - - - - 244 0 15.6 259 65. Monitoring expertise - - - - - - - 141 1 94 1505

Subtotal 162.8 6.0 - 402.2 - 80 9 45 5 470 6 295.8 1,463.6F. Travel for project supervision - - - 88.3 - - - - 38.1 126.4

Total InvestrnentCosts 165.9 553 8 277.2 564.3 4,345.2 930.7 172.1 532.3 333.8 7,875 3II. Recurrent Costs

A. Salaries - 289.8 - 225.1 - - - - - 514,9B. Operation and rmintenance

Buildings and laboratories - 262.8 - - - - - - - 262.8Vehicles - - - 16.6 - - 13.9 8.0 - 38.5Equipment - 56.7 - - - - 7.6 - 64.3

Subtotal - 319.5 - 16.6 - - 13.9 15.6 - 365.5C. PerIodicals -- - - - - 3.0 3.0

TotalRecurrentCosts - 609.3 - 241.7 - - 13.9 18.6 - 883.4TotalPPROJECTCOSTS 165.9 1,163.1 277.2 806.0 4,345.2 930.7 186.0 550.9 333.8 8,758.7 X

IndiaEco-Development Project

Expenditure Accounts by Components - Totals Including ContingenciesWest Bengal (US$ '000)

Develop Effective andExtensive Supportffor

EcodevelopmentVillage Ecodevelopment Improve

Improved PA Management Participatory Investments Conduct ImpactEcosystem Micro-Planning to Environmental MonitoringProtection Amenities and Implement Education and and

Planning and for Field Implementation Reciprocal Special Awareness Research ProjectProcesses Management Staff Support Commitments Programs Campaigns Systems Management Total

1 Investment CostsA. Civil works - 1,500.2 2367 - - - 27.7 22.5 - 1,787.1S. Vehicles - 56.6 - 112 - - 196 303 - 1177C. Furniture and Equipment

Field - 91.6 - - - - - 1.8 - 93.5OfFce - 12.3 - - - - - 31 - 15.4Laboratory - - - - - - 3.1 - 3.1Informaton Technology - 180 - - - - 7.7 10.4 - 36.1 Materials 1.6 - - 23.5 - - 53.7 - - 78.8

Subtotal 1.6 1219 - 23.5 - - 61.4 16 4 - 226.8D. Village ecodevelopment program - - - - 2,299.8 1,110.1 - - - 3,409.9E. Consultant, training and contractual services

1. TrainingGovernmentofficials 30.0 - - 24.6 - - - 5.8 10.1 70.6Fellowships 30.7 - - - 30.7Tours 17.7 - - 17.9 - - - - - 35.6

Subtotal 78.5 - - 42.5 - - - 5.8 10.1 137.02. Specialist services

NGO services - - - 67.0 - 324 23.0 - - 122.4National experts 59.4 - - 50.0 - 16.0 14.6 133.7 143.3 417.0

Subtotal 59.4 - - 116.9 - 48.4 37.6 133.7 143.3 539.43. Planning workshops 19.0 - - 20.5 - - 3.0 18.6 - 61.24. Special studies - - - - - - - 243.0 40.8 283.95. Monitoring expertise - 141.1 14.7 155.9

Subtotal 156.9 - - 179.9 - 484 407 542.3 209.0 1,177.2F. Travel for project supervision - 38.1 - 47.3 - - - - 85.4

TotalinvestmentCosts 158.4 1,716.7 236.7 262.1 2,299.8 1,158.5 149.4 613.6 209.0 6,804.2II. Recurmnt Costs

A. Salaries - 645.5 - 111.1 - - 2.9 759.6S. Operation and maintenance

Buildings and laboratories - 642.5 - - - - - - 642.5Vehicles - - - 31.5 - - 12.7 18.5 - 62.7Equipment - 46.6 - - - - - 7.6 - 54.2

Subtotal - 689.1 - 31.5 - - 12.7 26.1 - 7594 XC. Periocals - - - 1.5 1.5

Total Recurrent Costs - 1,334.7 - 142.6 - - 127 27.6 2.9 1,5205Total PROJECTCOSTS 158.4 3,051.4 236.7 404.7 2,299.8 1,158.5 162.1 641.2 211.9 8,324.6

211 Annex 14

Annex 14: Procurement and Disbursement

National shopping

1. National shopping procedures would be used to procure vehicles, infonnationtechnology, field, office and laboratory equipment, construction materials in individualcontracts not to exceed US $20,000. Rate contracts of the Directorate General of Supplies andDisposal (DGS&D), New Delhi, would only be acceptable as a substitute for procurementunder national shopping. State rate contracts would not be acceptable.

2. The essential elements of national shopping are (i) clear description and quantity of theitem(s) as well as a specified date of delivery; (ii) price quotations obtained from severalsuppliers, usually at least three to assure competitive prices; (iii) evaluation of quotations tofotlow sound public/private sector practices of the purchaser; and (iv) the purchase orderplaced with the lowest evaluated supplier by suitably incorporating the terms of the acceptedoffer. Further negotiations are not permitted after the lowest qualifying quotation has beenevaluated.

3. All documents associated with the purchase of goods under national shoppingprocedures would be subject to selective post-review by visiting missions. Such reviews wouldconcentrate on the competitiveness of prices paid and physical inspections of the relevant items.

4. The schedule of critical steps for national shopping suggests that about 10 weekswould normally be required from the preparation of the initial specifications to the deliverydate. Accordingly, to ensure that required equipment and goods are on hand to start the workprogram for a fiscal year that begins on April 1, procurement activities should normally beginby the preceding January 15.

Categorization of Consultants, Training, and Contractual Services

5. The consultants, training, and contractual services would be used for the followingpurposes:

(a) Policy and project preparation: US$2.7 million

(b) Capacity building: US$3.9 million, and

(c) Implementation support: US$8.1 million.

Criteria for the Selection of Non-Government Organizations (NGOs)

6. The project would seek NGO participation in village ecodevelopment support teams,research activities (especially of social science aspects and project monitoring), environmentaleducation, project preparation, and training for the full range of project components. The stateproject entities responsible for implementation and MOEF would invite from interested NGOsdetailed proposals for collaboration for work in and around the PAs and at the national levelrespectively. The state entities and MOEF would be responsible for reviewing the proposalsand agreeing on appropriate mechanisms to involve NGOs in the project.

212 Annex 14

7. The selection of NGOs would be guided by the following criteria:

(a) As part of the legal requirements, the NGO should be a registered body underthe relevant State Law. It should regularly maintain its accounting records andhave properly audited annual statements of income and expenditure.

(b) It is essential that the NGO have a proven track record in the proposed activity.To avoid creating any biases and misconceptions in the minds of the people, theNGO should have secular operations (i.e. development activities of religiousNGOs would not be associated with proselytizing) and should not be affiliatedwith any political organization.

(c) For project activities requiring field activities over many sites (e.g., villageecodevelopment support, socioeconornic research, project monitoring,environmental education), NGOs should have adequate numbers of field levelstaff conversant with the local dialect and customs, and have a clearunderstanding of the socioeconomic and political situation of the area or areasin which they would operate. They should also possess excellentcommunication skills and good rapport with the community so as to involvethem in the project activities.

(d) A prior understanding of the concept of ecodevelopment would be desirable.Owing to the nature and extent of the physical coverage of the program, NGOsparticipating in the project would be part of a larger effort involving otherNGOs, government officials, professional and academic institutions, andothers. Hence, the NGO should be able to interact smoothly with, and be partof, a tearn.

(e) Finally, the NGO should have internal stability so as to assure long-termsupport to the project.

Contractual Arrangements for Consulting Services (large NGOs,autonomous government agencies, and private firms)

8. Consultancy services estimated at US$6.0 million with consulting firms-mainly largeNGOs-for management support, implementation assistance, and special studies would becontracted on terms and condition in accordance with IDA guidelines for the use ofconsultants, which are set forth in Guidelines: Use of Consultants by World Bank Borrowersand by the World Bank as Executing Agency (August 1981). Consultancy contracts couldinclude up 100% for overhead charges including computing equipment hardware and software.

9. Abbreviations used in the description of the steps include:

(a) TOR - terms of reference;

(b) LOI - letter of invitation;

(c) NOL - IDA's no objection letter after required prior reviews ofdocumentation throughout the procurement process.

10. Prior review by IDA is required for:

213 Annex 14

(a) Draft LOI package including the draft letter of invitation, terms of reference,formats for submission of technical and financial proposals, draft contractunder which services will be performed before it is issued to the selectedconsultants

(b) Evaluation of technical proposals before opening the financial proposals

(c) Draft negotiated contract with agreed description of services before signing ofthe contract and

(d) Conformed signed copy of the contract before authorizing disbursementagainst the contract.

11. Using the average amounts of time taken for each step in most projects, the schedule ofcritical steps suggests that about 44 weeks would normally be required between thepreparation of the draft LOI package and the team leader being in post. Accordingly,procurement activities should usually begin in early July to ensure that the team leader is in postby the following 1 April. However, the actual number of weeks required can be shortenedsignificantly if project authorities quickly prepare draft documents and review proposalspromptly.

Contractual Arrangements for Consulting Services (small NGOs)

12. Consultancy services with small NGOs in contracts less than US$20,000 up to anaggregate of US$1.6 million for participatory planning and implementation assistance with theVillage Ecodevelopment component, and design of monitoring and evaluation procedures

would be contracted in accordance with IDA guidelines for the use of consultants. Withrespect to review, (i) the model documents for inviting proposals, (ii) terms of reference,(iii) all single source contracts (not applicable to contracts for individuals), (iv) allcontracts for assignments of a critical nature (regardless of value), and (v) all contracts(original or amendments) valued at more than US $20,000 would be subject to priorreview by IDA.

13. The schedule of critical steps for employment of small NGOs suggest that about 14weeks would be required from the preparation of the initial terms of reference (TORs) until theteam leader is in post. Accordingly, in order to ensure that required services are on hand tostart the work program for a fiscal year that begins on April 1, procurement activities shouldbegin by the preceding December 15.

Contractual Arrangements for Consulting Services (Individuals)

14. Procedures for employment of individuals-estimated at US$4.2 million-are usuallyless formal. IDA only requires prior approval of terms of reference and the qualifications andconditions of employment before an agreement (or contract) is negotiated and signed. In suchcases, the major concern will be that the individual is suitably experienced and capable.However, where three or more individuals are to be employed and coordination,

Guidelines: Use of consultant by World Bank Borrowers and by the World Bank as ExecutingAgency. August 1981.

214 Annex 14

administration, and collective responsibility can become difficult, IDA would normally advisethat a consulting firm be employed.

Ecodevelopment Reciprocal Investments

15. Investments expenditures associated with reciprocal commitments would not toexceed Rs. 10,000 (US $285) per family including local contributions over a three-yearperiod, and would finance small works and village development activities over 2,000widely scattered EDC locations over the five-year project period. Civil works required forthese investments would be procured in accordance with procedures acceptable to IDA:(i) under community participation by direct contracting with non-governmentalorganizations or village communities; or (ii) by soliciting quotations from at least threequalified contractors; or (iii) through force account. Annex 8 contains a full description ofhow community participation would function. Construction materials for these works,aggregating to about US $13.0 million, would be procured following national shoppingprocedures acceptable to IDA. Small equipment and goods required for these investmentswould be procured through national shopping procedures acceptable to IDA. Livestock,including breeding stock, young animals, fertile eggs for hatching, bees and silk worms,estimated to cost about US $800,000 would be obtained under direct contractingprocedures acceptable to IDA. For each investment a list would be kept showing thepurpose, location, total cost, and breakdown of costs into the various forms of procurement,which would be the basis of SOEs submitted with withdrawal requests. Documentationdescribing each investment and the associated purchases would be available for selective post-review by visiting missions. The focus of such reviews would be on the competitiveness ofprices received and the quality of work completed.

215 Annex 14

ID Task Name Duration Qtr 3 Qtr 4 Qtr 1I Standard Equipt NCB 33.7w

2 Preparation of Specification & Bidding 4w 819 916

3 IDA's NOL 4w 1014

4 Place invitation to bid in newpapers Od 10113

5 Submission of Bids 4w 11110

6 Bid Opening ld 11113

7 Evaluation of Bids 6w 2125

8 IDA's NOL 3w 1115

9 Award & Sign Contracts 4w 2112

10 IDA's NOL 1w 2119

11 Shipment & deliver 6w

12 Equipment available Ow

216 Annex 14

ID Task Name Duration 1st Quarter 2nd Quarter 3rd Quarter 4th Quarter1 Procure by National Shopping 10.2w p 4/1

2 Prepare specifications 4w 22 2116

3 Invite Quotations Od 2119

4 Submission of Quotations 2w 311

5 Evaluation of Quotations 2w 3115

6 Shipment & delivery 2w 3129

7 Delivery 1d 411

217 Annex 14

ID Task Name Duration Qtr 2 Qtr 3 Qtr 41 Consulting services 43.7w

2 Prepare TOR, Shortlist & LOI 4w

3 IDA's NOL of TOR, Shortlist & LOI 3w 19

4 Issue LOI Od 7131

5 Receive proposals 45d 9129

6 Open technical proposals Ow 012

7 Evaluate technical proposals 6w 11/10

8 IDA's NOL of evaluation 2w 11124

9 Open financial proposal d 11127

10 Negotiate contract 6w

11 IDA's NOL of draft contract 3w

12 Sign Contract 2w

13 IDA's NOL of final contract 3w

14 Mobilization 4w

15 Team Leader in Post Od

218 Annex 14

ID Task Name Duration Qtr 4 Qtr 1 Qtr 21 Proposed procedure for small NGOs 14.2w 411

2 Prepar TOR, justification SS and LOI 2w

3 IDA's NOL of TOR, SS and LOI 1w 1112

4 Issue LOI ld 1115

5 Receive proposals 3w 215

6 Open technical proposals Ow , 215

7 Evaluate technical proposals 1w j2112

8 Open financial proposal ow 2112

9 Negotiate contract 1w 2119

10 Sign Contract 1w 2126

11 IDA's NOL of final contract 1w 314

12 Mobilization 4w 4/1

13 Team Leader in Post Od 411

219 Annex 14

Project Disbursement(US$ '000)

International GlobalDevelopment Association Environmental Trust Disbursement

Per Semester Cumulative % Per Semester Cumulative % Profile %

19971 - - 0 - - 0 0

2 560.0 560.0 2 - - 0 31998

1 840.0 1,400.0 5 400.0 400.0 2 62 1,680.0 3,080.0 1 1 1,400.0 1,800.0 9 1 0

19991 2,240.0 5,320.0 19 1,800.0 3,600.0 18 142 3,080.0 8,400.0 30 2,200.0 5,800.0 29 22

20001 3,920.0 12,320.0 44 2,400.0 8,200.0 41 262 4,200.0 16,520.0 59 2,800.0 11,000.0 55 34

20011 3,640.0 20,160.0 72 3,000.0 14,000.0 70 422 3,080.0 23,240.0 83 2,800.0 16,800.0 84 50

20021 3,360.0 26,600.0 95 1,800.0 18,600.0 93 622 1,400.0 28,000.0 100 1,400.0 20,000.0 100 70

20031 - - 100 - - 100 782 - - 100 - - 100 86

20041 - - 100 - - 100 942 - - 100 - - 100 100

Model Statement of Expenditure (SOE) Withdrawal Application for VillageEcodevelopment Investment

(Rupees)Civil Works

Force Direct Quotations from Small Livestock TotalName of PA and account contracting qualified equipmentState contractors and goods

EDC NamelInvestment #1

Investment #2

EDC Name2

Investment #1Investment #2

EDC Name3

Investment #1Investment #2

Total

221 Annex 15

Annex 15: Project Administration

Shared Implementation Responsibilities

1. Overview. State governments, through their existing PA authorities within thestate forest departments (SFDs) or through newly-created autonomous implementingbodies, would be responsible for field level execution. For many project activities, the PAauthorities or implementing bodies would develop partnerships with or delegate to NGOsand village groups. They would also contract tasks to individual specialists, professionalresearch and training institutions, and other groups as needed. The degree of responsibilityof PA staff, contracted experts, and local people in implementing the different projectcomponents varies. PA officials would have the lead implementation responsibility forimproved PA management activities and hire local people to undertake some of the works.Village ecodevelopment would involve a full partnership of local NGOs, PA staff, andlocal residents in the initial negotiation of reciprocal commitments. Although theimplementation of the reciprocal commitments would also be shared, local people wouldbe likely to have the highest work load. Environmental education would involve extensiveuse of contracted experts. A combination of PA staff and contracted experts wouldconduct the monitoring and also involve local people in monitoring where possible.Outside experts would both conduct and coordinate research, but with the mandate tomeet the needs of PA managers. Outside experts and facilitators would conduct thefinancial sustainability and ecotourism strategies that are part of the long-term frameworkcomponent.

2. PA-Level Third-Party Support. For each state forest department (SFD),domestic third-party (contractual) implementation support would include:

(a) Direct administrative support and services (for the initial period of project start-up and implementation)

(b) Full-time specialists in ecology and in social science and, in some cases, inmanagement information system operation

(c) Specialists for visitor and ecotourism and financial sustainability studies.

(d) Specialists (including NGOs) in participatory planning to be members of villageecodevelopment microplanning support teams

(e) Research and monitoring specialists working on biological, social, technical,financial, and institutional aspects

(f) Trainers.

222 Annex 15

Staff Plans

Table 1: Field Executive Staff - Wildlife Wing(Number of Filled positions)

94/95 95/96 96/97 97/98

........................................................................................... ..................................... .................................. .............................. ........................ ...Buxa Tiger Reserve Only 415 !415 418 425

West Benga. -Entire State 1047 1079 1079 1079..................... . ............................................................ ......................................................................... ... ........................... ..............................

Gir Only 447 458 458 458g---- - ----Entire State 673 690 690 690

......................................................................... .................................... ................................... ........................... ..............................9Nagarhole Only 102 165 165 165

Karnataka - Entire State 565 965 971 971...................... ........................................................... .......... .............................Palamnau Only. 205 205 .205 205

Bihar - Entire State 803 803 803 803.......................................................................................... .............................Pn h O l.7 8... . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .Pench Only 78 81 81 81

............................................................................................................................. .................................... ............................... ....................... ....MadhyaPradesh -Entire State 1450 1450 1500 1500

Periyar Only .. 223 309.. 374 374

Kerala -Entire State 750 915 1020 1020

Ranthamnbhor Onl 141 161 161 161................................................................................................................................................. ................ ............................... ....................... ....

Rajasthan - Entire State 929 937 I 937 937

3. hnpact on Other Conservation Staff. Project staffling plans would not adverselyaffect the adequacy of staffing of other ongoing, non-project conservation activities. Theproject relies on extensive contracting of consultants, mainly NGOs. Under the project, currentstaff would become much more productive, due to their increased public profile (both amonglocal people and among government managers), greater accountability due to project workplans and monitoring, improved access to equipment and materials, improved skills due toproject-supported human resource development, and the increased collaboration with localpeople. Table 1 demonstrates that increases to PA staff from transfers within state forestdepartments do not deplete the overall number of conservation staff working on non-project activities. Net transfers to project activities in the wildlife wings of the state forestdepartments appear on the table as increases to the number of filled positions shown forthe seven individual PAs listed. In each case, the forest department staffing figures givenfor the entire state (italicised ) remain stable or increase, showing that there has been noencroachment on their numbers. Project performance review would include annual updatingof the above table to ensure compliance with the legal covenant that addresses this issue

4. Staff incentives. Within the context of the Indian bureaucratic system, and therelatively small scale (and hence limited leverage) of this project, opportunities to affect staff

223 Annex 15

incentives are limited. The project does provide improved amenities for junior level field staff,and extensive training opportunities. The project design also acknowledges that lack ofincentives prevents the recruitment of qualified permanent research staff, and therefore relies oncontracted research.

PA Commiftees

5. Committee Structure. Each PA is making its own arrangements to manage andcoordinate the project activities in accordance with local conventions. The maininnovation would be an explicit effort to expand their composition beyond governmentemployees and to include representatives from a range of outside specialists andstakeholders. Although their names and functions vary among the states, PA committeesor task forces typically would include a project steering committee, a district and/orregional coordination committee, a PA coordination/implementation task force, and animpact monitoring and research coordination working group, an environmental educationcoordination working group, and numerous ecodevelopment committees (EDCs).

National Level Coordination and Staffing

6. National-Level Organizations. MOEF would expand existing offices to handlethe project work. MOEF would in turn be assisted by NGOs, autonomous agencies, andconsultant firms and individuals employed under contractual arrangements with MOEF.Through these contracts, the offices would acquire substantial flexibility with respect toappointment of temporary staff and consultants, including levels of remuneration.

7. Project Tiger Office. The Project Tiger Office (PTO) would coordinate the project atthe national level. The PTO would expand to comprise two wings, each headed by a JointDirector. One wing would consist of existing staff positions and continue to handle the ProjectTiger activities. The second wing would focus on the Ecodevelopment Project. Theecodevelopment wing of the PTO would:

(a) Promptly release funds to states in three installments

(b) Promptly process and submit withdrawal applications for national-levelexpenditures to the DEA's Controller of Aid Accounts and monitor theprogress of withdrawal applications prepared by the state governments

(c) Compile project accounts and arrange required audits

(d) Facilitate procurement of goods and contracting of services in a timely mannerand in accordance with Bank and government requirements

(e) Produce semi-annual progress reports that include infonnation on the aboveitems, as well as other information on national-level project activities and anoverall summary of project progress

(f) Provide training and communication outlining financial and administrativeprocedures for the project

(g) Provide additional clarification and communication on project issues as neededbetween implementing states, national policy makers, donors; other nationalstakeholders, and the general public

224 Annex 15

(h) Make arrangements to hire and supervise contractual specialists who wouldprovide implementation services and review at the national level.

Table 2: Project Tiger OfficePosition Existing New Ecodevelopment Estimated Unit Cost

........ , ,,,,,,,,,.,, .. , , ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Wing .n '95 s.Director 1 150 000

.... ................................................................. ...................................................... ................................

Joint Director 1I 120,000............................................................................................................. ............................. " 'l ,............... .........................................

Technical Officer I-, 100,000.. i ............................................. ......................... ..................................................... .............................................................. Acons Officer 1 *96,000

Assistant I 1 i 2* 54 000Uppe Division Clerk (UDC) 1 38,000

......... .............................*........................ .................... .. ..............Lower Division Clerk LDC) 2 32,000

.............. .... .............................. ... ......................... ...................................................... .................................................~~~~~ 1 ~~~~~~~~~~~46,000Pers on Assist ts 2 1,*,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,.,,,,,,,,,., ..................................I .......... ...........................Personal Assistants I2 1*46,000

Peon 2 I 29,000Dispatch Rider and Driver . , 2 ' 50,000

* indicates staff needed for PPF Implementation.

8. Preparation of Second Ecodevelopment Project. The staff of the new unit in theWildlife Division would make arrangements to hire and supervise contractual specialiststo:

(a) Undertake policy studies and workshops on financial sustainability ofecodevelopment, legal frameworks for ecodevelopment, and other policy issuesaffecting the long-term institutional arrangements for ecodevelopment,including Ecodevelopment Project II

(b) Provide preparation guidance for Ecodevelopment Project II

(c) Prepare proposals for specific project areas of Ecodevelopment Project II

(d) Appraise proposals for Ecodevelopment Project II.

9. The International Division (ID) of MOEF would take responsibility for initialconcept papers of the Biodiversity Information and Genetic/Ex-situ Conservation Projects.The concept paper and subsequent consultations would then determine longer-termarrangements for sustained project preparation.

National Committees

10. The Ecodevelopment Project Steering Committee would facilitate center-statecoordination and provide policy guidance on project activities and work plans. Thecommittee would ensure compliance with the project legal covenant that requires that

IPosition essential during FY95/96

225 Annex 15

regional activities outside the scope of the project not undermine the biodiversityconservation of the project protected areas. It would meet semi-annually and be chaired bythe MOEF secretary, with the inspector general of forests as vice chair. Members wouldinclude the Chief Conservator of Forests(CCF) - Wildlife of the state implementing theecodevelopment project and the Forest Research Education and Extension Project(FREEP) ecodevelopment program, Inspector General of Forests (IGF) - Wildlife,financial advisor, MOEF, director WLI, and representatives of NGOs contracted toprovide national-level technical support. The director of the Project Tiger Office (PTO)would be member secretary. The member secretary may invite forest secretaries ofparticipating states as required. The committee would:

(a) review state submissions of annual work plans (including staffing plans,management arrangements, contractual services, training, implementationschedule, and associated budgets)

(b) recommend changes in norms for new activities that emerge over thecourse of implementation

(c) review the proposals for and findings of any regional assessment studiesfinanced by the project

(d) review project progress on a semi-annual basis;

(e) provide advice and recommendations to the Ecodevelopment ProjectImplementation Board (see below) and the PTO.

11. The Ecodevelopment Project Implementation Board (EPIB) would be anempowered body assigned full financial and administrative powers to implement theecodevelopment program of both the Ecodevelopment Project and the Forest ResearchEducation and Extension Project(FREEP). The EPIB would be chaired ex officio by theInspector General of Forests (IGF) with the additional IG - Wildlife as vice chair.Members would also comprise financial advisor - MOEF, advisor of the planningcommission, and controller of aid accounts of the Department of Economic Affairs(DEA), or their nominees. The director of the PTO would be member secretary of theEPIB. The EPIB would meet quarterly and as requested by the member - secretary.

12. The composition of the EPIB would empower it to exercise all financial andadministrative powers necessary for program planning and implementation and to ensurethat the necessary governmental approvals are processed expediently within the MOEF. Inthe exercise of its powers, the EPIB would carefully consider the recommendations of theEcodevelopment Project Steering Committee and the National Overview Committee forEcodevelopment.

13. Project Governance Arrangement. During the PPF or early period of theproject, in response to NGO suggestions, MOEF intends to contract a study to considerfurther strengthening arrangements for NGO partnerships in the project governance.

Flow of Funds

14. Release of Funds. As a centrally sponsored scheme, all funds to the PAs wouldflow through MOEF to the states. Release of funds to the states, with immediateforwarding to PAs, would occur three times annually. The first installment for twomonths' expenditures would be made by May 15 and the second installment for the next

226 Annex 15

three months' expenditures would be made by June 30; each of these would be based onfinal work plans and budgets. Neither the first nor the second installment would requireutilization certificates for the prior project (or PPF) year.

15. The third installment of seven month's expenditure would be made by August 31and would be based on:

(a) a careful review of project progress reports from the preceding fiscal yearwith a focus on consistency with project objectives and timely submissionof withdrawal applications

(b) submission by states of "utilization certificates" that provide evidence thatpreviously released funds for the prior project (or PPF) fiscal year havebeen spent (due from the states to PTO by June 15)

(c) budget outstanding adjusted to reflect project performance and unspentbalances.

The end of this annex includes charts outlining the flow of funds structure and theschedule of annual planning, budgeting, sanctioning, and fund flow.

Work Plan and Progress Report Schedule

16. Work Plan Deadlines.

(a) preliminary work plan to IDA by September 30

(b) final work plan proposal to IDA by January 31

17. Progress Report Deadlines

(a) Report covering prior fiscal year to IDA by June 30.

(b) Report covering first half of current fiscal year to IDA by December 31.

Budgeting and Flow of Funds Structure

Budget Sanctionlanning Mnistry of Finance

9ussNli55iuls 9 9 Department of

Budget MOEF ndCOlIC............ nou

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~............. ......... ........... .... .. _rg n l a W Original and /X ..........Vriginal & revised budget 'revised ,.....e.,requests , budget r PTI yn,sanction Budgei;requests ........................... Bud....g.........Copy of state withdrawal Budget Withdrawal: sanctionapplication plication 'application' &funds

TT T I T I . I ,overnment Governnment overnment overnment overnment of overnment overnment

of Bihar of Gujarat of Karnataka of Kerala Madhya of Rajasthan of WestPradesh Bengal

Bihar Forest State Forest State Forest State Forest State Forest State Forest State ForestDevelopment Department Department Department Department Department DepartmentAgency CCF, Wildlife CF, Wildlife CCF, Wildlife CCF, Wildlife CCF, Wildlife CF, Wildlife

1'11n11ry II IT 1J1v Iv

I- 1% I I ., ,' I @ . T I T Palamau ir National Nagarhole Periyar Pench Ranthambhore BuxaTiger Reserve ark& Sanc. National Park Tiger Reserve Tiger Reserve Tiger Reserve Tiger ReserveField Director ield Director Field Director Field Director Field Director Field Director Field Director I....................

I I I I I i~~~~~Statements.'Ofexpenditure

Sr. Executive Sr. Executive Sr. Executive Sr. Executive Sr. Executive Sr. Executive Sr. ExecutiveField with Field with Field with Field with i l tField with Field with xExpenditure Expenditure Expenditure Expenditure Expenditure Expenditure Expenditure

1^ ,L 6 *._. I -- tL AA -- __._ I IA . -. _ .. I lA.L_*_ - L _.. I|1.-_*_AuthorityPs5& Mtherity ~ LJAUA [ Athority Attoi -thrt

ID Task Name A S 0 N D J F1 Proposed annual planning, budgeting and sanctioning process

2 PT tentatively allocates budgets to tiger reserves 817

3 States prepare APO

4 Park Director prepared APO 4811

S Park Director submits APO to CCF 8115

6 CCF reviews and approves APO for park 8122

7 CCF submits APO to state FS 8123

8 FS reviews in consultation with CCF and finance department 8130

9 FS submhts APO to PT 8131

10 Project Tiger prepares budget estimate reflecting state proposals 9128

11 Draft work program/budget for IDA comments 9128

12 Project Tiger submits estimate to MOEF plan coordination division ,929

13 PCD prepares MOEF budget estimate 121

14 MOEF submit budget estimate to PC 1211

15 PC review budgets of central ministries 1122

16 MOEF/PC budget review discussions 1123

17 PC coomunicates approval of MOEF annual budget 21

18 PCD informs PT of approved budget estimate

19 PT adjusts state budgets

20 PT requests states to adjust work programs and submit APOs

In

ID Task Name F M A M J J A21 PT examines and recommends APOs from states to IFD 315

22 IFD examines and informs PT of CA approval l 4116

23 PT receives sanction for first 2 months' budget 4117

24 PT sanctions for 2 months' budget to state governments 24

25 State government issues sanctions to CCF/Park directors 518

26 PA Director start works, purchases and contracts 5)8

27 PT receives sanction for additional budget E6I7

28 PT sanction additional 3 months' budget to state governments *6129 States prepare for release of remaining 7 months' funds

30 Review of project progress for the preceding fiscal year 5/30

31 Preparation of CUs 6117

32 CU documentation sent to PT 117

33 PT adjusts budgets to reflect project performance and unspent bala 8

34 PT issues sanction for final 7 months' funds to state governments

35 Flow of Funds Complete I I

I-

231 Annex 16

Annex 16: Project Performance Reviewand Implementation Schedule'

Strategy

1. Use of Project Performance Information. Use of implementation review andprogress reports on biological, socioeconomic, financial, institutional, and other factorswould be integral to project management, providing feedback and accountability to assistin problem-solving and adjustment. The adaptive management approach would quicklyincorporate lessons learned from monitoring feedback. This review would provideinformation on which to take corrective actions and/or further refine the project design.

2. Purpose and Composition of Project Performance Indicators andBenchmarks. The project implementation benchmarks outlined below would provide anexplicit estimate of performance expectations and a basis on which to measure whether theproject is performance in these initial expectations. The project performance review wouldcompare actual experience with the benchmarks. While the indicators would incorporatefindings about project impacts to the extent they are available from the monitoringcomponent (see Annex 10), there would be a need for more immediate measures ofproject performance. Therefore, the project performance review would focus on measuresof project implementation (inputs. procedures and outputs) that would indicate whetherthe project is following key elements of its design. These implementation indicators wouldserve as interim proxies for measuring project impacts, on the assumption that the projectdesign would result in the desired impact. Tables 1-5 list the indicators and benchmarks.

3. Objectives of Semi-Annual Progress Reporting. The semi-annual progressreports would compile a selection of information that has been acquired and used forinternal management purposes, to meet the needs of outside audiences. The regularreporting channel to the GOI, external financing agencies and project stakeholders ofproject performance would:

(a) provide summary information on project implementation status thataddresses key concerns of financiers and stakeholders

(b) help make project management accountable and measure the effectivenessof project management procedures

(c) provide the tangible evidence of project benefits needed to sustainbudgetary and political support,

(d) identify issues which require GOI or Bank intervention.

4. Content of Semi-Annual Progress Reports. The PA field directors, MOEFofficials, and contracted specialists would be responsible for ensuring that the reports (a)efficiently provide the information required to meet the above objectives, (b) are timely,

Guidelines subject to revision to reflect experience in practice. Revision will be documented throughexchanges of letters and comprehensive updating as needed.

232 Annex 16

and (c) do not become a burdensome bureaucratic exercise. Field directors of each PAwould submit semi-annual progress reports to their respective state forest departments andthe PTO. These progress reports would incorporate measurement of projectimplementation for all project components. They would not be limited to measuringphysical inputs and outputs -- compliance with procedural guidelines would also beimportant. In addition to the implementation indicators the reports would also include dataon other aspects of project implementation status such as staffing, technical assistance,studies, training, budget, procurement, expenditures and coordination mechanisms. Thereports would include comments on current issues and problem-solving strategies.

5. Completion Report. The primary objective of the Project Completion Reportwould be to describe and analyze the state of the project at, or shortly after, itscompletion, to compare the costs and currently expected benefits with those expected atproject inception and thereby contribute to an assessment of the effectiveness of theproject and the implementing agency. It would reinforce self-evaluation, would drawlessons from experience and would serve as a mechanism to disseminate these lessons. Itwould include an assessment of the original project objectives and design and of themethods used and decisions taken in the course of project implementation. Topics coveredwould include project identification and preparation, implementation, operatingperformance, financial performance, institutional performance and development, andreevaluation of project impact and benefits.

Implementation Review

Table 1: Implementation Indicators and Benchmarks -Improving PA Management

Project Activity Implementation Indicators Benchmarks for Each PA

Strengthen PA Detailed guidelines for PA management Completed by mid-PYl.management plans and plan updates agreed and completedthe capacity to Updated comprehensive PA management Meet guidelines and completed

implement the plans plans which include: in PY 2through specialistadvice, studies, . PA management work program for PY Compliance (at least 4)workshops, associated 3-5travel costs, training,and staff . Ecological considerations (1-5 scale)

. Participation arrangements (1-5 scale)

. Incorporates initiatives from otherproject components (1-5 scale)

Financial Strategy Study Meet guidelines and completedby end PY3

Skills Development:

* Number of senior staff undergoing As specified in annual worktraining per year. plans

. Number of junior staff undergoingtraining per year

233 Annex 16

Table 1: Implementation Indicators and Benchmarks -Improving PA Management (continued)

Project Activity Implementation Indicators Benchmarks for Each PA

Incorporate PA concerns Inventory and assessment of proposed and Inventory and plans for furtherinto regional planning ongoing activities outside scope of project assessment available by end PYand regulation through that potentially could undermine PA 1 and updated yearlyprovision of specialist conservation or ecodevelopment strategyadvice, studies, Decisions that address findings of above Evidence of meetings, other

workshops, associated assessment communication, and decisionstravel costs, training,and staff Replicable model for integrating PA Existence of new guidelines or

concerns into regional planning and practices in PY 1 and evidenceregulation (1-5 scale) of implementation in PY 2-5

Protect and manage Composition of Investments Meets criteria for urgentecosystems and habitats investments or arises fromthrough eocsystem and updated PA management plan

habitat restoration, No. of restoration investments As specified in annual workimprovements in fire, planspoaching and ammalcontrol, and Specialist Capacity Environmental specialist hiredimprovements in and functioning by mid-PYlenvironmentalmanagermental oChange in amount of poaching per year No increasenmanagement ofenterprise and visitor Fire detection and control Significant percentage increaseenclaves in response time above pre-

project levels

Improved environmental quality of Evidence of improvementsenclaves:

Upgrade PA amenities Investments As specified in annual workfor field staff through plansinvestments in Staff Attitude Survey in PY I and PY 5 Statistically significantaccomnmodations and significantfacilities improvement

234 Annex 16

Table 2: Implementation Indicators and Benchmarks -Village Ecodevelopment

Project Activity Implementation Indicators Benchmarks for Each PA

Conduct microplanning Capacity to prepare microplans meeting As specified in annual workand implementation project specifications plans

provision of contracted * Specialist Capacity Social Scientist hired andprvso ofcnrce functiorling by mid PY1NGOs, expert advisors,workshops, materials, . NGO Services Contracted Contracting keeps pace withtraining, PA staff, and growing workloadassociated travel

* Number of Support Teams Mobilized As specified in annual workand Trained plan

* No. of SFA field staff, NGO staff, and At least 75% of eachvillagers trained and/or participated in stakeholder group in supportstudy tours teams, and at least 75% of EDC

Executive Committee members,including women.

* Government Order Meets project specifications andapproved by end PY1

Content and Coverage of Microplans

* Microplanning follows agreed steps At least 4and standards (1-5 scale)

• Number of EDCs (and people covered Cumulative totals of plans inthat have initiated microplanning Annex 8

. Number of completed and approvedmicroplans (and people covered) thatspecify reciprocal agreements and meeteligibility criteria

* Percent disadvantaged groups' At least equivalent to percent inrepresentatives in EDC executive EDCcommittee

. Number of EDC meetings held per At least fouryear

Availability of technical assistance from At least 4government agencies, NGOs, or others (1-5scale)

Corrective action in response to monitoring Examples of problemsresults identified and corrective action

_ beginning in PY2

235 Annex 16

Table 2: Implementation Indicators and Benchmarks -Village Ecodevelopment (continued)

Project Activity Implementation Indicators Benchmarks for Each PA

Implement reciprocal Reciprocal Comnmitmentscommitments andassommiatmedinvestens a* Follows record keeping guidelines At least 4associated investments (using 1-5 scale)through (a) specificmeasurable actions by * Meets expenditure requirements of:local people to improveconservation and (b) (a) beneficiary contribution All investmentsinvestments that foster (b) budget constraint, state norms, oralternative livelihoods granted waiverand resource uses, and

adrs s, a * Compliance with commitments (e.g. at least 75%timing of release of funds/inputs, use ofPA resources, etc.)

Beneficiaries

* Total number of beneficiaries Equal to number of forest-dependent households

* Number of tribals receiving benefits Greater than % in EDC

* Number of other disadvantaged people Greater than % in EDCreceiving benefits

* Number of women receiving benefits At least 50% of all beneficiaries

Community empowerment

* Non-ecodevelopment fundeddevelopment initiatives undertaken byEDCs and communities Cite specific examples

• Independent conservation initiatives Cite specific examples

Development of EDC implementation Cite specific examplescapacity .-

Additional Joint Forest Land area (ha) Annual work plansManagement

Voluntary Relocation Number of People Consulted All potential participants

Extent to which relocation plans meet Actual relocation based only oneligibility requirements plans that fully meet eligibility

requirements

Supplemental Level of Expenditures Less than 18% of PA's totalInvestments investments associated with

reciprocal agreements

Special needs (see Annex 8 para. 72) Special need explained for eachinvestment

236 Annex 16

Table 3: Implementation Indicators and Benchmarks -Developing More Effective and Extensive Support

Project Activity Implementation Indicators Benchmarks for Each PA

Develop environmental PA-specific strategies for environmental Meets guidelines andeducation and improve education and visitor management/ completed in PY 2visitor management ecotourismthrough provision of

local NGO support, Number of days of activity As specified in annual workwprk vshops, phyicn, plans consistent with strategyworkshops, physical.facilities, equipment, and Number of people contactededucation materials Understanding of issues by participants Increase in understanding by

measured by annual survey participants

Number of independent local conservation List effortsefforts

Impact monitoring and Impact Monitoring Strategy Consistent with conceptualresearch through framework, meets guidelines oncontracted content, and completed in PY Iimplementation support Operation of Monitoring Systemfrom institutions andindividuals, expert a Timing of reports meet deadlines Reports meet deadlinesadvice, studies, facilities, . . .equipment, training, * Use of moitorng iformation Evidence of adjustment inworkshops, transport, project operation and/or designand materials Research Strategy Meets guidelines and

completed in PY 2

Operation of Research Program

* Number of projects As specified in annual workplans consistent with researchstrategy

. Mix of disciplines Includes at least 40% socio-economic research

* Design quality as judged by external At least 4reviewers (scale of I to 5

Contractual monitoring and researchcapacity

* Number of institutions contracted As specified in annual workplans

. Number of individuals contracted c;

237 Annex 16

Table 4: Implementation Indicators and Benchmarks -Overall Project Management

Project Activity Implementation Indicators Benchmarks

PA-level and national- Staff plan filled PYI

level adminstration Sr. staff transfers do not exceed 25% in any Compliancethrough provision of one yeardirect adnministrativeservices provided by staff No decrease in number of non-PA state SAR Annex 15 Table 1and contractual support wildlife staff

Non GEF & IDA expenditures for Data in Annex 2 taablesbiodiversity do not decrease in rreal termsat national state and PA levels

Timeliness of work plans, progress reports, Meet deadlines in Annexes 14flow of funds, procurement and consultant & 15contracting, and withdrawal applications

Disbursement rates compared with SAR At least 75e of projectionsprojections

Integration of strategies, guidelines, At least 4implementation review findings andadaptive management decisions into work_plans and progress reports (1-5 scale)

Improve multi-state SAR in Hindi, and relevant portions inlearning and other first languages of local NGOs:dissemination through * Number of pages translatedtranslation, publicity,and dissemination * Completion Completed PYI

services Project Documents Readily and pulicallyAccessible: timeliness of response toinquiries Not to exceed two weeks

Newsletter

. Number of issues/year At least semi-annually

* Size of distribution

Video Production

* Completion Completed by end PY 3

. Number of showings

National-level Performance of each contract evaluated At least 4implementation against TOR (1-5 scale semi-annually)guidelines and capacitybuilding throughcontacted experts,workshops, training, andassociated travel

238 Annex 16

National-level Performance of each contract evaluated At least 4implementation review against TOR (1-5 scale semi-annually)through contracted . . .experts, workshops, managemernt project operation and/or designtraining, and associatedtravel

Policy and strategic Performance of each contract evaluated At least 4framework studies against TOR (1-5 scale semi-annually)

Table 5: Implementation Indicators and Benchmarks -Project Preparation Component

Project Activity Implementation Indicators Benchmarks

Prepare Second Proposal containing processes and contents As specified in annual workEcodevelopment Project outlined in SAR Annex 12 plans

Prepare Biodiversity Proposal containing processes and contents As specified in annual workInformation Project outlined in SAR Annex 12 plans

Prepare Ex-situ Genetic Proposal containing processes and contents As specified in annual workResource Conservation outlined in SAR Annex 12 plansProject

Table 6: Project Performance Monitoring Indicators

Project Objective Expected Project Impact I Means of Inpact Evaluation Project Inputs Imnplementatlon Indicators Project Risks

Development Objective 1: Improved Protected Area (PA) Management - To improve capacity of PA management to conserve biodiversity and increase opportunities for local participationin PA management activities and decision making

Strengthen PA management plans Broadened focus in PA plans To be determined as part of Specialist advice, studies, Updated comprehensive PA Some Government staff mayand the capacity to implement the to more comprehensively Impact Monitoring and workshops, associated travel, management plans meet not be committed to localplans cover ecological Research Component -- see training guidelines and are completed in participatory decision-

considerations, PA-related SAR Annex 10 PY2 making.concerns of local people, andstrategies for relevant The project may not be ableprograms (e.g., research, to adequately handle theenvironmental education, and different perspectives andecotourismn) agendas of biologists andecotourism)________________ __________________________ social scientists

Incorporate PA concerns into Compliance with project Specialist advice, studies, Inventory and assessment of Pressures of populationregional planning and regulation covenant that activities workshops, associated travel, proposed and ongoing activities growth, poverty and

outside scope of the project training outside scope of project are commercial interests maywould not undermine available by end PY I and undermine project effortsbiodiversity conservation and updated yearlyecodevelopment strategy, andcreation of a replicable modelfor other PAs to addressregional impacts .

Protect and manage ecosystems Restored ecosystems and Restoration and control works, Composition of investments The project and financiersand habitats habitats, improved fire associated supervision, meets criteria for urgent may be associated with and

control, byproduct sharing communications equipment, investments or arises from blamed for negative trendsand increased employment vehicles, access track updated PA management plan and unmet needs that do notfor local people improvements, fire watch stem from the project.

towers, sign boards, andbound markers ._

Upgrade PA amenities for field Improved staff morale and Limited quarters for PA staff, Investments as specified instaff increased time of staff in field patrol camps, drinking water project cost estimates and

and electricity supplies, career adjusted in approved annualdevelopment training, and field work planskits.

xX-

cr

Project Objective Expected Project Inpact I Means of Impact Evaluation I Project Inmputs I plementation Indicators Project Risks

Development Objective 2: Vilage Ecodevelopment - - To reduce negative impacts of local people on biodiversity, reduce negative impacts of PAs on local people, and increase collaboration oflocal people in conservation efforts

Conduct microplanning and Conflict resolution, increased To be detennined as part of Contracted local NGOs, expert Number of support teams Some Governmernt staff mayimplementation support capacity of local people to Impact Monitoring and advisors, workshops, materials, mobilized as specified in annual not be committed to

obtain support services and to Research Component -- see trainmig of goverrunent staff, work plans and are sufficient to participatory decision-negotiate with outsiders, SAR Annex 10 NGOs, and local people, PA cover microplan and people makingpreservation and application staff, and associated travel benchmarks (see below)of traditional knowledge, and Some local communities,increased role of local people disadvantaged groups, andin helping PA protection Number of completed and NGOs may not trust the

approved microplans (and initiatives of projectpeople covered) that specifyrreciprocal agreements and meet Some project staff may noteligibility criteria correspond to develop the operational skillscumulative totals in Annex 8 needed to implement process-Section E oriented project design

Implement reciprocal Reduction in unstainable Actions by local people to More than 75% of the reciprocal The project and financierscommitments comprising resource uses by local people, improve conservation and commitments comply with may be associated with andmeasuable actions to improve partial offsetting of negative investments that foster project guidelines (e.g. release blamed for negative trendsconservation and associated economic and cultural alternative livelihoods and of funds/inputs timing, use of and unmet needs that do notinvestments that foster altemative impacts of PAs on local resource uses (e.g., biomass PA resources, etc.) stem from the projectresource uses and livelihoods people, and increased substitutions, biomass

capacity of local people to generation and forestry, Percentage benefits going to The project may not be ablesustainably meet basic needs ecotourism, agriculture tribals exceeds the percentage of to adequately handle the

including watershed tribal members in EDCs different perspectives andmanagement, small irrigation, to ~agendas of biologists and

l aIivestock, a-all irrigatioin Percentage of benefits going to social scientistslivstck,ago-pocssig nd women exceeds 50%_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~~~artisanry)

Implement special programs in Increased forest protection JFM microplanning and Actual relocation based only on The project and financiersjoint forest management, and production in two PAs, forestry works, contracted plans that fully meet project may be associated with andvoluntary relocation, and creation of a model to local NGOs, expert advisors, criteria and procedures blamed for negative trendsdiscretionary funds for special respond to people's wishes workshops, materials, and and unmet needs that do notneeds and to reduce population associated travel, transitional stem from project activities

pressure through ineentives, support funds, culturaland increased capacity of PA investments, and additionalmanagers to respond to funding for villagespecial site-specific needs ecodevelopment investments

a.'

Project Objective Expected Project Impact Means of Impact Evaluation Project Inputs Implementation Indicators Project Risks

Development Objective 3: Education & Awareness and Impact Monitoring and Research -- To develop more effective and exte sive support for conservation and ecodevelopment

Develop environmental education Expansion of public To be determined as part of Local NGOs, expert advisors, Strategies meet guidelines and For visitor management andand awareness, improve visitor understanding, support, and Impact Monitoring and training, workshops, physical are completed on schedule. ecotourism, commercial ormanagement, and develop incentives for conservation, Research Component -- see facilities, equipment, and other vested interests mayecotourism and reduced adverse impact SAR Annex 10 educational and other Number of people contacted undermiine project efforts

of visitor materials consistent with annual workplans and consistent withstrategies

Impact monitoring and research Provision of information Contracted institutions and Impact monitoring reports meet Project may not have accessneeded to assess project individuals, including local deadlines specified in agreed to adequate technicalimpacts and to improve people, facility improvements, strategy expertise,guidelines, policies and training, workshops, transportstrategies for PA and materials Some project managers maymanagement and village Number of research projects not be able to process andecodevelopment meets plans specified in research fmalize contracts and

strategy administer fund flowefficiently and effectively

Development Objective 4: Overl Project Management -- To ensure effective management of the project

PA-level and national-level Integration, timeliness, To be determined as part of Administrative, financial, Timeliness of work plans, Project may not be able tomanagement dissemination, quality, Impact Monitoring and communication, technical, and progress reports, and flow of develop sufficient operational

control, accountability, and Research Component -- see review services from staff and funds complies with deadlines skills to implement process-adaptability by project SAR Annex 10 contracted experts including specified in Annex 15 oriented project design

managers. NGOs. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Some project managers maynot be able to process andfinalize contracts, administerfund flow, and handleperformance reviewefficiently and effectively

Development Objective 5: Preparation of Future Biodiversity Projects -- to prepare future biodiversity projects

Project Preparation Biodiversity proposals To be determined as part of Experts including NGOs, Proposal containing processes Some project managers mayeligible for GEF, IDA, and Impact Monitoring and studies, and workshops and contents outlined in SAR not be able to process andother donor consideration Research Component - see Annex 12 as specified in annual finalize contracts and

SAR Annex 10 work plans and cornpleted by administer fund flowend of PY5 efficiently and effectively

X

242 Annex 16

Semi-Annual Progress Report: Preliminary Draft Outline of Contents

1. Status of Performance Monitoring Indicators: Matrix (Table 6) presentingresults for each PA and overall project. Tables 1-5 specifying implementation indicatorsand benchmarks for each PA and overall project would be included as attachments at endof progress report.

2. Project Impacts And Dynamics: Summary text describing impact monitoringfindings, if any.

3. Problem solving.

(a) What are the main constraints to implementation during the last sixmonths?

(b) What actions are required to address these constraints? Who would beresponsible for these actions?

(c) What constraints are anticipated during the next six months?

(d) What preventive actions would address these constraints? Who would beresponsible for these actions?

(e) What are the results of the action recommendations from the previousprogress report?

4. Staffing.

(a) PA staffing: Number of senior and junior staff compared with staff plan

(b) Wildlife wing staffing: Number of total staff throughout state in wildlifewing compared to pre-project

(c) Comments on impact of project on the capacity for non project wildlifeproblems

5. Works And Goods Contracts And Physical Progress.

(a) Local Shopping and Contract Awards (excluding village ecodevelopmentinvestments and

(b) Physical Progress by Contract Compared to Contract Timetable

6. Consultant (Including NGOs And Autonomous Agencies) Recruitment AndWork Progress. For each contract indicating status of

(a) Terms of Reference

(b) Short lists or sole source justifications

(c) Requests for proposals

(d) Evaluation of proposal

(e) Contract Signing

(f) Consultant Activity Progress and

(g) Consultant Reports

243 Annex 16

7. Project Costs and Inputs: Project Expenditures by Project Objective (comparedwith budget, in matrix format for each fiscal year consistent with format of cost tables inAnnex 13)

8. Financial Management.

(a) Status of Project Accounting Systems and Procedures

(b) Government Budget Provision

(c) Status of Fund Advances

(d) Disbursement Claims

(i) Expenditure

(ii) Amount due for reimbursement

(iii) Amount claimed

(iv) Amount received

(v) Balance outstanding

(vi) Documented or SOEs and

(e) Status of Financial Statements, Audits, and Expenditure/ProcurementReview

9. Biodiversity Expenditures

(a) Non Project Budget/Expenditures of State Wildlife Wing with notesexplaining decreases in real terms, if any, from pre-project levels

(b) Non Project Budgets/Expenditures of the overall MOEF plan budgetaffecting biodiversity with notes explaining any decreases in real terms, ifany, from pre-project levels

10. Status of Project Legal Covenants (in standard Bank format)

244 Annex 16

Project Implementation ScheduleID Task Name 96 96 97 98 99 00 01 02

1 Bank Processing i _ _ - -

2 Yellow Cover 1i -8111

3 Invitation to Negotiate 7/15 7/15

4 Negotiation 7130 816

5 Board Presentation 9/11 911

6 Grant/Credit Signing 10/21 10/21

7 Effectiveness 12/31 12/31

8 Completion 12/31 12/31

9 Closing 7/1 71

10 Bank Supervision - -. -

11 PPF Review Mission 1013 10/18

12 Supervision - Prior to Mid4erm Review

13 First 2/3 2/21

14 Second 4/4 1424

16 Third 10/21 II11/1O

16 Fourth 4/15 1 5/5

17 Fifth 10/1 1 10/21

18 Mid-term Review 2/5 3/4

19 Supervision - After Mid4erm Review

26 Completion Review 10/31

27 PPF - Pre-effectivenes Activities

28 PPF EFC Clearance 1/21 r11/2,

29 Completion of Pre-Negotiation Steps 7/15

30 National Level

37 PA Level

38 Project Start-up Planning 2/15 12/31

39 Microplanning 4/3 12/31

40 Implementation of Reciprocal Agreements 9/20 12/31

41 Special programs 9/20 12/31

42 Project Activities - Post-Effectiveness . , _ _

43 Improve PA Management I I T44 Strengthen PA Management Plans . _ _

245 Annex 16

ID Task Name 97 98 9 99 J 00 I 01 | 02 03 0445 Initial Update ^1 12/291 l l

46 Ongoing Revision 12130 12/25

47 Regional Planning and Regulation _ 12/25

48 Financial Sustainability Study 12/28

49 Protecting and Managing Ecosystems

50 Investments Prior to Updated PA Plans 12/29

61 Implementation of PA Management Plans 12/30 12/25

52 Village Ecodevelopment T53 Participatory Microplanning _ 6/26

54 Implementating Reciprocal Agreements _12/25

55 Special Fringe Area Programs I T56 Additional Joint Forest Management 12125

57 Voluntary Relocation Planning 6/29

58 Voluntary Relocation Implementation 12/25

59 Env. EdNisitor Man. and Mon/Research

60 Environmental Education & Visitor Manage _

61 Strategies 9/30

62 Implementation of Strategies 0/1 12/25

63 Monitoring of Impacts and Status

64 Development of site-specific plan 7/1

65 Data Collection 1V25

66 Research

67 Site-specific Strategy 711

68 Studies and Implementation of Strategy /2 12/25

69 Project management 12/25

70 Preparation of Other Biodiversity Projects _

71 Biodiversity Information 12/28

72 Ex-situ Conservation 12/28

73 Second Ecodevelopment Project

74 Development of Preparation Guidelines 5/6

75 Prepare specific proposals 5/4

76 GOI appraise submitted proposals 5 5 11/2

I

247 Annex 17

Annex 17: Environmental Analysis1. The India Ecodevelopment Project is classified as a "B" category project according tothe Bank's Operational Directive 4.01 (Environmental Assessment), because it is not likely tohave major adverse environmental impacts. I-Iowever, in order to ensure that projectinvestments meet the objectives of protecting the environment, a preliminary environmentalanalysis was initiated during the project preparatory phase.

2. The purpose of the environmental analysis of the India Ecodevelopment Project is to:

(a) Assess the potential environmental impact, if any, of activities proposed in theindicative plans;

(b) Assess the degree to which environmental safeguards are incorporated intoexisting project designs and operations

(c) Recommend appropriate measures for strengthening environmentalmanagement within the Project.

The environmental analysis is confined to the discussion of the environmental and not thesocial aspects of the Project. (The Social Assessment is outlined in Annex 18).

3. The Indira Gandhi Conservation Monitoring Center (IGCMC) of the WorldwideFund for Nature - India and the Wildlife Institute of India (WIl) were responsible forstudying project proposals and other relevant materials and providing a preliminaryanalysis of the environmental issues related to the project. Their analyses constitute aninitial discussion of environmental impacts relevant to the project. They also provide aframework for incorporating site specific analysis on an ongoing basis during projectimplementation. This Annex summarizes the analyses.

Project Activities

4. The activities supported under the India Ecodevelopment Project comprise:

(a) Improved Protected Area Management

(b) Village Ecodevelopment

(c) Education, Impact Monitoring and Research

(d) Overall Project Management

(e) Preparation of Future Biodiversity Projects.

5. The analysis was confined to the broad range of activities falling under categories (a)and (b) above, because these are the field development activities. Category (c) was excludedbecause it represents a set of supportive activities (education, research, etc.) that does not havepotential to cause direct environmental impacts. Category (d) involves staffing and temporaryoffice facilities for the duration of the project. Proposed activities under category (e) are still tobe defined and are not to be implemented under the current project. An environmental analysisof the project concepts would be done during their design.

248 Annex 17

Potential Environmental Impact

6. The preliminary environmental analysis included examination of the potential effects ofa wide range of activities on the environment, the safeguards or mitigation measures providedunder existing operational procedures, and the existing capability for sound implementation(see Tables 1 and 2). Preliminary analysis indicates that project activities would producebeneficial environmental impacts, by improving productivity of forest and non-forest resourcesand reducing existing pressures on protected area resources. Most of the proposed projectactivities identified in the indicative plans are small-scale and localized. The potential of theseactivities for adverse impact is therefore, lirnited in scope and significance. Most activities arealso expected to be labor-intensive and involve little mechanization and construction work.

7. The initial environmental analyses confirms that the specifics of project activities wouldconform to environmental protection objectives. However, it also includes preliminaryrecommendations for improving environmental considerations in the design and operations,and for improving skills and training to implement them, where these are inadequate.

Protected Area Management

8. In this component a range of management and protection activities will evolvefrom a participatory PA planning process. The type of technologies generally applied inPAs, the likely scale of operations, and local environmental conditions make it unlikelythat the potential for impact will be significant in scope It should be easily manageablewithin current operational procedures and guidelines. Nevertheless,, managementinvestments will be monitored by further site-specific reviews to ensure that threats tobiodiversity and environmental conditions do not develop later. The PA managementinvestments can be grouped into the following categories:

(a) Eradication of weeds and assisted regeneration of native species

(b) Small soil and water conservation works, including check and stop dams,bunds, ponds, desilting, gully plugging, etc.

(c) Construction of communication towers, fire lines and watch towers,improvements of existing roads, sign boards, boundary markers, etc.

(d) Animal control structures, such as electric fences and stone walls;small-scale administrative, staff and research buildings

(e) Small solid waste disposal infrastructure works

Village Ecodevelopment

9. In this component the scope and nature of a range of development activities, would bedetermined and implemented by local communities on a village by village basis according tolocal environmental conditions and needs. Using participatory rural appraisal surveys insample communities in and around the PAs, the project preparation teams have identifiedan indicative list of possible ecodevelopment investments. These investments can begrouped into the following categories:

(a) Construction of crop protection structures such as stone walls, trenches, andenergized fences

249 Annex 17

(b) Establishment of fuelwood, fodder, and agroforestry plantations

(c) Construction of village-level irrigation facilities, most probably tube wells, stopdams, and micro-irrigation schemes

(d) Promotion of small scale crop and agricultural development activities such assericulture, mushroom, and sisal cultivation

(e) Development of small scale farm- and non-farm-based alternative incomegeneration operations such as poultry rearing, bee keeping, lac production,handicrafts, tailoring

(f) Promotion of improved energy saving devices such as biogas plants, solarcookers, and improved chulas.

10. These investment ideas will require monitoring in site-specific review to judgewhether they meet eligibility criteria. Not all investments would necessarily be adopted;others may be identified during more detailed planning.

11. All ecodevelopment activities established under the project would go through arigorous process of participatory microplanning at the local level to ensure that proposedactivities are consistent with the environmental and social objectives of the project. PAstaff and local NGOs would meet, as appropriately trained support teams, with thetargeted communities to help them develop their plans in detail. The teams would alsoconduct feasibility analyses for social and environmental soundness of proposedecodevelopment investments and ascertain whether the proposed investments would meetthe eligibility criteria. Only activities meeting all of the above criteria would be financedunder the project. Annex 8 explains the eligibility criteria and microplanning process.

Future Action Proposed

12. As a follow-up to the preliminary work of the Wildlife Institute of India (WII), andWorldwide Fund for Nature - India (WWF), a contracted national-level organizationwould review plans for initial improvements in PA management and initial microplans, anddevelop further guidelines as needed to address specific issues. Thereafter, PA ecologistswould carry out site-specific environmental analysis of selected project interventions. Onlyactivities that are environmentally sound according to the above analysis would be eligiblefor financing under the project. The PA performance review and the national level reviewteams would monitor compliance with this environmental eligibility criteria.

250 Annex 17

Table 1: Protected Area Management: Indicative Activities and TheirProbable Environmental Effects

Activities Size and Scope Environmental Safeguards & MitigationEffects

Ecorestoration of Works generally of small-scale Limited soil Areas for restoration are usuallydegraded involving only a few hectares at disturbance and highly degraded. Activity smallhabitats. each site. Would consist of exposure of soil and widely dispersed. Vegetative

uprooting noxious weeds, for short periods. soil conservation works applied.surface ploughing and seeding No use of agro-chemicals andof variety of local vegetation. pesticides applied within the PAs.No introduction of exotic Very limited adversespecies. environmental impact potential.

Works will improve wildlifehabitat and diversify theavailability of wildlife feedingpoints.

Soil and water Usually small-scale soil Some disturbance Basic designs specified in forestconservation conservation and water- to streamflows, department documents andworks. harvesting structures to improve accelerated stream construction sound. All

conditions for natural bank erosion and construction done by hand duringregeneration of food and fodder disruption of dry season, thus limitingspecies and provide water surface runoff construction related environmentalsupply for wildlife. The water patterns. impacts. Embankments stabilizedharvesting structures would be by vegetative measures. Impactsaugmented by de-silting of anticipated to be limited andnatural streambed hollows and manageable.construction or restoration ofstop dams, ponds, bunds, etc.These structures will increaseand diversify the availability ofwildlife watering points andimprove the security of waterand food supplies. The soilconservation structures wouldinclude gully plugs, gabions,stone walls and other small-scale structures.

Construction of Works generally small-scale Some soil Location of structures and accesssign boards, fire and dispersed. Sign boards and disturbance should be based on biological andwatch towers and boundary markers located in during transport environmental considerations.communication periphery of PAs. and construction. Most activities are small-scale andtowers, sign Occupation of fire would be completed in dry seasonboards, boundary watch towers will reducing potential for soil erosion.markers. be confined to watch towers should be located in

limited periods of manner to minimize disturbance tothe year. habitats and wildlife. Improved

communication and fire controlwill have a positive impact on PAs.

251 Annex 17

Activities Size and Scope Environmental Safeguards & MitigationEffects

Road Usually 10 feet wide, unpaved, Soil erosion and Basic design is sound. Someimprovements. constructed at grade: road drainage periodic waterlogging of road

rehabilitation, mainly confined impairment if surface may occur, but this is ato repair of table drains and design does not minor problem. Collection of soilstream crossings. No new road incorporate good from forest should be avoided. Noconstruction. Existing design construction serious impact anticipated.available with forest parameters.departments provides for drains Temporaryon both sides and dry stone disturbancesteam crossing. Staff capacity is during period ofadequate. maintenance work

due to influx oflaborers.

Animal control Would include electric fences, Would involve Location of structures should bestructures. stone walls, trenches, etc. to some clearing of based on careful scientific study

control animals in particular vegetation along and research. Electric fencingelephants from straying into the transect line. should be given preference overhabitations and fields. However, most trenching.

structures will beconstructed alongthe perimeters ofthe PA. Mayinvolve disruptionof wildlifemovements tosurroundingforests if notproperly planned.

Construction of Would include small buildings Some vegetation Location of structures to bestaff, for guards and rangers, limited clearance and soil carefully planned to minimizeadministrative research and administrative disturbance impacts on critical habitats andand research facilities and few small field during avoidance of disruption ofbuildings. research stations. Most construction. migratory routes. However, most

buildings would be located Buildings will structures are small-scale andindividually and dispersed. require creation of would be completed in dry seasonAdministrative and research access. reducing potential for soil erosion.buildings will be located outside Occupation levels at theseor in the periphery of the PAs. buildings would generally be low

reducing levels of disturbance towildlife. Area around facilitieswill be revegetated. Acceptablebuilding plans exists with the forestdepartments.

252 Annex 17

Activities Size and Scope Environmental Safeguards & MitigationEffects

Solid waste Would likely include latrines, Would have a Solid waste disposal systemsdisposal works. garbage collection structures positive impact in should be suitably located. Care

and use of tractors to transport reducing health should be taken in the collection,garbage to outside locations. hazards and transport and disposal of wastes toThese would be largely located controlling the avoid further degradation of thein areas presently utilized by spread of environment.pilgrims, e.g. Sabarimala hazardoustemple in Periyar and in materials.Ranthambhore. Garbage dumps

could attractanimals if notappropriately

._______ _______ __________ _________ __located.

Table 2: Village Ecodevelopment: Indicative Activities and Their ProbableEnvironmental Effects

Activities Size and Scope Environmental Effects Safeguards & Mitigation

Crop protection Construction of stone These structures can Needs to be designed and locatedstructures. walls, trenches, energized inhibit wildlife after taking into consideration

fences, etc. Usually movements between the wildlife migratory needs.constructed along the PA and habitats outside, if Structures need regularedges between the forest not properly planned and maintenance. Local people must beand villages to keep located Trenches can involved in planning andwildlife animals away induce erosion unless maintenance of these structures.from crops and regularly maintained.settlements. Energized fences need

regular maintenance. Maysometimes causeresentment by the localpeople if they preventdomestic livestock fromentering the PA.

253 Annex 17

Activities Size and Scope Environmental Effects Safeguards & Mitigation

Fuelwood, fodder, Small-scale village Positive impact on the Most of these plantations would beagroforestry based plots located PA by reducing current established through joint forestplantations and outside PA boundaries dependencies and approaches involving multipurposejoint forest to provide fodder, fuel improving environmental species on degraded land. Nomanagement and other products to conditions by increasing serious environmental issuesprograms. relieve current vegetation cover on anticipated.

dependencies on PA degraded lands. Possibleresources. Most of this reduction of biodiversitybiomass would be in areas to be planted upraised on already under monoculturedegraded land or regimes.through improvedprotection of degradedforest lands.Monocultures wouldbe avoided andmultipurpose localspecies promoted.

Construction of Specific investments Disturbance of Structures are built to a standardwater harvesting include tube wells, streamflows, accelerated design. In most cases, may onlyand irrigation hand pumps and stop steam bank erosion, involve de-silting or bundstructures and dams. Micro- disruption of surface renovations, desilting of canals, etc.systems. irrigation schemes runoff patterns. Most are minor-scale works with

may also be minimal environmentalconstructed or consequences. Although, veryrehabilitated. Most unlikely to be part of the project, ifwork would be done large scale works are proposed theyby hand or light would be preceded by anequipment in the dry environmental assessment.season to minimizesoil loss and erosion.Bunds would beusually vegetated.Irrigation canalswould be shallow,small & con-structedto low gradient.

254 Annex 17

Activities Size and Scope Environmental Effects Safeguards & Mitigation

Small scale crop Improved extension, Possible increase of The principal agricultural inputand agricultural planting stock, fertilizer and chemical would be cow dung. Subsistencedevelopment agronomic practices, usage. Pesticide residues farmers presently are, and in theactivities. diversification, credit in environment; and future will probably continue to be,

and marketing to occupational and health unable to finance purchase ofimprove productivity problems. Localized artificial fertilizers. The intensityof existing small eutropication of surface of development would be so lowsubsistence farmer waters. (limited to merely deflectingfields. Little or no existing dependencies on PAexpansion of crop resources) that any residues flowinglands has been into the environment would beproposed. small in relation to assimilative

capacity and unlikely to registersignificant adverse impacts.Conversely, the use of increasedinputs would generally be desirablein the wider context since it wouldincrease local incomes and reducepressures on the PA resources.

Small scale farm Most activities small- Possible introduction of Most activities are small-scale; andand non-farm based scale, implemented at exotic species, conversion introduced in a highly diversifiedalternative income the household level, of natural habitats, production set-up, thereby reducinggenerating and with low external diseases, etc. opportunity for concentration of anyactivities. inputs. Possible adverse impacts. The proposed

activities include bee- programs have potential forkeeping, mushroom improving incomes of the localcultivation, people and deflecting pressures onsericulture, lac the forest and environment.production,handicrafts, tailoring,weaving, improvedlivestock, ecotourism,etc.

Biomass Promotion of Positive impacts on the Encouraging less use of forestsubstitution through improved household environment. resources.energy saving stoves, biogas plants,devices. solar cookers, etc.

255 Annex 18

Annex 18: Social Assessment

Introduction

1. Importance of Interactions. The sustainability of biodiversity conservation inprotected areas (PAs) depends above all on the nature of human interactions with PAresources. The design of the Ecodevelopment Project is based on this understanding. Theestablishment of PAs significantly affects a variety of human population groups; thesegroups in turn have a significant impact on the PA. Project investments designed tominimize the negative and strengthen positive results of these mutual effects are based ontheir nature and extent. The innovative participatory approach taken by the project wouldenable each of these investments to be designed and negotiated by each community backedup by PA authorities addressing specific site and population needs.

2. Sources of Analysis. Each state provided analyses of the social impactsanticipated for their ecodevelopment program and of the strategy they plan to adopt toensure that vulnerable groups will be full participants in decision-making and benefitsunder the project. In addition, independent consultants are conducting more detailed socialassessments. This document provides a framework for incorporating these state analysesbased on data provided during project preparation and appraisal. It starts from anidentification of the major stakeholder groups involved, and among these stakeholders, thetribals, women, and poor who are most socially vulnerable. Next, a summary analysis ofstakeholder interaction with the PA demonstrates priority areas for project investment onthe basis of greatest interaction between land and people, paying special attention tovulnerable groups. The assessment of potential investments that follows is related to theproject's objectives for improving the effects of interactions between PAs and people, asoutlined in the Indicative Plan. An overview of likely impacts on tribals, poor, and womenis presented together with indicative project strategies for addressing these concerns.Finally, other key social issues in determining project success are identified and discussed.

Stakeholders in Project Sites

3. Variety. The multiple uses of PA resources and the long history of humanhabitation in forest areas are reflected in the variety and numbers of stakeholders found inthe project sites, and typically in most PAs throughout India (see Table 1). Stakeholderscan be found in the form of human settlements within the PA boundaries, governmentagencies operating in and around the PA, private enterprises using PA resources, localvillagers in the periphery of PAs, and tourists and pilgrims visiting the PAs.

4. Settlements. There is a long history of habitation within PA boundaries althoughsome stakeholders whose traditional livelihoods are highly dependent on access to forestresources, have been led by curtailed access to pursue employment outside the PA.Nevertheless, some tribal groups collecting NTFP and graziers such as the Maldharis inGir remain. Similar long histories of habitation are also found with revenue villages, oftencomprised of cultivators residing in enclaves that have been legally excluded from nationalpark and sanctuary boundaries (e.g., Palamau). Equally well established in PAs are culturalsites and their support staff who serve large numbers of pilgrims (e.g., Gir and Periyar).

256 Annex 18

More recent settlements, mainly within this century, are forest villages found in two of theseven sites. Forest villages were created to provide a supply of labor for commercial forestmanagement, but such job opportunities have also declined with the designation of forestareas as PAs.

5. Forest Department. The key government stakeholder continues to be the ForestDepartment with the Wildlife division primarily responsible for PAs, and the Territorialdivision operating in much of the periphery. Other government agencies are also importantand powerful stakeholders in PAs with interests in mining, hydropower generation,irrigation, fisheries, roads, and tourism. Within this set of interests, agencies concernedwith water resources are the most common across PAs.

6. Commercial Interests. Private and public commercial interests are alsostakeholders. For example, a monoculture plantation has been established for paperproduction in Periyar Sanctuary. In the periphery of some PAs, large-scale commercialcash crop enterprises place demands on natural resources for both processing and its laborforce (Buxa and Nagarhole), but can provide income sources for PA residents (Periyar andNagarhole). The ability of government agencies and private interests to act on theircommercial interests comes not only from power vested by the state, but also from thesupport of peripheral PA populations wanting irrigation, transport, employment, etc. andthe Wildlife Act (1972), which permits certain extractive processes in sanctuaries.

7. Periphery. Stakeholders on the periphery of PAs, although generally lessdependent on PA resources, still derive substantial income from PAs, which also serve asimportant reserves of resources in times of scarcity. For many peripheral villages, PAs areimportant sources of grazing, fodder, and fuelwood. These populations also derivesignificant supplemental income from the collection and sale of NTFP, employment incommercial forestry operations, and small-scale industries such as furniture productionand fisheries. However, with the designation of PAs, access to these resources andopportunities is decreasing, resulting in illegal use of PA resources and encroachment.Transitory stakeholders within PAs include migratory pastoralists found in Ranthambhore.

8. Tourists and pilgrims. Although the most transitory of the stakeholders, touristsand pilgrims nonetheless, constitute a large influential group in PAs, with servicesprovided by more permanent stakeholders such as state tourism departments, privatehotels, and temple complexes. In all the sites the majority of tourists are Indians. The largenumbers of pilgrims reflect the importance of PAs as sites of cultural and religioussignificance.

9. Researchers. Most of the sites have been or continue to be the subject of varioustypes of research by individuals and groups belonging to both NGOs and government.This group of stakeholders has been characterized by varying degrees of success ininfluencing policy. The variability is in part a function of the low priority given to wildliferesearch in the forest departments and the even lower emphasis on socioeconomic topics.Social and economic issues have, however, generated another important group ofstakeholders. These are primarily national and local NGOs, with opportunities to initiateactivities in and around PAs, and influence PA policies toward participation inmanagement and the welfare of indigenous tribal groups.

Table 1: Project Stakeholders by Protected AreaStakeholders BUXa j GIR| NAGarhole PALamau PENch f PERiyar 1 RANthamb

Inside PA _

People in Forest 15,600 4,500 7,110 630 3,900Settlements

Grazier Settlements 2,600 1210

Revenue Enclaves 39,000 12,000 3,067

Temple complexes Ipresent present present

Forest Department present present present present present present present

Other Govt. Agencies & Mining PWD, Tourism, North Koel Fisheries, HEP Tourism, Pulp,Industrial Irrigation PWD, Elect. HEP Irrigation _

I-'

D0

Table 1 continued - Project Stakeholders by Protected Area

Stakeholders BUXa GIR T NAGarhole PALamau PENch PERiyar RANthamb.

Outside PA

Peripheral Revenue Villages 20,400 65,000 63,000 36,000 36,000 58,000 60,000

Migratory Graziers present

Commercial & Industrial Tea Estates, Tea Estates FisheriesWood, NTFP

Water Use Agencies Irrigation Irrigation Hydro/irrig. Irrigation

Visitors - Tourists present present present present present present present

Visitors - Pilgrims present present present present

Smugglers/Poachers present present present present

Ritual Hunters oo

NGOs present present present present present

Researchers present present present present

0-

259 Annex 18

Tnbals, Women, and Marginalized Groups

10. Population. All seven project sites have populations of Scheduled Tribes andCastes (see Table 2). The accuracy of data on the distribution of these groups is highlyvariable, reflecting the variety of sources. Available data suggests that approximately 55percent of the project population in seven sites belongs to Scheduled Castes andScheduled Tribes. In five of the sites (Buxa, Palamau, Pench, Periyar and Ranthambhore)almost half or over half the project population belong to Scheduled Castes and Tribe. Inall sites, except Gir, the percentage of Scheduled Tribes in the project populations isgreater than that found across the respective states. This in part reflects the many tribesbasing their livelihoods on forest ecosystems.

11. Tribals. A variety of tribal groups reside in and around the project sites; at least32 Scheduled Tribes have been identified (Table 3). Although they pursue a range oflivelihood strategies, tribals in general have cultural, social, and economic systems closelylinked to their environments (often forest areas), and consequently have accumulatedextensive indigenous knowledge about ecosystems. Unfortunately, within PAs, tribalshave received little attention, and there is limited ethnographic information on their historyand cultural links with natural environments.

12. PA Residents. Where there is habitation within PA boundaries, the populationgenerally belongs to scheduled tribes. Many of these PA residents have traditionally beenforest-dwellers highly dependent on forest resources. In Nagarhole, for example, the tribalgroups of Jenu-Kurbas (honey-gatherers), Betta-Kurbas, Hakki-Pikki (bird-trappers) andYeravas (swamp and paddy cultivators), have a long history of livelihoods based on NTFPcollection, hunting, and forest cultivation. Tribals with similar histories are found inPeriyar (Mannans and Paliyans). In central India, forest villages are typically inhabited bytribals who have provided labor to forest departments, intercropped forest plantations andcollected NTFP and cultivating the land by inter-cropping. With the designation of forestareas as PAs, access to forest resources and the demand for labor have dramaticallydecreased. Tribals are therefore becoming integrated, with varying degrees of success, intothe larger commercial economy as they pursue supplemental and alternate incomes. Some,such as the Mannans in Periyar, have had problems of seasonal poverty because of theirinability to manage large influxes of income from the periodic sale of cash crops. There area number of state and central government schemes to support tribal development includingdepartments of tribal welfare and the Jawahar Rojagar Yogana (JRY).

13. Scheduled Castes. Another key group of vulnerable stakeholders in project sitesincludes scheduled castes and poor people with limited ability to generate income. It isdifficult to generalize about states of poverty among scheduled castes, since there isconsiderable variation in access to and ownership of resources. Some castes pursueparticular livelihoods such as blacksmith, tailor that can provide more than a subsistenceincome. However, as a group they are socially marginalized, which limits their ability toimprove livelihoods without the benefit of the variety of government programs specificallydeveloped to support them. The category of poor people would typically include, inaddition to scheduled castes, the landless, sharecroppers, and marginal cultivators forwhom wage labor is an important source of income. Daily wages and benefits vary

260 Annex 18

considerably across the states; the highest was found in Kerala (over Rs 50), while inMadhya Pradesh daily rates were Rs 10-12. Again a variety of government programsexists to assist these groups; The programs are usually coordinated through local districtrural development agencies (DRDA).

14. Women. As a group women are, perhaps, the most marginalized and vulnerable ofstakeholders in the project sites, particularly those of the scheduled tribes and castes.Women are, for the most part, primary collectors of fuelwood, fodder, and NTFP for bothsubsistence and supplemental income but are marginal participants in decisions governingthe management of these resources. They are significant contributors to the householdeconomy through agricultural wages and off-farm labor particularly in areas where malelabor has moved out. Generally, women have less access to education than men, whichlimits their ability to participate in alternate income generation initiatives. Culturalrestrictions, especially in Gir and Ranthambhore in the north and west of the country,further impede full and active participation by women in local economies and civicinstitutions.

Table 2: Distribution of Scheduled Tribes and Castes in Project AreasBUX GIR NAG PAL PEN PER RAN Total

2

Scheduled Tribes and Indigenous Pastoralists lPopulation 15,700 2,800 17,500 l 55,600 23,000 15,500 36,500 166,600

Percentage of 44% 4% 25% 74% 48% 25% 57% 39%)projectparticipants _ l

% ST in State 7% 19% 3% 9% 28% 1% 15%

Scheduled Castes l

Population 13,000 7,500 7,000 11,000 4,000 15,500 8,300 66,300

Percentage of 36% 10% 10% 15% 8% 25% 13% 13%projectparticipants _

% SC in State 26% 7% 27% 15% 15% 11% 18%Pop. I__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

Scheduled Tribes, Indigenous Pastoralists and Scheduled CastesTotal ST and 28,700 10,300 24,500 66,600 27,000 31,000 44,800 232,900C pop. I

%of project 79% 14% 35% 89% 54% 50% 70% 55%participants l l l l l l _ |____

Source: GOI & State Preparation Documents from 1981 & 1991 Census. All figures are estimates.

2

Includes 14,000 indigenous pastoralists in Ranthambhore who are not Scheduled Tribes.

261 Annex 18

Table 3: Distribution of Tribal Groups across Project Sites

Site Tribal Livelihood Strategies Settlement Type Number NumberGroup inside outside

._____ PA PA

Buxa Mech Inside PA- Cultivation, forestry Inside PA - Forest Villages, 1,240works, cattle rearing Fixed demand Holdings

Outside PA- Cultivation, cattle Outside PA -Revenue 4,350rearing Villages

Rava Inside PA- Cultivation, forestry 2,620works, cattle-rearing, NTFPcollection, fishing

Outside PA- Cultivation, cattle- 2,250rearing, weaving

Garo Inside PA- Cultivation, forestry 280works, cattle-rearing

Outside PA- Cultivation, cattle- 450rearing, cane & bamboohandicrafts

Santal Inside PA- Cultivation, cattle- 450rearing, forestry works

Outside PA- Cultivation, cattle- 1,350rearing

Oraon Inside PA- cultivation, cattle- 680rearing, forestry works, NTFPcollection

Outside PA- Cultivation, cattle- 900rearing

Bhutia Inside PA- Cultivation, forestry 1,110works, orange orchards, cattle-rearing, pig-rearing

TOTAL 6,380 9,300

Gir Siddis Inside PA- Cultivation, forestry Forest Village 240 none

Maldharis worksInside PA - Cattle rearing, Settlements with grazing 2,540 nonecultivation rights

Outside PA - Cattle-rearing, Revenue settlementscultivation

TOTAL 2,780Nagar- Jenu Inside PA - Wage labor, NTFP Inside PA - Tribalhole Kurba, collection, cultivation, forestry settlements

Betta worksKurba,Hakki-Pikki,Yeravas

TOTAL 7,000 10,500

262 Annex 18

Site Tribal Livelihood Strategies Settlement Type Number NumberGroup inside outside

PA PA

Palamau Oraon, Inside PA- Cultivation, forestry Inside PA- Forest Villages 630Munda, works, migratory labor, sale of (in intended NP), RevenueKherwar, firewood enclavesChero

Outside PA-Cultivation, wage Outside PA- Revenue 27,500 24,700labor villages

Korwa, Occupations as above As above 1,480 1,300Kisan,Lahar,Asur,Birjia,Birhor,Parahiya

TOTAL 29,600 26,000

Pench Gond Inside and Outside PA - Revenue villages 6,000 23,000Cultivation, cattle-rearing, wagelabor, forestry works

Periyar Mannan Inside PA - Fishing, cultivation, Inside PA - Tribal 806NTFP collection, wage labor settlements

Palliyan Inside PA - Firewood collection, Outside PA - 379NTFP collection, cultivation

Urali Inside PA - Cash crops, 174cultivation, firewood collection,wage labor

Mala Inside PA - Cash crops, 620Arayan cultivation, NTFP collection

Outside PA - Cultivation, cashMalaipan crops-daram Inside PA - NTFP collection 37

Outside PA - NTFP collection

TOTAL 2,016 13,500

Ran- Meena Outside PA - Cultivation Outside PA - Revenue 22,500tham- Villagesbhore Inside/Outside PA - pastoralism, 1,000 13,000

some agriculture

TOTAL 1,000 35,500

TOTAL 54,777 117,823

263 Annex 18

People - Protected Area Interactions

15. Stakeholder Use of PAs. The major types of interaction between people andparks are identified by PA in Table 4. The first seven interactions deal with stakeholderuse of PA resources for grazing, energy, income, cultural, pharmaceutical, food, andcultural purposes. These uses can seriously affect biodiversity conservation; they canreduce food and habitat for wild fauna, reduce plant regeneration, disturb the dynamics ofecosystems, and cause the loss of critical species through over-harvesting, through theintroduction of exotic species, and through excess human waste. However, relativelybenign and even positive interactions can also exist when the level of resource use is lowor well managed; selective grazing, grass cutting, fuelwood harvesting or fires canmaintain habitat for herbivores and species requiring open canopy, bushy, or disturbedconditions.

16. Wildlife Damage. The last three areas of interaction identified on Table 4 concernwildlife damage to cultivated crops, domestic livestock, and human life and limb---theimpact of the PA's resources on people. People ,in and around most PAs,, are providingwildlife with as much as 35 percent of their food from private plant and animal resources.In Gir National Park, approximately that amount of the Asiatic lion's food has beendocumented as consisting of domestic cattle. Elsewhere, many villagers complain of asimilar percentage of their crop lost to wild herbivores, wild boar, monkeys, porcupines,and other wildlife. An estimated 100 people a year are killed by tiger, elephant, and lion inthe project's seven sites, and many more are severely injured. Livestock loss and humaninjury is partially compensated, but crop loss is generally uncompensated. The mostcommon complaint about PAs is: "You don't allow us to graze our animals on your land,but you allow your animals to eat our fields and livestock."

17. Cultural Resources. PA - people interactions also include cultural resourcesestablished within park and sanctuary boundaries. Major temples in some sites are reveredand visited by people throughout the nation; smaller temples have regional importance,and small shrines and sacred sites are important to the cultural heritage of local residents.In addition, many tribal communities have retained strong cultural ties to forest-dwellingand the access to specific plants and animals for ritual and social purposes. Appreciation ofnatural heritage is also assuming increasing cultural importance for domestic andinternational visitors. Along with the increasing need to manage environmental impactsfrom these visitors and pilgrims there is also the potential for increasing local financialbenefits from their activities (see Working Paper on Ecotourism listed with other workingpapers in Annex 22).

18. Intensity. As shown in Table 4, the intensity of interaction differs considerablybetween project sites. Wildlife crop depredation, grazing, and fuelwood collection are theareas of greatest mutual impact throughout all project areas, with some significantexceptions. Among the project sites, Ranthambhore appears to have the greatest intensityof interaction across many different fronts, followed by Gir and Periyar. With over 30million pilgrims and 250,000 tourists, Periyar is also the site of greatest visitor impact.

264 Annex 18

19. Prevention of Stakeholder Uses. The establishment of PAs and prevention oftraditional stakeholder use can have significant negative impacts on different PA resourceusers. Those traditionally highly dependent on the resources of the PA for their livelihoodhave had their previous economic strategies severely disrupted by the new restrictions. Asshown in Table 5, these impacts are most significant for current PA residents, particularlythe mostly tribal populations without cultivable resources; but are also significant forrevenue viliage dwellers and migrant graziers on the periphery. Landless households andwomen who depend on PA resources for both subsistence and income supplements are theperipheral residents most affected by PA restrictions. During the project period, the mostaffected groups within the PAs are more likely to opt for voluntary relocation.

20. Decrease in Employment. In addition to reducing access to resourcesestablishment of the PA has often cut down employment in forestry operations that havebeen curtailed or stopped. The impact of this reduction is most severe for forestsettlements that were established by the Forest Department precisely to provide accessiblelabor for forestry operations, and for tribal settlements previously relocated within the PA.

21. Quality of Interactions. The quality of interaction between the PA authoritieswho regulate resource use and the various stakeholders with interests in the resource is animportant element in the people-park relationship and a critical variable in project success.As agents of continuing restrictions on resource use, the PA authorities have generally hadantagonistic relationships with most stakeholding groups. Changing the quality of thisinteraction is an important project objective.

265 Annex 18

Table 4: Interactions by Project AreaWith Estimated Intensity of Interaction

Interaction BUX GIR NAG PAL PEN PER RAN

Grazing/loppinglivestock use

Fuelwood collection & *sale__c _ _

Poaching/TimberSmuggling

Visitor use & environ- * -mental impacts

NTFP use & collection j j * U I I

Industrial land - I Ior water use

Cultural use & ritualhunting

Reduction in forestry U * _ -employment

Wildlife crop - - -depredation l

Wildlife livestockdamage l

Human injury &-

death .. * _ _____* _

Bux = Buxa = very low, occasionalGir = GirNag = Nagarhole = low, infrequent

Pal = PalamauPen = Pench = medium, fairly frequent

Per PeriyarRan = Ranthambhore = high, frequent

= very high, very frequent

Table 5: Interactions by Stakeholder Gro p

Stakeholders Graz- Fuel- Poach Visitor NTFP | Indus- Cul- Labor Crop Cows Lifeing wood Smugl trial tural J | loss [loss | loss

Inside PA

Forest Settlements - _mixed use l

Grazier Settlements _ I . I U I ._

Revenue Enclaves i U I s uTemple complexes J I *__

[| Forest Department *___ _ * _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ __ _ __ i .! Other Govt. Agencies &i Industrial

Outside PA

Landless, non-grazing _ - - - -collectors/laborers

Other People from -Peripheral RevenueVillages

Migratory Graziers _ J | * | P

Commercial & Industrial _ _ _

Water Use Agencies - _ _ _ _

Visitors - Tourists . U _ _*

Visitors - Pilgrims in _ _-

Smugglers/Poachers : _ * _

Ritual Hunters . _ _

~N G O s _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _

Researchers .

Key:= very low, occasional

low, infrequent* = medium, fairly frequent X

= high, frequent_ = very high, very frequent 00

267 Annex 18

Investment Assessment

22. Indicative Investments. The specific village ecodevelopment investments cannotbe determined ahead of the ongoing microplanning process in which local communitiesand PA authorities arrive at agreed annual investment programs. However, on the basis ofsome participatory rural appraisal (PRA) planning) for each site the indicative planningprocess has identified the most likely investments to be selected. In Table 6, proposedindicative investments have been categorized according to the type and objectives ofmutual interaction they are designed to address.

23. Incentives. The specific objectives are to decrease threats to the PA's biodiversityby providing incentives for alternative behaviors. These incentives include a combinationof the following:

(a) Direct substitutes for particular PA resources

(b) Alternative sources of income for a particular PA resource use

(c) Village projects and conservation education to increased understanding andcooperation in biodiversity conservation by generating good will.

24. Each of these sets of proposed investments is related to the goal of conservingbiodiversity; but the direct linkage -- especially for (b) and (c)-- will depend on specificagreements on behavior change negotiated during the microplanning process (see Annex8).

25. Social Impacts. The large menu of indicative investments will have varyingdegrees of linkage to biodiversity conservation, so the specific social impacts, especiallyon vulnerable groups, will vary widely by investment and the manner in which it isimplemented (see below). Each proposed investment has an accompanying set of issuesthat will undergo site and community-specific feasibility analysis during the microplanningprocess (see Annex 8). Table 6, notes some observations on these issues under theheading of "Feasibility Comments". In general, joint forest and PA management are likelyto provide the most direct linkage and most positive social impact if carried out throughthe participatory approach now being developed elsewhere in India. Soil and waterconservation structures, unless sought by communities for direct benefits, seldom attractcommunity interest, and thus may not provide strong motivation for behavior change.Alternative income sources, if directly linked to conservation through village agreementsand targeted to resource users, can provide long-term solutions to overuse of PAresources. However, many of these income-generating projects require technical expertiseand supporting investments with which forest departments have little experience and thatare unlikely to be available from existing sources

26. Issues. A wide variety of technical and social issues is associated with each of thepossible investments. The project thus embodies a learning process for all key actors: theforest department, the village communities, and the supporting NGOs. The GOI andNGOs involved on a country-wide basis will promote opportunities for PAs to shareknowledge; thus providing for continuous monitoring and helping PAs avoid repeatingeach others' mistakes.

268 Annex 18

Table 6: Proposed Indicative InvestmentsInteraction & Objectives Indicative Investments Feasibility Comments

Grazing/Aopping livestock use -- tree & fodder plantations FD plantations high cost option-- reduce uncontrolled grazing -- pasture regeneration with unproven sustainability. High-- provide non-PA fodder sources --joint-forest management potential for PA grass cutting

arrangements. Cattle-- promote stall feeding of -- grass & fodder tree nurseries improvement/stall feeding provenimproved cattle -- cattle breed improvement strategy, but often available from

-- livestock water provision DRD funds.

Fuelwood collection & sale -- tree plantations Joint forest management & natural-- reduce uncontrolled collection -- forest regeneration regeneration provide greatest

. . . ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~efficiency & impact compared to-- provide non-PA fuelwood --joint forest management plataions. Energy

sources ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ . FD plantations. Energysources -- tree nurseries conservation technologies often-- introduce energy conservation -- provide solar cookers, improved available from DRD funds.

-- provide alternative income stoves, biogas plants, windmills,crematoria

Poaching/Timber Smuggling -- anti-poaching squads Combination of improved PA-- stop/reduce poaching -- community protection enforcement & greater community

. . . ~~~~~~~~~~~~cooperation promising if genuine-- stop/reduce timber smuggling -- better roads, vehicles & participaton mobilized.-- stop illegal drug cultivation communications

-- better PA-people relations -- village support (see below)

Visitor use & environmental -- waste management Comprehensive, participatoryimpacts -- visitor infrastructure ecotourism strategies essential-- manage environmental impacts -- conservation education prerequisite for implementingof visitors environmental management &

of.visitors -- control thoroughfare use sustainable local revenue-- increase local revenue-- increase localrevene-- ecotourism management generation.generation strategies & policies (potential ---- increase public support not currently in plan)

-- reduce wildlife disturbance

NTFP use & collection -- cultivate selected NTFP outside Need for studies to identify-- reduce unsustainable collection PA feasibility of NTFP cultivation as-- cultivate non-PA sources -- research sustainability of well as potenhal for continuing

.provide alteative incomes selected NTFP use some existing collection.-- income generation (see below)

Industrial land or water use -- phase out current leases where Problematic issues in Periyar (pulp(bamboo, timber, pulp, dolomite, possible through negotiation plantation), Nagarhole (teakquarrying, dams) -- stop further development plantation), Palamau (Kutku dam)

need policy level attention.-- reduce current use levels

-- manage continuing uses

Cultural use & ritual hunting -- dialogue with temple Considerable potential for seeking-- manage cultural uses complexes and tribals participatory solutions which

voluntary cessation of hunting conserve cultural heritage of both-- voluntary cessationofhuntingtemples & tribals.

269 Annex 18

Table 6: Continued

Interaction & Objectives Indicative Investments Feasibility Comments

Reduction in forestry employment -- income generation: duckery, Most proposed income generation-- develop alternative incomes piggery, ironsmithy, poultry, already available from other

apiculture, fish, mushroom, agencies to limited extent.-- target existing employment to handicraft, diamond cutting, food Relationship to project objectiveproject stakeholders processing, recycling units, sewing, only indirect. Feasibility analysis

marketing complicated. Proposed large-scale

-- agriculture improvement & soil investments in soil & waterand water conservation: water conservation only indirectly relatedtarksbundscheck dams, gy to project objectives & often alreadytanks, bunds, heculture available. Targeting contracting

plugs, ponds, horticulture could bring immediate benefits.-- target contracting arrangements

Wildlife crop depredation -- improve PA habitat Largest PA impact on people. Joint,

-- decrease loss -- fencing/trenches participatory investments have highpotential of improving PA-people

-- improve PA-people relations -- community patrolling relations. Village support programsvillage support: drinking water need to be linked to objectives

-- village support: drinking water,roads, health, & family welfareprograms

Wildlife livestock damage -- increase natural prey Comparative study of most effective

-- decrease loss -- fencing/trenches prevention & compensatingmechanisms could improve

-- provide compensation -- decrease livestock in PA investment.

-- village support (see above)

Human iniurv & death -- decrease humans in PA Most emotive issue in project.S . . . ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Mechanisms for immnediate

-- decrease incidence -- fencing/trenches cpnsatinunedecompensation & support needed

-- provide compensation -- village support (see above)

Impacts on Tribals, Poor, and Women

27. Benefits. By its focus on reducing negative interaction between people and PAs,the project design anticipates benefits from development and support of livelihoodstrategies less dependent on PA resources. Benefits for tribals, women, and othermarginalized groups are likely to derive from employment in a variety of activities,operation of micro-enterprises (poultry, handicrafts, etc.), expenditure reduction throughefficient use of natural resources (e.g., energy conservation with improved stoves), andincreased crop and livestock production (see Tables 7 & 8). Further benefits may includeimproved infrastructure and such facilities as drinking water. By addressing areas ofgreatest friction between PA and stakeholders (see Table 6) the project should alsoimprove relationships between stakeholders, particularly between PA officials and localpeople.

28. Negative Effects of Village Ecodevelopment. Village ecodevelopment activitiesare, however, equally likely to generate negative effects on both biodiversity conservation

270 Annex 18

and the socioeconomic condition of those concerned. Livelihood strategies that reducedependency on forest resources will inevitably affect the extent and type of indigenousknowledge retained and used by those groups having close cultural links with forestecosystems. For example, forestry plantations will not provide the equivalent variety ofspecies found in forest areas and widely used for food and for income generation andmedicinal purposes by tribals and women (Ranthambhore Foundation, 1994). Similarly,NTFP cultivation may concentrate on a few species of commercial value rather than avariety serving a range of household needs.

29. Effects of Park Management on Marginal Groups. Marginal groups are alsolikely to be affected by the range of park management activities proposed in the project.Survey and demarcation activities could result in either including or excluding tribalsettlements from PA boundaries and generating questions for future relocation policies.Other activities such as the construction of habitat management structures (e.g., watch-towers) may curtail informal access to forest resources as policing becomes moreeffective. Habitat enrichment activities may similarly restrict access to grazing and NTFPas PA authorities concentrate on managing forest areas for increased biodiversity.

30. Effects of Park Management on Women. Where the sale of firewood has beenan important source of income (Periyar, Ranthambhore), especially for women, energyconservation may result in decreased income and some loss of financial independence.Livestock improvement through better breeds and stall-feeding may increase the workloadfor fodder-collectors, often women, when previously animals were left to graze. Similarly,more intensive crop production such as the cultivation of cash crops may immediatelyincrease workloads for cultivators, who again are likely to be women. Women may alsoface increased workloads and responsibilities across the range of investments if options aredecided without their active participation.

31. Poor Access to Benefits. There are certain categories of investments that areunlikely to produce benefits for some groups. Investments in agricultural improvements(including livestock) and in soil and water conservation have little to offer marginal andother types of cultivators, and even less to offer the landless. Cultivators such as those inforest villages may be unwilling or even unable to invest in land improvement given theiruncertain land tenure arrangements (e.g., leases on which credit is unavailable as in Gir,Buxa, Nagarhole, and Periyar). Under such circumstances landowners with larger, secureholdings may accumulate any benefits and force those with less resources into moremarginal and subsistence livelihoods. For PA residents, particularly tribals, alternatesources of natural resources (for example, plantations, and NTFP cultivation) are notpossible given the terms of the Wildlife Act and the conversion of declared sanctuariesinto notified national parks.

32. Local Financial Management Capability. Alternate income generation andincreased employment may create problems for groups, such as tribal PA residents whohave little education and experience with financial management, as they join the largercommercial economy. Tribals in Periyar experience periods of poverty during the year,despite reasonable annual incomes, due to an inability to manage large cash influxes fromcash crops. Current tourism strategies may generate hostile reactions from local people,

271 Annex 18

since at present they receive little benefit from the increasing numbers of visitors, andwould be unlikely to receive significantly more in the future unless policies change.

33. Targeting. Some PA authorities from the project sites have considered how toaddress specifically the needs and problems of vulnerable groups such as tribals, women,and the poor. On the basis of PRA findings during project preparation, indicative projectinvestments are set to cover particular activities for target groups, general activities morelikely to be taken up by vulnerable groups, and subsidies. Examples of the first can befound in Buxa where women have been tentatively targeted for participation in mushroomcultivation (120 women), cottage industries (270) bee-keeping, farm forestry (160 landlessand poor women) and intercropping (160). In Palamau, sewing (100) and poultry rearing(250) have specific female target populations, while Nagarhole has identified village forestnurseries (125) for female participation. Tribal populations have been targeted with pig-rearing in Nagarhole and Palamau, NTFP production and sale in Buxa, and fishing inPeriyar. In Palamau indicative investments in smithy activities and carpentry are intendedto be of direct benefit to scheduled castes. All the indicative ecodevelopment plans haveoutlined the number of person-days of employment anticipated directly from possibleinvestments, but there is no indication of future employment resulting from activities suchas successful micro-enterprises and expanded agricultural production.

34. Self Targeting. General activities more likely to be taken up by vulnerable groupsfall under a strategy of self-targeting. Typically, these activities include the generation ofwage labor and other employment opportunities that are primarily taken up by the poorand landless. An example of self-targeting would be the collection and processing of lowvalue NTFPs that would be taken up by low income and marginal groups; an example ofthis would be the collection and preparation of sal-leaf plates, which is primarily carriedout by women.

35. Subsidies cover various investment categories. In Buxa saplings are intended to besold at 50 percent subsidy to village members of forest protection and ecodevelopmentcommittees. Cattle improvement in Palamau incorporates a subsidy of 25 percent wheninferior cattle are exchanged for improved animals. In many existing rural developmentprograms, these subsidies are further adjusted according to social and economic status;For example, scheduled castes and tribes and households below the poverty line receivesignificantly greater subsidies than less vulnerable groups.

Table 7: Project Impacts on Women

Village Expected Benefits Possible Negative Impacts Measures to ensure MonitoringEcodevelopment benefits & mitigate mechanismInvestment negative impacts

Forestry Plantations Employment; fuel, fodder, & Decreased income from sale of firewood; Participatory Monitoring plan tointercrops decreased diversity of NTFP available to microplanning include locally-

meet household needs and for sale; loss of including feasibility identified measuresindigenous knowledge analyses; JFM of performance and

policies; mixed procedures, NGOplantations participation and

EDC/FPC reviewmeetings; research

Cattle Improvement Increased income Increased time for fodder collection Microplanning; -do-contact with femaleFD staff; effectiveparticipation indecision-making

Energy Conservation Decreased expenditure on fuel- Decreased income from fuelwood sales Alternate income -do-wood; decreased collection time. activities ____

Ecotourism (in present Negligible; some possible Resentment toward government and private Govt. orders on -do-form) employment opportunities . agencies capturing economic benefits; sharing of entry fees;

(prostitution in Periyar?) microplanning, ;targeting of trainingand employment

NTFP Cultivation Income; employment Capture of benefits by other groups/ Microplanning; -do-(outside PA) entrepreneurs; loss in income due to research

decreased diversity products for sale asefforts concentrate on fewer products.

OD

Table 7 continued: Project Impacts on Women

Investment Expected Benefits Possible Negative Impacts Measures Monitoring

Alternate Incomes Increased incomes; employment Marginal benefits without culturally Microplanning; -doopportunities appropriate choice of options and training contact with female

FD staff;participation indecision-making;training

Agricultural Increased income; increased food Increased workload due to Microplanning -do-Improvement supplies intensification/diversification of crops

Soil & Water Increased yields; employment Increased workload; options identified by Effective -do-Conservation opportunities groups other than women participation in

decision-making

Voluntary Relocation Access to irrigated land, housing Terms of relocation not met; loss of income Participatory -doand other facilities; increased and capital resources; decreased access to operational plans;-income resources (e.g. forests); loss of indigenous cultural continuity

knowledge; cultural isolation; increased activities; transitionworkload support; NGO

participation

Reduction in Wildlife Increased yields; increased income; Time spent in patrolling Provision of -doDamage improved relations with Forest equipment; joint

Dept.; employment patrols with FD

Park ManagementInvestments

Survey & Demarcation Employment; exclusion of land Loss of cultivable land; decreased access to Govt. orders on -do-from PA forest land resource-sharing

Habitat management Employment; resource-sharing Decreased access to forest resources Govt. orders on -do-structures e.g. fire- resource-sharinglines x

Habitat enrichment Employment; resource-sharing Reduction of grazing area (buffer zones) Targeting of -do-and access to NTFP employment; Govt.

orders

Table 8: Project Impacts on Tribals and Poor

Village Expected Benefits Possible Negative Impacts Measures to ensure MonitoringEcodevelopment benefits & mitigate mechanismInvestment negative impacts

Forestry Plantations Employment; fuel, fodder, & Loss of income; inability to meet household Participatory Monitoring plan tointercrops needs due decreased diversity of products for microplanning include locally-

sale; loss of indigenous knowledge; little benefit including feasibility identifiedto PA residents analyses; JFM measures of

policies; mixed performance andplantations procedures, NGO

participation andEDC/FPC reviewmeetings

Cattle Improvement Increased incomes & yields Little benefit to tribals with no tradition of Microplanning; -do-keeping milk animals; time spent in fodder contact with tribalcollection FD staff; effective

participation indecision-making

Energy Conservation Decreased expenditure on Decreased income from fuelwood sales Alternate income -do-fuelwood activities; JFM-type

Govt. Orders onresource sharing;training_

Ecotourism (in present Employment as guides, otherwise Resentment toward Forest Dept and other Govt. orders on -do-form) negligible agencies who capture benefits sharing of entry

fees;microplanning,;targeting of trainingand employment

NTFP Cultivation Continued source of income & Loss of indigenous knowledge as fewer species Microplanning; -do-(outside PA) employment are grown research x

oo

Table 8 continued: Project Impacts on Tribals and Poor

Investment Expected Benefits Possible Negative Impacts Measures Monitoring

Alternate Incomes Increased income; increased Capture of and subsequent polarization of Microplanning; -doemployment benefits by other groups; no long-term contact with tribal

improvement in livelihoods due to inability to FD staff;manage cash incomes participation in

decision-making;training

Agricultural Increased income and food Little economic benefit for landless; uncertain Microplanning -do-Improvement supplies due to greater yields; employment opportunities for landless and

increased employment for landless poor; negligible benefit for those unable toand other poor invest due to uncertain tenure arrangements

Soil & Water Increased income and food Little direct benefit for landless and non- Effective -do-Conservation supplies due to greater yields cultivators; inability of marginal cultivators to participation in

invest due uncertain tenure arrangements decision-making

Voluntary relocation Access to irrigated land, housing Terms of relocation not met; loss of income and Participatory -doand other facilities; increased capital resources; decreased access to resources operational plans;income (e.g. forests); loss of indigenous knowledge; cultural continuity

cultural isolation. activities; transitionsupport; NGOparticipation

Reduction in Wildlife Increased income due to decreased Little benefit for landless and non-cultivators Joint patrols form -doDamage crop and livestock damage; part of reciprocal

employment in patrols _ agreements

Park ManagementInvestments

Survey & Demarcation Employment; exclusion of land Loss of cultivable land; decreased access to Govt. orders on -do-from PA forest land resource-sharing

Habitat management Employment; resource-sharing Decreased access to forest resources Govt. orders on -do-structures e.g. fire- resource-sharing D

lines x

Habitat enrichment Employment; resource-sharing Reduction of grazing area (buffer zones) and Target employment; -do- xaccess to NTFP Govt. orders

276 Annex 18

37. Microplanning. The tools and processes of microplanning designed to alleviatepotential negative impacts are discussed in more detail in Annex 8. Feasibility analysisacross the range of possibilities for village ecodevelopment investments (Annexes 7 and 8)will be a critical element in the planning process. To ensure that village ecodevelopment isparticipatory and that agreements between parties are indeed reciprocal, tribal groups, thepoor, and women will have to be represented in decision-making structures and assisted byNGOs in making their voices heard. PA staff at all levels will have to be sensitive to therange of social issues likely to influence the process. SFDs have been asked to preparedraft government orders that would address, among other issues, the establishment andresponsibilities of village-level ecodevelopment committees (see Annex 8).

38. Role of NGOs. NGOs will have a critical role to play in the microplanning andimplementation process. Frequently, NGOs have entered the arena of PA managementthrough activities to alleviate poverty and improve livelihoods of populations in andaround PAs (e.g. MYRADA in Nagarhole, Peermade in Periyar, AKRSP in Gir and CEEin Ranthambhore). Their experience and approach will be a necessary addition to theefforts of PA authorities and bring to the project enhanced social skills and sensitivities.Furthermore, as non-government institutions, these organizations will enhance themonitoring and evaluation processes. The project has included funds to contract NGOsand increase their capacity through training to participate effectively in villageecodevelopment activities.

39. Training. Quality training, particularly for vulnerable groups, will be vital to thesuccess of village ecodevelopment investments since the access of these groups toeducation and exposure to large-scale economic forces are limited. This training shouldequip such groups with the skills and knowledge needed to operate in new and changingeconomic environments. With appropriate microplanning and NGO participation it is morelikely that options are identified and developed that are culturally appropriate and sociallyacceptable, and thus more likely to succeed. The project also realizes the value of researchin informing policy on the management of interaction between people and PAs and hasincluded support for socioeconomic studies.

40. Employment. There is also considerable opportunity and need to increasenumbers of vulnerable groups employed by PA authorities at all levels. In some states,forest departments with sufficient commitment have shown that they can changerecruitment policies to ensure that women and tribals are hired as forest guards, rangers,extension agents, etc. In Periyar, for example, park management activities include thehiring of tribals and women as conservation assistants. Particularly where distrust is great,languages different, or gender restrictions high, such recruitment will be critical in bridgingthe social distances that currently impede the full participation of women, tribals, and thepoor.

Other Key Social Issues

41. Overview. As with any complex participatory project, additional important socialissues will be critical to project success at each site. This includes issues related tocommunity participation and social organization, institutional support for community-

277 Annex 18

based programs, and any voluntary relocation, land and resource tenure regimes, thepolicy environment, etc.

42. Community Participation. Indigenous forms of social organization, decision-making and conflict resolution differ substantially between and within different socialgroups. For example, some groups interviewed during preappraisal indicated that majordecisions such as relocation, change in grazing patterns, etc. were only made on a groupbasis to which every member felt bound. In other cases, households followed moreindividualistic decision-making strategies. The inclusion of contract sociologists in theproject should help sensitize PA authorities and NGOs to these social and cultural realitiesand assist them in adjusting their PRA and microplanning strategies. Specialized support insocial assessment and participatory planning, serving all seven project sites, would provideadditional guidance.

43. Voluntary Relocation. In four of the project sites voluntary relocation is likely totake place during the project period and will have significant impacts on those who arerelocated (see Table 1). These impacts will have economic, social, and cultural dimensionsand will depend heavily on how such relocation is carried out. The project has developedan agreed policy for voluntary relocation (see Annex 20). PA authorities would developparticipatory relocation plans in response to the wishes of local people and in accordancewith the guidance contained in the Bank's Operational Directive 4.20 and recent GOIguidelines.

44. Tenure Within PAs. A wide array of tenure patterns are also found at each site,particularly for people living within PA boundaries. Some groups of tribal inhabitants(Nagarhole) do not have any tenure rights recognized by the forest department; some haveannual leasehold rights to limited cultivation (frequently not renewed) but no rights overforest products (i.e., most forest settlements); some have rights to certain limited non-timber forest products, but no rights to graze (i.e., tribals in Periyar); some have rights toresidence and grazing, but no rights to NTFP (i.e., Maldharis in Gir); some have rights toresidence, but no rights to any forest produce (i.e., most temple complexes). In manycases where rights are not recognized, customary usage is still tolerated and even explicitlyallowed (i.e., grazing in parts of Gir and Ranthambhore). In many cases, these rights andconcessions are being progressively diminished as the more flexible sanctuary designationsare replaced by national park notification and enforcement increases.

45. Tenure Outside PAs. Outside PA boundaries, tenure issues are also varied. Landsused for community grazing and NTFP collection (especially fuelwood), are variouslyunder the legal authority of the panchayats, the revenue department, the forestdepartment, private corporations (e.g. tea estates), or individual households. Frequently,the usage of these lands and their legal ownership are at variance and overlapping tenureclaims common. Even legal ownership is often a subject of dispute between differentagencies and users. Temporal variations can also occur when private lands change tocommon property during fallow seasons of collective grazing. Tenancy and various formsof resource use by landless households provide an additional dimension to the complicatedtenure patterns.

278 Annex 18

46. Security of Tenure. Tenure issues are central to the project since much of itsthrust is to negotiate a further reduction---or acceptance of the already institutedreduction---in usage of PA resources. To the extent that the microplanning process is ableto build a consensus between each of the stakeholders and tenure claimants, projectinvestments can be carried out with a reasonable degree of tenurial security. However,there will be situations in which measures to increase tenurial security will be needed tomaintain the motivation of stakeholders. Such measures would include issuing governmentorders on resource use rights; transferring forest settlements to revenue villageadministration; standing guarantee for credit collateral; and negotiating agreements forbenefit sharing. To ensure that these tenurial issues are adequately addressed, it will beimportant to carry out the planned social science research program .

47. Participation and Learning. The extent to which these impacts will be positivewill depend on the extent to which the participatory microplanning and implementingprocess is really participatory (See Annex 8). In addition, positive outcome will depend onthe adoption of a continuing learning process, involving all project stakeholders throughboth formal studies and monitoring; perhaps even more important, it will depend on awillingness to trust local people and their knowledge and to allow them to learn throughtheir own failures. The tools to allow local communities to influence the direction of PAmanagement significantly are built into this project to a far greater degree than normallyfound in the forestry or environment sector. Ideally, the ultimate outcome will be largelyup to local communities.

279 Annex 19

Annex 19: Indigenous PeopleCompliance with Bank Operational Directive 4.20

Operational Directive 4.20 Analyses in Annexes That Supplement SAR Main Text

Prerequisites

Full consideration of options Annex 7: paragraphs 5, 10, 11,16preferred by affected indigenous Annex 8 - paragraph 3, 5, 6, 13, 19, 27, 36, 37, Box 2,people

Anticipate adverse trends likely to Annex 7: paragraphs 4a, 5bbe induced by project and identify Annex 8 - paragraphs 5,6,13b, 36,37mitigation measures

Institutions responsible for Annex 7: paragraphs 5, 14interaction with indigenous peoples Annex 8: paragraphs 2 31l 32, Section G (TORs)should involve NGOs with expertise , ,in matters relating to indigenous Annex 9: paragraph 15, first TORpeople Annex 12: TORs relating to microplanning, social assessment,

and multi-state learning and communication

Annex 18 - Table 8 and paragraphs 26-35, 37

Local patterns of social Annex 6 - sections on "People" and "Social Concerns" for each PAorganization, religious beliefs, and Annex 8: paragraphs 13(d), 15, 36-38, 41resource use should be taken intoaccount Annex 9: paragraphs 15

Annex 10 - paragraphs 10-12, 36-39, 41

Annex 18: paragraphs 25-3 5, 41, Table 8

Production systems should be well Annex 7: paragraph 5adapted to the needs and Annex 8 - paragraphs 3,12-14, 23, 27, 28, 30-37, 41 Boxes I and 2environment of indigenous people

Annex 18 paragraphs 27-38, Table 8

Avoid dependency and include Annex 8 paragraphs 13-14, 21-26, 36-37, 42-44, 74management skills training Annex 9 paragraphs 9-10, 12-15

Annex 11: TORs on Microplanning Training

Annex 18: paragraphs 36, 38, 39

Adequacy of preparation and Annex 4follow-up Annex 7: paragraph 8

Annex 8 paragraphs 29, 32. TORs

Annex 11: TORs on Microplanning and Social Assessment

Incremental funding Annex 5, paragraph 4-10

Annex 8 paragraphs 13 (c). 39, 40

280 Annex 19

Elements

Legal framework Annex 1: paragraphs 7, 15

Annex 2, paragraph 8

Annex 7: paragraph 4 (a), l l(d), 13

Annex 8 paragraphs 7-10

Annex 18 paragraphs 30, 39-44

Baseline data Annex 6 in entirety

Annex 7 - TOR for Mapping

Annex 8: paragraphs 11-12, Box 1

Annex 10: 4, 11-23, 51-54, Tables 1-2

Annex 11: TORs on Social Assessment and Reviews

Annex 18 in entirety

Land tenure Annex 7: paragraphs 11, 16, 19(f)

Annex 18: paragraph 12, 31, 43-45

Annex 20

Local participation strategy Annex 7, paragraph 5, 8(f)

Annex 8 in entirety

Annex 10: paragraphs 20(d), 22(e)

Identification of activities that Annex 8 in entiretydraws on indigenous knowledge and Annex 11: TORs on social assessment, microplanning, andqualified technical support feasibility

Annex 18, paragraphs -25-26, Tables 6 and 8

Institutional Capacity Annex 2 in entirety

Annex 7, paragraph 12, 23-28

Annex 8 paragraph 42

Annex 18: paragraph 31-22

Implementation Schedule Annex 16: chart

Monitoring and Evaluation Annex 10 in entirety

Annex 16 in entirety

Detailed Cost Estimates and Detailed project cost estimates (working paper)Financing Plan

281 Annex 20

Annex 20: People in the PAs and Voluntary Relocation1. Current Situation. All protected areas (PAs) have people living within the PAboundaries (see Annex 6 Table 2). Most live in areas where human settlement is allowed.During the past few decades, the creation of the PAs has sometimes caused people livingin the PAs to lose access to resources and precipitated resettlement of tribal people inforest villages in ways that involved little or no participatory decision-making. The projectitself would not cause further loss of living standards; rather, it would help to address andameliorate existing conditions where people have already experienced losses and where,without the project, people would face very limited and bleak options. At the same time,population pressures are adversely affecting PA conservation. To address and ameliorateexisting conditions, state forest departments (SFDs) and some PA residents have starteddiscussions on the possibility of participatory, voluntary relocation. The ProjectPreparation Facility supported some prtliminary reviews by NGOs of these discussions.The discussions and NGO reviews indicate a strong demand for relocation from somehouseholds, but the number of potential participants is not yet clear. Initial impressionsindicate that some 1-4 percent of the 87,000 people living within the PAs would beinterested in participating in resettlement.

2. Definition of "Voluntary". The project would provide support on anexperimental basis for a participatory process to plan and implement "voluntaryrelocation". Relocation under the project would be "voluntary" in the sense that it wouldbe driven by the wishes of each local household. Planning would take place in the contextof options that would not involve relocation. The project would draw on lessons of bestpractice that are outlined in Bank's Operational Directives on Involuntary Resettlementand Indigenous People. Voluntary relocation does not require strict scheduling because itis driven by the wishes of local people rather than by an external "event" (which is whatdrives involuntary resettlement). Voluntary relocation under the project would not betimebound; there was no need to prepare a resettlement plan prior to appraisal. During theproject, people may move at different times -- at their own pace. Not all households in acommunity may move. In some cases, partial and/or gradual relocation may be subject toenvironmental considerations outlined below in paragraph 6. However, the success of theproject does not depend on timebound or complete evacuation of people from PAs.Indeed a major objective is to foster the cooperation of people who would not be moving.Voluntary relocation would be consistent with the legal covenant that the project projectwould not erode the customary tenure rights of tribals living within the protected areas.

3. Reasons to Avoid Involuntary Resettlement. Involuntary resettlement would:

(a) Be unnecessary on ecological grounds, or on other grounds related toprotected area management or project activities during the project period

(b) Conflict with the project strategy of reducing discord and increasingcollaboration between protected areas and local people

(c) Risk inadvertent erosion of customary land rights of indigenous peopleliving within the protected areas

282 Annex 20

(d) Conflict with usual Bank practice not to involuntarily resettle tribals fromprotected areas.

4. Relocation Strategy. The project's people-driven, participatory approach torelocation would provide win-win solutions to problems faced by local people and PAsand establish a model approach applicable to other PAs throughout India. This strategywould enable the project to meet the demands of local people who are eager to move.Relocation would be to lands on the periphery of the PAs, rather than to distant lands andthere would be no involuntary relocation. All relocation planning and implementationassociated with PA management or other project objectives, regardless of financing,would be consistent with Bank guidelines, and implementation would require prior Bankapproval. The project would help state and national governments to carefully plan andimplement relocation activities so that they do not inadvertently cause long-term hardship,impoverishment, and environmental damage. It would provide an incentive-basedmechanism to reduce population pressures. The strategy would also support options forpeople in the PAs not wishing to relocate.

5. Documenting Voluntary Nature of Relocation. The microplanning supportteams of PA personnel, collaborating NGOs, and villagers, with the support of relocationspecialists, would facilitate the consultation and decision making on relocation. In thesecases, microplanning would provide an opportunity for local people to consider therelocation option, and if they wished, to plan the relocation activities. The support teamswould carefully document the participatory planning process and content of local people'sdecisions on relocation. For relocation to proceed, this documentation would need toinclude unambiguous confirmation that decisions on relocation met the definition of"voluntary" outlined in paragraph 2 above. Both the independent review and the Bankreview of relocation plans would give close attention to this documentation.

6. Concerns Involving Gradual and/or Partial Relocation. Forest Departmentshave several concerns about the potential risks of gradual and/or partial relocation, e.g.,enlarged areas of human habitation in the vicinity of the PAs, increased transit of peoplebetween old and new communities, sustainability of groups decisions to relocate, etc. Theconsultation process on voluntary relocation would need to consider and address theseconcerns wherever they exist. Possible outcomes of such consideration would vary by siteand might include: (i) consensus decisions by communities to move together at one time,(ii) reciprocal commitments by existing and/or relocated communities that would addresspotential adverse impacts on biodiversity (e.g., consolidation of holdings within existingcommunity), (iii) decisions by PA managers to not support relocation because of potentialadverse impacts, or (iv) development of a relocation package so desirable that it wouldhave a high likelihood of enticing additional participation in the near future.

7. Support for Relocation. The funds provided for voluntary relocation would beadditional to standard GOI and state allocations, and would be used to developparticipatory operational plans consistent with GOI and IDA guidelines. They would aidhouseholds in the transitional period, provide investment funds for alternative livelihoods,provide implementation support services, and support measures fostering culturalcontinuity. Because the number of potential participants is not clear, project cost estimatesfor relocation are extremely tentative. The project costs for relocation would be subject to

283 Annex 20

major revision at the mid-project review, after consultation with potential participants(consistent with Bank standards) has taken place.

8. Support for Those Electing to Stay During Project Period. The project wouldinclude special efforts to identify and provide village ecodevelopment investments forpeople who do not wish to relocate during the project period. The eligibility criteria forvillage ecodevelopment investments (see Annex 8) would limit the range of optionsavailable to many of the people living within the PAs. Some of the people resident in thePAs are non-cultivating tribals without documented land titles and in these cases landbased investments would usually not be possible. Examples of possible investments forthese people include training and equipment for job and livelihood opportunities related tocontractual PA management activities and ecotourism enterprises. People living within thePAs have felt the burden of PA establishment most heavily. It is important to not excludethese people from access to village ecodevelopment support, and to carefully considertheir special situation during the negotiation of the reciprocal commitments. Although thevalue per household of village ecodevelopment investment provided to people remainingwithin the PA would be equivalent to those living in the periphery, in terms of unit costsper household it would amount to only a fraction of the support provided to peoplechoosing to relocate.

9. Legal Setting. Most people living within the PAs reside in (a) legally excludedenclaves or (b) forest villages within parts of the PAs that are legally classified assanctuaries or forest reserves. Section 24 (2) (c) of the Wildlife Act permits "thecontinuance of any right of any person in or over any land within the limits of thesanctuary", and similar legal provisions allowing the continuation of rights exist for forestreserves. In the Palamau Tiger Reserve, 630 people live in forest villages within asanctuary, in an area that is an "intended national park". According to Section 35 (4) (a)of the Wildlife Act, after a declaring that it intends to establish a national park in a specificarea, the Government would notify the area as a national park after "all claims.... havebeen disposed of by the State Government". Hence national park notification dependsupon a resolution of rights which is not time-bounid In Palamau, the state government hasnot decided how it will resolve the claims nor does has it set a deadline for this resolutionof claims and the legal notification. According to section 35 (3) and (5) of the WildlifeAct, once a national park has received notification, alteration of boundaries requires aresolution of the state legislature, and no continuance of rights over land within the park isallowed. In Nagarhole National Park, 7,100 people live in forest villages within a notifiednational park and 1,200 people in Ranthambhore Tiger Reserve live "on the boundary" ofa notified national park.

10. Government Approach. While legally state governments cannot give permissionfor people to continue to live within a notified national park, in practice, most stategovernments have addressed the problem of resident communities pragmatically. Theyhave not enforced the full rigor of the law because it would be socially and politicallydifficult. During the past decade, state governments with people in intended and notifiednational parks and core parts of sanctuaries have provided incentives for people to moveto the buffer or peripheral areas of the PAs. Incentives have included support for housing,village infrastructure, land and irrigation. However, these past initiatives have not

284 Annex 20

necessarily been "voluntary" according to the definition outlined in paragraph 2 above.Project preparation involved extensive dialogue on the opportunity the project provides todevelop a participatory, voluntary approach. Government officials have agreed to use theproject to experiment with this approach.

11. Build on Established Strategy. Recent Bank-financed state forestry projects inIndia have established a strategy that there would be no involuntary relocation of people inthe PA undertaken by SFDs. The project would build upon this strategy and activelydevelop a program of participatory, voluntary relocation that could serve as a model forother PAs. In addition to developing a model program of voluntary relocation, the projectwould address issues of people in PAs under a program to strengthen PA managementplans, which would consider possible rationalization of PA boundaries (see Annex 7), andunder the research program (see Annex 10). For example, some of the people withinNagarhole live on a periphery that might be excluded from the park by redefinition ofboundaries, and the PA management planning and research activities would consider theenvironmental feasibility of this option.

12. The following assurances have been obtained from the GOI and participatingstates and were reconfirmed during negotiations: that the GOSs would:

(a) In pursusing the objectives of the Project, not carry out any involuntaryresettlement for any people resident within the PAs

(b) Ensure that any proposals for voluntary relocation would be prepared andimplemented in accordance with criteria agreed with IDA and after priorapproval of IDA

(c) For people who opt to remain in the PAs, prepare an indicative list ofappropriate village ecodevelopment investments acceptable to the Bank,which meets project criteria, and include these people in the villageecodevelopment program

(d) Adopt an explicit strategy and plan for sustainable encroachment controlacceptable to IDA before making proposals for programs of voluntaryrelocation.

Non-project activities, including those related to resettlement, would be subject to theregional impacts covenant (see paragraph 17 below).

13. Criteria. The proposals would follow the strategy and guidelines outlined in thisAnnex, including

(a) Consistency with the project interpretation of "voluntary"

(b) Consistency with the Bank's Operational Directive 4.20 (IndigenousPeople) prior to execution

(c) Consistency with best practice outlined in the Bank's Operational Directive4.30 (Involuntary Resettlement) prior to execution

(d) Development of participatory operational plans with the assistance ofindependent NGOs or consultants

285 Annex 20

(e) Prior to execution, review of plans by the Bank on a case-by-case basis, toensure consistency with strategy and guidelines outlined in this Annex

(f) Prior to execution, correction of any inconsistencies in plans identified byBank review

(g) Inclusion of an independent program to monitor voluntary relocation

(h) Correction of problems identified by monitoring

(i) Documentation of conformity with the above points by provision oftransparent, credible, and verifiable information.

Execution of relocation would include proceeding with any land acquisition alreadyunderway and the initiation of any new land acquisition.

14. The state governments confirmed during appraisal and again at negotiations thatsince the November 1994 preappraisal, they have not acquired land from current residentswithin the project PAs, provided compensation to them, nor built housing for them, orotherwise carried out activities that could be considered implementation of a resettlementplan that has not been reviewed and approved by the Bank. The Bank decision to excludethe Similipal Tiger Reserve from the project demonstrates the importance that the Bankattaches to these assurances.

15. Investment in Support of Voluntary Relocation. In providing supplementarysupport for voluntary relocation from core to periphery areas the project would enablestates to develop model policies in accordance with recent GOI guidelines and Bank ODsfor assisting families desiring to move. It is currently anticipated that Buxa, Gir,Nagarhole, and Ranthambhore would use these funds, but Palamau and Periyar could alsoparticipate if they wished. These funds, which would be additional to GOI and stateallocations, would be used to:

(a) Develop participatory operational plans with the help of qualified NGOs orconsultants

(b) Provide additional funds to support households in maintaining theirlivelihoods in the transitional period (3 years) through employment, assetcreation, and training

(c) Support NGO services carrying out voluntary relocation activities

(d) Maintain cultural continuity by modest support of such actions asrelocation of tribal shrines and community activity centers, cultural events,passing on of indigenous knowledge, etc.

(e) Provide consultancy on plan assessment.

286 Annex 20

Comments on Relocation DiscussionsProtected Area CommentsBuxa, West Bengal One forest village in reserve (pop. 275) is likely to choose voluntary relocationGir, Gujarat Only limited numbers of people in nesses (population 2540) expected to participate

in relocation during project period.Nagarhole, Karnataka Prior to project, PA staff prepared a proposal to relocate 6145 people. With project

emphasis on voluntary participation, only a portion of the total numbers areanticipated to participate. PPF included preliminary study.

Palamau, Bihar There are three forest villages in intended NP (pop 630) where relocation haspreviously been discussed but is not being pursued. PPF included preliminary study.

Pench, Madhya Pradesh No settlements in proposed national park; resettlement completed in early 1994,prior to project preappraisal.

Periyar, Kerala No plans to relocate anvone.Ranthambhore, Rajasthan There are 4 villages on boundarv of declared NP (pop 1210) where relocation has

been under discussion, but only a portion of the total numbers are likely toparticipate.

16. Government and Private Colonies. Government and private colonies within PAsinclude major installations such as hydropower, irrigation, and electricity boards, tourismcomplexes, railway complexes, mines, industries, and places of religious importance. Theproject design incorporates PA management planning activities to determine impact ofsuch installations on biodiversity and the formulation of policies and agreements tomitigate serious disturbances. In the case of government enclosures, with their largegroups of staff and laborers, it will be useful to assess if the numbers resident within thePA boundaries are necessary, and whether there is scope to negotiate with the relevantentities their reduction or relocation.

17. Encroachment Control. With or without proposals for voluntary relocation, stategovernments would take steps to ensure that activities outside the PA would notundermine effective encroachment control.

18. Regional Impacts. The project strategy for relocation would not necessarily applyto non project activities (e.g., Kutku irrigation dam in Bihar, see Annex 6). To address thistype of situation, assurances were obtained at negotiations that activities outside thescope of the project would not undermine effective biodiversity conservation within theproject PAs, and would not undermine the implementation of the ecodevelopment strategyin and around the PAs (see Annex 7).

19. Operational Directive on Involuntary Resettlement. The Operational Directiveon Involuntary Resettlement (4.30) provides useful guidelines and principles to befollowed in any proposals for resettlement, even if this is voluntary. Examples of theseO.D. recommendations include, inter alia,:

(a) The preparation of a relocation plan that attempts to improve or at leastrestore living standards, earning capacity and production levels of thedisplaced people: It should include provision to

(i) assist the displaced people in the relocation move and providesupport during the transition period in the new site

287 Annex 20

(ii) assist the displaced people in their efforts to improve their formerliving standards, income earning capacity, and production levels, orat least to restore them. The project has provided for supplementarysupport in order to improve their incomes and resources

(b) Involving both settlers and hosts in resettlement activities: In designing therelocation plan, special emphasis would be placed on:

(i) community participation in planning and implementing it

(ii) enabling resettlers to maintain cultural continuity through buildingon existing social and cultural institutions. The project provides forsupplementary measures to assist community in relocating culturalstructures and maintaining desired cultural traditions

(iii) measures to integrate re-settlers socially and economically into hostcommunities so as to minimize adverse impacts on the hostcommunities, if applicable

(c) Improve or restore economic base: Resettlement plans should be based ona strategy to improve or at least restore the economic base for thoserelocated. The content of the resettlement plans, should normally include astatement of objectives and policies and other features

(d) Valuation and compensation for land and other assets affected by theproject. Prior to relocation, people would be provided a compensationpackage of support for housing, village infrastructure, land, and irrigationto compensate for lost assets, equivalent to full replacement value of allassets to be foregone, including usufruct and customary tenure.Compensation would be facilitated by:

(i) paying special attention to the adequacy of legal arrangementsconcerning land title, registration, and site occupation to ensuresecure rights (e.g., leasehold, full title), to ensure that security oftenure is at least equivalent to what would be forgone, and toensure that there is no erosion of customary tenure of tribals

(ii) publicizing among affected people to be displaced the laws andregulations governing relocation and compensation

(iii) development of mechanisms to prevent illegal encroachers to takeadvantage of such benefits and to prevent nonresidents moving intothose areas vacated

(iv) establishment of a simple grievance mechanism to resolve anydisputes that may arise.

20. Operational Directive on Indigenous People. The objective of the OperationalDirective on Indigenous People (4.20) is to ensure that indigenous peoples do not sufferadverse effects during development processes and that the social and economic benefitsthey receive are in harmony with their cultural preferences. It is based on a strategy ofinformed participation of affected indigenous peoples through methods such as direct

288 Annex 20

consultation, incorporation of indigenous knowledge into the project, and use ofexperienced specialists.

21. To be consistent with this OD's guidance, on-going participatory project planning(e.g. PA management planning, village ecodevelopment microplanning, and voluntaryrelocation planning) will need to take into account the following information needs:

(a) Legal status of affected groups, including existing rights, concessions,access to resources, and legal protection

(b) Baseline data on settlement patterns, social structure, incomes sourcesresource use, relationship to others, etc.

(c) Land tenure, both legally registered and customary

(d) The strategy for on-going participation in decision-making throughout theproject

(e) Technical identification of development and mitigation activities

(f) The adequacy of institutional capacity to deal with indigenous peoples

(g) Methods of monitoring impacts on indigenous peoples, includingparticipatory monitoring.

22. The plans developed should:

(a) Be culturally appropriate, and only decided after full consideration ofoptions preferred by indigenous people

(b) Anticipate all adverse trends and have developed a mitigation plan

(c) Ensure adequate institutional skills, including those available togovernment, local communities, and NGOs

(d) Take into account tribal social life and religious beliefs

(e) Support production systems adapted to the needs and environment ofindigenous people

(f) Avoid dependency through transferring management skills

(g) Cover all other guidance outlined in OD 4.20.

Draft Job Description for Relocation Plan ReviewsReports to: PA Manager

Objective: To assess proposed voluntary relocation plans for their conformity with the projectstrategy on voluntary relocation, with World Bank Operation Directives onresettlement and indigenous people and GOI guidelines on resettlement associatedwith PAs.

To make field visits to confirm that plans accurately reflect people's perceptions,accurately assess relocation sites, and otherwise reflect reality.

To recommend actions for meeting the above guidelines.

289 Annex 20

To assist in monitoring activities associated with relocation.

Responsibilities: Review the number of households interested in considering relocation.

Review the system of land tenure and transfer.

Review the system of land acquisition. including procedures related to thevaluation of land and other assets acquired, and the potential adverse impacts of aweak land tenure on land acquisition procedures and compensation eligibility.

Review specific social, economic and cultural loss of the community facingresettlement, especially that related to loss of access to forest resources, andsuggest ways to minimize or mitigate these losses.

Assess women's role in their families, community and in the subsistence economyand also the impacts of relocation on them and in the process suggest ways andmeans to help them regain or improve their role.

Assess the affected people's perception regarding issues related to land acquisition,compensation, resettlement, relocation site, the project, strategies for economicrehabilitation, and its benefits to them. Assess the extent of consent to relocation.Assess extent of participation in planning.

Assess the relocation site and proposed infrastructure for cultural and socialcompatibility, suggest measures to improve facilities, suggest measures to ensureparticipatory implementation, and suggcst opportunities for socioeconomicintegration of the displaced peoples with the host community.

Identify Government development schemes and welfare services in the relocationsite, suggest linkages to complement the package of benefits offered to affectedpeoples, and assess the impact of the linkages on the host community.

Assess the proposed compensation and entitlement package for resettlement andrehabilitation, including land-for-land, transition phase support, productive assetsfor self-employment, and other means for income generation and socialinfrastructure.

Assess the extent to which participation in relocation would be voluntary in thesense that it would be driven by the wishes of local people.

Design a participatory plan to monitor the relocation process.

Provide specialist services required for relocation monitoring.

Duration: Initial review: three to six months; thereafter on retainer basis to assist withmonitoring

Qualifications: Organization or individual with professional experience in resettlement issues;participatory planning experience; prior experience with World Bank projectsdesirable; strong writing skills.

291 Annex 21

Annex 21: Economic Analysis

Overall Benefits

1. The project would conserve globally significant biodiversity in the seven PAs anddevelop capacity for increased conservation in the future. The project would supportmutually dependent activities that in combination would reduce negative environmentalimpacts of local people on biodiversity, and increase protection of biodiversity in the PAs.In the project areas, over the long term, the project would help to slow, halt, or possiblyeven reverse the current declines in:

(a) the area and degree of ecosystem richness, complexity, and diversity

(b) the presence, productivity, and abundance of significant species

(c) the extent of regional connectivity

(d) the extent of nutrient recycling and rate of regeneration

(e) the control of weeds and exotic species.

The project would also increase the capacity of government officials to manage PAseffectively, addressing not only internal operations but also proposed and existingperiphery and regional activities that impact the PAs. It would increase the capacity oflocal communities to play a positive role in PA management. The project would alsoincrease the support of local people for PA conservation. It would develop stakeholderconsensus on conservation-related strategies. The project would create processes andorganizational frameworks that could be expanded to other ecologically significant areas.In addition to these overall benefits that derive from the total package, each projectcomponent would produce specific outputs and benefits described below.

Outputs from Improved PA Management

2. Improving PA Planning Processes and Building Capacity (averagingUS$150,000 base costs per PA). Strengthening of PA management skills and the regionalplanning and regulation activities would:

(a) produce a comprehensive and carefully designed work program forprotecting and managing ecosystems and habitats of the project PAscovering the last three years of the program

(b) broaden the focus of existing PA management planning capacity to morecomprehensively cover ecological considerations (e.g., boundaries, buffers,and ecosystems), PA-related concerns of local people, and strategies forrelevant government programs and policies (e.g., research, environmentaleducation, ecotourism)

(c) ensure compliance with the project covenant that activities outside thescope of the project would not undermine effective biodiversityconservation in the project PAs and

292 Annex 21

(d) develop a replicable model for more effectively integrating PA concernsinto regional planning and regulation processes.

3. Protecting and Managing Ecosystems and Habitats (averaging US$1,680,000base costs per PA) would:

(a) restore ecosystem and habitat through works (e.g., weed eradication, soiland water conservation, domestic/exotic animal controls), both thoseneeded on an urgent basis during the first two years of the project, andthose identified through the updated PA management plans for the lastthree years of the project, providing the foundation for normal plant andanimal succession in the future

(b) improve fire control, increase the effectiveness of anti-poaching efforts,reduce the extent to which wild animals stray out of the PA

(c) reduce the negative impacts of visitors, in accordance withrecommendations of ecological research and ecotourism strategies

(d) increase employment and byproduct sharing opportunities for local peoplein PA management activities

4. Upgrading PA Amenities for Field Staff (averaging US$150,000 base costs perPA) would improve staff morale and increase the amount of time staff spend in the field,thereby increasing staff efficiency and effectiveness.

Outputs from Village Ecodevelopment

5. Microplanning and Implementation Support (ranging from US$1,500 pergroup to US$9,200 per group, depending on group size and local cost parameters,covering a three to four year period for each group, for about 800 groups) would:

(a) provide the basis for conflict resolution by identifying and definingreciprocal commitments through an innovative and replicable participatorynegotiation process

(b) strengthen the capacity of communities to obtain support services and tonegotiate with outsiders (e.g. traders, outside groups who use PAresources)

(c) secure an equitable distribution of benefits, and ensure participation ofwomen, tribals and other disadvantaged people in community decisionsabout resource distribution and investment selection

(d) preserve and apply traditional knowledge systems in resource managementand

(e) increase the capacity of local communities to play a positive role in PAprotection.

6. Implementing Reciprocal Commitments and Associated Investments(US$300 base costs per household (including preinvestment for credibility and villagercontribution), or ranging in size from US$2,400 to US$67,500 per group, depending on

293 Annex 21

the number of households in each group, usually covering a three year investment periodfor each group). The commitments would involve about 71,000 households, although dueto phasing not all households would receive the full three year investment allocation. Thecommitments and investments would:

(a) slow, halt, or possibly even reverse unsustainable resource uses by localpeople (e.g., grazing, fuel wood removal, NTFP removal, poaching)

(b) partially offset negative economic and cultural impacts of PAs on localpeople (especially vulnerable groups such as tribals and women) and

(c) help enable local people to meet their basic needs in an environmentallysustainable manner.

7. Special Programs. This part of the project would:

(a) Support joint forest management of about 700 ha in two PAs (at aboutUS$342 base costs per ha annually beyond the scope permitted within thestandard village ecodevelopment budget constraint, thereby reversing theecological degradation of areas surrounding the national parks andsanctuaries

(b) provide compensatory alternative livelihood opportunities and culturalcontinuity activities to people in the PAs who have been most severelyaffected by PA establishment and reduce population pressures withinnational parks and sanctuaries; to do this use voluntary relocation(estimated total base costs of less than US $440,000, averaging US$1180base costs per participating household, of which about 50% would be spenton support services for consultation, participatory planning, andmonitoring, and 50% spent on direct compensatory support)

(c) increase flexibility by providing discretionary funds (limited to 18% of thetotal investments associated with reciprocal commitments) forsupplemental investments to be identified by PA officials and agreed bylocal people that would be made outside national parks and sanctuaries,that would benefit PA biodiversity conservation and local people.

Outputs from Environmental Education, Impact Monitoring and Research

8. Environmental Education and Visitor Management (averaging US$180,000base costs per PA) would:

(a) produce an explicit strategies for environmental education/awareness andvisitor management ecotourism activities focused on the project PAs

(b) expand public understanding of and support for conservation of the projectPAs.

(c) reduce adverse impacts of visitors

(d) develop new incentives for local people to support PA conservation.

294 Annex 21

9. Impact Monitoring and Research (averaging US$510,000 base costs per PA).This part of the project would provide a factual basis for decision making. It would:

(a) produce an explicit strategy for impact monitoring and research on theproject PAs

(b) provide both accountability and a basis for improving project design on anongoing basis (through the project period by measuring project impacts andeffectiveness, comparing with initial expectations, and recommending

appropriate adjustments )

(c) provide critical ecological and sccioeconomic information, includinginformation on cause-effect relationships, needed to improve guidelines,policies, and strategies for PA management and village ecodevelopment inthe project areas and

(d) increase contractual monitoring and research capacity.

Outputs from Overall Project Management

10. Overall project management (about US$340,000 per PA for PA-level projectadministration; US$860,000 for basic national level project administration; US$100,000for translation and publicity; US$140,000 for national policy and strategic frameworkstudies; US$1,060,000 for national-level implementation guidelines and capacitydevelopment; and US$830,000 for national-level implementation review). Suchmanagement would assist in the integration, timeliness, dissemination, quality,accountability, and adaptive management of project implementation by providingadministrative, financial, communication, technical, and review services:

Outputs from Preparation of Future Projects

11. Project preparation (averaging US$780,000 per project for three projects --budgetbased on past preparation requirements of large scale biodiversity projects) would improvebiodiversity conservation prospects in other areas by providing a portfolio of biodiversityproject proposals eligible for GEF, IDA and other donor consideration.

Measurement of Benefits

12. The feasibility analysis and justification of this project is not based on quantifiedfinancial and economic rates of return. Currently available methodology for quantifyingthe biodiversity benefits of this project would result in estimates of relative weights forvarious benefits that would not be consistent with judgments by specialists. Therefore,such quantification would not provide a useful basis for decision-making. The projectdesign does incorporate a process approach to the analysis of village ecodevelopmentinvestments' financial feasibility, a process which also incorporates technical and socialconsiderations. The small size and variation in site conditions of village ecodevelopment

This would include identifying negative impacts of PA establishment and reciprocal commitmentson vulnerable groups, especially tribals and women, and developing appropriate mitigationmeasures.

295 Annex 21

investments would make detailed site specific feasibility review prohibitively expensive. Toensure cost effective feasibility assessment, selection of investments within a fixed budgetconstraint, the requirement that beneficiaries contribute their own resources, andmonitoring would give local people incentive to seek expert advice where necessary andto take responsibility for selecting investments that maximize their well-being (within theeligibility constraints). The project would use written guidelines (e.g., Annex 8) andspecialist review to address generic issues, ensure that feasibility requirements are met,and provide experimental learning and adaptive management through the dynamicplanning, monitoring and adjustment processes.

Alternatives, Public Sector Role and Fiscal Impact

13. Consideration of Alternatives. The project PA management planning and villageecodevelopment microplanning provide for continuing, participatory consideration ofalternative investments options (e.g., works to restore ecosystems, livelihood investmentsto replace unsustainable resource uses) and their comparative costs and benefitsthroughout the project period.

14. Public Sector and Non-governmental Roles. The project directly addressesenvironmental externalities that require public sector initiatives. However, the project alsomaximizes private sector involvement by (a) using an incentive mechanism to create apartnership with local people for conservation, (b) developing ecotourism strategies thatinclude careful consideration of private sector roles, and (c) relying on contractual servicesrather than an expansion in government staff The project design allocates substantialresponsibilities and resources to non-governmental entities, and supplies a small amountsupplemental resources directly to government in order to build capacity. Of the totalproject costs, about US$31 million (46 percent) would flow to EDCs and US$17 million(25 percent) to NGOs, academic institutions, and other contracted specialists. Most of theUS$2 million PPF (3 percent of total project costs) is also flowing to NGOs, academicinstitutions, and EDCs. Project expenditures flowing to government would compriseabout US$17 million (25% of the total project costs) for works (that would be laborintensive and would employ local people), goods, travel, salaries of existing staff andoperation and maintenance.

15. Cost Recovery. Cost recovery of the village ecodevelopment investment fundswould not be appropriate. The Government would provide the funds, not for the purposeof development itself, but rather as an incentive for local people to forgo use of PAresources. Furthermore, project funds would only partially compensate for local people'stotal socioeconomic losses that stem from the original establishment of the PAs.

16. Fiscal Impact. The project design includes several provisions such as budgetconstraints, use of state budget norms, required investment contributions from localpeople, a high degree of transparency, and extensive implementation review to keepgovernment expenditures at reasonable levels. The project PAs were selected in partbecause the costs of protection were thought to be low relative to other PAs withcomparable biodiversity values and needs for strengthened protection. Projectexpenditures would represent only an insignificant fraction of the total state forestdepartments investment budgets. Incremental operation and maintenance expenditures are

296 Annex 21

minimal. The net fiscal impact is kept as small as possible and the concessional financingof GEF and IDA makes this impact even smaller. The project itself is completelyaffordable. However, the project does represent a significant increase both in the stateforest department expenditures on wildlife and in the total development ("plan") budgetflowing through the MOEF. Furthermore, large scale replication without new sources offinancing would raise issues of long-term fiscal impacts. To address these long-termconcerns, the project includes studies at both the PA level and the national level onfinancial sustainability and related topics such as ecotourism (see Annexes 7 and 11).

Risk Analysis

17. This project is not for the faint-hearted. It has significant risks. Nevertheless, theproject should proceed because of the importance of conserving biodiversity, the criticalrole of local people in conservation, and the potential of this project to provide thefoundation for long-term solutions to the challenging problems that India faces.

18. Pressures External to the Project. The pressures of population growth, povertyand commercial interests may undermine project efforts, at least in some of the PAs. Whilethe project includes activities, institutional mechanisms, and a legal covenant designed toaddress regional issues, it is not possible to fully address these risks within the projectdesign.

19. Dangers of Unrealistic Expectations. The status of biodiversity is likely tocontinue to decline in the project areas. It would be unrealistic to expect the project tohave an immediate impact or to be able single-handedly to completely halt biodiversitydegradation. Similarly, it would be unrealistic to expect that the project would be able tocompletely redress past negative impacts of the PAs on local people. Furthermore,biologists and social scientists have different perspectives and agendas that are sometimesimpossible to fully reconcile. The project and financiers face significant risks of beingassociated with and blamed for negative trends and unmet needs, even if the projectsucceeds in slowing the decline and addressing some needs. To address these risks, projectobjectives clearly emphasize "reduction in" not "elimination of' negative impacts, projectpreparation has included extensive efforts to communicate the project objectives, andmonitoring assessment criteria would further specify realistic expectations.

20. Extensive Time and Commitment Required to Achieve Participation andTrust. The participatory emphasis is new and will take time. Risks involve:

(a) insufficient state government staff commitment to local participatorydecision-making; and

(b) insufficient trust of local communities, disadvantaged groups and NGOs ingovernment initiatives.

To encourage sustained state government commitment to participation, the project wouldallocate financing annually according to a review of work plans and progress reports andavoiding a "blueprint" approach. To facilitate a gradual increase in trust, the project woulduse participatory planning processes; include careful, comprehensive, and transparentmonitoring of social considerations, and assign important roles for NGOs.

297 Annex 21

21. Limitations in Technical Implementation Capacity. India has a limited supplyof technical expertise. Both the Bank and India have limited experience with process-oriented project design. Appraisal assessments of implementation capacity have helpeddetermine project scope, and detailed documentation provides guidance on projectprocesses.

22. Inadequate Management Support. Potential risks include:

(a) weaknesses in motivation and qualifications of project staff,

(b) delays in bureaucratic processes involving flow of funds;

(c) cumbersome logistics in arranging and processing contracts; and

(d) poor assessments of project performance and/or poor use of assessments toadjust project design.

The detailed specification of organizational responsibilities, administrative structures,staffing plans, contracting arrangements, agreed performance indicators, and ongoingplanning and adjustment processes would help to ensure adequate management support.Activities funded by the Project Preparation Facility prior to negotiations furtherdemonstrate that sufficient management capacity exists.

2l____________ Risk Rating by Components

Assumption Over- PA Vill Env Mon. Proj Fut Risk Minimizationall Man Ecod Ed & Man Proj Measure

Res

External Pressures: med med med low low low low Project activities,The pressures of institutionalpopulation growth, mechanisms, and apoverty and legal covenant thatcommercial interests would address regionalwill not undermine issues and impacts ofproject efforts non-project activities.

Political med med med low low low low Clear emphasis inExpectations: The to to to project objectives onproject and high high high "reduction in" notfinanciers will not "elimination of'be associated with negative impacts,and blamed for extensive efforts tonegative trends and communicate the projectunmet needs, and objectives, specificationwill be able to of realistic expectationshandle the different in monitoringperspectives and assessment criteria, andagendas of biologists inclusion of conflictand social scientists resolution mechanisms.

2Likelihood that critical assumption will not be valid.

298 Annex 21

3Risk Rating by Components

Assumption Over- PA Viil Env [Mon. Proj Fut Risk Minimizationall Man Ecod Ed & Man Proj Measure

._ __ __ Res

Participation and med high med low low med low annual allocation ofTrust: Government project financingstaff will be according to a review ofcommited to local work plans and progressparticipatory reports and avoiding adecision-making "blueprint" approach;and local use of participatoryconununities, I planning processes;disadvantaged including careful,groups and NGOs . comprehensive, andwill trust the | transparent monitoringgovernment of social considerations;initiatives of project and assignment of

important roles forI__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _N G O s

Implementation med low med iow high med high Project scopeCapacity. Project I determined by appraisalwill have adequate i I assessments oftechnical expertise implementation capacit;and develop provision of guidanceoperational skills on project processesneeded to implement I through detailedprocess-oriented documentationproject design. _

Management med low med low med nmed high Detailed specification ofSupport Project I organizationalmanagers will be | I responsibilities,able to process I i administrativecontracts, structures, staffingadminister fund plans, contractingflow, and handle arrangements,performance review performance indicators,efficiently and and ongoing planningeffectively. I j and adjustment

processes. Also usingPPF to demonstrate thatsufficient management

I ____________ _ I_ _ 1_ _ li I | |capacity exists.

3Likelihood that critical assumption will not be valid.

299 Annex 22

Annex 22: Documents Available in Project File

1. Indicative Plan (as revised October 1994)

2. Background Information on Biodiversity in India

3. Ecotourism Working Paper

4. Finalized Staff Plans for Each Protected Area and MOEF

5. Institutional Development Working Paper

6. Detailed Cost Tables

IBRD 27842

INDIA

ECODEVELOPMENT PROJECT WEST D -ding B-uo TigerBENGAL 'a.aiRe eerve ToDispur

BUXA TIGER RESERVE arWEST BENGAL 0 100 200 300 t,j

BUXA TIGER RESERVE BOUNDARY KILOMETERSm SANCTUARY C OBaIurghat

| j | CORE AREA/PROPOSED NATIONAL PARK tRESERVE FORESTS -t

ROADS

-------- RA LROADS Ingrabozar 0 t--) tTo T.Bahormpur j To Dhakka

VILLAGES/VILLAGE ENCLAVES Aurongabodi

* FOREST REST HOUSES

-' '- STATE BOUNDARY

- ' ~ INTERNATIONAL BOUNDARY P,ruliaTo Raipur Haorao * CALCUTTA

Buxa Tiger Reserve is situated a northern West Bengal s Jalpoiguri district, onthe berder with Bthtan and the state of Assom It covers an area of 761 krn

2,

with a core zone of 314 5 ki2

designated as sanctuary t 1 t7 km2 proposed -fnationa park)

0 S tO ID I To Bhubaneshwar

KILOMETERS

Thandnrds. nior ,evem,uov and anyiHou B H U T A N

Creep any ndgievt an the legau nxe Dusr or or5t Houser on

_aoscn o r |setoc o! suc neud;s

v-A Sou th R1vidkhasYcU 1996

{ ~~~~~- ~~Godad Iar;

JALPAIGURI DISTRICT J t\ /,ho.m on th,, .. p do r.t -mply, on 0,e po I of The W-rld B-n _ G-op an-uge7 l}telgl^auso n el ry o nend--smen c,r ,-cpf-nc, of-suh anr

JULY 1 996

IBRD 27843

INDIA T

ECODEVELOPMENT PROJECTGIR NATIONAL PARK AND SANCTUARY - 7 Paianpir:J 1 .

GUJARAT g Bhu; - Mahesana oaBhuio~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~--

*,i ,GANDH1NAGAR RatlorGIR WILDLIFE SANCTUARY BOUNDARY Ahmadabod

Surkndranar-GIR NATIONAL PARK BOUNDARY KJ,eda oGdhrc-

'-i- CORE AREA olt Yadodart

| Z |BUFFER AREA

ROADS Ban~(~~ ROADS ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ / oA m i--- .7~~~~~~~~~~~thharuch

RAILROADS }agdh G, 0 amre P / Nura- ' To

TEMPLES - cd Soncrucuu9 Jalgaon

A NESS Ahwak

O SELECTED REVENUE VILLAGES ON GUJARAT ju Volso$ ?PERIPHERY OF SANCTUARY SILVASSA

* FOREST SETTLEMENT VILLAGES 0 100 200 300

'i) TALUKA HEADQUARTERS KILOMEIERS To Bomboy

- - - - DIVISION BOUNDARY

Gir National Park and Sanctuary is located in the Kathiawar Peninsula inSaurashtra, Gujorat. The entire Protected Area covers 1 412 km

2oF which

258 km2

is National Park and 1,154 km2

is Gir Wildlife Sanctuary.

v15AXt z@ ~~~~~ ~~~DHARI LMari'pur 2g )*Hasnapu rv

MENDARDA rp Sattadliar OM andia ( /O Natalia Kr, sa ~-

,¢ Jambuthala /g * AKz Semard Li -5 l

A Navi-Alavani _Sn AMRELI DISTRICTVanioa _ KacoehX\ ii f -

Ponchali fKamleswar pnes A * Hadola KHAMBHA

(j) MALIA a Dodhi~~~~~~~ruI_ T fU sso Chiklku6

tJ ~~~VodalcO> \ JasadnovTALALA X <st z W h J

,SlO +S,_9 ~~~~~~~~~~Babar;a_ V el~~mw anh;

JUNAGADH DISTRICT

'-. (VERAVAL

-N~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~N

_ KlD~~~~~~INAR - J

0 5 10 15 20 25 /) / Theatirrnolensd.no,intteens andr othr inkfe,,noheI I I I I I J /ont lbnmtpdorntknpty,oeih.eporTheWerddB.nk

KlLOMETERS Arabian Sea t,mw,de o t oP anybreitry, r vy

JULY 1996

IBRD 27844To Nanded

INDIA 1rKARNATAKA r-'ECODEVELOPMENT PROJECT AND GOA d wBdar

NAGARHOLE/RAJIV GANDHI NATIONAL PARK T.Bomory ' To Hyderbad

KARNATAKA T.

NATIONAL PARK BOUNDARY Rotnog- ' R-- ,n_m CORE AREA Blon

NON-CORE AREA T. C,ddaph

TOURISM ZONE

STATE FOREST BOUNDARIES

ROADS 4 s. ,

0 VILLAGES/VILLAGE ENCLAVES T k

-- - - DISTRICT BOUNDARIES Chin g alo n Kor

- - STATE BOUNDARY . H.,

Cowr - N 9rloe Noioa

Nagarhole National Park, in the Kodogu and Mysore districts of Karnataka state, NM ! qrhole Natonacoyers and area of 643 km'

2 with a core zone of 192 km2

and a tourism zone of 0 100 'ParkllDkm

2. I

KILOMETERS

Anechaukur

Siddapur .' , a

DISTRICTKODAGU 0 Nova ctde

DISTRICT a. ti

Doaoboir kpeKILOMETERSThe bo-d-, oor, n d ay

thA. oo thl, nap dono -otipy, o- the port at The Wo-ld Book

KR4LA4 endo-rseet or -rcpte- of s-h ho-dodes

JULY 1996

I

IBRD 27845

INDIA BIHARECODEVELOPMENT PROJECT Lukn Gontok

PAIAMAU TIGER RESERVEBIHARPALAMAU TIGER RESERVE BOUNDARY To , Khagarr

CORE AREA Ar'm BUFFER AREA b ag lpu... PROPOSED BETLA NATIONAL PARK BOUNDARY T.m TOURISM ZONE .m AREA OF THE TIGER RESERVE EXCLUDED FROM THE SANCTUARY D Ha

W AREA OF POTENTIAL INUNDATION FROM KUTKU DAM

ROADS Polamau Tiger; ,

-- | RAILROADS Resere TO

* FOREST REST HOUSES

o VILLAGES/VILLAGE ENCLAVES J1

* RANGE HEADQUARTERS

-_ DISTRICT BOUNDARIES

_ _ STATE BOUNDARIES o Nagpur /

0 100 200 300

KILOMETERSPalamau Tiger reserve, located in the Palamou district insouthwest Bihor, is 1 ,026 km2

in area The core zone Belencompasses 213 km2, 766 km2 of the buffer zone form thePalamasu Wildlife Sanctuary, and 47 km2 is reserve forest.Same 29 km2

of this area is designated as a tourism zone.An area of 225 km

2covering the current core area plus a

portion of the sancturay is the intended area of the proposedBetlo National Park.

f f r \ ~~~~~~Kerhz w o) tR ~~~~PALAAU DISTRICT

41 0~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~4

PRADESH~~~~~~~ ~~~~~ RANCHI DISTRICT

The buduvec coor do--e-i -d uy othe rf-rmusho- &v -Itcp cove - mply on uhe pert o The Worl Beck 1 2 3 4 5Or-p, cc 1 ,dg- ~ escie`gtt socyc-roy c-r-y, I I I J-4d--sm Ptorc-eptc ... clc b-d-ro- KILOMETERS

JULY 1996

IBRD 27846

INDIA r <-,ECODEVELOPMENT PROJECT r i

PENCH TIGER RESERVE T. oKet

MADHYA PRADESH GM. F-/oogh O,,

PENCH TIGER RESERVE BOUNDARY tVd -

CORE AREA/PROPOSED NATIONAL PARK U S-o: OAt

BUFFER AREAS D Dha° 0t Ho-tngoo, ,d

PENCH WILDLIFE SANCTUARY K K a ho Chh Tiger B ,o ho

- RESERVED FORESTS CuiusrT

L___ i PROTECTED FORESTS

SUBMERGENCE AREA To RoHys-dgouo urp

REVENUE AREAS MADHYA p I thonr

-MAIN ROADS

SECONDARY ROADS PRADESH -

-- RAILROADS 00 200 300 TVpS

0 VILLAGES KI r r- - - - DISTRICT BOUNDARY

- ' ' ~ STATE BOUNDARY _ _b_

Located in the Sean and Chhindwara districts of Madhyca Pradesh, Pench TigerReserve covers an area of 757 km2 witk a core zone lintended nationalpark) Of 293 km', a tourism zone (intended national park) of 55 km', awildlfe sancruary of 1 8 km

0and 308 km

2of reserve and protected forests.

. 0 5 1 0 1 5 20 25 I I ~ ~~I I I I _

KILOMETERS

C a risoopsn d aparor ep ra

~~~~~~OBisapu/Kpla n~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~srsrr nthsra d o epy nth otofTeWrl ol

fL~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~edreen or occepinocow of suc bondis_

L &\ Bichhuo a C H I N S A t . 1

9~~~~~~~~~~ I/ S S E CN4I

The bonans1-tr, -eoratosad on ohsr nomtshom on fh,, -p do -ot-Mply, onthe port of The Worid B.rk

enos e r accpt-ne of -uh b-rJd.ries

JULY 1 996

To ka, eCir

INDIA

ECODEVELOPMENT PROJECTPERIYAR TIGER RESERVE 5p

KERALA Cannanore -

PERIYAR TIGER RESERVE BOUNDARY Calicat

PROPOSED NATIONAL PARK BOUNDARY Moiop& orrm Trc Soie,,

___,U | CORE AREA KERALA| BUFFER AREA/SANCTUARY Trichur

[ TOURISM AREA/SANCTUARY

ROADS Ernakulam\ Idukki0:

5 TEMPLE Kot/oyarn. ,rr-

0 VILLAGES/VILLAGE ENCLAVES Alleppey° To Maduirdr j

- --- DISTRICT BOUNDARIES Quilon

- ' ' ~ STATE BOUNDARY

TRIVANDRUM fThe Periyar Tiger Reserve, locaIe in the idukki dis,t,ct of Kerala, covers an area of777 km2, oF which 350 km2 is the core zone (national park), 377 km2 is sanctuary 0 100 200 300buffer zone and 50 km2 iS a sanctuary tourism zone I I I I

KILOMETERS

0 5 10 15I I I I

KILOMETERS

(uninhctbe6v --kkudy

KOTTAYAM 0 / -i °iXorkk.dy/

DISTRICT 0_-8C ohknr anLkcrf _r , lunin',;loE,i~~~ ~ ~ ~~~~ted)* J

5Nao ,~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~. J

T/re~~~~ buneis un,rf deeirfouede,u/e nnmre

G,eu nay ,u,enr env . TAMIL u r

- - \ . g j M~~~~~~~ADU

A,'(uninhooiPel ,f.9t

QUILON DISTRICTj

JULY / 996

IBRD 27848To Lot,ore ~T. Ct,,odi 9orh

INDIA RAJASTHAN Ganganmc,r -. -odarh

ECODEVELOPMENT PROJECTRANTHAMBORE TIGER RESERVE

RAJASTHAN - Bikn, J | anx JhuniC~~~~~~rjun u

RANTHAMBORE NATIONAL PARKBOUNDARY ,

CORE AREA (r Joisalmern

RANTHAMBORE TIGER RESERVE BOUNDARY a me

BUFFER AREAS-

SANCTUARIES B

f 2 KAWAUJI GAME RESERVE JI mc,p6

RESERVED FOREST AREAS \ eserve/ Bhopo!

ROADS r

RAILROADS

0 VILLAGES/VILLAGE ENCLAVEST.di

- ' ~ STATE BOUNDARY

0 100 200 300 ,BonsO'i

KILOMETERS ' ( To Ah-edabarcad Surat

Located in the Sawai Madhopur district in southeastern Rolasthan, theRanthambhore Tiger Reserve covers an area of 1,334.6km

2, consisting

of a national park of 392 km2, (274.5 km2 core zone and 118 km2buffer zone) the Sawai Man Singh Sanctucr (127.6 kM

2), Kelodevi

Sanctuary 1674 ki2), Kawalji Game Reserve (7.6 kM

2f and some

reserved forests (132.9 km2)

- - ~~~SA WA I MADHOPUR , '6

SANCT YDISTRICT

Kihpu~ ~~~~ I

Mokholio i~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~soeo t,scpd ord~I,o h eoo heWrdhn

X~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Gop Ony udnro 0, She ,eo ,55, ,~ r0

JorS&,,r

. . f' , i °okpoli ^.

Lund o r orrtonue o u

R\J ASij2^[anw . OKhanrJellalU

Khlck.pu LacKayardiS

2J~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ L.,dI

Kus J Joo _,0 MADHYWARt } _" ANTUR

~~~~~~~~~~~~ KhILOMETERS

Badpur~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~h budns oos dnmrbn n ayohrmraomipur~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~hwna hsmpd r ml,a h eno h adBn

SAWAI~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~rdreetO acpnra8 5bJ °{nkrhy rrn

SANCTUARY~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~UL 9

II

I

I

I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

i~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~